JP7396409B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding slot machines, when the start lever is operated while medals are being bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is carried out, the reels begin to rotate, and the reels stop while they are rotating. When the switch is operated, the reels stop rotating. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the internal lottery result, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention
a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
comprising mode notification means capable of executing mode notification regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode using a predetermined notification means, based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
providing at least a normal state and a specific state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal state;
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result;
Specification that starts specific notification by turning on the specific notification means when transitioning to the specific state, and ends the specific notification by turning off the specific notification means when the specific state ends. notification means,
Equipped with
The specific notification means is configured to display a display corresponding to the specific result in a predetermined position that is visible through the display unit in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery device is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific state is won. The starting game is a game in which, when a specific symbol combination stops, a privilege corresponding to the specific result can be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and at least the operation of the next game after the starting game is allowed. The specific notification by the specific notification means is started at the previous timing,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a restriction means capable of restricting permission of operations in a game subsequent to the starting game .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state. It is a flow chart showing reel control processing. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is an explanatory view for explaining stop control of a reel. 3 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition relations of each state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart showing the first specific combination processing. It is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing. It is a flowchart showing the third specific combination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the number table of portent games. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transition notification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a press order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section. It is a flowchart which shows push order processing. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the number of games management process. 3 is a flowchart showing end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specialized zones. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process by the display control apparatus of the sub side. It is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of bet. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows the press order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at each stop operation. It is a diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional effects. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a full stop. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process during a bonus. It is a flowchart showing specific winning combination notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows continuous production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of continuous production. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the transition lottery probability of the display mode and the setting difference. It is a figure for explaining the outline of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display first processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of an advantageous section and the display of the section display. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display mode of the section indicator. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a modification example of a display start mode table of a section indicator in modification example 1; In Modification 2, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a specific state process. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section indicator for a specific state. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section display in Modification 3. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display first processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the reel control process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the third section display process. FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display start timing of the section display. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display start timing of the section display in Modification 4. 12 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display start timing of the section display in Modification 5. FIG. 7 is a front view of a slot machine in Modification 6. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section indicator. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a display start mode table of a section display in Modification 7. FIG. In Modification 8, (a) is a diagram showing a part of the lottery table for the normal game state and the first RT state, and (b) is a flowchart showing the start waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows section display first processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the display start timing of the section display. 12 is a flowchart showing a first section display process in Modification 9. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display end mode table of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows reel control processing in a 2nd embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. 3 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display first processing. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 4th process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a special RT state, an instruction monitor, and a section indicator. It is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the prize winning modes of various re-gaming results for the special RT state and the main stop results. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a flowchart which shows push order processing. It is a flowchart which shows the press order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special RT. (a) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notification contents and the instruction monitor during special replay, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop roll and the type of advantageous section during special replay. It is. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special RT state lottery table in Modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the notification contents and the eye-catching places when a specific combination is won. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special RT. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the notification contents and the eye-catching points when a special replay is won. It is a flowchart which shows the specific winning combination notification process in modification 2. (a) is a flowchart showing the notification cancellation process, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of a cancellation table. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special RT. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the specific combination during special RT and the notification content at the time of special replay. 12 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the winning combination and the transition destination RT state in Modification 3. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing. 12 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the winning combination and the transition destination RT state in Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the prize winning mode and the award given in Modification 5. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. 3 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for special RT conditions in 3rd Embodiment. It is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the winning modes of various re-gaming results for the special RT state and the main stop results. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. 3 is a flowchart showing special RT command reception processing by the display control device. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a notification scenario table. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special RT. It is a flowchart showing special replay winning processing by the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. 12 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing. It is a figure for explaining the number of games in an advantageous section. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-games additional lottery process. It is a figure showing an example of an additional lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows additional game number lottery processing. It is a figure showing an example of an additional game number lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the game number addition process. It is a figure showing an example of the 1st special information lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special notification setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. (a), (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part, (c) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st special notification type table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of games in an advantageous section and special notification. 7 is a flowchart showing various mode lottery processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. It is a figure showing an example of a mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special notification lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special notification setting process. (a), (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part, (c) is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd special notification type table. In Modification Example 2, (a) is a flowchart illustrating a lottery process for adding on the number of games, and (b) is a flowchart showing a lottery process for adding on the number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the game number addition process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an additional command setting process. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a third special notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a third special notification type table. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an additional command setting process in Modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd special notification lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing second section display processing in Modification 4. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing second section display processing in Modification 5. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4th special information lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an attack mode end effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. (a) is a figure showing an example of the 4th special information lottery table in modification 6, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the 4th special information lottery table in modification 7. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a fourth special notification type table 1 and a fourth special notification type table 2 in Modification 8. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing second section display processing in Modification 9. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various areas in the RAM of the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing data initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows special section setting processing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special section table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a press order notification lottery table at the time of special replay winning. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state. (a) is a flowchart showing the number of games management process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the push order process. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for special replays. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a precursor game number table in Modification 10. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a game number addition process in Modification 11. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 12 is a flowchart showing a third special notification setting process in Modification 12. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display in Modification 13. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows post-addition production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special notification setting process. 12 is a flowchart showing a pseudo add-on game number lottery process in Modification 14. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a table for the number of pseudo-additional games for setting value suggestion, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of pseudo-additional games and the content of suggestion. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the third specific combination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for specialized zone transition lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transition notification. It is a flowchart which shows push order processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of a lottery result and the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows addition processing for specialized zones. It is a figure which shows an example of an additional notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the specialized zone end effect. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a zone later pick lottery process in Modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a special additional notification timing table. In Modified Example 2, (a) is a flowchart illustrating a lottery process for placing in the middle of the zone, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display section. It is a figure which shows an example of various additional notification timing tables. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a zone later pick lottery process in Modification 3. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an additional notification timing table in Modifications 3 to 5. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the additional effect in modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an attack mode end effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 12 is a flowchart illustrating processing for a mobile terminal in Modification Example 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process for an attack mode end effect in Modification 8. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display section in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of 1st stop ON. It is a flowchart which shows processing for additional notification at the time of full stop. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the post-add effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of 1st stop ON in the modification 1. In Modification 2, (a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process during normal replay, and (b) is a flowchart showing the selected counter process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of 1st stop ON. 12 is a flowchart illustrating processing for additional notification at full stop in Modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a correction. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12 and a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 504-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include the "red bell" symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), the "white bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and the "1st replay" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). ), “2nd Replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “Red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “Watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 4th on left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (e.g., 18th on left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (e.g., 17th on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" There are 11 types of symbols: ``Youth'' symbol (for example, 5th on the left reel 32L) and ``Youth'' symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are reported using combinations of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, a combination of these three symbols is, for example, by tying the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIG. The combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1, the combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R, the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the bending line L6 is a line that bends in the middle when the symbols are lined up. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line other than the bending line L6, but their explanation will be omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated are set depending on the number of bets on medals, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line, As a result of winning a prize, the player is given a privilege in which a predetermined number of medals as game media are paid out, or a privilege in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no prize is won and the above benefits are not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the downward-sloping line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lines, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4, There are cases where the combination line is an effective line, and cases where only the bending line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when the game is started with 3 medals bet, only the lower right line L4 is considered as the valid line, and when the game is started with 2 medals bet, the lower right line L4 is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are taken as valid lines. Further, when the game is started after one medal is bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, middle line L2, and right-sloping line L5 are not set as valid lines. Below, a game started with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is called a 2-bet game. Also called a 1-bet game.

FIGS. 9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between symbol combinations that result in winnings and benefits that are awarded in the event of winning.

The small role winnings for which medals are paid out include the 1st small role winning to the 32nd small winning winning.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line. If it stops, the first small prize will be awarded. When the first small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 2nd minor prize winning to the 26th minor prize winning, the winning symbol combinations are different, but in a 3 bet game, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M "White BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "White Bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, right reel 32R's "White BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "White Bell" symbol, This is a winning mode in which the "Red 7" symbol or the "Second Replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "Bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L will stop at the top, the "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M will stop at the middle, and the "White BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop at the bottom. If so, it will be the 8th small winning prize. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, a "red bell" symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (no. 11) on the upstream side (no. 12), and on the right reel 32R, A "red bell" symbol is placed at a position (number 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) on the upstream side. For this reason, when the 8th small role prize is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th small win is a win determined by the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the 27th small win is a “cherry” on the left reel 32L. The 27th small winning combination is established when the symbols stop on the upper or lower row. In this case, the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L must be on the top or stop, that is, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol must be on the active line. By stopping, the 27th small role prize is established. When the 27th minor winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop on the upper or lower row, and the "cherry" symbols may stop aligned on the downward-rightward line L4. More specifically, the left reel 32L has a "cherry" symbol or a "second replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "cherry" symbol. When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th small winning combination is won. When the 29th small winning combination is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

In addition, to provide a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th minor role and the 28th minor role, when the "Cherry" symbol or the "2nd Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is achieved, depending on the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the 28th minor winning combination may be achieved instead of the 27th minor winning winning. In other words, although the configuration is such that the winning mode for winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode for winning the 28th minor role, winning the 27th minor role and winning the 28th minor role are clearly distinguished when determining the winning. will be held.

The 29th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the valid line, the 29th small winning combination is established when the "watermelon" symbols stop aligned downward to the right. When the 29th small winning combination is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, if the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 30th small It will be a prize. When the 30th small winning combination is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "Red Bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "Bell" symbol stops on the activated line, the 31st small role will be won. When the 31st small winning combination is established, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd minor winning combination to the 35th minor winning winning, if the winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2-bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 36th small prize is won if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. This is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on the active line, resulting in a so-called watermelon tenpai off-stop roll. When the 36th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol, "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "Bell" symbol and the "Youth" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small role will be won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "second replay" symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the "red bell" symbol (number 7) on the downstream side (number 6), and the main "white ``Bell'' symbols (No. 3, 12, 15, 20) and downstream adjacent positions (No. 2, 11, 14, 19) are arranged with ``First Replay'' symbols. On the right reel 32R, the main "Red Bell" symbols (No. 2, 5, 12, 20) and the "1 A "replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged, and a "first replay" symbol is arranged at a position (number 11) adjacent to the "white bell" symbol (number 10) on the upstream side. For this reason, when the 37th small prize is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are at full strength mainly on the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is The "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpai failure. When the 37th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, "1st Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "Watermelon" symbol and the "Black BAR" symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small prize is awarded. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the No. 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper row to the lower row, if the 38th minor prize is established, the left The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. When the 38th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, He won the 39th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 39th small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 39th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, This is the 40th small role prize. Although details will be described later, the 40th small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 40th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

If the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 41st small It will be a prize. When the 41st small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Prizes for which a replay benefit that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals include the 1st replay win to the 8th replay win. Furthermore, if the second re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and if the third re-gaming winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-gaming win is achieved. If a winning or a fifth re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. The 1st re-game winning to 8th re-gaming winning is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game.

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include a 1st BB winning, a 2nd BB winning, and a CB winning.

If the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, it will be the 1st BB prize, and if the "White BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line He won the 2nd BB prize. When these BB wins are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In addition, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "watermelon" symbol, the "first replay" symbol, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol and stops on the active line, it becomes a CB win. If a CB win is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although different from winning, there is a stop result in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the "white BAR" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, and "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. , "Red 7" symbol, and "Second Replay" symbol stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combination of the above symbols will be referred to as a transition roll.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to a main control device 101, which will be described later. The main controller 101 then recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output LOW detection signals, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 recognizes the switching of the signals and recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reels corresponding to the operated switches to stop rotating.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit input switch 56 is provided for inputting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit input switch 56, and a third credit input switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting one virtual medal, and the third credit input switch 58 is for inputting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit input switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. Also, it should be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 to 58 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

A performance switch 66 is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, which is operated when a performance occurs. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the production switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the production switch 66. There is.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the remaining number of medals that will be paid out before the BB state ends. A display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are constructed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25, and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. An instruction monitor 68 is provided with a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of the small winning combination is changed by the above, and the game can be played in an advantageous situation for the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, a payment detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the payment switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are outputted to the CPU 102 via an input/output port 104. It has become.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card A display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are connected via the input/output port 104. connected.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing game conditions such as a BB state, a state information storage area 106c for storing game states such as BB state, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181, which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. It has built-in RAM 183 for securing the memory.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), and the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-platform that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages the games. That is, by providing a sub-board for audio, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main board is reduced.

A production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor, which is the respective drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to transmit various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, and payout number display section 62, respectively. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display sections 60 to 62 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any re-game winnings were achieved in the previous game. If any re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, when a re-play winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and when a re-play winning is achieved in a 1-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Performs processing to automatically insert medals. By the way, in this embodiment, re-play winnings are not established in 2-bet games, but if it is modified so that re-play winnings are established in 2-bet games, 2 coins will be generated in this automatic insertion process. It is recommended that the virtual medals can be automatically inserted.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if any re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If any re-gaming winnings have not been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do.

After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of bets for medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number of CB states, and gaming states other than the CB state (specifically, normal gaming state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB "1" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the state). In other words, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "2", and in other than the CB state, the condition is that the number of bets is "1" or "3". An affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medals have been bet, or if a bet has been made but the number of bets is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and among the processes, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such transition notification processing will be explained in detail later.

After performing the process in step S206, a bet command including information on the process result in step S206 and information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. Set as the output target. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process in step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an active line, and in a 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as active lines. Furthermore, in a 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT status process in step S214, and the bonus status process in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. This slot machine 10 has six gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. Each is set for each gaming state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is set. select. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the process related to setting the probability of winning.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on with the setting key detection sensor 73a detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on. Started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" to "setting 2". The setting values are updated as follows: → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Note that each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, based on the setting key detection sensor 73a being turned off, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process ends. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display section 60 also ends. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored setting values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for the normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state of "Setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the number exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not one of the first BB, second BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination was made in step S305 for the index value IV (IV=32 to 48) that includes any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, processing is performed to set the corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the process in step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor role corresponding to the index value IV that was affirmatively determined in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag, and the 33rd minor winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set the small winning winning flag. Further, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th minor prize and the 41st minor prize have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB was won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB was winning (second BB winning flag), the winning flag is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In addition, in steps S306 to S308 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the 1st BB, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=32 while the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, the 1st BB winning flag is not set and the 28th minor winning flag is set. , the 33rd small winning combination winning flag, and the 35th small winning winning flag are set. In addition, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 33 while the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd The small winning combination winning flag and the 35th small winning winning flag are set.

In addition, a lottery table in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is prepared separately, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB, second BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV. By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in Figure 17, the probability of winning in the normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/7.3, which is the probability of winning in the strong cherry. The probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 13) is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is approximately 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is approximately 1 in 300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is approximately 1 in 300. 1. The probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 17) is approximately 1/252, and the probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 18) is approximately 252. It is 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no question bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is approximately 1 in 65,500. It is 1. The probability of winning the sequential push bell 1, the sequential push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) is approximately 1/43.7, respectively, and the middle push bell 1. The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=25 to 28) is about 1/21.8. The probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is approximately 1/1770, and the probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is approximately 1/1770. Approximately 1 in 4680, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is approximately 1 in 3280, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 35) The probability of winning is approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning strong watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 1/3280, and the probability of winning strong watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is approximately 1/3280. Approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning weak watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is approximately 1/13100, and the probability of winning weak watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is approximately 1/13100. Approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning Chance A overlap 1, Chance A overlap 2, Chance B overlap 1, and Chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=40 to 43) is approximately 1/3280. The probability of winning middle bell duplication 1 and middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV=44, 45) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone (probability of winning when IV=46, 47) is about 1/65,500, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=48) is approximately 1/19.9. Furthermore, the probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.96.

Note that in the normal gaming state lottery table, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 12, 29 to 31, and 49 to 52. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, winnings cannot be won at these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or if it is determined in step S310 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S312, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process in step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the above lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no commands are transmitted to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process is executed to set stoppable symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, if you win a strong cherry (win when IV = 13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th minor prize, 32nd minor prize to 35th minor prize win will be on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R so that the symbols can be stopped. Also, if you win Strong Cherry Duplication 1 (win when IV = 32) and the Strong Cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the 28th small role, 33rd small role, 35th small role, and Stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to 1BB winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the following step S315, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor role, replay, and bonus roles have been won, the following priority order is set. The priority order is set so that when a small winning combination and a bonus are won, the small winning combination is established with priority, and so that a bonus winning is established when the small winning combination cannot be achieved. When winning a re-game and a bonus, a priority order is set so that the re-game winning is established with priority.

For example, if you win Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th minor role, 33rd minor role, 35th minor role, and 1st BB prize is set, the 28th minor prize is selected more than the 1BB prize. The priority order is set so that the winning of the small prize, the 33rd minor prize, and the 35th minor prize are established with priority. For example, in a situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over, if you win in the normal replay and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st BB winning and the 1st replay winning is set, the 1. Priorities are set so that re-game winnings are established with priority.

After executing the process of step S315, the section display first process is executed in step S316, and then the lottery process is ended. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 18.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation performance process is a process for performing a performance using reel control during the invalid period based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and the rotation start process ends. Furthermore, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Notify players, etc.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. do. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If they are equal, reel stop processing to stop the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, if you win when IV=24 to 31, that is, sequential push bell 1, sequential push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command are activated. A second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established depending on the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. For example, if the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the second minor role win, the seventh minor role win, or the ninth minor role win is established. Then, the stop information is set so that the first minor prize is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the second minor prize is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. The stop information is set so that the winning part or the 9th small winning part is achieved. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly explained. In this slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, It can be stopped, and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as a valid line. Therefore, if the same type of symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol will be activated when it becomes a winning symbol regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by five or more symbols, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to stop the symbols on the active line.

An example will be explained in which the middle press bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in the order. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in order to achieve the second minor prize winning, the seventh minor prize winning, or the ninth minor prize winning.

The second small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as the seventh minor role symbol, and also have a function as the ninth minor role symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged such that the interval between the second small role symbols (the seventh minor role symbols, the ninth minor role symbols) is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the No. 4 "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, the No. 7 "Red Bell" symbol will appear as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for winning the second minor role, winning the seventh minor role, or winning the ninth minor role on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is a “white BAR” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is placed only at the 18th position. Furthermore, the seventh small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "Red 7" symbol is placed only at the 14th position. The 9th small winning symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is placed only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol, or the ninth minor role symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol, or the ninth minor role symbol may stop on the active line. None of the 9th small winning symbols may stop on the active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 13 to the "1st Replay" symbol No. 17 has reached the lower row, the second small role The "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the "Second Replay" symbol No. 9 to the "First Replay" symbol No. 13 has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20(b), , the ``Red 7'' symbol, which is the 7th small winning symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the seventh small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 10th "young man" symbol reaches the bottom row, the 9th small role symbol "cherry" symbol will be moved to the middle row. Stop at. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding for 4 symbols, the 2nd small role symbol, the 7th minor role symbol, and the 9th minor role symbol will be changed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the number 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol stops at the middle stage.

When the 7th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the 7th small role winning can be realized.

The 7th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a “white bell” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is placed only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 6 to the "White Bell" symbol No. 10 has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20(c). As shown in , the "white bell" symbol, which is the 7th small role symbol, stops at the lower row. As a result, the 7th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the No. 3 "Second Replay" symbol has reached the bottom row, the No. 4 "Watermelon" symbol will be displayed as shown in FIG. 20(d). Stop at the bottom. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

When the 9th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the 9th small role winning can be realized.

The 9th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a “Youth” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "youth" symbol is placed at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 11 to the "Youth" symbol No. 15 has reached the lower stage, the 9th small role symbol will be selected. The "Youth" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the 9th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

When the second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the second small role winning can be realized.

The second small role symbol on the right reel 32R is the “white BAR” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "white BAR" symbol is placed at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "Watermelon" symbol to the 18th "White BAR" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small role symbol " The "White BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

If the 2nd small role symbol, 7th minor role symbol, and 9th minor role symbol on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation. From the left, the combinations of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) transition as shown in Figure 11. It's a good result.

In this way, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the second minor prize winning will be established, and the seventh minor prize will be won. There are three cases: a winning is achieved, a ninth minor role winning is successful, and a transitional number is stopped.

Next, an example will be explained in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the first small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "red bell" symbols, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol stops at the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are first minor prize symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first minor prize symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped on the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first minor prize symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first minor prize symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated thirdly, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the first small winning combination is achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small role prize will be established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established, or the transition number will stop on the active line. By the way, if you win the middle bell, you will win the 38th small role regardless of the operation order and timing, and if you win the no-questions-asked bell, you will win the 38th small role regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 small win prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result corresponding process, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result corresponding process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the winning result corresponding process, a second section display process is executed in step S415. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S416, a winning result command is set to cause the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is ended.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the first to eighth replay winnings has been achieved. If any replay winnings have not been achieved, the medal payout process is immediately terminated, and if any replay winnings have been achieved, a replay setting process is performed to change the gaming state to the replaying state. , ends the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) explained earlier, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a re-gaming state, automatic insertion processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 is subtracted. .

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 21.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition number has stopped on the active line. If the transition number has stopped, the process advances to step S502, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition roll has not stopped on the active line, the process advances to step S504, and the second re-game winning is determined based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether it is established. If the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. In addition, if the rolled number stops moving on the active line under a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process returns to step S503. Then, the first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 17), the first RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 52 is equal to each winning probability in the normal gaming state, and the probability of winning when IV = 1 The probability of winning is approximately 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/32.8. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if you win when IV=1, it will be a normal replay win, and if you win when IV=2, it will be a first promotion replay 1 win, and IV If you win when IV = 3, you will win 1st promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win 1st promotion replay 3, and if you win when IV = 5, you will win 1st promotion replay 3. In this case, you will win the 1st promotion replay 4. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is approximately 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under normal gaming conditions is also approximately 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the normal gaming state, and the winning mode will be such that the replay benefit is granted. changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is realized, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming winning, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is realized. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated not only when the above-mentioned push order bell is won but also when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won. Stop information is set in order to change the winning mode achieved depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win the first promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, unlike the case where you win the push order bell, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay prize or The third re-game winning is guaranteed. For 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, the 3rd replay is associated with one of the 6 operation orders, and the 1st replay is associated with the other operation orders. It is attached.

In addition, in the first promoted replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th re-game to 8th re-game are not associated with any of the above six operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth regames, even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won, no prize is won regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, the 1st promoted replay 3 is distributed with the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promoted replay 4 is distributed. Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, no matter which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations for achieving the third replay win. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to do so. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established. If the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the second RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV=11 to 52 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and the probability of winning when IV=1 The probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is approximately 1/10.5 and IV = 9. , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/7.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. That is, when moving to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win that does not shift the gaming state, the second replay win that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth replay win that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth replay win that shifts to the third RT state. A prize is awarded.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-mentioned first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and Even when winning the 2 promotion replay 2, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. In the case of a win in Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3, the first re-game win or the second re-game win is always achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If you win the 2nd promotion replay 1, regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either the 1st replay win, the 4th replay win, or the 5th replay win will always be achieved. . If the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the fourth re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a winning combination, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when winning the second promotion replay 1, the winning symbol combination will stop and the fourth replay winning will be established, or the red 7 - Red 7/Black BAR The symbol combination that stops in the middle row stops and the 4th re-game winning is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-gaming winning has been achieved. If the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-gaming winning have not been achieved, the process is immediately terminated. If the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process ends.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a third RT state lottery table selected in the third RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the second RT state lottery table (see FIG. 24), the third RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 52 is equal to the probability of winning each in the second RT state, and the probability of winning when IV = 9, 10 When IV=11 and 12, the probability of winning is approximately 1/7.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and the prize winning mode in which the replay benefit is granted. changes to a state different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state and the 2nd re-gaming winning that moves to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state, and the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state. The 7th re-game winning, the 8th re-gaming winning, and the 3rd re-gaming winning that moves to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even if a prize is won in BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2, the winning mode that is achieved is changed depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command. Set the stop information accordingly.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win BAR Replay 1, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 7th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true. If you win BAR Replay 2, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 8th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 26.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not a bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any one of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process advances to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning combination has been achieved based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB win is established, a CB setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c for counting the remaining number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly explained.

The "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" symbol, or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. If , stops on the active line, it will be a CB win. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, if a CB is won, the CB is won regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether the number of medal bets has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting process (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Set as the valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV = 1 to 48, and "16384" is set as the point value PV for IV = 49 to 52. is set (see FIG. 17 etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning when IV = 49) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 2 (IV = 50). The probability of winning when IV = 51) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is approximately 1/4.00, The probability of winning the small and medium winning combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=52) is approximately 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, even if you win any of CB small/medium winnings 1 to CB small/medium winnings 4, any small winning will occur regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if you win the 1st minor role, 27th minor role, 31st minor role, 36th minor role to 38th minor role win, you will receive 15 medals. If a payout is made and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning, 14 pieces Medals are paid out. That is, when transitioning to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, there is a single bonus (SB) that allows you to play one game (JAC game) as a winning combination, and a single bonus winning (winning). ) may be provided.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been established, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning has been achieved.

If any BB winning is achieved, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, a process is performed in which 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value have been paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. .

FIG. 28 is a BB state lottery table that is selected in the BB state to which the game transitions at the first BB or the second BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 28 and 32 to 52, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=29 to 31. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning BB small and medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is approximately 1/3.00, and the probability of winning BB small and medium winning combination 2 (IV = 33). The probability of winning when IV=34) is approximately 1/3.00, and the probability of winning BB small and medium winning combination 3 (probability of winning when IV=34) is approximately 1/3.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/65,500.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As mentioned above, the first small winning combination is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, even if you win any of the BB small/medium winnings 1, BB small/medium winnings 2, or BB small/medium winnings 3, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will win the first small winning, Either the 39th small role winning or the 40th small role winning will definitely be achieved. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the 1st minor role win, the 39th minor role win, and the 40th minor role win are established. Since the probability of losing in the BB state is approximately 1/65,500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB winning is established, a process of setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carryover command is a command that is sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it aware that the bonus prize has not been won in the bonus winning game and a so-called carryover state has occurred, and the carryover command is executed by the timer interrupt processing. In the command output process (step S110), the command is output to the display control device 81.

Here, in this embodiment, in a game played in a carryover state, winning of other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (Fig. 17), if you win a combination of bonuses with IV = 32 to 48 (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB), etc., the winning combination will correspond to these bonuses. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, if a winning combination with IV=32 to 45 is won, the winning flag for each of these small roles will be set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus will not be set, and the small role will not be set. Only winnings will be valid. In other words, the carryover state can also be said to be a state in which bonus drawings are restricted.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout number counter has become 0 or not, and when it has become 0, a process of clearing the CB setting flag or BB setting flag is performed. Furthermore, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game. Note that the termination determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game returns to the gaming state when the CB winning was achieved. For example, if a CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is returned to after the CB state ends, and if a CB winning is achieved under the 3rd RT state, the 3rd RT state is returned after the CB state ends. to return to. On the other hand, if the first BB or second BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB winning is achieved under the second RT state, the game will shift to the normal gaming state. Incidentally, in the case of transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the CB state ends. In the case of transition to the BB state, the player can expect an increase in medals by approximately 144 (=9×24−3×24) until the BB state ends.

If none of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, or CB winning flag is set (if step S602 is NO), or the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, or CB winning flag is not established and the winning is carried over. When a command is set (when the process in step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, and when the end determination process is performed in step S614, In step S606, a status command is set. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the gaming status at the end of the game (that is, the gaming status of the next game), and in step S606, the status information storage area The state command corresponding to the configuration flag set in 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of gaming state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be explained using FIG. 29. Note that illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the gaming state is the BB state, when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the transition rolled number stops on the active line, and the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promoted replays 1 to 4, which trigger the transition to the second RT state, and the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not transition to the second RT state or the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay win is achieved when you win any of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won, so the first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state will shift to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag will be set. When the corresponding BB winning is achieved in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. There is no transition to the third RT state from the first RT state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-gaming win or the fifth re-gaming winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay win and the fifth replay win are achieved when you win the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (Fig. 23(b) )reference). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When a corresponding BB prize is established in a game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is achieved when the player wins BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 and operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(c)). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB winning is achieved in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

In this slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: , attack mode (including an additional specialized zone), VB mode (including an additional specialized zone), and BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transitions between each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB win or the second BB win is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, a lottery to transition to the challenge mode and a lottery to transition to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. If the lottery to enter the attack mode is won, the game shifts to the attack mode after the BB mode ends, and if the lottery to go to the challenge mode is won, the game shifts to the challenge mode after the BB mode ends. If no one wins in any transition lottery, the mode transitions to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is returned to after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is changed to the BB mode, the VB mode is returned to after the BB mode ends.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replay") is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery to transition to challenge mode and a lottery to transition to attack mode are performed. If the lottery to enter the challenge mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the challenge mode, and if the lottery to enter the attack mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the attack mode. There is no transition to VB mode from normal mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so it is rare for the stop switches 42 to 44 to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. This almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The challenge mode, like the normal mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. In challenge mode, a lottery will be held to switch to attack mode. However, the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, although the challenge mode is not notified of the order of operations like the normal mode, it is set as a mode in which it is easy to transition to the attack mode. If you win the lottery to shift to attack mode, you shift from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times, etc.) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is transitioned to the normal mode. Does not shift to VB mode from challenge mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the press order replay is won, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and 3rd RT state, which almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state. I will do it. In challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, 1st attack mode to 4th attack mode, which have different probabilities of transitioning to VB mode, and in any attack mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher than that of normal mode. The transition probability is high. If the lottery to shift to VB mode is won, the mode shifts from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, etc.) without winning a lottery, the game shifts from attack mode to normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode has the highest probability and the first attack mode has the lowest probability. , the third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so the player can press the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. 44 corresponds almost to the second RT state. In attack mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state, you can expect to increase the number of medals by approximately 0.61 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the 2nd RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

The VB mode, like the attack mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 or 2nd promotion replay 2, in attack mode you will be notified of the order of operations to make the 1st replay win. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in VB mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced, and it is determined that the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. If this happens, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is announced. Therefore, the VB mode almost corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In VB mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, you can expect the medals to increase by about 0.61 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

To explain the transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by a player increases, the general flow is from normal mode to challenge mode, from challenge mode to attack mode, and from attack mode to normal mode. . In attack mode, a lottery is held to switch to VB mode, so if a loop occurs in which the player shifts from attack mode to VB mode and returns from VB mode to attack mode, players expect more medals to be owned. can.

As mentioned above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for switching to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

Furthermore, in the attack mode, a first attack mode to a fourth attack mode are set, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. When shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, the mode basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transitioning to the second attack mode, you will transition to the second attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to the VB mode will increase. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transition to the third attack mode, you will transition to the third attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode will increase. In the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transitioning to the fourth attack mode, you will transition to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when transitioning to attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from 1st attack mode → 2nd attack mode → 3rd attack mode → 4th attack mode, increasing the probability of transitioning to VB mode and attacking A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the present slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals he owns in each display mode of attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, the configuration is such that a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state change back and forth depending on the winning of each re-game or the stoppage of a transition roll. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay win is established or the transition roll is stopped. Furthermore, in the attack mode or the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the order of operations that will make it possible to achieve the first small winning combination is announced, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration regarding the display mode will be explained below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into: (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. Below, they will be explained in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process (1) related to the display mode transition lottery is performed in the lottery result corresponding process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

In step S701, the current lottery results are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, B and middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, 2, weak cherry overlap 1, 2, strong watermelon overlap 1, 2. , weak watermelon overlap 1, 2, chance A overlap 1, 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2 (for example, see Figure 17, IV = 13 to 19, 32 to 45, hereinafter these roles collectively referred to as a "specific combination"). If the lottery result is a specific winning combination, it is determined in step S702 whether any of the bonus winning flags among the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag has been set.

In the process of step S702, if the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is already set, this indicates a carryover state, and does not include the game in which the first BB or the second BB wins. In other words, the case where it is determined that the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are not already set in step S702 means the case where it is not a specific combination winning that is a duplicate winning with the 1st BB or 2nd BB, and the case where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is not set. This also includes the case of a specific winning combination that is a duplicate winning with the second BB. In other words, if a specific winning combination that is a duplicate winning with the first BB or the second BB is won during the carryover state, an affirmative determination is made in step S702.

If a negative determination is made in step S702, processing for transitioning the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S703 to S709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination has not been won, or if the bonus winning flag is set in step S702, processing for transitioning to the display mode, etc. is performed in steps S710 to S713.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S701 that a specific winning combination has been won, and if it is determined in step S702 that the bonus winning flag is not set, the current gaming state is determined in step S703. It is determined whether the game is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined in step S704 whether or not an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won, and is cleared when transitioning to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S704, a first specific combination process is executed in step S705.

<First specific combination processing>
The first specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, and the state where the attack mode has not been won. The display mode in this case corresponds to normal mode or challenge mode. In the first specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to challenge mode, and a transition lottery is also conducted to determine whether to transition to attack mode. Further, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, processing for adding on the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is in challenge mode. The case of not being in challenge mode means that the current display mode is normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a challenge mode table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery in step S803. In the normal table and the challenge mode table, the probability of transition to attack mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to attack mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Additionally, the probability of transitioning to attack mode is different between the normal table and the challenge mode table, with the challenge mode table having a higher probability of transitioning to attack mode than the normal table. It is set as follows.

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table in step S802 or step S803, attack mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803, thereby performing a lottery to enter the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to attack mode has been won. If the lottery for entering the attack mode is won, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. Super attack mode is an attack mode that starts after passing through the additional specialization zone. For example, if the initial number of games in normal attack mode is 50, in super attack mode, attack mode will start with the number of games added to the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the additional special zone. Ru. Therefore, the normal attack mode and the super attack mode have different advantages for the player, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode. The super attack mode is set so that a portion (for example, 1%) of the cases where the attack mode is won in the attack mode lottery process in step S804 are won.

Note that the probability of winning the super attack mode may be set to be different depending on when the normal table is acquired (step S802) and when the challenge mode table is acquired (step S803). In this case, The superiority of the challenge mode is ensured by making the probability of winning the super attack mode higher during the challenge mode than during normal times. Further, although the probability of winning in attack mode is lower in normal times than in challenge mode, it may be set so that the ratio of winning in super attack mode is higher. Furthermore, the probability of winning the super attack mode and the proportion of the super attack mode when winning the attack mode may be varied depending on the type of specific combination.

If it is determined in step S806 that the super attack mode has been won, a process of setting a specialized zone winning flag is executed in step S807.

If a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the process in step S807 is executed, a process to set an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning flag is set, and in some cases (if the super attack mode is won) the specialized zone winning flag is set.

After performing the processing in step S808, processing for setting the precursor mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. Omen mode is a mode in which a win-suggesting effect that suggests winning in attack mode, challenge mode, etc. is more likely to occur, and it is possible to win in attack mode, challenge mode, etc. after playing each game in the omen mode. The winners will be announced. The omen mode continues for 0 to 32 games, and the number of games the omen mode continues is set to vary depending on the type of attack mode or challenge mode won, and whether or not the bonus is won at the same time. ing. In addition, if Attack Mode, Challenge Mode, etc. are won at the same time as a bonus, the winning notification of the bonus will be made after passing through the Omen Mode, and the winning of Attack Mode, Challenge Mode, etc. will be announced after the bonus state ends. Information on what was happening will be announced. Further, when the number of portent games is set as 0 games, the winning notification will be performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S809, first, a process of acquiring a precursor game number table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 35, in the number of portent games table, the number of portent games to be selected is set to differ depending on the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and whether or not a bonus has been won at the same time. . Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode, and when winning the attack mode, if you have not won the bonus at the same time, games 1 to 5 will be selected with 80%, and 6 Games ~10 games will be selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is normal mode, if you win attack mode and bonus at the same time, games 1 to 5 will be selected at 10%, and games 6 to 10 will be selected at 20%. %, 11 games to 20 games are selected by 50%, and 21 games to 32 games are selected by 20%. In other words, when the display mode is the normal mode, a longer number of precursory games is more likely to be selected when bonuses are won at the same time than when bonuses are not won at the same time. In other words, if bonuses are not won at the same time, the attack mode winning game will be notified after a relatively short number of games after the attack mode winning game. On the other hand, when the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games are selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not bonuses are simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the precursor mode is not set, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed in the game following the winning game.

In addition, when winning Super Attack mode, which is an attack mode with an additional specialized zone, if you do not win the bonus at the same time, games 1 to 5 will be selected at 70%, and games 6 to 10 will be selected at 30%. Selected in %. On the other hand, if you win the attack mode and win the bonus at the same time, games 1 to 5 will not be selected, games 6 to 10 will be selected at 20%, and games 11 to 20 will be selected at 30%. Games 21 to 32 will be selected at 50%. In other words, even when winning in super attack mode, it is easier to select a longer number of precursory games when bonuses are won at the same time than when they are not won at the same time, and when bonuses are not won at the same time. In this case, the winning of the super attack mode will be announced after a relatively short number of games starting from the winning game of the super attack mode. Even when the super attack mode is won, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games are selected as the number of precursor games, regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the precursor mode is not set, and the winning notification of the super attack mode is performed in the game following the winning game.

In step S810, a process is performed to draw the number of games in the current portent mode based on the table of number of portent games obtained in step S809 and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S811, processing is performed to input the number of precursor games into the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter becomes 0, the omen mode ends, and a winning notification is performed that the player has won the transition lottery such as the attack mode.

In step S812, processing is executed to set the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device. The omen command includes information on the lottery result that triggered the omen mode (the display mode to which the display mode shifts after the omen mode, BB mode and attack mode in the case of step S812) and the number of omen games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S812, the first specific combination process ends.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for entering the attack mode has not been won, the process advances to step S813. In step S813, challenge mode lottery processing is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the challenge mode lottery table, the probability of transition to challenge mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

Cases in which step S813 is executed include a case where the display mode is challenge mode, but in this case also, challenge mode lottery processing is executed in step S813, and the table for the lottery is common between normal mode and challenge mode. It's a table. Note that, as in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S814, it is determined whether the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S813. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S816, a process of setting a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

After performing the process in step S816, the setting process for the precursor mode is performed in steps S817 to S820, similar to steps S809 to S812. That is, the table for the number of portent games is acquired in step S817, the lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S818, the number of portent games is set in step S819, and the portent command is set in step S820. The first specific combination processing ends.

In the precursor game number table acquired in step S817, as shown in FIG. 35, when a winner is won in challenge mode alone, games 1 to 5 are selected at 90%, games 6 to 10 are selected at 10%. Selected in %. On the other hand, if the challenge mode is won at the same time as the bonus, games 1 to 5 will be selected at 20%, games 6 to 10 will be selected at 30%, and games 11 to 20 will be selected at 50%. be done. In other words, even when winning in challenge mode, it is easier to select a longer number of precursory games when you win bonuses at the same time than when you do not win at the same time, and when you do not win bonuses at the same time. , the challenge mode winning game will be notified after a relatively short number of games.

Regarding the number of precursor games, regardless of whether or not bonuses are won at the same time, longer precursor games are more likely to be selected in attack mode than in challenge mode, and longer precursor games are more likely to be selected in super attack mode than in attack mode. If a player wins a display mode that is advantageous to the player, a long precursor game number is likely to be selected. In addition, if you have not won the bonus at the same time, a number of 10 or less omen games will be selected, and if the omen mode continues for 11 or more games, it is confirmed that you have won the bonus at the same time. do. In addition, even if you win at the same time as a bonus, if you win both challenge mode and bonus at the same time, the number of precursory games is 20 or less. For simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games of 21 or more is also selected, and if the precursor mode continues for 21 games or more, it is confirmed that the mode is bonus + attack mode or super attack mode. In this way, the fun of predicting the winning contents in relation to the number of portent games is added.

Further, in this embodiment, when a specific winning combination is won, if the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. are not won, the game may shift to the pseudo omen mode. Although such processing will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo-warning mode is between 1 and 20 games. Therefore, by frequently generating win-suggesting effects over 21 games or more, it is determined that the omen mode or pseudo omen mode to which the game transitioned in response to the specific role is the omen mode.

If it is determined in step S815 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, then in steps S821 to S825, processing for adding on to the continuation game of the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S822, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the term "additional" refers to adding the number of consecutive games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of consecutive games. In step S822, a value to be added to the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of add-on games, a table for the challenge mode add-on game number lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases depending on the type of specific combination. For example, with strong cherry, there is an 80% probability that 30 games will be added to the challenge mode, and there is a 20% probability that 50 games will be added. In addition, for weak cherry, there is an 80% probability of adding 5 games, and a 20% probability of adding 20 games.

In step S823, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S822 is set in a counter for managing the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Performs addition processing. Then, in step S824, a process is performed to set the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the first specific combination process is ended. The top-up command includes information that the top-up has occurred, the number of top-up games, and the target for the top-up (challenge mode or attack mode). The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the additional commands will be described in detail later, but based on the reception of the additional commands, the display control device 81 performs additional processing as a notification of information included in these additional commands. Perform notifications (additional effects).

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S821, the process advances to step S825. In step S825, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination processing is ended. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the conditions for adding the number of games in the challenge mode are satisfied. Although details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition will be performed at the end of the bonus. In other words, the game in which the additional notification is given is set to differ depending on whether or not the bonus is won at the same time.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S703 or an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the process advances to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is the second RT state, it is determined in step S707 whether the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery, and is cleared when transitioning to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S707, a second specific combination process is executed in step S708. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S706 or an affirmative determination is made in step S707, a third specific combination process is executed in step S709.

<Second specific combination processing>
The second specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is the second RT state and the state where the player has not won the VB mode. The display mode in this case is attack mode. In the second specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the VB mode. In addition, in the second specific combination processing, a lottery for promoting the rank of the attack mode is carried out, and processing for adding up the number of consecutive games of the attack mode is carried out.

That is, in step S901, processing is performed to ascertain the rank of the attack mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, four attack mode ranks, ie, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined which of the first to fourth attack modes the current rank of attack mode is.

In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the attack mode rank grasped in step S901 is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transitioning to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table for each rank, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is different overall, and the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. Just as the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for those in the third attack mode than for those in the second attack mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for those in the fourth attack mode than those in the third attack mode. The transition probability is set to be high.

In step S903, a VB mode shift lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to a VB mode win.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process is performed in which a VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S905. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, in step S906, a table of number of portent games is acquired, in step S907, the number of portent games is drawn, in step S908, the number of portent games is set, and in step S909, a portent command is set, and then the second specified Finish the role processing. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the number of precursory games is set to 0 for all VB mode wins during the attack mode. Therefore, if the player wins the VB mode during the attack mode, the winner will be notified in the next game.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode winning, the process advances to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for promoting rank in attack mode.

In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. There are multiple tables for the promotion lottery depending on the rank of the attack mode, specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode. There are three (promotion lottery will not be held when staying in the fourth attack mode). At each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode, and the table for the third attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the second attack mode. The table for attack mode is set so that the probability of promotion is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion win. If the promotion has been won, an attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the rank of the current attack mode to the rank flag one level higher. Thereafter, in step S913, processing is performed to set the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to perform an attack mode effect for the rank to which the rank is to be promoted. As the attack mode effect on the auxiliary display section 65, for example, a different background color effect is set depending on the rank of the attack mode, and the display control device 81 displays the attack mode effect when the promotion command is received. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that an attack mode effect is performed with a background color that corresponds to the rank to which the rank has been promoted.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process in step S913 is executed, processes for increasing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode are performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, an additional lottery process for the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this additional lottery process, a table for the attack mode additional lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The attack mode supplementary lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the supplementary lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% probability of winning the additional lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% probability of winning the additional lottery. Note that the probability of winning may vary depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. If it is determined that the player has not won the additional lottery, the second specific combination processing is immediately ended.

If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S917, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for the lottery for the number of attack mode additional games is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the attack mode is set so that the number of additional games varies depending on the type of specific combination. For example, with strong cherry, there is a 90% probability that 20 games will be added to the attack mode, and there is a 10% probability that 80 games will be added. Furthermore, in weak cherry, there is a 95% probability that 5 games will be added, and there is a 5% probability that 100 games will be added.

In step S918, processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S917 is set in a counter for managing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Performs addition processing. Then, in step S919, the process of setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is ended.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process advances to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is ended. The attack mode addition flag is a flag used by the CPU 102 to determine that the attack mode addition condition for the number of games is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition will be performed at the end of the bonus. That is, similar to the notification of additional games in the challenge mode, the games for which additional notification is given are set to differ depending on whether or not bonuses are simultaneously won.

<Third specific combination processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S709 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is the case where the player is in the third RT state or the state where the player is in the second RT state and has won the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to attack mode or VB mode. In the third specific combination processing, processing for adding on the number of consecutive games in attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, an attack mode game number addition lottery process is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S914. Note that the probability of winning the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed, and in step S1006, a process for setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the third specific combination process is ended. The processing from step S1003 to step S1006 is similar to the processing from step S916 to step S919. Note that the number of additional games may be different between the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination processing is directly ended. Further, if it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination processing is ended. The attack mode additional flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the current lottery process is not a specific winning combination, or even if it is a specific winning combination, the bonus winning flag is set in step S702. If it is determined that the lottery has been set, in step S710, whether or not the result of the current lottery process is a push order replay or a push order bell (hereinafter also collectively referred to as "push order winning combination") is determined. Determine. If the winning combination is determined by pressing the winning combination, the pressing winning combination is executed in step S711. This push order processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing any one of steps S705, S708, S709, and S711, or after making a negative determination in step S710, the process advances to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether a specialized zone flag corresponding to the additional specialized zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th replay prize, and the special zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th replay prize. Indicates a state that occurs with probability. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S712, specialized zone processing is executed in step S713. The specialized zone flag, specialized zone, and specialized zone processing will be explained in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S712, or after executing the process in step S713, the main lottery result corresponding process is ended.

As mentioned above, in the lottery result handling process, if it is determined that a specific winning combination has been won, the lottery to shift to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, challenge mode or attack Processing for adding on the number of consecutive games in the mode, etc. is performed. In other words, even if a specific winning combination is won, during the carryover state, there will be no transition lottery for Challenge Mode, Attack Mode, or VB Mode, or processing for increasing the number of consecutive games in Challenge Mode or Attack Mode, etc. Its implementation is limited. If you win the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, after playing the precursor game, you will be notified that you have won the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode shift lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the display mode transition lottery result>
(2) In the process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, there is a process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won, and a notification for transitioning the gaming state. The processing to perform is performed. Therefore, first, a process related to notification of winning the transfer lottery will be explained.

<Processing for mode transition notification>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

In step S1101, it is determined whether the number of precursor games is 0 or not. Counting of the number of portent games is performed in a winning result corresponding process described later, and the number of portent games is subtracted by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is immediately ended.

If the number of portent games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether a bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current omen mode is a omen mode triggered by a bonus win. If the bonus winning flag is set, a bonus winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1103, and then this mode transition notification processing is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won, for example, by displaying "Bonus Confirmed!!" on the auxiliary display section 65. Note that the type of bonus that has been won (either the first BB or the second BB) may also be notified.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, if the bonus and the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. are won at the same time, the winning notification of the attack mode, etc. is made at the end of the bonus notified in step S1103. Processing related to winning notification will be explained in detail later, but when performing winning notification such as attack mode in conjunction with bonus winning notification, winning notification such as attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1103. It is recommended that the configuration be configured to set commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process advances to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1105. Then, in step S1106, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1107, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies the start of the challenge mode using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, in step S1108, counting of the number of challenge mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 10) of the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is set in a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1108, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1104 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1110. Then, in step S1111, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in response to winning the attack mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1112, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the attack mode winning notification command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode transition lottery has been won. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process of step S1112, this mode transition notification process ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the aspect of winning notification in super attack mode is different from the aspect of winning notification in attack mode. Therefore, in step S1112, the attack mode winning notification command may be configured to include information as to whether or not the super attack mode is selected. The mode of winning notification in the attack mode and the mode of winning notification in the super attack mode may be different enough to be distinguishable by the player, and more preferably, the mode of winning notification in the highly advantageous super attack mode. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of winning notification in the attack mode.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the manner of winning notification in these attack mode and super attack mode is made common. By doing this, it is possible to make it appear as if the winning content has been promoted from attack mode to super attack mode between the attack mode winning notification game and the start notification game, and the attack mode winning notification game It is possible to eliminate the delay caused by the difference between the notification game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1109 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1113 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1114. Then, in step S1115, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state in response to winning the VB mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1116, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode winning notification command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process of step S1116, this mode transition notification process ends. Further, if it is determined in step S1113 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is directly terminated.

That is, among the challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode that transition through the omen mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in the omen mode becomes 0. On the other hand, for attack mode and VB mode, based on the bet operation when the number of portent games in portent mode becomes 0, only notification of winning the attack mode transfer lottery or VB mode transfer lottery is performed, and Even if the number of games reaches 0, attack mode and VB mode will not start. This is because the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve a transition to the gaming state, while the attack mode and VB mode involve a transition to the gaming state. Specifically, the attack mode does not involve a transition to the second RT state. This is due to the difference that the VB mode is started by transitioning to the third RT state.

As already explained, the second RT state is entered when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the third RT state is entered when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won. The process shifts to the case where the player wins, and the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established. Then, the case where the first promoted replay 1 to 4 is won and the third replay prize is established, or the case where the second promoted replay 1 and 2 is won and the fourth and fifth replay prize is established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of these promotion replay wins corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, if you win a lottery to shift to attack mode or VB mode, then in the game in which you win a winning combination that will shift these gaming states, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced. The configuration allows the game state to be changed. Please note that from the time you are notified that you have won the transition lottery for attack mode or VB mode until the attack mode or VB mode starts (until the gaming state changes), you will not be notified as a preparation state (for example, " An announcement will be made that “Preparations are in progress”.

<Explanation regarding display mode transition>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the push order process (step S711) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to explaining the pressing order processing, an outline of the case where the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG. 37.

<Summary of push order notification performance>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (press order notification, push order notification effect, order notification) is mainly performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described using as an example a case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. The press order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the middle stop The number 1 is added to the middle button (corresponding to the switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display section 65, a number is displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is displayed and the number 3 is displayed on the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the execution timing of the press order notification, the press order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R until the constant speed rotation after the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by having a configuration in which the press order notification is executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then press the stop switches 42 to 44. This allows the game to proceed at a good tempo.

<Press order processing>
Next, the push order process executed in step S711 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 38.

In step S1201, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is the case where the first replay or the third replay wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1202, and it is determined whether an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to enter the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 36). be.

If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, a process for notifying the push order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(a)). Thereafter, in step S1204, a process is performed to set the press order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, and then the main press order process is ended. The press order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the press order notification command will be described in detail later.

Note that the case where the notification of the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning is performed in step S1203 basically means that the player wins the lottery to enter the attack mode, and the notification of the winning of the attack mode is carried out after passing through the omen mode. This is assumed to be after the attack mode is activated, but before the transition to attack mode. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even if you are in attack mode, the gaming state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an incorrect operation, etc. Even in such a case, you will not be able to win the 1st promotion replay 1 to 4. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is the case where the first replay or the second replay wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, a process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1208, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

In this way, if you win the first promotion replay 1 to 4 in a situation where you have won the lottery to enter the attack mode, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win will be announced, and the gaming state will be changed to the first one. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if you win the first promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay win is achieved and cases where the third replay win is achieved. There is.

In addition, if you win Fall Replay 1 to 3 in a situation where the attack notification flag is set, the gaming state will shift to the 1st RT state by notifying you of the operation order corresponding to the 1st replay winning. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends and the attack notification flag is cleared and the display mode shifts to normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

For example, in the 1st RT state, you win the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the attack mode, and the order of operations happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, so the 3rd replay win is established. Even in this case (even if the state shifts to the second RT state), the second re-game winning can be achieved by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the player happens to move to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, the player will immediately move to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether the current lottery result is either second promotion replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1209 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay will win depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1211 whether the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 36). be.

If the VB notification flag is set, in step S1212, a process for notifying the press order of the fourth regame or the fifth regame is executed. Specifically, among the first re-game, fourth re-game, and fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1213, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, a process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and a process for setting a press order notification command is performed in step S1208. The main push order processing ends. Therefore, if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 without winning VB mode, if you are in attack mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the 1st replay winning will be performed, and if you are not in attack mode, There will be no press-order notification performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether the current lottery result is either BAR Replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1214 is a case where a prize is won in any of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replay depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, processing for notification of the push order of the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game is executed. Specifically, among the first re-gaming, third re-gaming, and sixth re-gaming to eighth re-gaming, the operation order corresponding to the sixth re-gaming winning to the eighth re-gaming winning is notified (FIG. 23 ( c). After that, in step S1218, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the press order notification command is performed in step S1208. The main push order process ends. Therefore, if you win BAR Replay 1 and 2 without winning VB mode, if you are in attack mode, the press order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning will be performed, and if you are not in attack mode, press There will be no announcement performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the current lottery result is a push order bell win. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is normal mode or challenge mode. If the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, in step S1221, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1222, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the main press order process is ended without performing the press order notification process.

<Processing to shift the display mode based on winning results>
<Winning result processing>
Next, as a result of notifying to shift the gaming state as described above, a process will be described in which a winning combination corresponding to the shifting of the gaming state is won (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

In step S1301, a game number management process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the aforementioned precursor mode, the number of consecutive games in challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted.

In the subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the current stop result indicates that the third re-game winning has been established. As described above, when the third replay winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. The case where the attack notification flag is not set is the case where the third replay winning is achieved without the conditions for transitioning to the attack mode being satisfied, and in this case, the attack notification flag is not set. The winning result handling process is then terminated. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying display modes, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than the attack mode (VB mode, additional specialization zone), the attack mode flag is set to the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, It is configured to coexist with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set in step S1304 includes not only the case where the attack mode is in progress but also the case where the case is in the VB mode and the case in the specialization zone. .

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, the display mode is already the attack mode, so the main prize winning result handling process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, an attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, an attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1307, counting of the number of attack mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of consecutive attack mode games is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106.

After performing the process in step S1307, it is determined in step S1308 whether the specialized zone flag is set. An affirmative determination in step S1308 means that the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode, and in this case, the specialization zone winning flag is cleared in step S1309, and then the additional specialization zone starts. The process advances to steps S1318 to S1320. The processing for starting the additional specialization zone will be explained later. If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third re-game winning has not been established, the process advances to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established as a result of the current stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-gaming wins are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing is performed to shift the gaming state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1311, it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are achieved without winning the VB mode transition lottery, and in this case, the VB mode start process is not performed. , and ends the winning result handling process. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1312 whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, and therefore the main winning result handling process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1313 to S1315.

That is, in step S1313, a process of setting a VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that transitions through the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

Thereafter, in step S1314, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode start command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1315, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 60) of the number of consecutive games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1315, the main prize winning result corresponding process ends.

If it is determined in step S1310 that the fourth and fifth replay wins have not been established, the process advances to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established as the current stop result. In this embodiment, when the 7th re-game winning is established, that is, the "Black BAR" symbol is placed in the middle of the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol is placed in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol is placed in the middle of the right reel 32R. When the "Black BAR" symbol stops and the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the middle combination line, the system shifts to the special add-on zone. In the special bonus zone, the number of consecutive games in attack mode is increased not only for specific winning combinations but also for all winnable winning combinations (push order winning combination, specific winning combination, and bonus). Note that the case where the 7th replay win is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th replay win (Fig. 23 (c)) Furthermore, this is a case where the 7th replay out of the 1st, 6th, and 7th replay wins a lottery. The player wins the lottery in which the seventh re-game wins with a probability of 1.

If the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1317 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1318 to S1320. Note that, as already explained, at the start of the super attack mode, even if an affirmative determination is made in step S1308 and the process in step S1309 is performed, the processes in steps S1318 to S1320 are performed.

Specifically, in step S1318, processing is performed to set a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, counting of the number of consecutive games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

Thereafter, in step S1319, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the specialized zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1320, counting of the number of continued specialized zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games of the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1320, the main prize winning result handling process ends. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1316 or step S1317, the winning result handling process is directly ended.

As mentioned above, based on the winning combination (3rd to 5th replay) corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, the processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21). conduct. This is to prevent attack mode etc. from being started based on a winning combination that corresponds to changing the gaming state, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. It is.

Also, when transitioning to a display mode, among those that involve transitioning to a gaming state, transitioning to a higher mode, i.e., transitioning from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or transitioning from attack mode to VB mode, Alternatively, when transitioning from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the configuration is such that the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of a transition to a lower mode, for example, when the game state is transitioned due to a second replay winning as a fall replay or a stoppage of the transition roll, the display mode is not transitioned. When moving to a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in different games.

<Number of games management process>
The number of games management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and the number of consecutive games in these display modes is 0. Based on this, processing for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be performed with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a 3 bet, the number of games management process is ended. That is, in a 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode etc. are not counted.

If the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game, the process advances to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is present. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the game number management process ends. do. In other words, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, while the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the attack notification flag and VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through a preparation state such as attack mode, these flags are used to notify the pressing order for shifting the gaming state, making it possible to return to the gaming state before the bonus. On the other hand, if a bonus is won during the challenge mode or specialized zone, the challenge mode or specialized zone is ended by winning the bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether the number of portent games is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of portent games is subtracted by 1 in step S1405. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (not in precursor mode), or after executing the process of step S1405, the number of continuous games of each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1428. .

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process advances to step S1407, and the challenge mode continuation counter is subtracted by 1, thereby subtracting the number of challenge mode continuation games. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether the challenge mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command notifies the end of the challenge mode in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. After performing the process of step S1410, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not challenge mode, the process advances to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether the current display mode is attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process advances to step S1412, and it is determined whether the specialized zone is in the attack mode. That is, when transitioning to the specialized zone at the start of the attack mode, such as in the super attack mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1412. If the game is in the specialized zone, a game number management process for the specialized zone is performed in steps S1425 to S1428. These processes will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is not a specialized zone, in step S1413, the attack mode continuation counter is subtracted by 1, thereby subtracting the number of games in which the attack mode can be continued. Then, in step S1414, it is determined whether the attack mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1415, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1416. Thereafter, in step S1417, an attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1417, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the mode is not attack mode, the process advances to step S1418. In step S1418, it is determined whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the mode is VB mode, the process advances to step S1419, and it is determined whether the zone is a specialized add-on zone. If it is not the special add-on zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1420, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1421, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1422, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1423. Thereafter, in step S1424, a VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode termination command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will be terminated in the current game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1424, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1419 that the area is in the special add-on zone, the process advances to step S1425. As already explained, if it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is a specialized zone in attack mode, the process also advances to step S1425. In step S1425, the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is subtracted by subtracting 1 from the specialized zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1426, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S1427, and a specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1428. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone end command notifies the end of the specialized zone in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Such notification may include, for example, notification of the number of games in which the game has been successfully added in total in the current specialized zone. After performing the process of step S1428, the number of games management process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1418 or step S1426, the number of games management process is directly ended.

<Completion judgment process>
Next, as the process when the bonus ends, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. As already explained, the end determination process is the process executed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether the bonus termination conditions are met or not, and if the bonus is to be terminated, processing is performed to notify the winner of the attack mode etc. where the bonus was won in duplicate, etc., and the attack mode where the bonus was won in duplicate. Perform processing to add on the number of games, etc.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved. As already explained, the first small winning combination (BB medium small winning combination 1) is achieved with high probability during the bonus (FIG. 28). Furthermore, when winning the BB medium and small winning combination 2 (IV=30), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operations corresponding to the 39th small winning combination (FIG. 27(b)), and the first If the 39th small role of the 39th small role and the 39th small role wins a lottery, the 39th small role is won. In this embodiment, for example, when winning the BB medium/small winning combination 2, the probability of winning the 39th small winning combination is 1/100. When winning the BB medium and small winning combination 3 (IV=31), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation corresponding to the winning of the 40th small winning combination (FIG. 27(b)), and then the first small winning combination is won. If the 40th small role of the 40th small role wins a lottery, the 40th small role is won. In this embodiment, for example, when winning the BB medium BAR winning combination, the probability of winning the 40th minor winning combination is 1/200. In addition, it is good also as a structure which adjusts the probability of winning the 39th minor prize or the 40th minor prize by adjusting the winning probability of the BB small prize 2 or the BB small prize 3. In more detail, the point value PV is allocated so that the probability of winning BB small and medium winning combination 2 is approximately 1/100 of the above configuration, and the point value PV is allocated so that the probability of winning BB small and medium winning combination 3 is approximately 1/200 of the above configuration. Allocate point value PV. Then, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the corresponding small role (39th small role, 40th small role) when winning BB small/medium role 2 or BB small/medium role 3, it is possible to achieve the corresponding small role winning. It may also be a configuration.

If it is determined in step S1501 that a small winning combination has been achieved, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the remaining number of payouts is performed in step S1502. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after executing the process in step S1502, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is immediately ended. If it is 0, the bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1504, and then in steps S1505 to S1518, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding on the number of consecutive games.

That is, in step S1505, it is determined whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S1506, the number of portent games is set in step S1507, and a portent command is set in step S1508. Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S1506, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursor games is 0 with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1507, the number of precursor games of 0 games is always set, and a winning notification such as an attack mode is carried out in the next game after the bonus ending game. After executing the process in step S1508, the end determination process ends.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended. That is, if the bonus ends in a situation where the player has also won the challenge mode or the VB mode, after the bonus ends, the winner of the challenge mode or the VB mode is notified through a precursor game.

In addition, if the bonus ends when the attack mode winning flag or challenge mode winning flag is set, it means if you win the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. and the bonus at the same time, or if you win the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. winning notification. This is the case when the bonus is won during the omen mode. On the other hand, when the bonus ends when the VB mode winning flag is set, it is when the VB mode and the bonus are won at the same time during the attack mode, or during the precursor mode of the winning notification of the VB mode (in this case, This is a case where the bonus is won in the next game (after winning the VB mode) because the omen mode of the 0 game is selected.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, the process advances to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed in step S1512, a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed in step S1513, and an additional command is set in step S1514. . The processing in steps S1512 to S1514 is similar to the processing in steps S917 to S919. After executing the process in step S1514, the end determination process ends.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1511, it is determined in step S1515 whether the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is performed in step S1516, an additional process for the number of games in the challenge mode is performed in step S1517, and an additional command is set in step S1518. . The processing in steps S1516 to S1518 is similar to the processing in steps S822 to S824. If a negative determination is made in step S1515, or after executing the process in step S1518, the end determination process is ended.

<Specialized zone processing>
Next, the specialized zone processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The specialized zone process is a process executed in step S713 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). As already explained, the player enters the specialized zone during the VB mode, and during the specialized zone, the number of consecutive games of attack mode is added to each game.

That is, in the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the following step S1603, processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1604, an additional command is set, and then the specialized zone processing ends. The processing from step S1602 to step S1604 is similar to the processing from step S917 to step S919. However, the number of games to be selected is greater in the number of additional games lottery process in step S1602 than in the number of additional games lottery process in step S917.

<Processing related to notification performance on the sub side>
Next, various notification processes performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described as (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. As a process for various notifications, an effect setting process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In the effect setting process, first in step S1701, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out the previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after executing the process in step S1702, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on a bet operation, and in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process, the mode transition notification process (Fig. 36), a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, etc. If these are the bet time commands, a bet time performance setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after executing the process in step S1704, it is determined in step S1705 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, as well as the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order processing (FIG. 38), and the like. If it is one of these start time commands, start time effect setting processing is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after executing the process in step S1706, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main controller 101 in step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). This is a stop command that is set in . If the command is a stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, a production setting process at each stop operation is executed in step S1708.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after executing the process in step S1708, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In addition to commands, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialization set in the winning result response process (Figure 39) There are zone termination commands, etc. If it is one of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after executing the process in step S1710, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is ended. In step S1711, effects are set based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), and connections are made without going through the main controller 101. Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for effects, settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of bet, the effect setting process at start, the effect setting process at each stop operation, and the effect setting process at all stops will be explained. Note that each effect setting process will be explained with reference to the schematic diagrams of display effects shown in FIGS. 55 to 60.

<Bet performance setting process>
The bet time performance setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the currently received bet command includes a challenge mode start command. If a challenge mode start command is included, processing for setting a challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1802. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the characters "Challenge mode start" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the display mode to be transitioned to is likely to win the attack mode transition lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) indicating that it is a chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, ``Grasp the attack mode!'' in a deep male voice).

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the currently received bet command includes an attack mode winning notification command. If an attack mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting an attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1804. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the characters "Attack mode confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack number one!" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a VB mode winning notification command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting a VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(b), the words "VICTORY BONUS confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a bonus winning notification command. If a bonus winning notification command is included, processing for setting a bonus winning notification effect is performed in step S1808. In the bonus winning notification performance, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "You did it! Bonus confirmed." In addition, in the bonus winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "We did it!" in male and female voices).

After executing any of the processes in step S1802, step S1804, step S1806, and step S1808, or if a negative determination is made in step S1807, in step S1809, other bet effects are set, and then the main Finish the production setting process. In the process of step S1809, for example, in response to receiving a bet command, a lamp around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 for the corresponding bet number is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. For example, a process for returning from the demo mode where one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined period of time, and a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned on to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Start production setting process>
Next, the start effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S1901, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the display mode is set in the corresponding display mode. , settings are made so that the display effects on the auxiliary display section 65 are performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, a challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag are set as flags for understanding the display mode. Areas are provided, and a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and a corresponding flag is cleared at the end of each mode. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start effect in step S1802, a challenge mode flag is set. In step S1901, by understanding these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the following step S1902, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order win. If the pressing order winning combination is determined, a pressing order notification process is performed in step S1903. Here, the press order notification process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the start command currently received includes a press order notification command. If the press order notification command is not included, the main press order notification process is ended. If a press order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2003, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the third replay winning is established, and then the press order notification process is performed. end.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replay 1 to 4 has not been won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is a fall replay 1 to 3. If it is a fall replay 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2005, and the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to notify the press order that the first replay win is established, and then the process for press order notification ends. do.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not a fall replay 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is a second promotion replay 1 or 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notified flag indicating that the VB winning notification has been set is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The notification completed flag is cleared based on transition to VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the notification completed flag. If the winning of the VB mode has been announced, in step S2008, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the pressing order that the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are achieved, and then the pressing order is notified. end the process. If the winning of the VB mode has not been announced, the process advances to step S2005, where the press order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is the BAR replay 1 or 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, the mode correspondence flag is checked in step S2010 to determine whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the VB mode is in effect, in step S2011, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the press order that the 6th to 8th replay winnings are achieved, and then the process for press order notification ends. do. If the VB mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S2005, where the press order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If it is a bell win, in step S2013, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the push order that the bell win is established as the first minor role, and then the push order notification process is ended. . If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the press order notification process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start performance setting process (FIG. 45), if it is determined in step S1902 that the pressing combination has not been won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not a specific combination has been won. If the specific winning combination is won, specific winning notification processing is performed in step S1905. The specific winning combination notification process will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after executing the process in step S1903 or step S1905, the process advances to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether an additional command has been received as the current start command. If the add-on command has been received, in step S1907, processing is performed to set the add-on effect in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(b), a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed as "+10" on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the additional performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "squeaky squeakyyyy!").

The details of the additional effect setting process in step S1907 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

In step S2101, processing is performed to determine the number of add-on games based on the add-on command received this time. In the following step S2102, a notification timing lottery process is executed. The notification timing lottery process is a process of randomly selecting at which timing in the game the additional effect will be performed, assuming that the additional effect will be performed in the current game.

The execution timing of the additional effects is set to differ depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 48, as the execution timing of the additional effects in this game, the first reel, second reel, third reel, and Then, the times when the first reel is stopped, the second reel is stopped, and the third reel is stopped are set. Then, among the stop operations for each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation was performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 were pressed, and the timing at which the stop OFF operation was performed when the pressing operation was completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop switches 42 to 44 are movable from an initial position located on the front side to an operating position located on the rear side. When placed at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by being operated from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are Switches from LOW signal to HI signal. Then, the main controller 101 determines that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal.

Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward the initial position by springs or the like. Therefore, if you release your hands from the stop switches 42 to 44 and do not apply the operating force (pressing force) that pushed them toward the operating position, the stop switches 42 to 44 will be moved to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring or the like. to return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Then, the main controller 101 determines that a stop OFF operation has been performed, which indicates that the pressing operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been completed, based on the detection signal switching from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

The additional effect is set so that it can occur either when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to turn on the stop or when the stop is turned off. That is, in a game where an additional effect occurs, the additional effect may occur not only at the timing when the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the execution timing table for the top-up effect, when the number of top-up games is relatively small, for example, when a top-up occurs for 5 to 10 games, the timing when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing when the first reel's stop OFF operation was performed is 10%, the second reel's stop ON operation is 15%, the second reel's stop OFF operation is 20%, the third reel's stop ON operation is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is easier to select than the stop ON operation, and the rear side operation is also easier to select.

On the other hand, if the number of games with a relatively large number of add-on games is 100 or more games, the timing when the first reel stop ON operation is selected is 5%, and the first reel stop OFF operation is selected. The timing at which was performed is 10%, the second reel stop ON operation is 5%, the second reel stop OFF operation is 30%, the third reel stop ON operation is 5%, the third reel stop OFF operation ( (when all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is easier to select than the stop ON operation, and the rear side operation is relatively easier to select.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the setting is such that the additional effect is more likely to occur when each reel is stopped when the reel is turned OFF than when the reel is turned OFF. Also, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation of the third reel (ON operation, OFF operation) is the most likely to be selected, the second reel is the second most likely to be selected, and the stop operation of the first reel is the most likely to be selected. It is set so that it is most likely to be selected during operation.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the additional effect, after performing the notification timing lottery process in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S2102 was when any reel was stopped ON. judge. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2104, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to set any one of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing at which the additional effects occur. Further, in step S2104, the performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the performance data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined performance data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 recognizes that an additional performance will occur at a timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads out the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area and causes the additional performance to be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is being operated to stop or turn OFF. If it is during the stop OFF operation of these reels, in step S2106, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the target reel is stopped OFF. Specifically, processing is performed to set either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of additional effects. Also, in step S2106, processing is performed in which the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read from the effect data storage area 182b and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed in which a third reel stop OFF operation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. Further, in step S2107, temporary storage processing of performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the process of step S2104, step S2106, or step S2107, the additional effect setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the start effect setting process, if the additional command is not received in step S1906, or after executing the process of step S1907, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S1908, and the process proceeds to step S1909. Then, in step S1910, other start effects are set, and then the start effect setting process is ended. The bonus medium performance setting process and the continuous performance setting process will be described in detail later. In the process of step S1910, for example, in response to the start of the game, an effect suggesting the lottery result is set, a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc.

<Production setting process for each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting process for each stop operation performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49.

In step S2201, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations for each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned on is set as an effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If it has been set, it is determined in step S2203 whether the stop ON operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the effect during the set stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation for the target reel, this setting process is directly ended. If it is a stop ON operation for the target reel, in step S2204, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that an effect is performed when the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the current stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the auxiliary display section 65 An additional performance will occur. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64.

In addition, for example, if this game is a press order winning combination and a press order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel will stop based on each stop ON operation, and the press order notification effect will become the next operation target. The effect changes to show the reel. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation, a display indicating that the first reel is the operation target as shown in FIG. 37(a) is displayed. . When the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) is shown as shown in FIG. 37(b). It changes into a performance. In addition, if the two reels are rotating before the performance when the stop ON operation is performed, a display showing that the second reel is to be stopped is displayed as shown in FIG. 37(b), and the second reel is rotated by the stop ON operation. Based on the reel stopping, the display changes to indicate that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 37(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2205, and it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main controller 101 when pressing the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations for each reel is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as an effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If set, in step S2207, it is determined whether the stop OFF operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the set effect during the stop OFF operation. If the operation is not to stop or turn off the target reel, this setting process is immediately terminated. If it is a stop OFF operation for the target reel, in step S2208, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a stop OFF operation effect is performed, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the current stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the main effect setting process is directly ended.

<Processing for setting effects when fully stopped>
Next, the full-stop performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a challenge mode end command. If a challenge mode end command is included, in step S2302, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the characters "Challenge mode end" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Be more devoted!" in a deep male voice).

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the currently received stop command includes an attack mode start command. If an attack mode start command is included, processing for setting an attack mode start effect is performed in step S2304. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the characters "Attack mode!! Ver. 1" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack mode start!" in a high-pitched female voice).

Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. In other words, this is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. When the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the characters "Attack Mode!! Ver. 2" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as a promotion effect. Also, when the rank of attack mode is promoted to the 3rd attack mode, the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 3" is displayed, and when the rank of attack mode is promoted to the 4th attack mode, the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 4" is displayed. Display is performed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the currently received stop command includes an attack mode end command. If an attack mode end command is included, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. ), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in the current attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you again" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If a VB mode start command is included, processing for setting a VB mode start effect is performed in step S2308. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the characters "777 VICTORY!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory Bonus Start" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If a VB mode end command is included, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2312. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the characters "VICTORY BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of consecutive games of attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. Displays the number of consecutive games (including VB mode and specialized zone), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "It's still going on" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If a specialized zone start command is included, processing for setting a specialized zone start effect is performed in step S2314. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "additional challenge!!" and a special mode in which additions to the attack mode are likely to occur. Displays a character that suggests that In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go!" in a boy's voice).

If the specialized zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If a specialized zone end command is included, in step S2316, processing is performed to set a specialized zone end effect. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the current specialized zone. In addition, in the specialized zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "Kyukyukyukyu!"). Note that it is preferable to vary the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of additional games.

If the specialized zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If a bonus end command is included, processing for setting a bonus end effect is performed in step S2318. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of coins paid out during the current bonus, and if the bonus is in attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, attack mode ( Displays the total number of coins paid out (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end performance, a performance using characters etc. that suggests these contents is performed depending on the success or failure of the attack mode, the success or failure of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of the processes in step S2302, step S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2312, step S2314, step S2316, and step S2318, or after making a negative determination in step S2317, proceed to step S2309 and step S2319. move on. In steps S2309 and S2319, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional effect if the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1907 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the additional effect setting process (FIG. 47), if the current generation timing of the additional effect is set to full stop, all the reels 32L, 32M, as shown in FIG. 50(c), , 32R is stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64.

Thereafter, in steps S2310 and S2320, other stop effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is ended. In steps S2310 and S2320, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination. , and controls the speaker 64 to emit sound effects corresponding to automatic bets during replay.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In this embodiment, continuous effects and bonus effects are provided as effects during various games. A continuous performance is a performance that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and is performed multiple times (four times in this embodiment). This is a performance that can be continued for a long period of time, and is a performance that informs whether or not there was an advantageous result in the final game. The mid-bonus performance is a performance performed in each game during the bonus state that is transitioned based on the first BB or second BB winning.

An overview of the continuous performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 60.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60(a), at the start of the first game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, four stages correspond to the continuous effects of four games). (Shows a nodaruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect was set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect of the successful Daruma Drop in the first stage, (This indicates that the continuous performance continues). If the continuous performance is interrupted, at the end of the first game for which the continuous performance was set, a performance will be performed to notify that the continuous performance will end midway (for example, a performance in which the first Daruma drop fails, etc.) ). The presentation regarding whether or not to continue the continuous presentation is the same for each game in the continuous presentation.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are three remaining Daruma doll effects). Then, at the end of the second game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 60(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are two remaining Daruma doll effects). Then, at the end of the third game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 60(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous performance, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous performance is performed (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is performed to show whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows an effect indicating that the Daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous performance, the performance of the next game is set by taking over the performance of the previous game, and the performance of each game has continuity. Furthermore, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous performance (how many games there are until the end of the continuous performance).

Here, in each game of continuous performance, whether or not the continuous performance continues until the next game is set such that the more the game of continuous performance progresses, the higher the continuation rate becomes. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous performance, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous performance will be notified, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be notified. Therefore, in a continuous production, the level of interest of the players varies greatly depending on the number of games in the continuous production that the current game is, and the interest increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game. .

Hereinafter, as the processes related to the continuous performance and bonus performance, the process for setting a bonus performance (step S1908) in the start performance setting process (FIG. 45), the specific role notification process (step S1905), and the continuous performance setting process (step S1909) ) will be explained respectively.

<Bonus performance processing>
First, the bonus mid-effect processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

In the bonus mid-effect setting process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether a bonus game is to be started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the next game in which the first BB or second BB is won until the end of the bonus. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2401 is the case where the first BB or the second BB winning is achieved in the previous game. In this case, in step S2402, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus effect counter in the various counter areas 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus performance counter is a counter for executing a performance set for each game as the bonus game progresses, and a performance corresponding to the counter is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

As already explained, in this embodiment, in the first BB and second BB bonus games, the winning combination is won in which 9 medals are paid out every game, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. In other words, the first BB and second BB bonus games end after 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned bonus effect counter is a counter for determining which game of the 24 games the effect should be performed. It is. In step S2402, the bonus effect counter is set to 24 as the number of bonus effect games. After performing the process in step S2402, in step S2403, a bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The mid-bonus performance flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the mid-bonus performance is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after executing the process in step S2403, the present bonus effect setting process ends.

<Specific role notification process>
Next, the specific winning combination notification process executed in step S1905 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 53.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the current start command. If no precursor command is included, it is determined in step S2502 whether an additional command is included as the current start command. If the bonus command is not included, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won a bonus, that is, if you have won a specific role as a lottery result, but you have not won a lottery to transition to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or an additional lottery for the number of consecutive games, If the player has not won the bonus either, a lottery process in the pseudo omen mode is executed in step S2504. Pseudo omen mode is visually difficult to distinguish from omen mode, but in omen mode, the player is notified of an advantageous result (such as winning a challenge mode) based on the completion of the number of omen games. The pseudo-harbinger mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo-harbinger games.

In step S2504, a table for pseudo omen mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and a counter for lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo omen mode. conduct. The table for the pseudo omen mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo omen mode lottery differs depending on the type of specific winning combination. For example, a strong cherry is more likely to win a pseudo omen mode lottery than a weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the omen mode lottery is high.

In step S2505, it is determined based on the processing result in step S2504 whether or not the lottery in the pseudo omen mode has been won. If the player has won, in step S2506, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo omen mode is performed. This processing corresponds to step S810 and the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 from 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the following step S2507, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2506 is set in the continuous performance counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous performance counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration that performs a continuous performance of four games, the continuous performance is started in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 4, and the result notification is performed in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 0. In this embodiment, when the omen mode or pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or pseudo omen mode ends after continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games into the continuous performance counter in step S2507, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of the continuous performance (4 games remaining), the continuous performance is started. That will happen.

In step S2508, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating that the mode is a pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage areas 183a. In the following step S2509, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the specific winning combination notification process ends. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2501 to S2503, or if a negative determination is made in step S2505, the specific winning combination notification process is immediately terminated.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous performance setting process performed in step S1909 of the start time performance setting process (FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54.

In step S2601, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the start command currently received. If an omen command is included, in step S2602, processing is performed to input the number of omen games in the omen mode included in the omen command into a continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the portent mode becomes one corresponding to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), continuous performance will be started. In addition, when inputting the number of precursor games from 1 game to 3 games into the continuous performance counter in step S2602, the continuous performance is started from the middle. For example, if 2 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S2602, the continuous performance will start from the current game, and will be performed from the performance of the third continuous performance game in FIG. 60(c). Furthermore, when 0 is input to the continuous performance counter, that is, when a winning notification such as an attack mode is performed without going through the precursor mode, the continuous performance is not executed. After performing the process of step S2602, a continuous effect flag is set in step S2603.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or after executing the process in step S2603, the process advances to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not a pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2608, and the main omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2609, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the present omen performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous performance is Perform the processing to set as . As for the performance data of the continuous performance specified from the performance table for this precursor, if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, it is the performance data that indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game, and the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3. If it is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends successfully.

If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S2610. In step S2610, a pseudo omen effect table is obtained from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2611, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous performance is Perform the processing to set as . If the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the continuous performance performance data specified from the pseudo-foreshadowing performance table is performance data indicating that the continuous performance will continue until the next game or performance data indicating that the continuous performance will not continue. If the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends in failure.

Note that when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the performance data specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table includes data for which no continuous performance is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, no continuous effect effect data is set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect will continue until the next game as shown in FIG. 60(a). When the performance data for the first game is set and the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data for the second continuous performance game is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will not continue until the next game in FIG. 60(b). By doing so, it becomes possible to set a performance in which the continuous performance is interrupted in the middle in a game in which the number of pseudo-precursor games in the pseudo-precursor mode is 0.

After performing the processing in step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined in step S2612 whether the continuous effect counter is 0 or not. If the continuous performance counter is 0, processing to clear the continuous performance flag and pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. Note that if the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after performing the process in step S2613, this continuous effect setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process advances to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether the bonus effect flag is set. If it has been set, in step S2615, the subtraction process of the bonus performance counter is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to subtract 1 from the bonus performance counter. In the following step S2616, a bonus effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2617, the performance data of the corresponding bonus performance is specified from the bonus performance table and the bonus performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b, and the current bonus performance is Perform the processing to set as . In step S2618, it is determined whether the bonus performance counter is 0 or not. If the bonus mid-performance counter is 0, processing to clear the bonus mid-performance flag is performed in step S2619. After that, the main continuous performance setting process is ended.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the lottery process is performed on the main controller 101 side based on the insertion of medals as game media and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are Rotation is started, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. In the configuration in which benefits are given, a plurality of RT states are provided with different probabilities of becoming a replay as a result of the lottery process, and the RT state shifts when a prize is established in the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay. Whether or not the corresponding replay will win a prize is determined by the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the lottery, and the notification of the order of operations is made by changing the display mode according to the result of the lottery process. This is done by winning a lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell prize and win a medal. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a gaming state where the replay probability is improved, and also to the display mode where the operation order is notified, in the RT state, the replay probability is improved. It is possible to establish a first-order prize and win a large amount of medals.

The trigger events for winning in the display mode transition lottery, attack mode, etc., which are triggers for acquiring a large amount of medals, and the bonus lottery for the number of consecutive games are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong cherry, etc. This occurs when a specific combination such as Watermelon, Weak Watermelon, Chance A, B, or Middle Bell is won. In other words, small roles (single roles) or overlapping roles of IV = 13 to 19, 32 to 45 are set as specific roles, and when these specific roles are won, the display mode shift lottery and An additional lottery will be held, and you will win in a bonus lottery. The specific winning combination has a relatively lower probability of being won than Bell, Replay, etc., and is also called a rare winning combination. Therefore, the player plays each game while expecting the occurrence of such a relatively low-probability trigger event.

Here, the display mode shift lottery based on the specific combination and the bonus win/fail lottery will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery table for the normal game state, the display mode transition lottery, and the set values.

As already explained, the specific combinations include a single combination such as a strong cherry with IV=13 to 19, and a combination combination with a bonus of IV=32 to 45.

For the 1st BB and 2nd BB bonus, if you win a combination of bonuses with IV = 32 to 45, or if you win a single bonus combination of IV = 46, 47, the winning flag (the 1BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag) are set. On the other hand, if a single combination of IV=13 to 19 is won, the bonus will not be won twice. That is, if it is determined in step S305 of the lottery process in FIG. Although the flag, weak cherry winning flag, strong watermelon winning flag, weak watermelon winning flag, chance A winning flag, chance B winning flag, middle bell winning flag) are set, the bonus winning flag (1st BB winning flag, 1st BB winning flag, middle bell winning flag) is set in step S307. 2BB winning flag) is not set. In other words, the trigger event as a bonus win occurs in games where the player wins at IV=32 to 45, and does not occur in the game where the player wins at IV=13 to 19.

The probability of occurrence of a trigger event as a bonus win may vary depending on a set value that causes a change in the ball payout rate. In other words, among IV = 32 to 45, the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value for the combination with the 1st BB, and the probability of occurrence is the same, while the probability of occurrence is the same for the combination with the 2nd BB, which varies depending on the setting value. The odds of winning are different. More specifically, strong cherry overlap 1 (IV = 32), weak cherry overlap 1 (IV = 34), strong watermelon overlap 1 (IV = 36), weak watermelon overlap 1 (IV = 38), chance A overlap 1 (IV = 40), chance B stack 1 (IV = 42), and middle bell stack 1 (IV = 44) are set to have the same probability regardless of the setting value, while strong cherry stack 2 (IV=33), Weak cherry stack 2 (IV=35), Strong watermelon stack 2 (IV=37), Weak watermelon stack 2 (IV=39), Chance A stack 2 (IV=41), Chance B stack 2 (IV=43) and the probability of winning middle bell duplication 2 (IV=45) are set to differ depending on the set value. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB individually is set to be the same probability of winning independently regardless of the set value. Therefore, the first BB is set to have the same probability of occurrence regardless of the set value, while the second BB is set to have a different probability of occurrence depending on the set value.

The display mode transition lottery is carried out when a player wins a single role with IV = 13 to 19 and a duplicate role with IV = 32 to 45, which are set to have the same probability of occurrence depending on the set value. On the other hand, if a duplicate combination of IV=32 to 45 is won, which is set to have a different probability of occurrence depending on the set value, it will not be executed (or it will be executed but the probability of winning will be 0). ). In other words, regardless of whether or not there is overlap with a bonus, the display mode transition lottery will not be performed when winning a winning combination with a different probability of winning depending on the setting value, while winning a winning combination with the same winning probability depending on the setting value. Sometimes a display mode transition lottery is held. Therefore, in this embodiment, it can be said that unlike the triggering event of bonus winning, the triggering event related to the display mode is determined so that the probability of occurrence does not differ depending on the setting value. Regarding triggering events related to the display mode, the performance differs depending on the setting value, not only in the display mode transition lottery, but also in terms of the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of consecutive games in attack mode and challenge mode, and the number of additional games at the time of winning. It is determined that this will not happen.

In other words, in this embodiment, the first advantageous state as a bonus state that is advantageous to the player by changing the probability (lottery table) of winning or losing a small winning combination, and the notification of the operation order of the pushing winning combination are When compared with a second advantageous state such as attack mode, which becomes an advantageous state for the player if it is implemented, the probability of winning (transition probability) differs depending on the setting value for the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state is determined so that the winning probability (transition probability) does not differ depending on the setting value.

The best part of playing a so-called slot machine is that each game involves drawing lots to determine whether the winning combination is correct or not, and stopping each reel according to the results. There is also the idea that the second advantageous state in which the player is trying to gain is a secondary game. From that perspective, even if it is acceptable for the winning probability of the first advantageous state to vary depending on the setting value, it is undesirable for the winning probability to vary even for the second advantageous state of the secondary game mentioned above. Conceivable. If even the above-mentioned secondary games have different winning probabilities depending on the setting values, the difference in the ball payout rate depending on the winning probability of each role, which is the main game, will become smaller, and as a result, the master-slave role of the game will be reversed. This is because there is a possibility that the

Therefore, as mentioned above, by adjusting the payout rate according to the first advantageous state and treating the second advantageous state as a secondary game, the first advantageous state can be It is possible to realize gameplay through cooperation between the state and the second advantageous state.

Regarding such a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, both advantageous states are implemented separately, and settings are made so that the two states do not overlap. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when you win the first BB or the second BB and move to the bonus state (BB state), the bonus state will be maintained until the specified number of payouts are made, and you will not be able to enter the RT state etc. No migration occurs. Further, the display mode also shifts to the BB mode, and the BB mode is maintained until the bonus state ends (transition to the attack mode or the like does not occur). If the first BB or the second BB is won during the attack mode, the display mode shifts to the BB mode, and after the BB mode ends, the attack mode is restarted (FIG. 40).

On the other hand, the configuration is such that a triggering event for one advantageous condition may occur during the other advantageous condition. More specifically, it is a secondary game during the first advantageous state which is the main game, and no trigger event related to the second advantageous state (attack mode transition lottery, additional lottery, etc.) occurs, but during the second advantageous state. The configuration is such that a triggering event (bonus win) regarding the first advantageous state can occur. Specifically, for each small role (IV = 29 to 31) during the bonus state as the first advantageous state, no transition lottery to attack mode or additional lottery is performed, and no triggering event regarding the second advantageous state occurs. . On the other hand, during the attack mode or VB mode as the second advantageous state, it is possible to win a duplicate combination of IV=32 to 45, so a triggering event related to the first advantageous state may occur. In this way, while restricting the repeated execution of both advantageous situations, the other triggering event is allowed to occur, which makes it easier for a chain of both advantageous situations to occur, thereby increasing the game's interest.

Here, when the second advantageous state is reached and the operation order of the pressing order combination is notified, in addition to the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display section 65 in FIG. 37 (the pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81), Press order notification is also performed on the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101. The configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. 62(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 62(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling on/off of these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Note that since all of the above-mentioned individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments. Segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally at the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that as long as it is possible to individually display multiple patterns of symbols on the instruction monitor 68, the shape and arrangement of each of the display segments N1 to N8 may be arbitrary. It is also possible to use a configuration using 1 segment, 9 segments, or the like. Furthermore, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and the configuration may be such that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, a configuration in which each display segment N1 to N8 is turned on or off by controlling the light source on and off is not essential, but if the display can be controlled individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be configured with a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of the pressing combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), by performing the stop operations in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be achieved. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and "1" is displayed. Furthermore, if the winning mode is advantageous to the player by performing the stop operations in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit to display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed in each display segment N1 to N7 have a one-to-one correspondence with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 is displayed when the display mode is normal mode and you win the lottery to enter attack mode, super attack mode, or challenge mode, or when you win attack mode, super attack mode, and challenge mode at the same time. It lights up when you win the bonus (1st BB). In addition, the light is turned off when the attack mode, super attack mode, challenge mode, or first BB is completed and the mode is transferred to the normal mode (excluding the case where the mode is transferred to the attack mode again after passing through the omen mode, etc.).

In other words, navigation states (attack mode, super attack mode, high-frequency mode) that make it easier for players to win prizes in an advantageous manner by making it easier to be notified of the order of operations for the push order bell and push order replay; A chance state where it is easier to win a transition lottery (challenge mode, 1st BB, high probability mode), or a winning lottery that transitions to a navigation state or chance state, but does not transition to the navigation state or chance state. The section including the state (winning mode) is set as an advantageous section (specific gaming state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 lights up during the advantageous section and turns off during the normal section that is not an advantageous section. This serves as a section indicator (specific notification means) to clearly indicate whether or not the section is advantageous.

The eighth display segment N8 is a starting game in which a game result (such as a specific combination such as strong cherry) that triggered an advantageous section such as a navigation state, a chance state, or a winning state is won and the game result is established. Then, at a timing before the game operation by the player is permitted in the game following the starting game, the lighting is started as a notification of the advantageous period. More specifically, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game result that triggered the advantageous section is won, that is, regardless of whether or not there is a loss, the game in which the game result was won is played. The eighth display segment N8 is turned on at a timing before a bet operation is permitted as a game operation by a player in the next game as a starting game. In other words, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up before the start of the game following the game in which the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as a press order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, displays the number of payout pieces on the gaming panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display section 62. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 to 44, etc. that are operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44, etc. are provided, on the front surface of the gaming machine. is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hands operating the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is placed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. Also, since it is arranged near the payout number display section 62, which is easy to watch for players who are playing the game with the aim of acquiring medals, it can be said that the chances of players overlooking it are suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display parts (for example, the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice that of the surrounding display section. Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display sections are both controlled to emit light (lighted up), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance of the eighth display segment N8 toward the front of the gaming machine is higher than that of the surrounding display sections (more specifically, the illuminance of the eighth display segment N8 is higher than that of the surrounding display sections). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is twice as high. Such a configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents it from being overlooked when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state.

Hereinafter, the first section display process and the second section display process will be described as the process regarding lighting/extinguishing of the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to FIG. 63. The first section display process is a process performed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the lottery result. This is carried out after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S2701, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As mentioned above, when the 8th display segment N8 is lit, it means that you have won the lottery to enter attack mode, super attack mode, or challenge mode as an advantageous section, or you are in any of these modes. It shows a case. If a negative determination is made in step S2701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the process advances to step S2702.

In step S2702, it is determined whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If the eighth display segment N8 is off and either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, this means that in the current lottery process, the transition to challenge mode or the attack mode Or if you win the lottery to enter super attack mode. As already explained, in the first specific combination processing (FIG. 32), if the lottery to shift to challenge mode is won, the challenge mode winning flag is set, and the lottery to shift to attack mode or super attack mode is won. In this case, the attack mode winning flag is set. In step S2702, if none of the flags is set, the first section display process is ended.

If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process advances to step S2703 and a display start mode lottery process is executed. In the display start mode lottery process, a display start mode table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and upon transition to the advantageous section, the lighting mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery. In the display start mode table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is set to differ depending on the contents of the advantageous section.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is when the start lever 41 is operated, when the first reel is stopped ON, when the first reel is stopped OFF, and when the second reel is turned ON. Each of the following settings are set: when the reels are stopped ON, when the second reel is stopped OFF, when the third reel is stopped ON, when the third reel is stopped OFF, and when medal payout based on winnings is completed. In this case, the first section display process is one of the lottery processes performed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the time when the start lever 41 is operated in the lighting start timing is the lottery process. This indicates the time when the start lever 41 was operated, which triggered the operation, and the lighting starts immediately after the first processing of the section display. Also, the first reel, second reel, and third reel mean that the reel that is stopped first among the three stop switches 42 to 44 is the first reel, and the reel that is stopped next is the first reel. The second reel is the third reel, and the last reel that is stopped is the third reel. The stop ON operation and stop OFF operation are as described above, and the operation of pushing the stop switches 42 to 44 from the initial position located on the front side to the operation position located on the rear side is the stop ON operation, and the stop ON operation is The stop OFF operation is an operation in which the switches 42 to 44 are released from the corresponding operating position to the initial position. Further, when the medal payout is completed, if the winning is not achieved due to missed medals or the like, lighting is started without going through the payout process.

When moving to challenge mode (when the challenge mode winning flag is set), 5% when operating the start lever 41, 10% when operating the first reel to stop ON, and 10% when operating the first reel to stop OFF. 55% when the second reel is stopped ON, 15% when the second reel is turned OFF, 3% when the third reel is turned ON, and 3% when the 3rd reel is turned OFF. 6%, and 1% when medal payout is completed. In addition, when moving to attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set), 3% when operating the start lever 41, 3% when operating the first reel stop ON, and 3% when the first reel is stopped. 6% when OFF operation, 10% when 2nd reel stop ON operation, 55% when 2nd reel stop OFF operation, 5% when 3rd reel stop ON operation, 3rd reel stop OFF operation The time is selected at a rate of 15%, and the time when medal payout is completed is selected at a rate of 3%. When transitioning to super attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set and the specialized zone flag is set), when the start lever 41 is operated, the first reel is stopped by 1%. 2% when ON operation, 4% when 1st reel stop OFF operation, 8% when 2nd reel stop ON operation, 20% when 2nd reel stop OFF operation, 3rd reel stop ON operation The time is selected at a rate of 8%, the time when the third reel is stopped and OFF is operated at a rate of 50%, and the time when medal payout is completed is selected at a rate of 7%.

That is, in the present embodiment, when moving to an advantageous section, the section indicator (eighth The display start timing of the display segment N8) is set to be different, and in challenge mode, the most likely selection is when the first reel is stopped and turned OFF, and in attack mode, when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF. In super attack mode, it is most likely to be selected when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF. Challenge mode is a so-called chance zone where it is easy to transition to attack mode, attack mode is a navigation state where push order notifications are easy to be made, and super attack mode is a navigation state where you transition to attack mode via an additional specialization zone. , the attack mode is more advantageous to the player than the challenge mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous to the player than the attack mode. In other words, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up and the game shifts to an advantageous section, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player varies greatly depending on the contents of the advantageous section. Since the display start mode is such that the content and advantage of the advantageous section are associated with the eighth display segment surface and N8, in games where the lottery for transition to these modes is won, the eighth display segment N8 is It is possible to draw a lot of attention to the timing of starting lighting.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the later the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is, the easier it is to shift to the advantageous section of the mode that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, a device has been devised to gradually provide a sense of excitement as to whether or not the eighth display segment N8 will light up.

Furthermore, although the selection rate of display start timing is determined in each mode, any display start timing can be selected when any mode is selected. That is, for example, if the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up when the start lever 41 is operated, it is most likely that you have won the lottery for transitioning to challenge mode, and it is possible that you have won the lottery for transitioning to super attack mode. Although the probability is set to be the lowest, the possibility of the super attack mode being the least likely is not zero. By doing this, even if the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 starts at a timing different from the timing desired by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up until the mode winning notification is performed. can.

Here, as already explained, the notification that the challenge mode has been won (challenge mode start effect, step S1802) and the notification that the attack mode has been won (attack mode winning notification effect, step S1804) are based on the omen mode. This is done at the time of the bet operation for the next game in which the number of precursor games becomes 0. On the other hand, in the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, the game in which the game result that triggered the transition lottery such as the challenge mode is established is the starting game, and bet operations for the next game are permitted. The lighting starts before the start of the lighting. In other words, even if the precursor mode is set to 0 games, when comparing the winning notification performance of each mode transition and the notification of the advantageous section by the section display, the notification of the advantageous section by the section display is performed first. In this relationship, we have designed a configuration that does not allow you to completely identify which mode you have won when the section indicator starts lighting, so it is difficult to switch to each mode after the section indicator starts lighting. It is also possible to provide a sense of excitement during the period when the winning notification performance is performed.

Furthermore, looking at the stop operation for each reel, the configuration is such that the stop OFF operation is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation. Therefore, in situations where there is no certainty whether or not the eighth display segment N8 will light up, it is thought that people operate with a sense of expectation that it will light up when operating the stop OFF operation rather than during the stop ON operation. . In this case, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are turned ON, the corresponding reel will stop, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are turned OFF, there is a high possibility that the corresponding reel will be stopped. , therefore, when the corresponding reel is stopped, the user presses the stop switch 42 with higher expectations that the eighth display segment N8 will light up than when the corresponding reel stops. It is believed that 44 operations were performed.

For example, when comparing the winning of the 27th minor prize with a weak cherry and the winning of the 28th minor prize with a strong cherry, we can see that each reel is 32L, 32M when the 27th minor prize is won and the 28th minor prize is won. , If you perform a stop operation aiming at the "Cherry" symbol on 32R, the stop number on the left reel 32L is the same, and the "Cherry" symbol will stop on the upper or lower row of the left reel 32L in both cases. . In this case, by stopping the middle reel 32M, it is determined whether the 27th minor winning combination has been won or the 28th minor winning combination has been won. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that there is a possibility of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section for both the 27th minor role and the 28th minor role. In other words, if the left reel 32L is stopped and the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, (1) the result of the current game is a weak cherry win, and the eighth display segment N8 is still lit. Cases in which the lighting timing has not yet been reached, (2) Cases in which the playing result of the current game was a weak cherry win, and the player did not win in the lottery for transition to any advantageous section, (3) Playing in the current game Case where the result is a strong cherry win and the lighting timing of the 8th display segment N8 has not yet been reached; (4) the game result of the current game is a strong cherry win and the transition to any advantageous section There may be a case in which the person did not win the lottery either. Then, by stopping the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R as the second reel, it is determined whether the case is (1) or (2) or (3) or (4). Furthermore, since the configuration is such that it is easier to win the transition lottery to the advantageous section when a strong cherry is won than when a weak cherry is won, the player is more likely to win the transition lottery to the advantageous section than in cases (1) or (2). It is considered that the player performs the stopping operation of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R while expecting that case 3) or (4) will be the case. In other words, when the "cherry" symbol stops at a predetermined position on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, it is determined that case (3) or (4) is the case, so the "cherry" symbol stops. It is thought that the person performs the stop operation while hoping that this will happen. The stop OFF operation in that situation can be said to be an operation to determine whether the above case is (3) or (4), and it is more purely an operation to determine whether the interval indicator lights up or not. You can entertain whether or not you like it. In other words, when you operate the stop ON operation while hoping that the "cherry" symbol will stop, the eighth display segment N8 is difficult to light up, so when you operate the stop ON operation, the "cherry" symbol appears more purely. ” You can enjoy a game where the symbols stop. In this way, by dividing the parts that are likely to attract the player's attention in stages so that they are less likely to overlap, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from becoming distracted and not being able to enjoy the game. becomes possible.

Returning to the explanation of the first section display process, after the display start mode lottery process is executed in step S2703, a process for setting the display start mode based on the lottery result in step S2703 is performed in step S2704. In this case, processing is performed to set a flag corresponding to the timing determined by lottery. Then, in the display start processing (not shown) that is started individually as the display start processing of the section display device (eighth display segment N8), processing for determining whether or not the timing corresponds to these flags is performed. At the same time, if it is a corresponding timing, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to that timing is set, and if it is set, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is started. . For example, in step S2703, if the first stop OFF operation is determined, a flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set. In the process for starting the display, various determination processes are performed, such as whether or not it is the timing to operate the start lever 41, whether it is the timing to turn on the first stop, and whether or not it is the timing to turn the first stop OFF. , starts displaying the eighth display segment N8 (turns off (switch from state to lit state). Note that the display start process is configured as a periodic process that is started every predetermined period (for example, a 1.49 msec period), and is started, for example, as one process of a timer interrupt process.

In addition, in the main control device 101, when the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned on and the display is started, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A sound output command is output to the display control device 81 so that a sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Note that when the eighth display segment N8 starts displaying, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is generated on the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. In this case, a corresponding command is output to the display control device 81, and It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that the display control device 81 performs a corresponding effect.

After executing the process in step S2704, in step S2705, a process is executed to start measuring the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section, and then the first section display process is ended. The number of consecutive games in the advantageous section is determined by measuring the number of advantageous section games AG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and in step S2705, the process sets the number of games AG in the advantageous section to an initial value of 0. I do. The number of games in the advantageous section AG is incremented by 1 for each game in the advantageous section.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, then in step S2706 a process is performed to continue displaying the advantageous section, and then a first process for displaying this section is performed. end. Specifically, in step S2706, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S415 of the reel control process, and upon the end of one game, the payout of medals (payout determination process) and the transition of the gaming state based on the winning results are performed. etc. (winning result corresponding processing) is carried out.

In step S2801, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit and displayed as a section indicator. If the light is off (non-lit, non-display), the second section display process is immediately terminated. If the display is lit, the process advances to step S2802. In step S2802, processing for counting the number of games during the advantageous period is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of advantageous zone games AG is performed. The number of games in the advantageous section AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and measures the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit.

After executing the process of step S2802, it is determined in step S2803 whether the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit value "1500". If it reaches "1500", the number of advantageous section games AG is cleared to 0 in step S2804, and then the eighth display segment N8 is turned off in step S2805 as a process for ending the display of the section display. Perform the processing to After data initialization processing is performed in step S2806, the second section display processing ends.

The data initialization process is a process of returning the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. For example, a challenge mode winning flag, an attack mode winning flag, etc. may be set when moving to an advantageous section, or a VB mode winning flag may be set during attack mode, and the flag may remain set until this initialization process. If so, clear these winning flags. Furthermore, in the initialization process, if an attack notification flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, specialized zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Further, if the precursor counter, the counter for the number of consecutive games such as attack mode, etc. are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to press order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using press order notification, and clears the RAM regarding such variables and parameters. This is a process that performs

If it is determined in step S2803 that the number of games AG in the advantageous period has not reached the upper limit value, the process advances to step S2807, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous period has ended. That is, in step S2807, it is determined whether or not neither the challenge mode winning flag nor the attack mode winning flag is set, and in step S2808, it is determined that neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode winning flag is set. Determine whether the state is the same or not. An affirmative determination in both step S2807 and step S2808 means that the advantageous section ends before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section.In this case, in step S2809, the number of games AG in the advantageous section is It is cleared to 0, and at step S2810, the section display end process is performed, and then the second section display process is ended. If a negative determination is made in either step S2807 or step S2808, it is determined that the vehicle is still in the advantageous zone, and the second zone display process is ended. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) continues.

<About the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be explained with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 66, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, the push order notification effect is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the performance related to the instruction function, as opposed to the advantageous section that has the performance related to the instruction function such as push order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section such as challenge mode or attack mode by winning a weak watermelon combination, the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established will be the starting game, and the starting game will be At a timing before the bet operation by the player is permitted in the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator lights up, and notification of the advantageous section is started.

In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon winning combination is won as described above, the game is in a state before shifting to the advantageous section, and is a game included in the normal section. Then, regarding the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator indicating an advantageous section, the notification that it is in the advantageous section is the timing at which a bet operation for the next game of the starting game in which the weak watermelon winning combination is won is permitted. In other words, if we consider the game in which the advantageous section starts to be played at the timing when the game becomes playable, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon win winning game (starting game) as described above. The notification can be said to be an earlier notification that is performed before the notification of the advantageous section (in-state notification, in-mode notification). As described above, this embodiment is configured to suggest the content or degree of advantage of an advantageous section when the advance notification is made to indicate that it is an advantageous section.

Thereafter, in a situation where the advantageous section is being notified, press order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, as described above, press order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player presses the button based on the press order information. Be able to understand the order. In the press order notification, the display of the press order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If such a game is not the last game of the advantageous section, when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends, and the eighth display The display of the advantageous section by segment N8 continues. If the player wins the push order combination again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit and the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 also turns off, and the notification of the advantageous section ends. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in the game in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Specifically, the game following the starting game is the first game, and the number of games in the advantageous section is counted in the game in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. The number of games in the advantageous range is up to the game.

In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout ends (by the section display second process which is the process after the payout determination process). Note that if medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game is the final game in the advantageous section.

In this way, the eighth display segment N8 lights up during the advantageous period, and turns off when the advantageous period ends. The eighth display segment N8 not only starts lighting up based on transition to challenge mode, attack mode, etc., but also starts lighting up based on winning the transition lottery to challenge mode, attack mode, etc. Lighting starts. In other words, even if there is no notification in the game where you have won the transition lottery to these modes, you can check whether or not you have won the transition lottery by checking whether the eighth display segment N8 is lit. It is now possible to understand clearly. By doing this, players who have won the lottery to switch to these modes but end the game without knowing it will be at an advantage, and the players who will take their seats afterwards will have an advantage. It is possible to avoid any difference in degree.

In addition, the present slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the advantage depending on the setting value regarding the playability in which the advantage is changed by notification of the push order such as challenge mode and attack mode. Therefore, by making the playability based on press order notification uniformly advantageous for each game machine (setting value) and each game (situation), it is possible to eliminate advantages/disadvantages between players, and to give special rewards by aiming at the symbols. It is possible to fully enjoy the inherent gaming nature of the slot machine 10, in which players can obtain the following information, while also making it possible to create a well-balanced gaming machine by relating this to the gaming nature of the accompanying press order notification.

On the other hand, in terms of gameplay based on push order notifications, players are interested in whether or not they will win the lottery to enter challenge mode, attack mode, etc., and whether these modes will continue. Although it may be advantageous in terms of ensuring equality among players that it becomes obvious at a glance by lighting/non-lighting of the 8 display segment N8, it may be a disadvantage in terms of gameplay and production effects. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the first section display process, the lighting start timing (display start mode) of the eighth display segment N8 is configured to vary depending on the contents of the advantageous section to which the segment is turned on.

FIG. 67 shows the relationship between the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 and the contents of the advantageous section to which the win is announced (transferred) when the weak watermelon winning combination is won as a specific winning combination in the normal section. ing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), when a weak watermelon winning combination is won, it is assumed that the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up when the first reel is stopped and turned off. As a player, since the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting up, it becomes possible for the player to understand that he has won the lottery to move to the advantageous section, and when the first reel is stopped and turned off, the lighting starts. Therefore, it is predicted that the current advantageous section is the challenge mode (see FIG. 64). After passing through the precursor mode, the player confirms that the current advantageous section was the challenge mode by generating a challenge mode start effect as a notification game. As already explained, the measurement of the advantageous section starts after the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting up, that is, the advantageous section is still in the advantageous section even during the omen mode.

FIG. 67(b) shows a case where the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up when the second reel is stopped and turned off when the weak watermelon combination is won. In this case, the player predicts that he has won the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section and that the current advantageous section is in attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, after passing through the harbinger mode, an attack mode confirmation effect occurs as a notification game, thereby confirming that the current advantageous section was the attack mode.

FIG. 68(c) shows a case where the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up when the third reel is stopped and turned off when the weak watermelon combination is won. In this case, the player predicts that he has won the lottery to move to the advantageous section and that the current advantageous section is in super attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, after passing through the harbinger mode, an additional specialization zone confirmation effect occurs as a notification game, confirming that this advantageous section was a super attack mode with an additional specialization zone.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a configuration in which the eighth display segment N8 serving as a section indicator lights up to clearly indicate that the section is an advantageous section, and the eighth display segment N8 turns off to clearly indicate that the section is not an advantageous section, By varying the manner in which the display segments N8 start lighting, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) while ensuring the function of notifying whether the section is advantageous or not.

By changing the manner in which the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting up depending on the contents of the advantageous section, the player can see the transition lottery to the advantageous section when the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting up. It becomes possible not only to know that a winner has been won, but also to predict the details thereof, and the degree of attention when the eighth display segment N8 is lit can be greatly improved.

In particular, by configuring the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 to be determined by lottery based on the contents of the advantageous section, the lighting start mode and the contents of the advantageous section do not have a one-to-one relationship. Even if the lighting is started in a manner that is unfavorable for the player, the game can be continued while maintaining the sense of anticipation for the mode to which the player will transition later.

Furthermore, assuming a configuration in which the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting before the next game after the starting game, after the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 starts, notification of the challenge mode or attack mode to be transitioned to (challenge mode) is assumed. Mode start notification effects, attack mode winning notification effects, etc.) are configured to occur several games after passing through the precursor mode, so the contents of the advantageous section are predicted at the start of the lighting, and during the precursor mode, the predicted contents are confirmed to be correct. It is possible to make the eighth display segment N8 a so-called final notification so that the player can enjoy the excitement of knowing whether the game is accurate or not, and to play a game that predicts the content even after the final notification is made.

Further, as described above, since the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting before the next game after the starting game, the end of the lighting start timing is determined in advance. In such a production where the end of occurrence is determined, the content of the advantageous section when the lighting starts is displayed in the eighth display segment N8 before the end, so that the contents of the advantageous section can be displayed in the eighth display segment N8. It is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the performance to be announced. That is, for players who are interested in whether or not they have won the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 will start to be displayed is a matter of great interest; Since the end of the display start timing is determined, it can be said that the timing at which the player should pay attention to the eighth display segment N8 is concentrated. Based on such a premise, if the content of the advantageous section is notified in the eighth display segment N8, the content of the advantageous section will be overwhelmingly announced compared to notification of the advantageous section at other timings or by other display means. This makes it possible to make announcements that attract a lot of attention.

The eighth display segment N8 is configured to light up mainly when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, so it creates a sense of expectation that it will light up in games where it may light up (games when a specific winning combination is won). This makes it possible to cause the player to perform a stop operation while the player is operating the light, and the impression that the light is turned on by the player's own operation can be strengthened, compared to a configuration in which the light is turned on regardless of the player's operation.

Further, by configuring the stop switches 42 to 44 to be turned on based on the operation, it is possible to judge whether or not the lights are turned on based on the relationship with the stop result of the operated reel being stopped. Specifically, for example, when you win a strong cherry or a weak cherry, you can win a lottery to transition to challenge mode or attack mode, etc., but the probability of winning the transition lottery is different for strong cherries and weak cherries. has a higher chance of winning than a weak cherry. Therefore, it is thought that the player will operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while expecting that the lottery result of this game will be a strong cherry rather than a weak cherry, and the eighth display segment N8 The stop operation can be performed while predicting whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry depending on the lighting timing of the cherry.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery according to the contents of the advantageous section, and regardless of which display start mode is started, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery. Although the configuration is such that the mode, attack mode, and super attack mode are possible, the display start mode and the contents of the advantageous section may be associated on a one-to-one basis. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which there are display start modes that are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis and display start modes that are not associated with each other (any mode is possible).

For example, FIG. 68(a) shows an example of a display start mode table in which the content of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 are associated on a one-to-one basis. That is, in this example, if the content of the current advantageous section is the challenge mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting based on the stop operation of the first reel, and the content of the current advantageous section is the challenge mode. If the content is attack mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting based on the stop operation of the second reel, and if the content of the current advantageous section is super attack mode, the third reel starts lighting. Based on the stop operation performed, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting. By doing so, it is possible to clearly understand the contents of the current advantageous section based on the lighting start mode. In particular, the eighth display segment N8 is smaller than other notification sections such as the auxiliary display section 65, and is easily recognized only by the player who is playing the game. It is highly likely that only the player playing the game in question can grasp the contents of the advantageous section. Then, for example, a player who understands that the super attack mode is on by the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 will feel a sense of superiority that he knows information that other players do not know, and will continue to play the super attack mode. It is also possible to wait for the attack mode winning notification performance.

Also, in this example, the transition to an advantageous section occurs when the second reel's stopping operation is more advantageous than the first reel's stopping operation, and the third reel's stopping operation is more advantageous than the second reel's stopping operation. It is set so that it is more advantageous when the display starts when the rear side is operated, such as moving to an advantageous section where it is more advantageous. By doing this, the game enjoys a balance between the desire to start displaying early and confirm the transition to the advantageous section, and the desire to start displaying later and move to the advantageous section. You can realize your sexuality. For example, if you stop the 1st reel or the 2nd reel and predict/know from the stopped result that it will be a winning role (for example, a middle bell role) that can be expected to be used in super attack mode, then the 1st reel You will probably operate while hoping that the display will not start when you stop or turn off the second reel, and even in challenge mode when you stop the first reel, you will win a winning combination that has a low chance of winning (for example, a weak cherry winning combination). If they had predicted/understood this, they would probably operate while hoping that the display would start when the first reel is stopped and turned OFF. In other words, even in a configuration where there is a one-to-one correspondence between the display start mode and the content of the advantageous section, by setting the selection rate ratio between the stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation as described above, the stop It is possible to enjoy whether or not the display starts depending on the relationship with the rolled number.

FIG. 68(b) shows a display start mode table in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between the contents of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8, and there are cases where there is no correspondence. An example is shown. In this example, in addition to the correspondence between the stop operation of each reel and the contents of the advantageous section in the table of FIG. At the end of the payout, the selection can be made regardless of the contents of the advantageous section. By doing this, when the stop operation is completed up to the second reel, it is confirmed that you have either won the super attack mode or missed the lottery to move to the advantageous section (see FIG. 68(a) above) Compared to the example above, you can enjoy the excitement until the end.

<Modification 2>
In this embodiment, a specific state (specific situation) that affects the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is provided as a gaming state (game situation). In this modification, the specific state does not change the normal game state and the lottery table like each RT state or bonus state, nor does it change the performance regarding press order notification like challenge mode or attack mode. Although there is no difference in the degree of advantage for the player depending on whether the player is in a specific state or not, the display start mode table when winning the lottery for transition to an advantageous section differs depending on whether the player is in a specific state or not.

FIG. 69(a) shows a part of the lottery process (FIG. 16) in this modification. That is, in this modification, after priority setting processing is performed in step S315, specific state processing is performed in step S2901, and then section display first processing is performed in step S316.

In the specific state processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69(b), first, in step S3001, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed (lit). If it is being displayed (lit), the specific state processing is immediately terminated. If it is not being displayed (the light is off), it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the result of the current lottery process is a specific winning combination. If the specific winning combination is not won, the specific state processing is immediately terminated. If the specific winning combination has been won, the process advances to step S3003.

In step S3003, it is determined whether a specific state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specific state flag is a flag used by the CPU 102 to determine whether or not the state is a specific state. If the specific state flag is not set, the process advances to step S3004, and it is determined whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the player has won the transition lottery for the advantageous section in the current game. If the winner has been selected, the specific state processing is immediately terminated. If the lottery has not been won, the process advances to step S3005 and specific state lottery processing is executed. The specific state lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to shift to a specific state by lottery. For example, a table for lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery table is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Get the counter for. In this case, the winning probability of the transition lottery may be different depending on the type of specific combination, for example, as in the transition lottery to challenge mode, etc., a strong cherry has a higher winning probability than a weak cherry. Or, conversely, weak cherries may have a higher probability of winning than strong cherries. There is an inverse relationship with the ease of winning the lottery for transitioning to challenge mode, etc. (The easier it is for a role to win the lottery for transitioning to challenge mode, etc., the harder it is to win the lottery for transitioning to a specific state; By establishing a relationship in which the more difficult the winning combination is, the more likely it is to win the lottery for transition to a specific state, it is possible to attract the attention of players even to the winning combinations that are difficult to win the lottery for transition to a challenge mode or the like.

After performing the specific state lottery process in step S3005, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the result of step S3005 is a winning result. If it is a non-win, the process for the specific state is immediately ended, and if it is a win, the process advances to step S3007. In step S3007, processing is performed to input "3" as a predetermined value into the state counter K provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The state counter K is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the continuation conditions in the specific state, and is decremented by 1 every time a specific winning combination is won. In the subsequent step S3008, the specific state flag is set, and then this specific state processing is ended. By setting the specific state flag in step S3008, it becomes possible to make an affirmative determination in step S3003.

If it is determined in step S3003 that the specific state flag is set, the process advances to step S3009. In step S3009, similarly to step S3004, by determining whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery for the advantageous section has been won in the current game. Determine whether If the transfer lottery has not been won, the state counter K is decremented by 1 in step S3010, and it is determined in step S3011 whether the state counter K has become 0. If the state counter K is not 0, this specific state processing is immediately terminated; if the state counter K is 0, the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012, and then the specific state processing is ended. do. Further, if it is determined in step S3009 that the transition lottery for the advantageous section has been won, the state counter K is cleared to 0 in step S3013, the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012, and the specific state end the process.

As mentioned above, in this modified example, the specific state is transferred in a part of the game where a specific winning combination is won in the normal section, and when the lottery to move to the advantageous section is not won, and then the specific state is transferred to the specific winning section. The game is continued until a game in which the player wins and does not win the transition lottery to an advantageous section occurs three times as a predetermined number of times. In other words, the specific state is a state to which the player is transitioned based on the occurrence of an event disadvantageous to the player in terms of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

In the first section display process in this modification, in the display start mode lottery process (step S2703), a display start mode table that differs depending on whether the state is a specific state or not is acquired. That is, if the state is not a specific state, a display start mode table such as shown in FIG. 64 is obtained and a display start mode is selected by lottery, whereas if the state is a specific state, a display start mode table for the specific state shown in FIG. 70 is obtained. The display start mode is selected by lottery. The display start mode table for the specific state is different from the display start mode table for normal times (for states other than the specific state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, the selection rate of the display start mode differs not only depending on the contents of the advantageous section but also on the setting value that changes the medal increase/decrease rate.

For example, if you win the lottery to enter the challenge mode, the times are selected when you operate the start lever 41, when you operate the first reel to stop OFF, when you operate the third reel to stop OFF, and when the payout ends. However, the selection rate for each timing differs depending on the setting value. Specifically, when winning the challenge mode, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 will start when the start lever 41 is operated is higher than that of settings 2, 4, and 6 than settings 1, 3, and 5. is higher, and the even number setting is more likely to be selected than the odd number setting. In other words, if the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the start lever 41 is operated, and then the game shifts to the challenge mode, the setting value of the gaming machine is more likely to be an even number setting than an odd number setting. In addition, when winning the challenge mode, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 will start at the end of the payout is higher for setting 5 than setting 4, higher for setting 6 than setting 5, and for settings 3 and below. It is 0. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of the payout, and then the challenge mode is entered, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or higher. Furthermore, when winning the challenge mode, in setting 1, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is not selected. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and turned off, and then the challenge mode is entered, it is determined that the setting is 2 or higher.

On the other hand, if you win the lottery to enter the attack mode, the times when the start lever 41 is operated, the second reel's stop/OFF operation, the third reel's stop/OFF operation, and the end of payout are selected. , the selection rate for each timing differs depending on the setting value. Specifically, when the attack mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 will start when the start lever 41 is operated is higher than that of settings 1, 3, and 5 than settings 2, 4, and 6. is higher, and the odd number setting is more likely to be selected than the even number setting. In other words, it is set to have the opposite relationship to the challenge mode, and when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the start lever 41 is operated, and then shifts to attack mode, the setting value of this gaming machine is more likely to be an odd number setting than an even number setting, and when shifting to challenge mode, the setting value of the gaming machine is more likely to be an even number setting than an odd number setting. Furthermore, when the attack mode is won, the payout end time is not selected in setting 1. In other words, if the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of the payout and then shifts to challenge mode, it is determined that the setting is 4 or higher, as described above, but if the mode shifts to attack mode, the setting is 2. The above is confirmed. Therefore, assuming that a high setting value is preferable to the player, if the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of the payout, it is preferable for the player to shift to the challenge mode rather than the attack mode. The advantageousness of the contents of the advantageous section and the desirability for the player are reversed. Further, when winning the challenge mode, the third reel stop OFF operation is not selected if the setting is 3 or lower. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and turned off, and then the challenge mode is entered, it is determined that the setting is 4 or higher. In other words, if the 8th display segment N8 lights up when the 3rd reel is stopped and turned OFF, and then shifts to challenge mode, as described above, although it is confirmed that the setting is 2 or higher, it shifts to attack mode. If so, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or higher. Therefore, if the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and turned off, it is preferable for the player to shift to the attack mode rather than the challenge mode, and the advantageousness of the contents of the advantageous section and the player's Desirability matches.

In the display start mode table for a specific state, if the lottery for transition to super attack mode is won, the payout end time is selected regardless of the set value. In other words, if you win the lottery to move to an advantageous section in a specific state, if the display of the 8th display segment N8 starts before the end of the payout, you can guess some set value and the end of the payout. However, if the 8th display segment N8 starts lighting at the end of the payout and the super attack mode , the setting value cannot be estimated. By doing this, it is possible to create an interesting game that takes advantage of the desire to shift to the super attack mode based on the advantage of the super attack mode and the desire to guess the settings.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, a plurality of display start modes are set as the display start modes of the eighth display segment N8, in which the elapsed time from the event that triggers the start is different.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the display start mode table in this modification, no matter what the contents of the advantageous section are, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting after the third reel is stopped ON or when the payout ends. . Then, the elapsed time from the stop ON operation of the third reel is set to be different, and 0 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel (that is, when the third reel is stopped ON), 5 seconds after the third reel stop ON operation, 10 seconds after the third reel stop ON operation, and 15 seconds after the third reel stop ON operation can be set. For example, when winning challenge mode, the time 5 seconds after the 3rd reel stop ON operation is most likely to be selected, and when winning the attack mode, the time 10 seconds after the 3rd reel stop ON operation is most likely to be selected, and the super attack mode win is most likely to be selected. Sometimes, it is most likely to be selected 15 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel. In other words, the later the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 is from the third reel stop ON operation, the more the game shifts to an advantageous section that is more advantageous for the player.

In the first section display process in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, in steps S3101 to S3103, the same processes as those in steps S2701 to S2703 are performed. However, in the lottery process in step S3103, a lottery is performed based on the display start mode table shown in FIG. 71 above. In step S3104, based on the processing result in step S3103, processing is performed to store the display start timing according to the lottery result. In this case, for example, a flag or the like that can determine the determined display start timing (i.e., how many seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel or when the payout ends) is set, and the display is started after the fact using this flag. The timing can be determined. In step S3105, processing is performed to set a display start game flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The display start game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is to be started in the current game.

After executing the process of step S3105, measurement of the number of advantageous section games AG is started in step S3106, and then the first section display process is ended. The processing in step S3106 is similar to the processing in step S2705. Further, if it is determined in step S3101 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, display continuation processing is performed in step S3107, and then the section display first processing is ended. The processing in step S3107 is similar to the processing in step S2706.

In the reel control process (FIG. 18) in this modification, as shown in FIG. 73(a), after it is determined in step S411 that all the reels have stopped, a third section display process is performed in step S3201. After performing the process in step S3201, a payout determination process is performed in step S413, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414, a second section display process is performed in step S415, and a winning result command is executed in step S416. is set, and then the reel control process ends. The processing from step S413 to step S416 is as described above.

The third section display process in step S3201 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73(b).

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the display start game flag is set. As already explained, the display start game flag is a flag set in the first section display process. If it has not been set, this section display third process is immediately terminated. If set, in step S3302, processing is performed to clear the display start game flag. Then, in step S3303, freeze setting processing is performed. The freeze setting process is a process for generating a so-called freeze effect that temporarily restricts the process based on the player's operation and the progress of the game when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in this modification.

Specifically, in step S3303, one of 1 sec, 6 sec, 11 sec, and 16 sec is set as the freeze period. Here, the timing at which the third section display process is performed is the timing at which all the reels have stopped, and the timing at which the stop ON operation for the third reel has been performed. In this modification, the freeze period set in step S3303 is a period obtained by adding 1 sec as a predetermined period to each period when the eighth display segment N8 is displayed after the stop ON operation of the third reel. 0 sec + 1 sec after the third reel stop ON operation, 5 sec + 1 sec after the third reel stop ON operation, 10 sec + 1 sec after the third reel stop ON operation, and 15 sec + 1 sec after the third reel stop ON operation. In step S3303, the display start mode of the current eighth display segment N8 is grasped, and a freeze period is set according to the grasped start mode. That is, if the start mode is 0 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 1 second, if it is 5 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 6 seconds, and 10 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel. If so, the freeze period is set to 11 seconds, and if it is 15 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is set to 16 seconds. Furthermore, if the current start mode is the end of payout, 16 seconds, which is the longest freeze period when the start mode is after the third reel stop operation, is set as the current freeze period. To set the freeze period, for example, a value corresponding to the length of the freeze period is input into a timer counter that is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and updating of the timer counter is started. It is assumed that the frozen state continues until the timer counter reaches the initial value (0), and the CPU 102 refers to the value of the timer counter to determine whether to proceed to the next process (payout determination process in step S413). In other words, until the timer counter reaches the initial value, the third section display process waits.

After performing the process of step S3304, a process of setting display start timing is performed in step S3305. That is, based on the display start timing information that can be determined after the fact in step S3104 of the first section display process, processing is performed to synchronize with the freeze period information set in step S3305. Specifically, if the display start timing is set to 0 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the eighth display segment N8 is set to start displaying at 0 seconds after the start of freezing; If 5 seconds after the stop ON operation is set, the 8th display segment N8 is set to start displaying 5 seconds after the freeze starts, and if the display start timing is set to 10 seconds after the stop ON operation, the freeze is set. If the eighth display segment N8 is set to start displaying 10 seconds after the start, and the display start timing is set to 15 seconds after the stop ON operation, the eighth display segment N8 will start displaying 15 seconds after the start of freezing. Set it so that Further, when the display start timing is set to the end of payout, the eighth display segment N8 is set to start displaying at the end of payout after the end of the current freeze period. In this case, for example, by setting a flag indicating that the display should start when the payout ends, and determining whether or not the flag is present, it is determined whether the display should start during the freeze period, and whether the display should start when the payout ends. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which it is determined whether or not.

After performing the process in step S3305, a display start command is output to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, in step S3306, and then the third section display process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the display start command controls the auxiliary display section 65 so that a freeze effect (for example, a blackout effect) corresponding to the freeze period is performed on the auxiliary display section 65, and also displays a corresponding effect. The speaker 64 is controlled so that a sound (for example, a "boom" sound as if a machine is breaking) is emitted. In this case, the freeze effect and its sound effects may be configured to differ depending on the length of the freeze period.

In this modification, the relationship between the timing at which the eighth display segment N8 starts displaying and the content of the advantageous section will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 74.

FIG. 74(a) shows a case where 6 seconds is set as the freeze period during which operations by the player and processing based on the operations are invalidated. If the third reel stops at the timing of ta1 and remains in a frozen state for a period from there to the timing of ta3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of ta2, which is slightly earlier than the timing of ta3. . In this case, the period TB1 from the start of freeze to the eighth display segment N8 in the freeze period is 5 seconds, and the period from the start of display at timing ta2 until the freeze is released at timing ta3. is 1 sec. When the freeze is released at the timing ta3, medals are paid out, and the medal payout process is performed for a period TA up to the timing ta4. In this case, the advantageous section to be started is likely to be the challenge mode. When the medal payout process is completed at timing ta4, the next game operation (bet operation) is permitted.

FIG. 74(b) shows a case where the freeze period is set as 11 seconds. If the third reel stops at the timing of tb1 and remains in a frozen state for a period from there to the timing of tb3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tb2, which is slightly earlier than the timing of tb3. . In this case, the period TB2 from the start of freezing to the eighth display segment N8 in the freeze period is 10 seconds, which is longer than the case of FIG. The period until the freeze is released at timing tb3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as in the case of FIG. 74(a). When the freeze is released at timing tb3, medal payout occurs, and the medal payout process is performed over a period TA up to timing tb4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in the case of FIG. 74(a) above, the length of the medal payout process will also be the same, and the period TA from tb3 to tb4 will be the same length as in the case of FIG. 74(a) above. . In this case, the advantageous section to be started is likely to be the attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at timing tb4, the next game operation (bet operation) is permitted. That is, in the case of FIG. 74(b), the timing at which the next game operation is permitted is later than in the case of FIG. 74(a).

FIG. 74(c) shows a case where the freeze period is set as 16 seconds. If the third reel stops at the timing of tc1 and remains in a frozen state for a period from there to the timing of tc3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tc2, which is slightly earlier than the timing of tc3. . In this case, the period TB3 from the start of freezing to the eighth display segment N8 in the freeze period is 15 seconds, which is longer than the case of FIG. The period until the freeze is released at timing tc3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as in the case of FIG. 74(a) and FIG. 74(b). When the freeze is released at timing tc3, medal payout occurs, and the medal payout process is performed over a period TA up to timing tc4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in the case of FIG. 74(a) or FIG. 74(b) above, the length of the period TA is the same length as in the case of FIG. 74(a) or FIG. 74(b). It is. In this case, the advantageous section to be started is likely to be the super attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at timing tc4, the next game operation (bet operation) is permitted. That is, in the case of FIG. 74(c), the timing at which the next game operation is permitted is later than in the cases of FIG. 74(a) or FIG. 74(b).

As described above, in the starting game that starts displaying the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, by setting the freeze state (freeze period, invalid period) that limits the progress of the game, the start timing can be changed. In the display start effect of the eighth display segment N8 whose end period is determined, a period for performing the display start effect can be ensured, and the display start effect can be diversified.

Moreover, by associating the length of the frozen state period with the contents of the advantageous section, it is possible to not only just need the frozen state to occur, but also to be interested in the length of the period. becomes.

In particular, by associating the period from the start of the frozen state to the display start timing of the eighth display segment N8 with the contents of the advantageous section, interest in the eighth display segment N8 after entering the frozen state is reduced. This results in an overwhelming increase in performance, and it is possible to expect a great performance effect even with a simple performance such as simply switching the eighth display segment N8 from an unlit state to a lit state.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the frozen state occurs not after all reels have stopped, but while the reels are rotating.

That is, for example, when 6 seconds is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the period from the timing ta5 when one of the reels is rotating to ta7, which is 6 seconds later, is in the freeze state, For example, even if the player attempts to stop the rotating reels by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, the stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at timing ta6, which is slightly earlier than ta7. That is, the section display starts displaying after the period TA1 (5 seconds) has elapsed since the freeze state. All reels stop at timing ta8, medal payout processing is performed at timing ta9 to ta10, and operation of the next game is permitted at timing ta10.

When 11 seconds is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the period from timing tb5 when any reel is rotating to tb7, which is 11 seconds later, is in the freeze state. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at timing tb6, which is slightly earlier than tb7. That is, the section display starts displaying after the period TA2 (10 seconds) has elapsed since the freeze state. All reels stop at timing tb8, medal payout processing is performed at timing tb9 to tb10, and operation of the next game is permitted at timing tb10.

When 16 seconds is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the period from timing tc5 when one of the reels is rotating to tc7, which is 16 seconds later, becomes a freeze state. Even if the user attempts to stop the rotating reel by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, the stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at timing tc6, which is slightly earlier than tc7. That is, the section display starts displaying after the period TA3 (15 seconds) has elapsed since the freeze state. All reels stop at timing tc8, medal payout processing is performed at timing tc9 to tc10, and operation for the next game is permitted at timing tc10.

In this way, the period during which the starting game is in the frozen state can be set at any timing as long as the timing at which operations in the next game are permitted is associated with the contents of the advantageous section.

In particular, by configuring a structure in which the player's operations (in the above example, the stop operation) are restricted when the player enters the freeze state, the player will be able to recognize that the player has entered the freeze state through the restriction of the operation. It can be a matter of recognition. This makes it difficult to understand the start timing of the frozen state compared to the frozen state in which execution of processing unilaterally performed on the gaming machine side, such as payout processing, is restricted as in the third modification. Therefore, since it becomes difficult to understand the start timing, it also becomes difficult to understand the length of the frozen state, and even if the length of the frozen state that has been set is not desirable for the player, it is difficult to understand the length of the frozen state while maintaining expectations. It becomes possible to enjoy the content suggestion of the advantageous section by starting the display on the display.

Further, by creating a frozen state in which the player's operations are restricted as described above, it becomes difficult to know when the frozen state ends. That is, as described above, if a frozen state occurs while the reels are rotating, after the frozen state is released, the rotating reels must be stopped by the player's operation. From the viewpoint that the timing of the stop operation depends on the player, in the case of a configuration in which a freeze state occurs while the reels are rotating, the timing at which operation for the next game is allowed depends not only on the length of the freeze state but also on the length of the game. The timing of the operator's operations also has an effect. By doing the above, it is possible to entertain the user with the content notification of the advantageous section while creating a sense of anticipation beyond the length of the set frozen state, and at the same time, the end of the start timing of the display on the section indicator can be adjusted. It is also possible to have the advantage of delaying the process.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed at a timing different from that during the freeze period. That is, in this modification, the eighth display segment N8 is configured to start displaying at the end of payout, a freeze state is generated in the starting game, and the length of the freeze period is associated with the content of the advantageous section. That's what I do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(a), when the challenge mode is won, a freeze state occurs for a period from ta11 to ta12 (6 seconds, TC1). The reels stop at timing ta13, and medal payout processing is performed during the period (TA) from ta14 to ta15. When the payout of medals ends at timing ta15, display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), when the attack mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period from tb11 to tb12 (11 sec, TC2). The reels stop at timing tb13, and medal payout processing is performed during the period (TA) from tb14 to tb15. When the payout of medals ends at timing tb15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

As shown in FIG. 76(c), when the super attack mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period from tc11 to tc12 (16 seconds, TC3). The reels stop at timing tc13, and medal payout processing is performed during the period (TA) from tc14 to tc15. When the payout of medals ends at timing tc15, display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

In this way, even if the section indicator does not start displaying during the frozen state, it is sufficient that the length of the frozen state period corresponds to the content of the advantageous section, and the length of the frozen state indicates the advantageous section. It is also possible to have the player play a game that predicts the contents of the section. By doing as described above, the degree of freedom in the timing of generating a freeze state can be overwhelmingly improved.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, the mode of the section indicator is different. FIG. 77 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in this modification.

In this modification, a ninth display section N9 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine as a section indicator. Specifically, in the game panel 25 on the front side of the game machine, a ninth display section N9 is provided horizontally adjacent to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R (adjacent to the left of the display window 26L when viewed from the front). The ninth display section N9 is a light emitting section whose front panel is formed of a resin member having light transmittance, and the front panel is integrally formed with the game panel 25. In the ninth display section N9, an LED (not shown) is arranged behind the front panel. The LED is connected to the main control device 101, and the light emission of the LED is controlled by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The LED can emit light in multiple colors, for example, in four colors: blue, green, red, and white. Although this modification also includes the eighth display segment N8, it may be configured to include a ninth display section N9 instead of the eighth display segment N8.

By the way, when the LED of the ninth display section N9 is controlled to emit light, its brightness and the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine may vary depending on the brightness of the surrounding display sections and the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine (for example, the back of the gaming panel 25). The light is emitted so as to be higher than the brightness or illuminance of the light or the brightness or illuminance of the auxiliary display section 65. Therefore, when the ninth display section N9 is controlled to emit light, it becomes more noticeable than the surrounding display sections, and the player is prevented from overlooking it.

In addition, each light emitting color in the ninth display section N9 is set to a color that is easily noticeable in relation to other display sections (gaming panel 25, etc.), and regardless of which color it is emitted, , the function as a section indicator clearly indicating that it is an advantageous section is guaranteed.

FIG. 78 shows a display start mode table in this modification.

In this modification, among the display start modes of the ninth display section N9 as a section display, the display start timing is unified to the end of payout in the starting game. On the other hand, among the display start modes, the emitted light color of the LED of the ninth display section N9 is changed depending on the content of the advantageous section. Specifically, if you win in challenge mode, blue is more likely to be selected among blue, green, and red, if you win in attack mode, green is more likely to be selected, and if you win in super attack mode, red is more likely to be selected. easy to be Therefore, when the ninth display section N9 starts displaying in the starting game, the contents of the advantageous section in which the emitted light is won in the order of red, green, and blue are likely to be advantageous. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the section display and improve the degree of attention to the section display.

The ninth display section N9 as a section indicator emits light in red, green, or blue depending on the content of the advantageous section at the start of display, but from the game following the starting game, During the advantageous section, the emitted light color is unified to white. In other words, the game of predicting the contents of the advantageous section from the display color of the ninth display section N9 is limited to the starting game, and the timing to be watched is concentrated, so that the performance effect is enhanced.

Further, as described above, all of the colors emitted at the start of display are colors that are more conspicuous than the white light emitted during the advantageous section. From this point of view as well, it is possible to attract a high level of interest in the display color at the start of display on the ninth display section N9.

As mentioned above, in suggesting the content of advantageous sections by different starting modes of the section display, the difference in the starting mode is not limited to the difference in display start timing; It may also be configured to suggest the content of the advantageous section from the difference in presentation content (color).

In particular, by configuring each luminescent color to be conspicuous (easily recognized) in relation to other display parts, no matter which luminous color the luminescent color is emitted, it will be in a lighting state during the advantageous section, and it will be lit normally. Even with a section indicator that has relatively low performance elements, such as being turned off during the section, it is possible to expect performance elements while ensuring the function of clearly indicating advantageous sections.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, in a configuration in which the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is varied, the display start mode is varied depending on the game result that triggered the lottery for transition to the advantageous section. FIG. 79 shows an example of a display start mode table in this modification.

For example, in FIG. 79(a), the game result that triggered the lottery to move to the advantageous section, that is, the game result in the game in which the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag was set, was a strong cherry. This shows a display start mode table when there is a display start mode. That is, when the challenge mode is won based on a strong cherry win, the time when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF is selected as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8. Furthermore, if the attack mode is won based on the strong cherry win, the second reel stop OFF operation is selected, and if the super attack mode is won, the first reel stop OFF operation is selected.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the lottery to move to the advantageous section is a weak cherry, as shown in FIG. 79(b), if the challenge mode is won, the first reel stop OFF operation If the attack mode is selected, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is selected, and if the super attack mode is won, the third reel stop OFF operation is selected.

Regarding the strong watermelon and the weak watermelon, the display start mode is determined by a common display start mode table. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79(c), in the challenge mode, the third reel stop ON operation is selected, in the attack mode, the third reel stop OFF operation is selected, and in the super attack mode If so, the end of payout is selected.

Regarding other specific combinations, the display start mode is determined by the display start mode table shown in FIG. 79(d). In this case, in the challenge mode, the time when the start lever 41 is operated is selected, in the attack mode, the time when the first reel is stopped and turned OFF is selected, and in the super attack mode, the time when the payout ends is selected.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a game in which it is possible to predict whether or not there will be a shift to an advantageous section, and the contents of the advantageous section if there is a shift, based on the game result and the display start mode of the section display. I can do it. Specifically, for example, when the "cherry" symbol stops at the lower or upper stage of the left reel 32L, the current game result will be a strong cherry or a weak cherry. In this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped first and the left reel 32L is the first reel, when the left reel 32L is stopped and the eighth display segment N8 lights up, the challenge mode or super attack is activated. It is confirmed that you have won the mode transition lottery. In other words, it is confirmed that it is not in attack mode. You can determine whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry by stopping the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R, and when the "cherry" symbols are aligned and stopped on the active line of the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R, it becomes a triple cherry. If it does, it is a strong cherry, and if it does not stop all at once, it is a weak cherry. For example, if the second reel or the third reel is stopped and it is determined that it is a weak cherry, the eighth display segment N8 is lit when the first reel is stopped OFF. , it is confirmed that the content of this advantageous section is super attack mode. On the other hand, when the second reel or the third reel is stopped and it is determined that it is a strong cherry, in this case, it is determined that the content of the advantageous section is the challenge mode. In other words, from the perspective of the probability of winning the challenge mode, attack mode, etc., it can be said that strong cherries are better for players than weak cherries, but in the above situation, weak cherries are more attractive to players than strong cherries. This is preferable for players, and the image of game results is reversed.

In addition, if the "cherry" symbol stops on the left reel 32L and the 8th display segment N8 does not light up, a strong cherry is won and challenge mode or attack mode is won, a weak cherry is won and attack mode or super attack mode is won. Either you win, you win a strong cherry or a weak cherry, and you don't win the lottery to move to the advantageous section. In this case, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the second reel is stopped and turned off, it is confirmed that the current advantageous section is the attack mode, regardless of whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. On the other hand, if the eighth display segment N8 does not light up when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF, a strong cherry is won and the challenge mode is won, a weak cherry is won and the super attack mode is won, a strong cherry or a weak cherry is won and the advantageous section is entered. You will either not be selected for the transition lottery. In cases where strong cherries and weak cherries can be distinguished from the number of stops on the second reel, if it is determined that it is a strong cherry, it means that you have not won the lottery to move to the advantageous section, or you have won the challenge mode. It will be one of two things. However, in the case of a strong cherry, there is a high possibility of winning the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section, and in this case, there is a high possibility of winning the challenge mode. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a weak cherry, it means that either the lottery to move to the advantageous section has not been won, or the player has won the super attack mode, which has the greatest difference in terms of advantage for the player. situation. However, in the case of a weak cherry, there is a low possibility of winning the lottery for shifting to an advantageous section, and in this case, there is a high possibility that the lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is not won.

In this way, by associating the game result, that is, the stop result with the display start mode of the section display, it is possible to narrow down the winning combinations as each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. From the relationship with the gameplay of 10, it becomes possible to play a game such as predicting the contents of an advantageous section.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, in a predetermined replay of replays (replay results), a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode is performed. FIG. 80(a) shows a part of the winning/losing lottery table for the normal game state and the first RT state in this modification.

In this modification, a prize is established when the index value IV=53 is won as a type of replay combination in the win/fail lottery table in the normal game state and the first RT state, and the first replay or the seventh replay wins. A winning replay role is set. The winning replay combination has the same winning probability regardless of the setting value, and specifically, the winning replay combination has a winning probability of about 1/32000. As described above, when a winning replay combination is achieved, a replay is granted and the next game can be played without the need to insert new medals.

In this modification, the winning replay combination is handled as a specific combination, similar to the strong cherry combination. Therefore, for example, in step S701 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31), if the winning replay combination has been won, an affirmative determination is made that the specific combination has been won, and the process proceeds to the first specific combination processing (step S705) and the like. In the first specific combination processing in this modification, a transition lottery between challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode is also performed based on the winning replay combination.

The probability of winning in the challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode transition lottery based on the winning replay is the same regardless of the setting value. Specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to enter challenge mode is 0% regardless of the setting value, the probability of winning the lottery to enter attack mode is 50% regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the lottery to enter attack mode is 50% regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning the transition lottery is 50% regardless of the setting value. That is, in the normal game state or the first RT state, if the display mode is the normal mode and the winning replay is won, the attack mode or super attack mode is won, and the ratio is 1:1. In this modification, if the player wins the winning replay during the challenge mode, the player will win the super attack mode with a 100% probability.

As mentioned above, when a winning replay combination is achieved, a replay is awarded like other replay combinations. However, compared to other replay combinations, the structure of the bet processing when giving a replay is different. FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing the start waiting process in this modification. The start waiting process is a process started in step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 15), and is mainly a process for setting the number of bets for the game (bet).

In step S3401, it is determined whether the previous game resulted in any replay winnings. If it is a replay win, steps S3402 to S3404 are performed to award a replay. In this case, in this modification, it is determined in step S3402 whether the replay that won in the previous game was a winning replay. If it is not a winning replay, automatic bet processing is performed in step S3403. The automatic bet process is a process in which the number of bets in the previous game is determined and a bet of the same number as the determined number of bets is set. For example, if the previous game was a 3 bet, in step S3403, a process of setting a 3 bet is performed. Furthermore, if the previous game was one bet, one bet is set in step S3403. After executing the process in step S3403, the start waiting process ends.

If it is determined in step S3402 that the previous game was a winning replay combination, then in step S3404, an operation bet flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The operation bet flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the current game is a game for which a replay is granted, and that the replay is not yet granted. In addition, in this modification, when setting the bet flag at the time of operation, the number of bets in the previous game is temporarily stored in a register etc. It is good also as a structure where it is provided.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401, or after executing the process in step S3404, the process advances to step S3405. In step S3405, it is determined whether a bet operation has been made. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the credit input switches 56 to 58 has been operated. If it has not been operated, it remains on standby, and when any of the credit input switches 56 to 58 is operated, an affirmative determination is made in step S3405. Note that, if medals are inserted from the medal slot 45 during the standby period in step S3405, a bet process is performed based on the medal insertion, but a description of this configuration will be omitted.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the process advances to step S3406, and it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned operation bet flag is set. If the bet flag at the time of operation is not set, in step S3407, the number of bets corresponding to the operated credit insertion switch (bet switch) is processed. That is, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, 3 bets are set, when the second credit input switch 57 is operated, 1 bet is set, and when the third credit input switch 58 is operated. In this case, set 2 bets. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3406 that the operation bet flag is set, in step S3408, the same number of bets as the number of bets in the previous game is set as a replay grant. For example, if the previous game was 3 bets, 3 bets are set in step S3408, and if the previous game was 1 bet, 1 bet is set in step S3408. After executing the process of step S3408, the operation bet flag is cleared in step S3409. After executing the process of step S3407 or step S3409, the start waiting process ends.

As described above, the structure of the bet process when a replay is awarded is different between the winning replay and the other replays. For other replays, the same number of bets as the previous game will be automatically set, and for winning replays, the number of bets for the previous game will be set as a trigger when one of the credit input switches 56 to 58 is operated. An equal number of bets will be placed. If the previous game was not a winning replay, automatic bet processing will not be performed and the current game will proceed by operating any of the credit input switches 56 to 58. If you win in the winning replay, the credit input switch will not be processed. In terms of the presence or absence of operations 56 to 58, the operations for advancing the game are the same as in the case of game results other than replay.

FIG. 81 shows the first section display process in this modification.

In step S3501, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the process advances to step S3502, and it is determined whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags are set, the first section display process is ended. If any winning flag is set, the process advances to step S3503.

In step S3503, the winning opportunity of the winning flag that was determined to be affirmative in step S3502 is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the specific combination that triggered the winning of the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is a winning replay. Note that, as described above, since the challenge mode is not won in the winning replay, the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3503 is the case where the attack mode winning flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery in steps S3504 and S3505, and processing for setting it is performed. The processing in steps S3504 and S3505 is similar to the processing in steps S2703 and S2704.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3503 that the winning opportunity is a winning replay, in step S3506, the display start mode of the current eighth display segment N8 is set at the time of bet operation for the next game.

After performing the processing in step S3505 or step S3506, in step S3507, a process to start measuring the number of games AG in an advantageous section is performed, and then the first section display process is ended. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, a process for continuing the section display is performed in step S3508, and then the first section display process is ended. These processes in steps S3507 and S3508 are similar to the processes in steps S2705 and S2706 described above.

Differences in the final timing at which the section display starts displaying due to differences in winning opportunities for advantageous sections will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 82.

FIG. 82(a) shows a case where the winning opportunity in the advantageous section is a specific combination other than the winning replay. All the reels stop at timing ta16, and medals are paid out at timing ta17 to ta18. Then, if the medal payout of the current game (starting game) ends at the timing of ta18, and the bet operation for the next game becomes valid at the timing of ta19, the timing of ta19 is the timing to display the section indicator. Of these, this is the latest timing.

In this way, by configuring the section indicator to be displayed in the starting game before the operation of the next game is allowed, it can be displayed before it is decided whether or not to play the next game. In other words, when deciding whether to end the game at the end of the starting game, the display on the section display has already started, and even though you have won the advantageous section, This prevents the player from ending the game. As already explained, in the display start mode table of the section display, among the set display start modes, the display start mode having the latest timing is the end of payout of ta18.

The bet operation becomes valid at the timing of ta19, and if the bet operation is performed by the timing of ta20, for example, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts based on the start operation (operation of the start lever 41) at the timing of ta21. be done.

On the other hand, if the previous game is a winning replay, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the latest timing for displaying the section display is different. Specifically, when the reels stop at timing tb16, a re-game is awarded instead of medals being paid out. However, since this replay is a winning replay, the operation bet flag is set in the start waiting process (FIG. 80(b)) in the normal process, and the replay is awarded by the bet operation instead of an automatic bet. .

In this case, if a bet operation is made at the timing tb18 from when the bet operation becomes valid at the timing tb17 to the timing tb19 which is the valid period, a replay will be granted and the bet amount from the previous game will be At the same time, the same number of bets as , are set, and the display on the section display starts. Then, when a start operation is performed at timing tb20, rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started.

In this way, when the display of the section display is started based on the winning replay, the display of the section display is started at the time of the bet operation after winning the winning replay. Here, the bet operation after the winning replay prize is an operation for obtaining a replay obtained in the starting game, and can be said to be an operation accompanying the starting game. In other words, even with the above configuration, the effect of displaying the section display in the starting game is ensured.

Further, if the bet operation after winning the winning replay prize is an operation accompanying the starting game in which the winning replay is won as described above, the next game after the starting game is performed by operating the start lever 41. Then, when the display of the section display is started based on the winning replay, the latest display start timing is the timing tb20, which is the start operation of the next game.

As mentioned above, if a small role other than a replay (specific role, payout role) is an opportunity to win an advantageous section, the section display will start displaying before the bet operation of the next game, and the specified replay (winning replay) will be displayed. If it is an opportunity to win an advantageous section, the section display is configured to start displaying by the time the start lever 41 of the next game is operated. In this way, by varying the final timing at which the section display starts displaying, it is possible to greatly diversify the manner in which the section display starts displaying.

Furthermore, in the case of a winning replay, the trigger for awarding a replay based on the winning replay is a bet operation. In other words, it is possible to postpone the starting game by making the game that won the winning replay continue until the player makes a bet operation.

When the winning replay is an opportunity to win an advantageous section, the section indicator is displayed based on the bet operation that is the opportunity for awarding the replay. Normally (if the winning opportunity is due to another minor role, etc.), assuming that the section indicator starts displaying before the bet operation, it is assumed that the winning replay is the trigger for re-playing. When the player makes a bet, it is considered that the player has already given up unless the display of the section indicator starts, and if the display of the section indicator starts in such a situation, it can surprise the player and cause a lot of damage. It is possible to achieve a dramatic effect.

The stop roll of the above-mentioned winning replay may be as follows. Specifically, when the symbol combination set as the winning pattern of the winning replay stops on the active line, a small role that involves other medal payouts (particularly a specific role that triggers a lottery to move to an advantageous section, e.g. A combination of symbols set as a winning mode of a strong watermelon is made to stop on a line different from an effective line. By doing this, it is possible to expect the effect of making it appear as if a small prize winning accompanied by other medal payouts has been established, and the section indicator has not started displaying by the time of the bet operation. Through this, it is possible to increase the effect of making people think that they will not win the lottery for moving to the advantageous section based on the small prize winning accompanied by the other medal payout. As a result of the above, it becomes easier for players to give up on winning the lottery for moving to an advantageous section, and it becomes possible to expect an effect that will surprise and delight the players.

<Modification 9>
In this modification, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and ends, the display end mode of the section display is changed. FIG. 83 shows the first section display process in this modification.

In step S3601, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the same processing as steps S2702 to S2705 described above is performed in steps S3602 to S3605. If the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the process advances to step S3606, and the process of adding the number of advantageous section games AG is performed. That is, in this modification, the management of the number of advantageous section games AG is performed using the section display second process that is started at the start of the game (in the lottery process) rather than the second section display process that is started at the end of the game (in the reel control process). This is done in the first display process. In step S3607, it is determined whether the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit of "1500". If the upper limit has not been reached, in step S3608, a process is performed to continue displaying the eighth display segment N8, and then the first section display process is ended.

In step S3607, if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit value, that is, if it is determined that the forced termination condition for ending the advantageous section in the current game is satisfied, the process advances to step S3609. In step S3609, the number of advantageous section games AG is reset to the initial value (0). Then, in step S3610, a process of setting a forced termination flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The forced termination flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the above-mentioned forced termination conditions have been met.

In step S3611, a display end mode lottery process is performed. In this lottery process, a display end mode table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and the display end mode of the section indicator when the advantageous section ends is determined by lottery. In the display end manner table, as shown in FIG. 84, the display end manner (display end timing) is set to differ depending on the contents of the advantageous section when the forced end condition is satisfied and the set value.

That is, in step S3611, the content of the display mode in the game in which the forced termination condition is satisfied (the game in which the process in step S3611 is performed) is grasped, and if the display mode is challenge mode or attack mode, the section display As the display end mode, the payout end time is set. On the other hand, when the display mode of this game is VB mode or special special zone, when the first reel is stopped OFF, the second reel is stopped OFF, the third reel is stopped OFF, and The payout end time is determined from the set value.

Specifically, when the current game is in VB mode, when the first reel is stopped and turned OFF, setting 2 or higher is selected, and setting 1 is not selected. When the third reel is stopped and turned OFF, a setting of 4 or higher is selected, and a setting of 3 or lower is not selected. Furthermore, when the second reel is stopped and turned off, settings 2, 4, and 6 are more likely to be selected than settings 1, 3, and 5.

If this game is a specialized zone, when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF, a setting of 4 or higher will be selected, and a setting of 3 or lower will not be selected. Only setting 6 is selected when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF. Furthermore, when the first reel is stopped and turned off, settings 1, 3, and 5 are more likely to be selected than settings 2, 4, and 6.

In other words, the display end mode table is determined such that the more advantageous the situation (display mode) at the time when the forced end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied for the player, the easier it is to narrow down the setting values. In other words, if the forced termination condition is met in a situation where the player is in an advantageous situation and there is no upper limit on the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section, and the number of consecutive games can be expected to increase, the forced termination condition will be set as an alternative. It is possible to play a game that allows players to guess values, and it is possible to compensate for the sense of loss caused by the end of an advantageous period when there is still much to come.

After performing the display end mode lottery process in step S3611, the display end mode according to the lottery result is set as the end mode of the current section display in step S3612, and then the first section display process ends. do. In this case, for example, if the stop OFF operation of the first reel is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the stop OFF operation. Further, if the payout end time is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the end of the medal payout.

In the second section display process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 85, it is determined in step S3701 whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the second section display process is immediately terminated, and if it is being displayed, the process advances to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the forced termination flag is set. If it is set, data initialization processing is performed in step S3703, and then the second section display processing is ended. Note that the display of the eighth display segment N8 ends in the end manner set by the processing in steps S3611 and S3612, so when the forced end flag is set, the section display second processing In this case, only data initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step S3702 that the forced termination flag is not set, the process advances to step S3704. The processing from step S3704 to step S3707 is similar to the processing from step S2807 to step S2810.

As described above, in the section display, the display starts when the player moves to an advantageous section where the performance related to press order notification is improved, and the display ends when the advantageous section ends. By changing the display ending mode depending on the situation at the end, it is possible to understand the situation at the end from the section display and to soak in the afterglow of the situation at the end.

In particular, when the conditions for forced termination of an advantageous section are met in an advantageous situation for the player and the advantageous section ends, the set value can be estimated as a type of information that may be beneficial to the player. . In this way, the sense of loss upon forced termination can be reduced, and the more advantageous the conditions for forced termination are to the player, the easier it is to estimate the setting value. It is possible to create a game that is well-balanced between the feeling of loss upon forced termination and the ease of obtaining potentially useful information.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the chance of winning the lottery for transition to an advantageous section is a winning combination with a bonus, the contents of the advantageous section are suggested in the game from the game in which the overlapped combination is won until the bonus is won. Here, changes in the display mode of the section indicator in this embodiment will be explained first.

As mentioned above, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed based on winning a specific combination such as strong cherry or strong watermelon. Further, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is also performed based on winning a combination of a bonus and a strong cherry (particularly a combination of a combination with the first BB). In this embodiment, the display start mode of the section display is changed depending on whether the chance of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is a combination with the first BB. Specifically, if the winning opportunity of the transition lottery is not a combination of winning combinations with the 1st BB, similarly to the first embodiment above, the game in which the specific winning opportunity, which is the winning opportunity, is won is changed to the specific winning combination. The game is set as the start game in which the following is established, and the section display starts displaying before the next game operation is allowed.

On the other hand, if the winning opportunity of the transition lottery is a combination of combinations with the 1st BB, the game in which the 1st BB winning is achieved among the specific winning opportunities is set as the starting game as the game in which the specific winning combination is achieved, The section indicator starts displaying before the next game operation is allowed.

As already explained, the winning pattern of the 1st BB is a so-called missed symbol combination, and if a winning is not achieved in the winning game, the 1st BB winning flag is carried over. Therefore, in the case where a lottery to move to an advantageous section is won due to a winning combination with the 1st BB, the game in which the winning combination is won may be different from the game that becomes the starting game when the winning combination with the 1st BB is established. If you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section due to a winning combination with the 1st BB, the section display will not start displaying in the game where you won the winning combination, and the 1st BB winning will be achieved in the game. The display start of that section display is carried over until

In this embodiment, gameplay is realized using whether or not the display start of the section display is carried over. The processing configuration related to the gameplay will be explained below.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing reel control processing in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, in steps S3801 to S3816, the same processes as steps S401 to S416 described above are performed. Then, in step S3817, special RT state processing is performed, and then the reel control processing is ended. In this embodiment, when the first BB or the second BB is won, the player moves to a special RT state that is different from the first to third RT states that are entered by the promotion replay, fall replay, etc. In the special RT state, the winning probability of a predetermined replay is different from that in the normal gaming state, and specifically, it is higher than in the normal gaming state. The special RT state that shifts based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB ends when the winning of the first BB or the second BB that triggered the shift is established. In addition, in this embodiment, there is also a special RT state to which a transition is made, regardless of whether the first BB or the second BB is won. Special RT state processing is processing for controlling such special RT state.

In the special RT state processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, in step S3901, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S3902 whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the first BB or the second BB has been won in the normal gaming state or the first RT state.

If any BB is won, it is determined in step S3903 whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not the specialized zone winning flag is set. If the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set, and the attack mode winning flag and specialized zone winning flag are also set, in step S3905, a special RT command with super attack mode is sent to the display control device. Set as an output target to 81. The special RT state command with super attack mode is used to make the display control device 81 understand that the transition to the RT state is based on winning the first BB or the second BB, and that the super attack mode has been won. It is a command. More specifically, the special RT state command with super attack mode is to transition to the special RT state based on the first BB win, and to win the lottery for transition to super attack mode and before transition to super attack mode. This is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT command will be described later.

On the other hand, if the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set, and the attack mode winning flag is set but the specialized zone flag is not set, in step S3906, the attack mode A special RT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special RT command with attack mode is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the transition to the RT state is based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and that the attack mode has been won. . In more detail, the special RT state command with attack mode indicates that the state will be shifted to the special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB, that the lottery to shift to attack mode has been won, and that the state has not yet shifted to attack mode. This is a command for the control device 81 to understand. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3903 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S3907. In step S3907, it is determined whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, in step S3908, processing is performed to set a special RT state command with challenge mode as an output target to the display control device 81. The special RT state command with challenge mode is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the transition to the RT state is based on winning the first BB or the second BB, and that the challenge mode is being won. be. More specifically, the special RT state command with challenge mode indicates that the special RT state will be entered based on the 1st BB win, and that the player has won the challenge mode entry lottery and has not yet entered the challenge mode. This is a command for the control device 81 to understand. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S3909. The special RT state command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the state will be shifted to the RT state based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB. More specifically, the special RT state command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the state will be shifted to the special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB, and that the transition lottery such as attack mode has not been won. . The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT status command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3902 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process advances to step S3910. In step S3910, it is determined whether a specific combination has been won in the current game. When it is determined that the specific combination has been won, it is determined in step S3911 whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If it is determined in step S3910 that the specific combination has not been won, or if it is determined that any winning flag is set in step S3911 even if the specific combination has been won, The special RT state processing is then terminated.

On the other hand, if the specific winning combination is won and neither the challenge mode nor the attack mode is won, in step S3912, a special RT state is displayed on the special RT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. A process of inputting "5" as the number of consecutive games is executed. The special RT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of consecutive games in the special RT state that is not based on winning the first BB or the second BB. Note that the number of consecutive games in the special RT state is arbitrary, and may be less than 5 or more than 5. However, it is preferable to set the number of consecutive games in the special RT state in relation to the probability of winning the special replay, which will be explained later.

In the following step S3913, the fake special RT status command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The fake special RT state command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the state will be shifted to the RT state regardless of the winning of the first BB or the second BB. More specifically, the fake special RT state command causes the display control device 81 to understand that the transition to the special RT state is not based on winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and that the transition lottery such as attack mode has not been won. This is a command for The processing of the display control device 81 that receives such a special RT status command will be described later.

After executing any one of steps S3905, S3906, S3908, S3909, and S3913, the process advances to step S3914. In step S3914, processing for storing the current gaming state is executed. Specifically, the process of grasping the current gaming state (normal gaming state or first RT state) and storing the RT setting flag (first RT setting flag) in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 106 if the current gaming state is the first RT state. I do. The RT setting flag stored in such a storage area can be read later. For example, the RT setting flag read from the storage area after the first BB or second BB or after the special RT state ends. It is possible to set the RT state based on.

Then, in step S3915, the stored RT setting flag is cleared, and in step S3916, the fourth RT setting flag is set, and then the special RT state processing is ended. The fourth RT setting flag corresponds to a special RT state. Through the processing of steps S3915 and S3916, the gaming state shifts to a fourth RT state as a special RT state.

Here, the success/failure lottery table in the fourth RT state will be explained with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 shows a winning/failure lottery table for the 4th RT state to which the transition is made based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and FIG. It shows.

In any winning/failure lottery table for the 4th RT state, the winning probability of the specific combination with index value IV = 13 to 20, 32 to 45 and the push order bell of IV = 21 to 28 is different from that in the normal game state and the 1st RT state. The probability of winning is the same. However, in the 4th RT state that shifts based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, even if the specific combination with the index value IV=32 to 45 is won, it does not result in the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. That is, in a situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, a new winning of the first BB or the second BB (duplicate winning of bonuses) is avoided. For the same reason, various bonuses with index values IV=46 to 48 are not won in the 4th RT state based on winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. On that point, in the 4th RT state that is not based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB, if you win with the index value IV = 32 to 45, it will be a duplicate win with the 1st BB or 2nd BB, and if you win with the index value IV = 46 to 48. It is also possible to win various bonuses.

In the fourth RT state, as replays, the winning probability of the normal replay with the index value IV=1 and the winning probability of the special replay with the index values IV=53 and 54 are higher than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state. More specifically, the special replays with index values IV=53 and 54 are replays that win only in the fourth RT state, and the winning probability in other gaming states is zero. Note that it may be configured such that some (with low probability) wins even in other gaming states. In addition, in the fourth RT state, 0 is set for the point values PV of index values IV=2 to 12, and the push order replay corresponding to these index values will not be won.

If you win the special replay 1 with the index value IV=53, you will win the first replay, the ninth replay, and the eleventh to fifteenth replay twice. Also, if you win the special replay 2 with index value IV=54, you will win the first replay and the 11th replay to the 15th replay twice.

In the fourth RT state, the probability of winning with index value IV = 1 is approximately 1/5.3, the probability of winning with index value IV = 53 is approximately 1/43.7, and the probability of winning with index value IV = 53 is approximately 1/43.7. =54, the probability of winning is approximately 1/43.7. Therefore, in the fourth RT state, the total replay probability is higher than in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, and the probability of a losing result is lower.

Incidentally, the replay probability in the fourth RT state is lower than that in the second RT state and the third RT state, and the probability of a wrong result is higher. Therefore, even when reel control is performed to give priority to replay winnings over BB winnings, it is possible to achieve BB winnings relatively smoothly.

Returning to the explanation of the special RT state processing, if it is determined in step S3901 that the state is not the normal gaming state or the first RT state, the process advances to step S3917. In step S3917, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special RT state by determining whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set. If it is not a special RT state, the special RT state processing is immediately terminated. If it is a special RT state, the process advances to step S3918.

In step S3918, it is determined whether either the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. In other words, if the special RT state shifts based on winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB, or if it shifts not based on winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB but then wins the 1st BB or 2nd BB, the state will remain as it is. Special RT state processing ends. If it is determined in step S3918 that none of the BB winning flags is set, then in step S3919 a special RT counter is subtracted. That is, the special RT counter set in step S3912 is decremented by 1 each time the game is played.

In step S3920, it is determined whether the special RT counter has reached "0" based on the processing result of step S3919. If it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined in step S3921 whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. A case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3921 means that although the current special RT state is a special RT state to which the transition was made without being based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB, in the current game in the special RT state, the 1st BB or 2nd BB This means that the challenge mode or attack mode (super attack mode) was won using a specific role that is not a duplicate role. As already explained, when a specific winning combination that is not an overlapping combination with the first BB or the second BB is used as a winning opportunity, the section display starts displaying the game as the starting game.

If it is determined in step S3920 that the special RT counter is "0", or if in step S3921 the section indicator starts displaying with the current game as the starting game, the process advances to step S3922, and the process proceeds to step S3914. Read processing of the RT setting flag stored is performed. Note that if the normal gaming state is determined in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored, and in step S3914, the pre-transition gaming state is is determined to be in the normal gaming state. Then, in step S3923, based on the result of the readout process in step S3922, processing is performed to return to the gaming state before transition to the special RT state. After performing the process of step S3923, the special RT state process ends.

It should be noted that when transitioning to the special RT state, the game state before the transition may not be stored, and the game state may be changed to a uniform gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) at the end of the special RT state. In particular, since the special RT state is configured such that it does not shift during the second to third RT states, there is not much difference in the advantage between the normal gaming state and the first RT state, and even if you return to either of the gaming states, It is thought that the losses incurred by the players are small.

Next, the bonus state processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the bonus state is in effect, and if it is not in the bonus state, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not a CB winning is established. If it is established, a CB setting flag is set in step S4004, and the remaining balance is determined in step S4005. The number of payouts is set to "15". After that, a status command is set in step S4006, and an external signal setting process is performed in step S4007, and then the bonus status process is ended. These processes from step S4001 to step S4007 are similar to the processes from step S601 to step S607 described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S4003, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the first BB or second BB winning has been achieved. If any BB winning has been achieved, the process advances to step S4009 to clear the current RT setting flag. In step S4010, processing is performed to clear the BB winning flag, and in step S4011, processing is performed to set the BB setting flag. Then, in step S4012, the remaining number of payouts is set to "216". Thereafter, in step S4013, a fourth section display process is performed. The fourth section display process is a process related to the display of the section display, the details of which will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S4008 that BB winning has not been established, a carryover command is set in step S4014. Further, if it is determined in step S4001 that the bonus state is in progress, an end determination process is performed in step S4015. After executing the process in step S4013, step S4014, or step S4015, the process advances to step S4006, in the same way as after executing the process in step S4005, and after performing status command setting process and external signal setting process, bonus state Finish the process.

Next, the RT state processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 91.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S4101 whether the fourth RT setting flag is set. If the fourth RT setting flag is set, the RT state processing is immediately terminated. If it is determined in step S4101 that the fourth RT setting flag is not set, the process advances to step S4102, and the same processes as those in steps S501 to S511 described above are performed in steps S4102 to S4112.

That is, the fourth RT setting flag is set, and during the special RT state, the transition to the RT state does not occur until the BB win or the number of consecutive games in the special RT state becomes 0. Specifically, even if the transition roll stops, it does not shift to the first RT state, and it does not win in other promotion replays or fall replays (second replay to fifth replay). It should be noted that if the transition number stops during the special RT state (fourth RT state), a configuration may be adopted in which processing is performed to reset the number to the fourth RT state. In this case, the special RT counter may also be configured to be set to the initial value (5) again.

Next, the section display first process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 92.

In step S4201, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, it is determined in step S4202 whether a standby period flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The waiting period flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that although the lottery for moving to the advantageous section has been won, the start of display on the section display has been carried over due to the carryover of the BB win. . If the waiting period flag is set, the first section display process is ended. That is, in a situation where the standby period flag is set, the first section display process does not perform the process for starting display on the section display.

If a negative determination is made in step S4202, it is determined in step S4203 whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags are set, the first section display process is ended. If any winning flag is set, the process advances to step S4204, and it is determined whether the first BB winning flag is set. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S4204 means that in the current game, the lottery to move to the advantageous section is won, and the chance of winning is a combination with the first BB.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the configuration is such that the combination of the winning combination with the 2nd BB and the single winning combination of the 2nd BB (IV=47) will not win the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, in step S4204, only the presence or absence of the 1st BB winning flag is determined. Determine. In the case of a configuration in which it is possible to win the transition lottery to an advantageous section even with a combination of combinations with the second BB or a single combination of the second BB, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the presence or absence of the second BB winning flag is also determined in step S4204.

If a negative determination is made in step S4204 and the winning opportunity is not a duplicate combination, then in steps S4205 to S4207, similarly to steps S2703 to S2705, the display start mode of the section display is set, and the continuation of the advantageous section is set. After performing a process to start counting the number of games, the first section display process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4204 and the winning opportunity is a duplicate combination, a waiting period flag is set in step S4208, and then the first section display process is ended. Through this process, an affirmative determination will be made in step S4202 from the next game onwards.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, a process to continue the display is performed in step S4209, and then the first section display process is ended. The processing in step S4209 is similar to the processing in step S2706.

Next, the fourth section display process executed in step S4013 of the bonus state process (FIG. 90) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93.

In step S4301, it is determined whether the above-mentioned waiting period flag is set. The case where the waiting period flag is not set is, for example, when the first BB or the second BB is won while the section display is displayed (during the advantageous section), or when the current bonus is the second BB. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S4301, and the fourth section display process is ended. If the standby period flag is set, the process advances to step S4302 and the standby period flag is cleared.

Then, in step S4303, the section display starts displaying. In other words, if the waiting period flag is set, the section display will start displaying in the fourth section display process performed based on the 1st BB winning, and the section display will continue until the 1st BB winning is achieved. The display start of the container is carried over. In step S4304, processing to start measuring the number of games in the advantageous period AG is performed. This process is similar to step S4207 and the like. In other words, when the waiting period flag is set, the start of measuring the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section is also carried over until the first BB winning is achieved. After performing the process in step S4304, the fourth section display process ends.

The flow of the special RT state will be explained with reference to FIG. 94.

In the normal section, if a stop roll that results in a weak watermelon win appears, for example, (1) the current game is a specific role that is not an overlapping role with BB (1st BB or 2nd BB), and the transition to an advantageous section occurs. (2) A case where the current game is a specific role that is not an overlapping role with BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and a case where the player has not won the lottery to move to an advantageous area; (3) This time. A case where the game is a combination with BB (1st BB) and the lottery to move to an advantageous section is won; (4) This game is a combination with BB (1st BB or 2nd BB), and There are several possible cases in which the player has not won the lottery for moving to an advantageous section.

In the case of (1) above, the game in which the stop result that results in the weak watermelon winning combination appears is set as the starting game, and the display on the section display is started. On the other hand, in cases (2) to (4) above, in a game in which a stop result resulting in the weak watermelon win appears, the section display does not start displaying. In these cases (2) to (4), the state shifts to the special RT state. However, in cases (3) and (4), it is a special RT state in which winning a BB prize is the termination condition, and in case (2), the termination condition is the completion of the maximum number of consecutive games of 5. This is a special RT state. In any case, during the special RT state, the section indicator does not start displaying, the replay winning probability is higher than that, and the expectation of BB winning or advantageous section winning is maintained.

In the lottery process of each game in the special RT state, if there is no win at any index value and the result is a loser, it is possible to establish a winning BB prize. In this case, if the display of the section indicator starts with the winning of the BB prize, it will be determined that the case of (3) above is the case, and if the display of the section indicator does not start with the winning of the BB prize, the case of (4) above will occur. It is determined that it was. On the other hand, in case (2) above, the special RT state ends when the maximum number of games to continue in the special RT state is played. In this case, the section indicator does not start displaying either.

When the special RT state occurs as described above, the replay probability increases. Most of the replays won during the special RT state are normal replays, and special replays 1 or 2 are rarely won. As already explained, special replay 1 is a combination of the 1st replay, 9th replay, and 11th replay to 15th replay, and special replay 2 is a combination of the 1st replay and 10th replay to 15th replay. This is a duplicate combination in the 15th replay.

As shown in FIG. 95, in each of the 9th replay to the 15th replay, replay is given as a bonus, but the stop results are different. In addition, in the following explanation, all prize winning modes are explained on the premise that the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line in a 3-bet game.

Specifically, in the ninth replay, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R A winning mode is set in which a winning is achieved when the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the active line. The 10th replay is a "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, a "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R, or A winning mode is set in which a winning is established when the "white bell" symbol stops on the active line. In the 11th replay, the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "1st Replay" symbol or "2nd Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R are A winning mode is set in which a winning is achieved by stopping on an active line. The 12th replay includes the "1st replay" symbol or "2nd replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "1st replay" symbol or "2nd replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" on the right reel 32R. A winning mode is set in which a winning is established when the symbol stops on an active line. In these 9th re-games to 12th re-games, even if you aim for the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "Black BAR" symbol will not stop on any reel, or will be in a straight line even if it stops. It is a replay game in which a replay prize is established when the "black BAR" symbols are aligned on the line and the stop roll does not stop, and as a whole, a win is established when the black BAR symbol is not stopped.

More specifically, for example, in the 9th replay, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 19th "1st replay" symbol on the left reel 32L will be stopped in the upper row. Then, the 18th "Black BAR" symbol stopped in the middle row. Furthermore, when the 9th "Second Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle row, the 8th "Black BAR" symbol is stopped in the lower row. Then, when the sixth "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower row, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the middle row. In this case, the "Black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle row, the lower row, and the middle row, and the "Black BAR" symbol is tenpai on the middle line L2 between the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, and the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. In this case, the "Black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tenpai line, resulting in a stop roll (left/right middle row tenpai miss).

Also, in the 10th replay, if you aim at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop the stop operation, if you stop the 19th "1st replay" symbol on the left reel 32L in the upper row, the 18th The "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row. Furthermore, when the seventh "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle row, the eighth "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the upper row. Then, when the fifth "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower row, the seventh "Black BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper row. In this case, the "Black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, upper, and upper rows, and the "Black BAR" symbol is tenpai on the upper line L1 on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L In this case, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the relevant tenpai line, resulting in a stop roll (middle/right upper row tenpai miss).

In the 11th re-game, if you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop the stop operation, if you stop the 20th "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L in the upper row, the 18th "Black" symbol will appear. BAR” symbol stops at the bottom. In addition, on the middle reel 32M, the eighth "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row. When the 6th "1st Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped in the lower row, the 7th "Black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row. In this case, the "Black BAR" symbol stops at the bottom, middle, and middle rows from the left reel 32L, and the "Black BAR" symbol is tenpai on the middle line L2 on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L , the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tenpai line, resulting in a stop roll (middle/right middle row tenpai miss).

In the 12th replay, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, if you stop the 19th "1st Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L in the upper row, the 18th " The "Black BAR" pattern stops in the middle row. Furthermore, when the 9th "Second Replay" of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle row, the 8th "Black BAR" symbol is stopped in the lower row. Then, on the right reel 32R, the 7th or 9th "Black BAR" symbol stops at the lower row. In this case, the "Black BAR" symbol stops at the middle, lower, and lower (upper) rows from the left reel 32L, and the "Black BAR" symbol is tenpied on the lower line L3 on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, and On the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the relevant tenpai line, resulting in a stop roll (middle/right lower tenpai miss).

In the 13th replay, the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "1st Replay" symbol or "2nd Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. A winning mode is set in which a winning is achieved. In particular, the winning mode of the 13th replay is that when you perform a stop operation aiming at the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "Black BAR" symbol will stop on the upper and lower rows of the left reel 32L, and the middle Although the "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the reel 32M, the "Black BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R, and the "Black BAR" symbol is tenpai on the lower right line L4 and the upper right line L5. The black BAR double tenpai is set as the winning mode of the stop roll that results in a miss.

In the 14th replay, you win when the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. A winning mode is set in which the following is achieved. In particular, the winning mode of the 14th replay is that when you perform a stop operation aiming at the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "Black BAR" symbol will stop on the upper and lower rows of the left reel 32L, and the middle The "Black BAR" symbol stops on the middle row of reel 32M, the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the upper row of the right reel 32R, and the "Black BAR" symbol does not stop on the lower row, and the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the right-up line L5. ” A winning pattern is set in which the symbols come to a stop and the black BAR singles come to a stop.

In the 15th replay, the winning mode is such that a winning is achieved when the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. It is set. In particular, the winning mode of the 15th re-game is that when you perform a stop operation aiming at the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "Black BAR" symbol will stop on the upper and lower rows of the left reel 32L, and the middle The "Black BAR" symbol stops on the middle row of reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol also stops on the upper and lower rows of the right reel 32R, and the "Black BAR" symbols are aligned on the lower right line L4 and the upper right line L5. The winning mode is set as the winning mode of the black bar tenpai.

Incidentally, special replay 1 and special replay 2 both include the first replay as a winning combination. As already explained (as shown in FIG. 11), the first replay is the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M. A winning mode is set in which a winning is established when a symbol, a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol, or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on an active line. In this case, in the first replay, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the 20th "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped on the upper row, 18 The th "Black BAR" symbol stops at the bottom row. Furthermore, when the 9th "Second Replay" of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle row, the 8th "Black BAR" symbol is stopped in the lower row. Then, when the fifth "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped at the lower row, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper row. In this case, the "Black BAR" symbol stops at the lower, lower, and upper rows from the left reel 32L, and the "Black BAR" symbol is tenpai on the lower line L3 on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R In this case, the "Black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tenpai line, resulting in a stop roll (left/middle/lower tenpai miss).

Special replay 1 and special replay 2 are push order combinations in which winning combinations differ depending on the stop order. However, no matter which role wins, the bonus given is replay, and the advantage for the player remains the same. In other words, although the stop result differs depending on the stop order, the profit obtained by the player does not increase or decrease.

FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established.

If you win special replay 1, if you stop each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the first stop order of "left" → "middle" → "right", the first replay prize will be established, In this case, the stopping numbers will stop when the "replay" symbols are aligned on the downward-sloping line L4. Furthermore, even if the game is stopped in the second stopping order of "left" → "right" → "middle", the first replay winning is achieved and the "replay" symbols are aligned on the downward-sloping line L4 and the game stops. Even if you perform a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, a prize will be won if the stop roll is off the left/middle/lower tenpai as described above.

On the other hand, if the game is stopped in the third stop order of "middle" -> "left" -> "right", a winning of any one of the 9th re-game, the 11th re-game, and the 13th re-game will be achieved. In this case, if you aim at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop the operation, any of these 9th replay, 11th replay, and 13th replay will miss the black BAR tenpai (black A winning is established when a stop roll results in BAR double tenpai (missing). More specifically, when the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M, which is first stopped, the 11th re-game or the 13th re-game can win, but the 9th re-game can no longer win. In this case, when the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the lower row of the left reel 32L, the 11th replay win may be achieved, but the 13th replay win will not be achieved, and the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the middle row of the right reel 32R. When the number stops and the 11th re-game winning is established, the number of stops will be out of the middle tenpai of the middle/right middle row. In the case where the "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel 32M, if the "Black BAR" symbol stops in the upper row of the left reel 32L, the 13th replay prize can be established, and the 11th replay prize of the person who can win is established. When the "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row on the right reel 32R and the 13th replay win is established, the black BAR double tenpai on the downward right line L4 (and the upward right line L5) will be stopped. . On the middle reel 32M that is first stopped, if the "Black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row and the "Black BAR" symbol stops in the lower row, the 9th replay win may be achieved, but the 11th replay win The 13th re-game winning will no longer be possible. In this case, even if you perform a stop operation on the left reel 32L and right reel 32R while aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the stop result will be that the left and right middle numbers are off. In other words, no matter which re-game winning is achieved, even if you aim at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop the operation, the "black BAR" symbols will not stop on a straight line. , the result is a stop roll that misses the black BAR tenpai. In other words, in this case, by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and performing a stop operation, it is possible to make a stop result that is a black BAR double tenpai miss, and also a black bar tenpai. It is possible to make a stop result that is a miss appear, and if the eye press operation is accurate, a replay prize is established when a stop result becomes a miss for the black BAR double tenpai.

In special replay 1, if the game is stopped in the fourth stop order of "middle" → "right" → "left", a winning is achieved in any of the 10th replay, 11th replay, and 14th replay. In this case, if you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and perform a stop operation, the "Black BAR" symbols on the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R will align and stop at the upward-sloping line L5. Then, as the 14th re-game prize, the black BAR singles are all stopped.

If the game is stopped in the fifth stop order of "right" → "left" → "middle", a winning of any one of the 9th re-game, the 12th re-game, and the 13th re-game will be achieved. In this case, as in the case of the third stopping order, if the stopping operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stopping result will be that the black BAR is out of tenpi. If the game is stopped in the sixth stopping order of "right" → "middle" → "left", a winning in any of the 9th replay, 12th replay, and 15th replay will be achieved. In this case, when a stop operation is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a stop roll of double black BAR will be made as the 15th re-game win.

In the case of special replay 2, the first replay winning is achieved in both the first stop order and the second stop order, and as in special replay 1, the "replay" symbols are aligned on the downward-sloping line L4 and the game stops. In this case as well, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped while aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a winning is established when the stop roll of the black BAR is off. In the case of the third stop order, unlike special replay 1, a winning is achieved in either the 10th replay, the 11th replay, or the 14th replay, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a "black BAR". ” If you aim at the symbol and perform a stop operation, you will receive a stop roll of black BAR singles as the 14th replay prize. In the case of the fourth stop order, unlike the special replay 1, winning is achieved in any of the 10th replay, 11th replay, and 13th replay. However, in this case as well, if you perform a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop result will be that the black BAR double tenpai is off.

In the case of the 5th stop order, unlike special replay 1, a winning is achieved in any of the 10th replay, 12th replay, and 15th replay, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a "black BAR". ” When you aim at the symbol and perform a stop operation, you will receive a stop roll of double black BAR as the 15th re-game win. In the case of the 6th stop order, unlike special replay 1, a winning is achieved in any of the 10th replay, 12th replay, and 13th replay, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a "black BAR". ” If you aim at the symbol and perform the stop operation, you will get a stop result that misses the black BAR double tenpai.

In the present embodiment, the content of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is suggested by utilizing the difference in the stop result depending on the stop order of special replays 1 and 2 that are won during such a special RT state. FIG. 97 shows the push order processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the push order process is a process (FIG. 37) that is executed in step S711 of the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31) in the main control device 101.

The push order processing in this embodiment is generally the same as the push order processing in the first embodiment, and the difference is that when the current push order is the special replay 1 or 2 winning It is processing. That is, the processing from step S4401 to step S4422 is similar to the processing from step S1201 to step S1222 described above, and depending on the relationship between the winning push order combination and the display mode (whether or not the condition for press order notification is met), It is determined whether or not to notify the press order. If the press order is to be notified, the instruction monitor 68 notifies the press order and outputs a press order notification command to the display control device 81. Note that the processing from step S4401 to step S4422 is processing that can cause a change in the degree of advantage for the player due to press order notification.

In the pressing order processing in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S4419 that it is not a promotion replay of any kind, nor is it a pressing order bell, the process proceeds to step S4423. In step S4423, it is determined whether it is special replay 1 or 2. If it is neither special replay 1 nor special replay 2, the push order process is ended. If it is either special replay 1 or 2, the press order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4424, and then the press order processing is ended.

That is, although the press order notification when winning special replays 1 and 2 is executed regardless of the relationship with the display mode (whether or not the conditions for press order notification are met), Press order notification is not performed, and only press order notification is performed by the display control device 81.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the press order notification process in this embodiment. As already explained, the press order notification process is a process (FIG. 45) that is executed in step S1903 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) in the sub-side display control device 81.

The process for notifying the press order is generally the same as the process for notifying the press order of the first embodiment, and the difference is that the process when the current press order combination is a special replay 1 or 2 win. It is. Specifically, in steps S4501 to S4513, as in steps S2001 to S2013 above, depending on the relationship between the winning push order combination and the display mode (whether or not the condition for press order notification is satisfied) It is determined whether or not to perform press order notification, and if press order notification is to be performed, a press order notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65.

In the push order notification process in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S4512 that it is neither a promotion replay of any kind nor a push order bell, the process advances to step S4514. In step S4514, it is determined whether it is special replay 1 or 2. If it is neither special replay 1 nor special replay 2, the pressing order notification process is immediately terminated. If it is either special replay 1 or 2, special RT notification processing is executed in step S4515, and then press order notification processing is ended.

The special RT notification process in step S4515 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 99.

In step S4601, it is determined whether a special RT command with super attack mode has been received. As already explained, when the display control device 81 receives a new command in step S1701 of the effect setting process (FIG. 42), the display control device 81 stores the received command in the command storage area of the RAM 183 in step S1702. Perform processing. In step S4601, by checking the command storage area, it can be determined whether the above-described special RT status command has been received. Note that in the following process, the command storage area is similarly checked in the process of determining whether or not a predetermined command has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command with super attack mode is a command set to be output in step S3905 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). This command is a command indicating that the state is to be shifted to the special RT state based on the winning of the first BB, and that the super attack mode has been won and is in the state before the shift.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the above command has been received, then in step S4602, a press order notification effect is performed in which the black BAR is double aligned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the sixth stop order of "right" → "middle" → "left" is notified. Further, if the current game result is special replay 2, the fifth stop order of "right" → "left" → "middle" is notified. After performing the process of step S4602, the special RT notification process ends.

In this case, as a push order notification effect, in addition to the notification of each stop order described above, a notification to the effect that a stop operation is to be performed aiming at each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R with the "black BAR" is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 100(a), on the auxiliary display section 65, the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped is displayed with numbers in association with the positional relationship of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. At the same time, symbols to aim for are displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In Figure 100(a), the number "3" and the character "Black BAR" are displayed on the left, the number "1" and the character "Black BAR" are displayed in the middle, and the number "2" is displayed on the right. and the "Black BAR" character are displayed, and the stop order this time is "Middle" → "Right" → "Left". It shows what you should aim for the pattern. Furthermore, the number in the middle and the character "Black BAR" are highlighted by the boy holding them up, making it easy to understand that the stop operation should be performed first.

Incidentally, in this case, although the auxiliary display section 65 performs the press order notification effect, the instruction monitor 68 does not notify the press order. This indicates that the current press order notification performance is not a press order notification performance for causing a change in the player's advantage. In other words, in the case of a press order notification effect for causing a change in the player's advantage, the press order notification is always generated by the instruction monitor 68.

If it is determined in step S4601 that a special RT command with super attack mode has not been received, the process advances to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether a special RT status command with attack mode has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command with attack mode is a command set to be output in step S3906 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). This command is a command indicating that the state is to shift to the special RT state based on the winning of the first BB, and that the state is the state before the shift when the attack mode is won.

If it is determined in step S4603 that the above command has been received, then in step S4604, a press order notification effect is performed in which all black BAR singles are available. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the fourth stop order of "middle" → "right" → "left" is notified. Further, if the current game result is special replay 2, the third stop order of "middle" → "left" → "right" is notified. After performing the process in step S4604, the special RT notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S4603 that a special RT command with attack mode has not been received, the process advances to step S4605. In step S4605, it is determined whether a special RT status command with challenge mode has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command with challenge mode is a command set to be output in step S3908 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). This command is a command indicating that the state is to be shifted to the special RT state based on the winning of the first BB, and that the state is the state before the shift when the challenge mode has been won.

If it is determined in step S4605 that the above command has been received, notification lottery processing 1 is executed in step S4606. The notification lottery process 1 is a lottery process in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the press order notification effect when the special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, and the winning probability is set to the first probability (80%). It is. In this case, a lottery table with the first probability is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183, and lottery processing is performed.

If it is determined in step S4605 that the special RT command with challenge mode has not been received, the process advances to step S4607. In step S4607, it is determined whether a special RT command has been received.

As already explained, the special RT command is a command set to be output in step S3909 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). This command is a command that indicates that the state is to be shifted to a special RT state based on winning the first BB or the second BB, and that the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like has not been won.

If it is determined in step S4607 that the above command has been received, notification lottery processing 2 is executed in step S4608. The notification lottery process 2 is a lottery process in which it is determined whether or not to execute the press order notification effect when the special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, and the winning probability is a second probability (20%) that is lower than the first probability. ). In this case, a lottery table with the second probability is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and lottery processing is performed.

The case where it is determined in step S4607 that the above command has not been received is a case where the current special RT is not based on the first BB or the second BB, and a fake special RT command has been received. If a fake special command has been received, notification lottery processing 3 is executed in step S4609. The notification lottery process 3 is a lottery process in which it is determined whether or not to execute the press order notification effect when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won. This is a process set to a probability (5%). In this case, a lottery table with the third probability is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and lottery processing is performed.

After executing any of the processes in step S4606, step S4608, and step S4609, it is determined in step S4610 whether or not a prize has been won in each of the above notification lottery processes. If the winner has not been won in the notification lottery process, the special RT notification process is immediately ended. In this case, even if special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won, the press order notification effect is not performed, and for example, when a stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, the first replay win is established. In this case, even special replay 1 and special replay 2 cannot be distinguished from a normal replay with index value IV=1.

In step S4610, if it is determined that the player has won in each of the notification lottery processes described above, in step S4611, a press order notification effect is performed in which the black BAR double tenpai is out. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the current game result is special replay 1, the third stop order is "middle" → "left" → "right", or "right" → "left". →Notify the fifth stop order of “medium”. Also, if the current game result is Special Replay 2, the fourth stop order is "Middle" → "Right" → "Left", or the sixth stop order is "Right" → "Middle" → "Left". inform. After performing the process of step S4611, the special RT notification process ends.

The relationship between the pressing order notification effect when winning special replay 1 or special replay 2 and the contents of the advantageous section will be explained with reference to FIG. 100(b).

As a result of performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the press order notification effect, you will win a replay prize (special replay 1 or special replay 2) when the stop roll results in a double black bar. If any one of the winnings) is established, it is confirmed that the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB, and that after the first BB, the mode will shift to the super attack mode. As shown in FIG. 61, the combination with the second BB is set so that it will not win the transition lottery to the advantageous section, and the situation in which the special RT command with super attack mode is set to be output in step S3905 is as follows. This is a case where the overlapping combination with the first BB is the winning opportunity for the lottery to move to the advantageous section. Therefore, when the black BAR double alignment is stopped by operating in the stop order according to the push order notification effect, it is a special RT state based on the winning of the 1st BB between the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and also in the super attack mode. This shows that he has also won the lottery to move to .

As a result of performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the press order notification effect, you will win a replay prize (Special Replay 1 or Special Replay 2) when the stop result is a black BAR single. If any one of the winning prizes) is established, it is confirmed that the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB, and that after the first BB, the mode will shift to the attack mode. Similarly to the above, out of the first BB and the second BB, a combination with the second BB does not win the lottery for transition to the attack mode. Therefore, the situation in which the special RT command with attack mode is set to be output in step S3906 is a case where the overlapping combination with the first BB is an opportunity to win the lottery to move to the advantageous section.

As a result of performing a stop operation aiming at the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the push order notification effect, you will win a replay prize (Special Replay 1 or Special Replay 2) when the stop roll is out of Black BAR double tenpai. If any of the following (winning a prize) is established, the current special RT state is (1) a special RT state based on the 1st BB and transitioning to challenge mode after the 1st BB, (2) a special RT based on the 1st BB. (3) A special RT state based on the 2nd BB, (4) A special RT state not based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning, Either.

However, due to the difference in the winning probability of each of the above notification lottery processes, if a replay prize is established with the stop roll of the black BAR double tenpai, then the case where the push order notification effect is performed after the notification lottery process 1, that is, the above ( Case 1) is most likely to be the case, and case (2) or (3) is the next most likely to be the case where the press order notification effect is performed through the notification lottery process 2.

Furthermore, it is possible to predict which case will occur based on the game stop result that triggered the transition to the special RT state. For example, if a stop roll that results in a middle bell appears and the transition to the special RT state occurs, the middle bell with index value IV = 19, the middle bell with index value IV = 44, 45, 1 or 2. The transition to the special RT state is based on either of these. In the case of index value IV = 44 and middle bell duplication 1, there is a 90% probability that you will win Challenge Mode, a 10% probability that you will win Super Attack Mode, you will not win Attack Mode, and you will not be able to move to any mode. There is no possibility that the candidate will not be elected. Further, in the case of index value IV=45 and middle bell duplication 2, no transition to any mode is achieved. Therefore, when a stop result that results in a middle bell winning appears and the game transitions to the special RT state, the pressing order notification effect of all black BAR singles indicating the winning of the attack mode will not occur.

In addition, when a stop result that results in a middle bell prize appears and the transition to the special RT state occurs, if the index value IV = 44, the special RT command with challenge mode will be received with a 90% probability, and the special RT No commands are received. If the index value IV=44, only special RT commands are received. In the case where the transition to the special RT state is made with the index value IV=19, a fake special RT command is received.

Then, when a stop roll that results in a middle bell prize appears and the transition to the special RT state occurs, aim for the "Black BAR" symbol according to the push order notification effect, and if the stop roll that is off the black BAR tenpi occurs, ( 1) A case where the 1st BB and challenge mode are won with index value IV = 44, (2) a case where the 2nd BB is won with index value IV = 45, or (3) a case where neither is won. Either it is based on a fake special RT command, or it is based on a fake special RT command. However, the probability of winning the notification lottery in these cases (1) to (3) is 80%, 20%, and 5%, respectively, and it can be predicted that case (1) is the most likely. can. In addition, case (3) is based on the premise that the middle bell does not change to any of the modes that occur in 10% of winnings, so even if it is won in the notification lottery, the index value IV = This is 0.5% of the chance of winning on the 19th, which is extremely low.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

During the carryover state of the 1st BB or 2nd BB, the execution of the lottery to move to an advantageous section such as attack mode is restricted, and the game result that triggered the carryover state is used to enter the advantageous section. When the transition lottery is won, the display start of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is delayed until the bonus is won. By doing this, in a configuration in which a transition lottery to an advantageous section is performed using an overlapping role of a bonus and a small role, even if the display of the eighth display segment N8 does not start in the winning game, the transition lottery can be performed. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation about being selected.

However, by doing the above, there will be more opportunities to limit the transfer lottery to the advantageous section, and for example, even if a specific winning combination is won during the carryover state, the transfer lottery will not be held, so the carryover state will be limited. This can be thought of as a situation where expectations for the advantageous section are lowered, and this can also be said to be an unfavorable situation for the player. Therefore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the content of the lottery for transition to an advantageous section that was carried out based on the game result that triggered the transition to the carryover state is announced using the stop roll of the special replay during the carryover state. , the structure suggested. By doing this, even during the carryover state, it is possible to have the player play the game while having a sense of expectation for the advantageous section, and it is possible to improve interest.

Moreover, the carryover state is basically a state that shifts based on a bonus win, and if you win the lottery to move to an advantageous section with a specific combination that does not overlap with the bonus win, the carryover state will be used as the section indicator in the game. The display of the eighth display segment N8 is started. Therefore, for example, when a stop roll that results in a special win such as a strong watermelon appears, if the display on the section display has not started, it is a small win that does not overlap with the bonus, and it will not be won in the transfer lottery. Either there is an overlap with the bonus and the player does not win the transition lottery, or there is an overlap with the bonus and the player wins the transition lottery. In this way, we have a bonus overlapping role and a bonus non-overlapping role, and in both cases, we have a configuration in which a lottery is performed to move to an advantageous section, and the display start timing of the section display is set as described above to determine whether the bonus overlaps or not. If the configuration is made to vary depending on the winning combination, the patterns of the winning combination and whether or not the section display starts displaying will be diversified, and it will be possible to significantly improve the gameplay.

In particular, for example, Strong Watermelon overlap 1, which is a role that overlaps with the bonus, and Strong Watermelon, which is a small role that does not overlap with the bonus, have the same stop roll, so Strong Watermelon overlap 1 and Strong Watermelon In these winning games, it is difficult to determine which outcome will result. This makes it possible to subsequently determine not only whether or not a carryover state will occur, but also the start of display on the section display.

For example, when comparing a strong watermelon and a weak watermelon as a lottery for transition to an advantageous section, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to an advantageous zone is higher for a strong watermelon than for a weak watermelon, regardless of whether or not it overlaps with the 1st BB. High (Figure 61). Therefore, when comparing the case where a strong watermelon stop roll appears and the section indicator does not start displaying, and the case where a weak watermelon stop roll appears and the section indicator does not start displaying, the former is better. However, it can be determined that there is a high possibility that the situation is being carried over.

Further, for example, regarding strong watermelons and weak watermelons, the ratio of whether or not they overlap with the first BB is higher for strong watermelons than for weak watermelons (FIG. 61). Specifically, when a strong watermelon stop roll appears, about a quarter of the time overlaps with the 1st BB, whereas when a weak watermelon stop roll appears, about 30 minutes overlap. 1 is an overlap with the first BB. Therefore, even if you compare the case where a strong watermelon stop roll appears and the section indicator does not start displaying, and the case where a weak watermelon stop roll appears and the section indicator does not start displaying, the former It can be determined that there is a higher possibility of the carryover state occurring.

During the carryover state, it is possible to win special replays 1 and 2, and the contents of the advantageous section are announced and suggested at the stop roll of special replays 1 and 2. Specifically, when special replays 1 and 2 are won, when a press order notification is performed for the stop order that results in double black BARs, it will be announced that you have won the lottery to enter super attack mode, and the black When the push order announcement of the stop order that will result in all BAR singles is performed, it will be announced that you have won the lottery to move to attack mode, and when the push order announcement of the stop order that will result in the black BAR being out of tenpai is performed. , it is suggested that you have won the lottery to enter challenge mode. In this way, during the carryover state where the display on the section display has not yet started, on the premise that the player has a sense of expectation for the transfer lottery to the advantageous section, the transfer lottery that is of interest to the player can be adjusted. If the content is performed using a push-order notification effect, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the push-order notification effect.

Even if these black BAR press order notification effects occur, unless a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding stop number will not appear. Therefore, when trying to understand and predict the content of the advantageous section from the relationship with the stop result, it is necessary to challenge the "black BAR" symbol to the target, which improves the gameplay. In other words, you won the lottery to enter attack mode etc. because you aimed at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stopped the "black BAR" symbol at the desired position. Even from this impression (the impression that if you do not aim for it, you will not win the transfer lottery), it is possible to expect active participation in the game.

In special replays 1 and 2, although the stop result differs depending on the stop order, the benefit obtained is a replay regardless of the stop order, and it can be said that the press order notification performance does not affect the player's profits. Therefore, consistency with performing the push order notification effect is ensured in the section where execution of the transition lottery to an advantageous section in which the degree of advantage is changed by press order notification such as a press order bell is restricted.

Further, special replays 1 and 2 are replays that do not involve transition of the RT state, like other promoted replays. Therefore, it can be said that this result does not change not only the privilege of replaying that is granted, but also the advantage of the subsequent gaming state, and it is more consistent with the above-mentioned restriction on the transfer lottery to the advantageous section. Guaranteed.

When special replays 1 and 2 are performed to notify the press order, the press order is not notified on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side, but only on the auxiliary display section 65 on the sub side. In other words, when press order notification that is related to the player's profits is performed, the press order notification on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side is always performed. By doing this, it is made clear that if, for example, a game hall manager wants to monitor the relationship between the stop order and the granted benefits, all he has to do is monitor the instruction monitor 68. , the degree of freedom in presentation of the press order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 side is greatly improved.

Special replays 1 and 2 in which the push order notification effect may occur are game results that do not trigger a lottery to move to an advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible for the user to genuinely enjoy the pressing order notification effect without giving a negative impression that the transfer lottery is restricted in the carryover state.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the structure of the special replay that can be won during the special RT state is different. FIG. 101 is a winning/failure lottery table for a special RT state that transitions based on winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB in this modification, and FIG. This is a lottery table.

In this modification, special replays include a special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the 9th to 13th replays with the index value IV=53, and the 1st replay, the 1st replay, and the 13th replay with the index value IV=54. Special replay 4 consisting of 9th replay to 12th replay and 14th replay, and special replay consisting of 1st replay, 9th replay to 12th replay and 15th replay with index value IV = 55. 5 is set.

The winning pattern for the 1st re-game and the 9th re-game to the 15th re-game is as described above. In the 1st re-game, winnings are mainly achieved with stop rolls that are downward-sloping replays, and in the 9th re-play, Game ~ In the 12th re-game, a winning is established when the black BAR is out of tenpai, and in the 13th re-game, a winning is established when the black BAR is out of double tenpai, and in the 14th re-game, A winning is established when the black BAR singles are aligned, and a winning is established when the black BAR doubles are aligned in the 15th re-game. Furthermore, the winning probability for Special Replays 3 to 5 is approximately 1/65.5 each.

As shown in FIG. 103, in special replays 3 to 5, it is possible to win a prize in the corresponding replay regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, for example, if you win Special Replay 5, regardless of the stop order, if you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop, the stop will result in a double black BAR. The 15th re-game winning is established based on the result. In addition, even if you win Special Replay 5, if you stop each reel 32L, 32M, 32R without aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the replay will be downward to the right, regardless of the stopping order. The first re-game winning is established when the stop result becomes .

By the way, since the 14th replay and the 15th replay are not associated with special replay 3, even if you aim at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop it at the time of winning, the Regardless of the stop order, no prize is won in the 14th re-game or the 15th re-game, and no stop results that result in a black BAR single or a black BAR double do not appear. In addition, since the 13th replay and the 15th replay are not associated with special replay 4, even if you aim at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop the replay at the time of winning, the Regardless of the stopping order, no prize is won in the 13th re-game or the 15th re-game, and no stop results such as black BAR double tenpai missing or black BAR double matching do not appear. Similarly, since the 13th replay and the 14th replay are not associated with special replay 5, even if you aim at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop the replay at the time of winning, Regardless of the stopping order, no prize is won in the 13th re-game or the 14th re-game, and no stop results such as a black BAR double tenpai miss or a black BAR single match do not appear.

Here, in this slot machine 10, recommended game modes for achieving winnings for each minor winning combination, including the specific winning combination, will be explained.

Among the winning combinations in each game, the small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 and cause so-called missed winnings are set as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. . More specifically, as already explained, strong cherry and strong cherry duplication 1 and 2 are the winning combinations of the 28th minor role and any of the 32nd minor role to the 35th minor role, and regarding the left reel 32L. The 28th small role symbol and the 32nd to 35th minor role symbol are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "Red Bell" symbol to the 20th "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, the above-mentioned None of the ``Cherry'' symbol and the ``Second Replay'' symbol, which are the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd to 35th minor symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong cherry combination will be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a role that can win any of the 27th small role, 32nd small role to 35th small role, and the 27th small role symbol and the 32nd minor role symbol to the 32nd minor role symbol on the left reel 32L. The 35 small winning symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "Red Bell" symbol to the 20th "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, None of the above-mentioned 27th small role symbol, 32nd to 35th minor role symbol, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak cherry combination will be missed.

Strong watermelon and strong watermelon duplication 1 and 2 are winning hands that can win either the 30th small role or the 41st small role, and the 30th small role symbol and the 41st minor role symbol on the left reel 32L are: It has a "watermelon" design. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "Red 7" symbol to the 3rd "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, the 30th The small winning symbol and the 41st small winning symbol "Watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a win that can win either the 29th small role or the 41st small role, and the 29th small role symbol and the 41st minor role symbol on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "Red 7" symbol to the 3rd "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, The 29th small role symbol and the 41st small role symbol, ``Watermelon'' symbol, cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon winning combination will be missed.

Then, if you operate the left reel 32L to stop while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these winning hands, the 4th "Cherry" symbol to the 6th "2nd Replay" symbol will be on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when the upper stage is reached. In the following explanation, the operation mode of the left reel 32L will also be referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a missed draw, and each of the above-mentioned operation modes that cause a missed draw will be referred to as a non-specific operation. Also referred to as a mode (second operation mode).

Further, in each game, in a game where there is a high possibility of winning a specific combination, a chance notification performance may occur as the performance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(a), for example, the characters "Chance!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and characters with exclamation marks are displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and displayed accordingly. In addition, in the chance notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "cue").

In the chance notification performance, although it is suggested that the current winning combination is one of the specific combinations, it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which specific combination it is. In other words, when a chance notification effect is performed, there is a high possibility that the winning combination for this game will be either strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc.; It is not possible to determine whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon, etc. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104(b), the player must move the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode so as not to miss any of the specific winning combinations. The operation will be performed.

Here, the probability of occurrence of the chance notification effect differs depending on whether or not the special RT state is in progress. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(c), chance notification effects occur in 80% of cases when a specific combination is won except during the special RT state, whereas during the special RT state A chance notification effect occurs in 5% of cases when a winning role is won. This is due to the following reasons. In other words, in this embodiment, the special RT state is provided mainly to prolong the expectation of winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB, but the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning is carried over. During carryover, duplicate winnings of the 1st BB and 2nd BB will not occur, and furthermore, execution of the transfer lottery for a new advantageous section will be restricted. In other words, even if you win a new specific combination in a game played in a situation where the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are set, there will be no duplicate winning with the 1st BB or 2nd BB, and there will be no advantageous areas. Since there is no possibility of winning the transition lottery, the winning of the specific combination is basically unfavorable for the player from the viewpoint of the timing of winning. Therefore, in the special RT state that creates a sense of expectation that the carryover is being carried over, even if the specific role is won, the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect is lower than the occurrence rate in other than the special RT state. It is designed to make it difficult for players to notice, and to avoid creating flashy effects, so as not to offend players who may feel that they have lost money.

However, even if you win a specific role during a carryover state, even if you have no hope of winning a new bonus multiple times or winning a transition to an advantageous section, missing out on a specific role itself is a loss of medals. This is not desirable for players. Therefore, it is thought that the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode, regardless of whether it is a specific combination or not, especially during the special RT state, so as not to miss out. .

As already explained, even if you win special replays 3 to 5 during the special RT state, unless you aim at the "black BAR" symbol and perform a stop operation, the 13th replay to 15th replay won will not be achieved, and the black Stop rolls of BAR double tenpai missing, black BAR single matching, and black BAR double matching will not appear. In other words, if the left reel 32L is operated in a specific operation mode, these stop numbers will not appear.

The special RT notification process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 105. The special RT notification process is a process (FIG. 99) performed in step S4515 in the press order notification process (FIG. 98) by the display control device 81.

In this modification, it is determined in step S4701 whether or not the special replay 5 has been won. If it has been won, the command storage area is referred to in step S4702 to determine whether the special RT command with super attack mode has been received. If such a command has been received, in step S4703, the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that a black bar press notification effect is performed.

In the black BAR push notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106(a), an image of a hub character and a mongoose character fighting while intertwined is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, along with the image of the battle between the hub and the mongoose, an image indicating that you should aim for the "black BAR" is also displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the black BAR target notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Aim for it" in a male voice). In this case, for example, if the player performs a stop operation from the left reel 32L aiming at the "Black BAR" symbol, as shown in FIG. Since the "BAR" symbol and the "Black BAR" symbol stop at the bottom, expectations are aroused for the appearance of a stop result that will result in a double black BAR or a single black BAR.

Based on the black BAR press notification effect in step S4703, when the player operates the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, in this case, the stop result is a double black BAR. The 15th re-game winning is established. On the other hand, in step S4702, if the special RT command with super attack mode has not been received, the special RT notification process is ended without generating the black BAR press notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above in order to prevent missing out on the specific combination. As a result, even if the special replay 5 is won, it is difficult for a stop result that results in a black BAR double to appear, and winnings in the first replay and the 9th to 12th replays are more likely to occur.

If it is determined in step S4701 that the special replay 5 has not been won, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not the special replay 4 has been won. If the special replay 4 has been won, it is determined in step S4705 whether or not a special RT command with attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled in step S4706 so that a black bar press notification effect is generated. In this case, when the player performs a stop operation on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 14th re-game winning is established when the stop result is a black BAR single. On the other hand, in step S4705, if the special RT command with attack mode has not been received, the special RT notification process is ended without generating the black BAR press notification effect. In this case, the player is considered to perform the stop operation in a specific operation mode, as described above. As a result, even if there is a special replay 4 win, it is difficult to get a stop result that results in all black BAR singles, and winnings in the first replay and the 9th to 12th replays are more likely to occur.

If it is determined in step S4704 that the special replay 4 has not been won, it is determined in step S4707 whether or not the special replay 3 has been won. If the special replay 3 is won, it is determined in step S4708 whether or not a special RT command with challenge mode has been received. If it has been received, notification lottery processing 1 is executed in step S4709. This notification lottery process 1 is generally the same process as step S4608 described above, and a lottery is performed to win the notification with a first probability (80%). If a special RT command with challenge mode has not been received, it is determined in step S4710 whether a special RT command has been received. If the special RT command has been received, the notification lottery process 2 is executed in step S4711, and if the special RT command has not been received, the notification lottery process 3 is executed in step S4712. These notification lottery process 2 and notification lottery process 3 are generally similar to the processes in step S4608 and step S4609, and notification lottery process 2 results in a notification winning with a second probability (20%) lower than the first probability. Process 3 is a lottery with a third probability (5%) that is lower than the second probability of winning.

After executing the processing in step S4709, step S4711, or step S4712, it is determined in step S4713 whether or not the player has won in these notification lottery processing. If the player has won, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute a black bar press notification effect in step S4714. In this case, when the player performs a stop operation on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 13th re-game winning is established when the stop result of the black BAR double tenpai misses. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4713 that the player has not won in the notification lottery process, the special RT notification process is directly ended without generating the black BAR push notification effect. In this case, the player is considered to perform the stop operation in a specific operation mode, as described above. As a result, even if the special replay 3 is won, it is difficult for the black BAR double tenpai to fail and the stop result is unlikely to appear, and it is easy to win the first replay or the 9th to 12th replay.

If it is determined in step S4707 that the special replay 3 has not been won, the special RT notification process is immediately terminated. That is, the black BAR push notification effect does not occur when winning a normal replay or winning another small winning combination.

By doing as described above, it is possible to make the stop roll at the time of special replay win different while not using the push order notification effect. Therefore, with regard to advantageous sections whose advantages change depending on push order notifications such as press order bells, we will more strictly ensure the significance of restricting lottery transfers to advantageous sections during a carryover state. It is possible to realize a game feature in which notifications are provided.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, if a specific combination is won in the special RT state, a predetermined notification cancellation lottery is performed, and if the special replay is won with the notification cancellation lottery being won, a press order notification is issued to align the "black BAR" symbols. produce a performance. In addition, in this modification, a special RT state in which the special replay 1 and special replay 2 in the second embodiment can be won is set, and the stop result may differ depending on the stop order.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the specific winning combination notification process in this modification. As already explained, the specific winning combination notification process is a process (FIG. 52) that is executed in step S1905 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) in the display control device 81, and is a process that is executed when a specific winning combination is won. be.

In the specific combination notification process in this modification, before performing the process of setting the pseudo precursor mode (steps S4802 to S4810), similar to the processes of steps S2501 to S2509, the process for canceling the notification is performed in step S4801.

In the notification cancellation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108(a), first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the special RT state is in progress. If it is not the special RT state, the notification cancellation process is immediately ended. If the special RT state is in progress, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags are set, the notification canceling process is immediately terminated. If any winning flag is set, the process advances to step S4903.

In step S4903, a cancellation lottery table in which a cancellation rate corresponding to a specific winning combination is set is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. In the cancellation lottery table, as shown in FIG. 108(b), for example, a strong cherry has a 40% probability of winning the cancellation, and a weak cherry has a 5% probability of winning the cancellation, which is lower than that of a strong cherry. In addition, a strong watermelon has an 80% probability of being a winning prize, which is higher than a strong cherry, and a weak watermelon has a 20% chance of winning a winning prize.

In step S4904, a cancellation lottery process is performed based on the cancellation lottery table acquired in step S4903. Then, in step S4905, it is determined whether or not the cancellation lottery has been won. If the player has not won the cancellation lottery, the notification cancellation process is immediately terminated. If you have won the cancellation lottery, in step S4906, a process is performed to set a cancellation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183, and then the notification cancellation process is ended.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing special RT notification processing in this modification.

In this modification, in step S5001, it is determined whether the cancellation flag is set. If the release flag is not set, a process is performed in step S5002 to obtain a notification table for a non-released state from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. If the release flag is set, in step S5003, processing is performed to obtain a release state notification table from the various table storage areas 182a. These notification tables show the probability of winning the notification lottery whether or not to notify the stopping order of Black BAR double alignment, Black BAR single alignment, or Black BAR double tenpai out if you win Special Replay 1 or Special Replay 2. is defined, and the notification table for the released state has a higher probability of winning the notification lottery than the notification table for the non-released state.

After performing the processing in step S5002 or step S5003, it is determined in step S5004 whether a special RT command with super attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process advances to step S5005, and notification lottery processing 1 is executed. The notification lottery process 1 is a lottery process to determine whether or not to execute a press order notification effect for the stop order in which the black BAR doubles are aligned, and the lottery process is performed based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003 above. conduct. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 1 in the non-released state, there is a 10% probability of winning the notification lottery, and in the notification lottery process 1 in the release state, the probability of winning the notification lottery is 80%, which is higher than in the non-cancellation state. Get elected.

In step S5006, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S5005, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification processing is directly ended. If you have won the notification lottery, in step S5007, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to generate a press order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR is double aligned, and a special RT notification is generated. Finish the process.

If a negative determination is made in step S5004, it is determined in step S5008 whether or not a special RT command with attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process advances to step S5009, and notification lottery processing 2 is executed. The notification lottery process 2 is a lottery process to determine whether or not to execute a push order notification effect for the stop order in which all black BAR singles are available. conduct. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 2 in the non-released state, there is a 10% probability of winning the notification lottery, and in the notification lottery process 2 in the release state, the probability of winning the notification lottery is 80%, which is higher than in the non-cancellation state. Get elected.

In step S5010, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S5009, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification process is directly ended. If you have won the notification lottery, in step S5011, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to generate a press order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR singles are aligned, and a special RT notification is generated. Finish the process.

If a negative determination is made in step S5008, it is determined in step S5012 whether a special RT command with challenge mode has been received. If it has been received, the process advances to step S5013, and notification lottery processing 3 is executed. The notification lottery process 3 is a lottery process to determine whether or not to execute a press order notification effect for the stop order in which the Black BAR double tenpai is out.The lottery process is performed based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003 above. I do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 3 in the non-released state, there is a 30% probability of winning the notification lottery, and in the notification lottery process 3 in the release state, the probability of winning the notification lottery is 80%, which is higher than in the non-cancellation state. Get elected.

If a negative determination is made in step S5012, it is determined in step S5014 whether a special RT command has been received. If it has been received, the process advances to step S5015, and notification lottery process 4 is executed. Moreover, if it has not been received, the process advances to step S5016, and notification lottery processing 5 is executed. The notification lottery process 4 and the notification lottery process 5 are also lottery processes for determining whether or not to execute the press order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR double tenpai is out. The lottery process is performed based on this. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 4 in the non-released state, you will win the notification lottery with a 10% probability, and in the notification lottery process 4 in the release state, you will win the notification lottery with the same 10% probability as in the non-released state. do. Furthermore, in the notification lottery process 5 in the non-released state, the notification lottery process 5 has a probability of 5%, and in the notification lottery process 5 in the release state, the notification lottery process 5 has the same probability of 5% as in the non-release state.

After executing the processing in step S5013, step S5015, or step S5016, the process advances to step S5017. In step S5017, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing results of each of the notification lottery processes 3 to 5, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification process is directly ended. If you have won the notification lottery, in step S5018, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to generate a press order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR double tenpai is out, and the special RT End the notification process.

The situation when a special replay is won in the special RT state of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 110.

For example, assume that a stop result that results in a weak watermelon winning combination appears and the game enters a special RT state. The example in FIG. 110 shows a case where a transition is made to a special RT state with super attack mode. As already explained, in the special RT state, replay winnings occur frequently.

During the special RT state, if a specific winning combination such as a weak watermelon winning combination is won, the above notification cancellation process (FIG. 108) is performed. Then, if you win the cancellation lottery in the cancellation lottery process of the notification cancellation process, the notification table obtained when you win special replays 1 and 2 will be different (step S5002, step S5003), and those who have won the cancellation lottery However, it becomes easier to win the lottery. Then, when winning the special replay 1 and 2 winning notification lottery (step S5005), a push order notification effect of the stop order that matches the black BAR double occurs, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed in the stop order with " If you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol and perform a stop operation, the 15th re-game winning will be established when the stop roll results in a double black BAR.

On the other hand, if you do not win a specific role such as a weak watermelon role in the special RT state, or if you do not win in the cancellation lottery process even if you win a specific role, the notification lottery when winning special replay 1 or 2 will be held. The probability of winning is lower. As a result, when special replays 1 and 2 are won, the first replay prize is established with the stop roll resulting in a downward-sloping replay.

By doing the above, the gameplay is improved when a specific winning combination is won during the special RT state. As already explained, in a situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, no new bonus winning will occur, and no lottery will be performed to move to the advantageous section. Therefore, even though you have won a specific combination, you may receive fewer benefits than in a situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set. On that point, as mentioned above, if the notification cancellation lottery is performed based on the winning of a specific role, there will be the advantage of playing a game that predicts the contents of the subsequent advantageous section. It becomes possible to provide an alternative to the section lottery.

In particular, by making it possible to appear a stop roll that suggests the contents of an advantageous section based on winning a specific combination during the special RT state, it is as if the lottery to move to the advantageous section is based on the winning of a specific combination during the special RT state. The player can be made to feel as if he or she has won. Therefore, in a situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is not performed.

In addition, during the special RT state, even if you have not won the cancellation lottery based on the specific winning combination, you can win the notification lottery, so the special winning combination that triggered the transition to the special RT state has an advantageous section. This makes it easy to make ambiguous judgments when predicting whether the player has won the game, or whether he or she has won in the advantageous section triggered by a specific combination won after entering the special RT state. It becomes possible to have fun.

As in the above modification, according to a configuration that can notify the contents of the lottery to move to an advantageous section based on a specific winning combination during a carryover state (special RT state), based on a specific winning combination during a carryover state (special RT state), In this way, it is possible to realize a new gaming experience in which the content of the lottery for transition to an advantageous section that has already been executed is notified. In other words, in the carryover state, the execution of the lottery to move to an advantageous section based on the winning of a specific winning combination is restricted, so it can be said that winning the specific winning combination is not desirable for the player. In this regard, according to the above configuration, since the content of the transfer lottery that has already been executed is announced, it is possible to make it appear as if the transfer lottery was held based on the particular winning of the specific winning combination, and the transfer lottery during the carryover state can be made. It is also possible to prevent the user from realizing that the lottery is restricted.

As already explained, in the winning game that triggers the transition to the carryover state, the result of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is not necessarily announced, and the notification may be limited. Specifically, even if you win in attack mode, etc., you will be notified that you have won through the omen mode, and depending on the number of games set in the omen mode, the result of the lottery will shift to the advantageous section. will be announced in a later game than the game in which the transition lottery was held. Therefore, as mentioned above, if a lottery to move to an advantageous section is held in a combination with the bonus that triggered the carryover state, the contents of the transfer lottery remain unannounced in the carryover state. There is a high possibility that there is. With such a configuration, in the configuration where the unannounced content can be announced in response to the winning of a specific combination as described above, the phenomenon that the unannounced content does not exist is unlikely to occur.

In addition, in the carryover state, instead of announcing the unannounced content in the specific winning game, the unannounced content is announced in the game after the specific winning game, so that the unannounced content is announced in the game after the specific winning game. It becomes possible to notify the contents of the notification in a more variety of games.

In addition, by configuring the system to notify the unannounced content in games that have won a special replay in games after the specific winning game, there is a possibility that the information will not be announced unless a special replay win has been won. , Even if the player does not win the transition lottery, it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned unannounced content is notified by whether or not the section indicator is lit at the end of the carryover state, that is, when the bonus is won. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that unreported content is not being reported for a long time.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, a plurality of special RT states are set, and the type of special replay that can be won differs depending on each special RT state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, 5th to 8th RT states are set as special RT states, and the types of special replays won in each RT state are different. In the 5th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the 1st replay, and the special replay 5 consisting of the 1st replay, 9th replay to 12th replay, and 15th replay are set as replays that can win. There is. The winning probability for each replay is approximately 1/5.3 for the normal replay, approximately 1/21.8 for the special replay 5, and the total replay probability is approximately 1/4.3.

In the 6th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the 1st replay, and the special replay 4 consisting of the 1st replay, 9th replay to 12th replay, and 14th replay are set as replays that can win. There is. The probability of winning for each replay is approximately 1/5.3 for the normal replay, approximately 1/21.8 for the special replay 4, and the total replay probability is approximately 1/4.3.

In the seventh RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay and the special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the 9th replay to the 13th replay are set as replays that can win. The probability of winning for each replay is approximately 1/5.3 for the normal replay, approximately 1/21.8 for the special replay 3, and the total replay probability is approximately 1/4.3.

In the 8th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as the replay that can win, and the special replays 3 to 5 do not win. Since the normal replay rate is approximately 1/4.3, the total replay probability is also approximately 1/4.3.

In this modification, different RT states are set when transitioning to the special RT state. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing special RT state processing in this modification.

In step S5101, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If it is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S5102 whether the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. If any BB winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5103 whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5104 whether the specialized zone winning flag is set.

If the special zone winning flag is set and the lottery for switching to super attack mode is won, a process of setting a special RT command with super attack mode as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S5105. conduct. Then, in step S5106, the current RT setting flag is stored in a predetermined storage area, and in step S5107, the current RT setting flag is cleared. Thereafter, in step S5108, the fifth RT setting flag is set, and then the special RT state processing ends. Note that the processes in steps S5106 to S5108 are basically the same as the processes in steps S3914 to S3916, although there are differences in the types of RT setting flags to be set, and the details of each process will be omitted in the following explanation. Omitted.

Through the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the fifth RT state among the special RT states. That is, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB win and the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won, the state shifts to the fifth RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state is reached in which special replay 5 can be achieved, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a replay winning of double black BAR will be achieved.

If it is determined in step S5104 that the super attack mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command with attack mode is set as an output target in step S5109, and then the state is changed to the 6th RT state in steps S5110 to S5112. After performing the process for transition, the special RT state process ends.

Through the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the sixth RT state among the special RT states. That is, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB win and the lottery for entering the attack mode has been won, the state shifts to the sixth RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state is reached in which special replay 4 can be achieved, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a replay winning of all black BAR singles will be achieved.

If it is determined in step S5103 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S5113 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, a special RT command with challenge mode is set as an output target in step S5114. Thereafter, in steps S5115 to S5117, processing for transitioning to the seventh RT state is performed, and then the special RT state processing ends.

Through the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the seventh RT state among the special RT states. In other words, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on the first BB win and the lottery for entering the challenge mode has been won, the state shifts to the seventh RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state is reached in which special replay 3 can be achieved, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, a replay winning of the black BAR off-temperature will be achieved.

If it is determined in step S5113 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command is set as an output target in step S5118. Thereafter, in steps S5119 to S5121, processing for transitioning to the eighth RT state is performed, and then the special RT state processing ends.

If it is determined in step S5102 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process advances to step S5122. The processing from step S5122 to step S5125 is similar to the processing from step S3910 to step S3913 described above. After setting the output of the fake special RT command in step S5125, processing for transitioning to the eighth RT state is performed in steps S5126 to S5128, and then the special RT state processing ends.

Through the above processing, the gaming state shifts to the eighth RT state among the special RT states. In other words, if the current special RT state is a special RT state based on winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB, and you have not won the lottery to transition to super attack mode, attack mode, or challenge mode, If the player does not win in either of the above and the attack modes, the state shifts to the 8th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the RT state will occur where normal replays are frequently established and special replays 3 to 5 are not established, and even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the black There will be no replay winnings for BAR singles and black BAR double tenpais.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the process advances to step S5129. The processing from step S5129 to step S5135 is the same as the processing from step S3917 to step S3923 described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, in the special RT notification process in this embodiment, regardless of the contents of the advantageous section, if the special replay is won, a black BAR push notification effect is generated. In other words, if the RT state is the 5th RT state, by operating according to the black BAR push notification effect, a stop number that is a double black BAR will appear, and if the RT state is the 6th RT state, the black BAR push notification effect will appear. By operating according to the following, a stop result that will result in a black BAR single match will appear, and in the 7th RT state, by operating according to the black BAR push notification effect, a stop result that will result in a black BAR double tenpai error will appear. do. In the 8th RT state, there is no special replay win, so the black BAR push notification effect does not occur.

By doing the above, the winning probabilities of special replays 3 to 5 are different in each RT state, so there is no need to conduct a lottery etc. to notify when the special replay is won, and there is no need to conduct a lottery etc. from the stop roll of various black BARs. You can play a game that predicts the contents of the game.

In addition, in a configuration in which the RT state to which the game moves is made to vary depending on the content of the advantageous section, as in the above modification, it is preferable to set the game result in association with the RT state and the content of the advantageous section. Specifically, for example, although strong cherry stack 1 (IV = 32) can win the super attack mode, it will not be possible to win the attack mode or challenge mode, and a special RT will be transferred based on the strong cherry stack 1. Let the state be the fifth RT state. In addition, although weak cherry overlap 1 (IV = 34) can win attack mode, it will not be able to win super attack mode or challenge mode, and the special RT state to be transitioned based on weak cherry overlap 1 will be changed to the 6th RT. state. Although strong watermelon stack 1 (IV = 36) and weak watermelon stack 1 (IV = 38) can be won in challenge mode, they cannot be won in super attack mode or attack mode. The special RT state to which the transition occurs based on 1 is referred to as the seventh RT state. Other duplicate roles (1 chance A stack with IV = 40, 1 chance B stack with IV = 42, 1 middle bell stack with IV = 44) will not win in either Super Attack Mode, Attack Mode, or Challenge Mode. The special RT state to which the player moves based on these overlapping hands is defined as the eighth RT state. By doing this, the game results that trigger the transition to each RT state are associated, and the transparency of the game is ensured.

Then, in each RT state, the notification lottery probability at the time of special replay winning is changed depending on whether the lottery to transition to super attack mode, attack mode, or challenge mode is won. It is possible to guarantee the enjoyment of predicting whether or not you have won.

In the configuration in which RT states and game results are associated as described above, the content of the advantageous sections in which the transition lottery can be won may be made different even with the same stop result, such as by increasing the types of bonuses. For example, in addition to the first BB and the second BB, a third BB and a fourth BB are provided. In strong cherry duplication A, which is a duplicate winning of the first BB and a strong cherry, the RT state to be transferred is set to the fifth RT state, assuming that the winning is possible only in the super attack mode. On the other hand, in strong cherry duplication B, which is a double winning of the third BB and the strong cherry, the transition RT state is set as the sixth RT state, since it is possible to win only in the attack mode. In strong cherry duplication C, which is a duplicate winning of the 4th BB and the strong cherry, the RT state to be transferred is set to the 7th RT state, as it is possible to win only in the challenge mode. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the details of the advantageous section to which the transition can be made from the stopping outcome of the specific combination that triggered the transition to the RT state (in the above example, the stopping outcome that would result in a strong cherry prize). This makes it possible to enjoy the game in which the content of the advantageous section is predicted from the stopped result at the time of a subsequent special replay win.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, as in the third modified example, the special RT state to which the system moves is changed depending on the content of the advantageous section, and the probability of winning a predetermined special replay in each special RT state is changed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, in the 5th RT state, which is a special RT state in which the super attack mode is won, there is a normal replay consisting of the 1st replay, the 1st replay, the 9th replay, and so on. Special replay 5 consisting of the 12th replay and the 15th replay is set as a replay that can win. The winning probability for each replay is approximately 1/5.3 for the normal replay, approximately 1/21.8 for the special replay 5, and the total replay probability is approximately 1/4.3.

In the 6th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the 1st replay, and the special replay 5 consisting of the 1st replay, 9th replay to 12th replay, and 15th replay are set as replays that can win. The type of winning replay is the same as in the fifth RT state. However, the winning probability for each replay is different, and the winning probability for normal replay is about 1 in 5.0, which is higher than that in the 5th RT state, and for special replay 5, it is about 1 in 32.8. The probability of winning is set lower than that of the fifth RT state.

In the 7th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the 1st replay, and the special replay 5 consisting of the 1st replay, 9th replay to 12th replay, and 15th replay are set as replays in which you can win. The types of winning replays are the same as in the 5th RT state and the 6th RT state. However, the probability of winning for each replay is different; the probability of winning for the normal replay is about 1/4.6, which is higher than that for the 5th RT state and the 6th RT state, and the probability of winning for the special replay 5 is about 65. The winning probability is set to be 1/5, which is lower than that of the fifth RT state and the sixth RT state.

In the eighth RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as the replay that can win, and each special replay 5 does not win. Since the normal replay rate is approximately 1/4.3, the total replay probability is also approximately 1/4.3.

Incidentally, in the special RT notification process in this embodiment, a black BAR push notification effect is generated when the special replay 5 is won, regardless of the contents of the advantageous section. In other words, regardless of the type of RT state, a stop result that is a double black BAR appears based on the special replay 5 win.

As described above, by changing the type of special RT state to be transitioned to depending on the contents of the advantageous section and making the winning probability of special replay 5 different depending on the type of special RT state, the winning probability of special replay 5 can be changed depending on the advantageous section. It is possible to have the player play a game such as predicting the content of the game. Therefore, there is no need to vary the probability of winning in the lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the black BAR push notification performance when the special replay 5 is won, depending on the contents of the advantageous section, and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, if you do the above, even if you press the "Black BAR" symbol in a situation where the black BAR press notification effect is not occurring, a stop result such as a black BAR double alignment will not appear, so the effect will not occur. It is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by the appearance of a stop roll such as a black BAR double alignment.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, a configuration example will be described in which the transition to the special RT state is performed by winning a replay game.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the relationship between the prize winning mode and the awarded benefits in this modification.

In this modified example, replay is set as a privilege given when winning each role (27th minor role to 38th minor role) that is specified as a specific role in each of the above embodiments and each modified example, and the replay is At the same time, the configuration is such that the transition is made to the fourth RT state, that is, the special RT state. That is, for example, when a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc. are won and the winning combination is established, a re-game is given and the game moves to the fourth RT state. Also, regarding the combinations of these combinations and bonuses (strong cherry overlap 1, 2, strong watermelon overlap 1, 2, etc.), if you win the overlap combination, the corresponding combination will be won and you will be given a replay. At the same time, the state shifts to the fourth RT state.

It should be noted that, regarding the re-game where a winning is established with a stop result such as the above-mentioned strong cherry, it is preferable to set the winning combination to the first re-game so as not to miss out. In other words, if it is not possible to stop a stop roll such as a strong cherry, a winning is established with another stop roll, a replay is given, and the system shifts to the fourth RT state.

In this modification, these re-games and each role to which the fourth RT state is given are defined as a specific role (hereinafter also referred to as a specific re-game), and the advantageous section is shifted based on the specific re-game win. A lottery will be held. More specifically, for example, in step S701 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31), if these specific re-games have been won, an affirmative determination is made and the first specific winning combination processing to third specific winning processing are performed. do.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing RT state processing in this modification.

It is determined in step S5201 whether the transition roll has stopped, and if it has stopped, it is determined in step S5202 whether or not either the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set. do. In other words, the process in step S5202 mainly indicates a case where the game shifts to the fourth RT state based on the result of winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, among the results for which the replay is awarded. ing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the RT state processing is immediately terminated. That is, in this case, even if the number of stop rolls stops, the transition to the RT state is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5202, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state, and if it is in the normal gaming state, a process is performed in which the first RT state is set in step S5204. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S5205, it is determined in step S5205 whether or not the second replay winning is established, and if it is established or a negative determination is made in step S5103, step After clearing the RT setting flag in S5206, processing for setting the first RT state is performed in step S5204. The processing in steps S5204 to S5206 is similar to the processing in steps S503 to S505 described above.

In addition, if it is determined in step S5205 that the second replay win has not been established, in steps S5207 to S5212, the RT state corresponding to the winning replay is set in the same way as the processing in steps S506 to S511. Perform the processing to do.

If it is determined in step S5210 that the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win has not been established, the process advances to step S5213. In step S5213, it is determined whether or not a specific re-game winning has been achieved. If no prize has been won, the RT state processing is immediately ended. If a winning has been achieved, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S5214, and the fourth RT setting flag is set in step S5215, the gaming state is shifted to the fourth RT state, and then the main RT state processing is started. end. In addition, also in this modification, when making a transition to a 4th RT state, it is good also as a structure which memorize|stores the RT state before a transition.

FIG. 116 shows special RT state processing in this modification.

In the special RT state processing of this modification, since the transition processing to the fourth RT state is performed in the RT state processing as described above, the transition processing to the fourth RT state in the special RT state processing is performed. do not have. Specifically, in steps S5301 to S5309, similar to steps S3901 to S3909 above, various special RT commands are set based on a specific re-game win that is a duplicate win with the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. After that, the special RT state processing ends without performing the transition processing to the fourth RT state in steps S3914 to S3916.

Further, if it is determined in step S5302 that it is not a duplicate win with the first BB or the second BB, it is determined in step S5310 whether or not it is a specific re-game win, and if it is a specific re-game win, Under the condition that the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. have not been won (step S5311: NO), a fake special RT command is set in step S5312, and then the special RT state processing is ended.

In addition, in this modification, if it is determined in step S5301 that the game is not in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, the special End RT state processing.

With the above configuration, the conditions for transition to the special RT state can be matched with the conditions for when various re-game winnings are established, which are conditions for transition to other RT states.

In addition, in the above configuration, the special RT state that transitioned without going through the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning is terminated on the condition that the transition roll stops, so the number of consecutive games in the special RT state is reduced. A game that is diversified and predicts the subsequent advantage (whether BB is won or not, whether or not it is won in the advantageous section) during a special RT state until the bell is missed (until the transition roll stops). can be entertained.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, a special replay during the special RT state is used to suggest that the player has won not only the advantageous section but also the first BB and the second BB. In this embodiment, as in the fifth modification of the second embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, 2, Weak cherry stacks 1 and 2, strong watermelon stacks 1 and 2, weak watermelon stacks 1 and 2, chance A stacks 1 and 2, chance B stacks 1 and 2, and middle bell stacks 1 and 2 can all be replayed by winning. At the same time, the fourth RT state is assigned.

FIG. 117 shows a part of the winning/losing lottery table during the special RT state in this embodiment. As described above, during the special RT state, the probability of winning a small winning combination does not change, but the probability of winning a replay changes. In FIG. 117, the winning combinations and winning probabilities are shown only for replays in which the winning probabilities change. In this embodiment as well, during the special RT state, the normal replay with index value IV=1 is mainly won, and special replays 6 to 11 are rarely won. Special Replay 6 to Special Replay 11 are the overlapping combinations of any of the 16th replay to 24th replay.

As shown in FIG. 118, in the 16th replay to the 24th replay, replays are given as a bonus, but the stop rolls are different, especially in the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The number of stopped "BAR" symbols is different. In the following explanation, the winning mode is based on the assumption that the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line in a 3-bet game.

In the 16th replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are A winning mode is set in which a winning is achieved by stopping on an active line. In the 17th replay, the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line. A winning mode is set in which a winning is achieved by stopping the game. In these 16th re-games and 17th re-games, even if you operate aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol will appear in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a winning mode that does not stop.

In the 18th replay, the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are A winning mode is set in which a winning is achieved by stopping on an active line. In the 19th replay, you win when the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. A winning mode is set in which the following is achieved. In the 20th replay, the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "1st Replay" symbol or "2nd Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. A winning mode is set in which a winning is achieved. In these 18th re-games to 20th re-games, if you operate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, " This is a winning mode in which one “Black BAR” symbol stops.

In the 21st replay, a prize is won when the "White BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. A winning mode is set in which the following is achieved. In the 22nd replay, the "White BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "1st Replay" symbol or "2nd Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. A winning mode is set in which a winning is achieved. In the 23rd re-game, the winning mode is such that a winning is achieved when the "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. It is set. In these 21st re-games to 23rd re-games, if you operate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, " This is a winning mode in which two "Black BAR" symbols stop.

In the 24th re-game, the winning mode is such that a winning is achieved when the "White BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. It is set. The winning mode of the 24th re-game is that when you perform a stop operation aiming at the "Black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "Black BAR" symbol will line up in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop. , the number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row is 3, which is the winning mode.

Special Replay 6 to Special Replay 11 are push order combinations in which winning combinations differ depending on the stop order. However, no matter which role wins, the bonus given is replay, and the advantage for the player remains the same. In other words, these special replays 6 to 11 are combinations whose advantage level does not change, although the number of stops resulting in winnings differs depending on the stop order.

FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established.

Special replay 6 is a combination of the 16th replay, 18th replay to 20th replay. If you win special replay 6, if you stop each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the first stop order of "left" → "middle" → "right", the 16th replay or the 18th replay will be played. In this case, if you aim at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and stop the winning, the 18th replay of the 16th replay and 18th replay will result in a win. , the "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L. If the game is stopped in the second stopping order of "left" → "right" → "middle", the 16th re-game winning is established. In this case, even if the stopping operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol will not stop in the middle row of any reel. If you stop in the third stop order of "middle" → "left" → "right", the 16th replay or the 19th replay win will be established, and in this case, "black" will be displayed in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R When the stop operation is performed aiming at the "BAR" symbol, the 19th re-game winning of the 16th re-game and the 19th re-game is established, and the "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel 32M. If the reels are stopped in the fourth stopping order of "middle" -> "right" -> "left", the 16th re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row of any reel. If you stop in the 5th stop order of "Right" → "Left" → "Middle", the 16th replay or the 20th replay win will be established, and in this case, a "black When the stop operation is performed aiming at the "BAR" symbol, the 20th re-game winning of the 16th re-game and the 20th re-game is established, and the "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R. If the reels are stopped in the 6th stopping order of "right" → "middle" → "left", the 16th re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row of any reel. Regarding the 1st stop order, 3rd stop order, and 5th stop order, even if you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and perform the stop operation, the "Black BAR" symbol will appear on the middle row of each reel. ” If the timing is such that the symbols cannot be stopped, the 16th re-game winning will be established.

Special replay 7 is a combination of the 17th replay to the 20th replay. Then, as in the case of Special Replay 6, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the above-mentioned first stop order, third stop order and fifth stop order In either case, the 17th re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row on any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the second stopping order, the 18th re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L. In the fourth stop order, the 19th re-game win is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. Then, in the sixth stop order, the 20th re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R. Regarding the 2nd stop order, 4th stop order, and 6th stop order, even if you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and perform the stop operation, the "Black BAR" symbol will appear on the middle row of each reel. If the timing is such that it cannot be stopped, the 17th re-game winning will be established.

Special replay 8 is a combination of the 16th replay and the 18th to 22nd replay. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped while aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, if the second stop order, fourth stop order, or sixth stop order is selected, the 16th replay prize will be won. This is true, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row on any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the first stopping order or the third stopping order, the 21st re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. Then, in the fifth stopping order, the 22nd re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. Regarding the 1st stop order, 3rd stop order, and 5th stop order, even if you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and perform the stop operation, the "Black BAR" symbol will appear on the middle row of each reel. If the timing is such that it is not possible to stop, the 16th re-game winning, the 18th re-gaming winning to the 20th re-gaming winning are established.

Special replay 9 is a combination of the 17th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, the 22nd replay, and the 23rd replay. When a stop operation is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 17th replay prize will be won if the above-mentioned first stop order, third stop order, or fifth stop order is selected. This is true, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row on any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, in the second stopping order, the 22nd re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and right reel 32R. Then, in the fourth stop order or the sixth stop order, the 23rd re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Regarding the 12th stop order, 4th stop order, and 6th stop order, even if you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and perform the stop operation, the "Black BAR" symbol will appear on the middle row of each reel. If it is a timing that cannot be stopped, the 17th re-game winning to 20th re-gaming winning will be established.

The special replay 10 is a combination of the 16th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, and the 24th replay. Then, if the above-mentioned second stop order, fourth stop order, or sixth stop order is selected, the 16th replay win will be achieved, and the "Black BAR" symbol will stop in the middle row of any reel 32L, 32M, or 32R. do not. Also, if the 1st stop order, 3rd stop order, or 5th stop order is selected, the 24th replay win will be established, and the "black BAR" symbols will be aligned in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the reels will stop. . Regarding the 1st stop order, 3rd stop order, and 5th stop order, even if you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and perform the stop operation, the "Black BAR" symbol will appear on the middle row of each reel. If the timing is such that it is not possible to stop, the 16th re-game winning, the 18th re-gaming winning to the 22nd re-gaming winning are established.

The special replay 11 is a combination of the 17th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, and the 22nd replay to the 24th replay. Then, if the above-mentioned first stop order, third stop order, or fifth stop order is selected, the 17th replay win will be achieved, and the "black BAR" symbol will stop in the middle row of any reel 32L, 32M, or 32R. do not. Also, if the second stop order, fourth stop order, or sixth stop order is selected, the 24th replay win will be achieved, and the "black BAR" symbols will be aligned in the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the reels will stop. . Regarding the 2nd stop order, 4th stop order, and 6th stop order, even if you aim at the "Black BAR" symbol on the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and perform the stop operation, the "Black BAR" symbol will appear on the middle row of each reel. If the timing cannot be stopped, the 17th re-game winning to the 20th re-gaming winning, the 22nd re-gaming winning, and the 23rd re-gaming winning are established.

As described above, various special RT commands are output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 based on the specific winning combination (BB winning or BB non-winning). Furthermore, as described above, when the display control device 81 receives a command from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 performs processing such as storing the received command in a predetermined area in the command storage process.

Here, in this embodiment, the special RT command reception process that is activated when the above-mentioned various special RT commands are received will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120. In the special RT command reception process, a process for setting a performance pattern during the current special RT state is performed according to the type of the received command.

Specifically, in step S5401, it is determined whether the command received this time is a special RT command with super attack mode. If it is a special RT command with super attack mode, in step S5402, the notification scenario table stored in the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 is referred to, and notification scenario A is selected as the performance pattern during the current special RT state. After performing the setting process, this special RT command reception process ends.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the notification scenario table in this embodiment, the probability of winning the push order notification effect lottery for stopping the black BAR is set to differ depending on the type of notification scenario. ing. The black BAR stop counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times the "black BAR" symbol has stopped on the middle row of each reel 32L, 32M, or 32R during the current special RT state. It is provided in the counter area 183b. Further, the push order notification effect lottery for stopping the black BAR is executed when any special replay is won. For example, in notification scenario A, if the black BAR stop counter is 0, there is an 80% probability that you will win the push-order notification lottery, and if the black BAR stop counter is 5, you will win the press-order notification lottery with a 30% probability. Get elected.

If a negative determination is made in step S5401, it is determined in step S5403 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with attack mode. If it is a special RT command with attack mode, in step S5404, processing is performed to set notification scenario B as the performance pattern during the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. Thereafter, in step S5405, in the current performance pattern, 5 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter, and then this special RT command reception process is ended.

Here, as shown in FIG. 121, in each notification scenario, the upper limit value is determined so that when the black BAR stop counter exceeds a predetermined value, the player will not win the press order notification effect lottery. For example, in notification scenario B that is set when the special RT command with attack mode is received, if the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0 to 4, you can win the push order notification lottery, but if the value of the counter is 5. When this happens, you will no longer be able to win the push order announcement lottery.

In this embodiment, in the special RT state, the subsequent game content is indicated by the number of "black BAR" symbols stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. For example, when the total number of stopped "black BAR" symbols during the special RT state reaches three or more, it is determined that the game will then move to the first BB or second BB bonus state. Furthermore, when the total number of stopped "black BAR" symbols during the special RT state reaches four or more, it is confirmed that the game will further shift to the challenge mode after the bonus state of the first BB or the second BB. When the total number of stops of the "Black BAR" symbol reaches 5 or more, it is confirmed that the transition to attack mode will occur after the bonus state of the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and when the total number of stops reaches 6 or more, the bonus state It is confirmed that it will later transition to super attack mode.

That is, the more the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R during the special RT state, the easier it is for the player to transition to an advantageous state after the special RT state. Therefore, the player can infer the subsequent state from the number of stopped "black BAR" symbols.

Furthermore, during the special RT state, the display on the auxiliary display section 65 displays a state corresponding to the special RT state. The state performance is set to change depending on the number of stopped "black BAR" symbols. Specifically, as the cumulative number of stops of the "Black BAR" symbol increases from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6, the background color of the state production changes from white → blue → yellow → green → red → Changes from gold to rainbow. In other words, by stopping the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the background color of the state effect indicating the special RT state changes, and it is possible to shift to an advantageous state after the special RT state. be understood. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that because the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage during the special RT state, the player has transitioned to an advantageous state. is significantly improved.

Returning to the explanation of the special RT command reception process (FIG. 120), if a negative determination is made in step S5403, it is determined in step S5406 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with challenge mode. If it is a special RT command with challenge mode, in step S5407, processing is performed to set notification scenario C as the effect pattern during the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. Thereafter, in step S5408, the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter is set to 4 in the current performance pattern, and then the special RT command reception process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S5406, it is determined in step S5409 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command. If it is a special RT command, in step S5410, processing is performed to set the notification scenario D as the performance pattern during the current special RT state from the notification scenario table. Thereafter, in step S5411, in the current performance pattern, 3 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter, and then this special RT command reception process is ended.

A negative determination in step S5409 means that the command received this time is a fake special RT command. As already explained, the fake special RT command is used when you win a specific role that is not a duplicate role with the 1st BB or 2nd BB, and the specific role triggers any of the challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode. This is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the transfer has not been won. Then, when the fake special RT command is output/received, a transition is made to a special RT state that continues until the number of transition rolls stops. As explained in the second embodiment, when the transition number stops and the special RT state ends, the game returns to the normal gaming state or the first RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S5409, a notification scenario lottery process is executed in step S5412. In the notification scenario lottery process, from the notification scenario table, which of notification scenarios E to G is to be set as the performance pattern during the current special RT state is determined by lottery. The notification scenarios E to G are set so that the probability of winning the press order notification effect lottery differs depending on the value of the black BAR stop counter. For example, when the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0, the probability of winning the press order notification effect lottery is 80% in notification scenario E, 60% in notification scenario F, and 50% in notification scenario G. . Which of the notification scenarios E to G to be set depends on the winning probability depending on the type of specific combination that triggered the fake special RT command. For example, in notification scenario E, the probability of winning is high when a fake special RT command is output/received with a strong cherry or strong watermelon as a specific combination, and in notification scenario F, a weak cherry or weak watermelon is used as a specific combination. The winning probability is high when a fake special RT command is output/received as a trigger, and the winning probability is high when a fake special RT command is output/received triggered by another specific combination in notification scenario G.

After performing lottery processing for notification scenarios in step S5412, processing for setting notification scenarios according to the lottery results is performed in step S5413. Then, in step S5414, in the current performance pattern, 2 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter, and then this special RT command reception process is ended.

Next, the special RT notification process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122. As already explained, the special RT notification process is a process executed in step S4515 of the push order notification process (FIG. 97) in the display control device 81 when a special replay is won.

In step S5501, processing is performed to understand the notification scenario set in the special RT command reception processing. Then, in step S5502, processing is performed to grasp the current value of the black BAR stop counter. In the following step S5503, processing is performed to determine the type of special replay of the current game. That is, it is determined which one of special replays 6 to 11 is selected.

In step S5504, it is determined whether or not there is space in the black BAR stop counter based on the relationship between the upper limit set in the special RT command reception process and the current special replay. That is, for example, if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 and the upper limit is set as 3 (when notification scenario D is set), " If the "Black BAR" symbol is Special Replay 6 or Special Replay 7 where only one symbol can be stopped, more specifically, in this game, if "Black BAR" appears in the middle of any reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Even if the symbols stop, if there is no contradiction in relation to the notification contents (contents of the state after the special RT state), it is determined that there is an empty space in the value of the black BAR stop counter. On the other hand, even if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 and the upper limit is set as 3 (notification scenario D is set), "Black In the case of Special Replay 8 to Special Replay 11 where two or more "BAR" symbols can be stopped, more specifically, in this game, if there is a "Black BAR" symbol in the middle of any reel 32L, 32M, 32R. When the black BAR stop counter is stopped, it is determined that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter if there is a possibility of a contradiction in relation to the notification content (the content of the state after the special RT state). In addition, even if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2, if the upper limit is set as 2 (notification scenario E to notification scenario G are set), special replay Regardless of the type, it is determined that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter.

If it is determined in step S5504 that there is an empty space in the value of the black BAR stop counter, a notification lottery process is executed in step S5505. Specifically, the probability of winning the notification lottery is determined from the current notification scenario and the black BAR stop counter, and a press order notification performance lottery is performed using a lottery counter or the like. Then, in step S5506, the result of the lottery process in step S5505 is determined, and if it is determined that it is a winning result, in step S5507, as the current press order notification effect, the press order for stopping the black bar is determined. The auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification effect is performed. Specifically, for example, if the current special replay is special replay 6, as shown in FIG. The auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled accordingly. For example, if the current special replay is special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like. The pressing order to be notified may be randomly determined by lottery or the like. Then, in step S5508, the notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the special RT notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S5504 that there is no space in the black BAR stop counter, or if it is determined in step S5506 that even though there is space, it was not won in the notification lottery, in step S5509, the current push order As a notification effect, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a press order notification effect for non-stopping of the black bar is performed. Specifically, for example, if the current special replay is special replay 6, as shown in FIG. The auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled accordingly. For example, if the current special replay is special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like. The pressing order to be notified may be randomly determined by lottery or the like. After that, the special RT notification process is ended.

Next, the special replay winning process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 when the special replay wins will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 123. The special replay winning process is carried out as one of the full-stop performance setting processes (step S1710) in the performance setting process (FIG. 42).

First, in step S5601, it is determined from the stop result of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R whether or not a "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If it is stopped, it is determined in step S5602 whether the notification flag is set. If the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row in a situation where the notification flag is set, the process advances to step S5603, and the number of "black BAR" symbols stopped in the middle row is determined. Then, in step S5604, processing is performed to add the number grasped in step S5603 to the black BAR stop counter. For example, if one "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row, the black BAR stop counter will be incremented by 1, and three "black BAR" symbols will be stopped in the middle row, and if the number of black bars in the middle row is complete. Add 3 to the black bar stop counter.

In the following step S5605, an addition time notification effect is set. Specifically, the background color of the state rendering for the special RT state is changed to correspond to the value of the black BAR stop counter after addition. Then, in the subsequent step S5606, the notification flag is cleared, and then the special replay winning process is ended.

If it is determined in step S5601 that the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped in the middle row of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or in step S5602, the "black BAR" symbol is stopped but the notification flag is If it is determined that it has not been set, the process advances to step S5606, where the notification flag is cleared, and then the special replay winning process is ended. Note that in step S5606, if the notification flag is not set, that state is maintained.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

If the 1st BB or 2nd BB is won, it will be configured to move to a special RT state, and when the special replay win during the special RT state is won, the push order will be announced to indicate whether or not the 1st BB or 2nd BB has been won. The structure was designed to be performed through directing. By doing so, it is possible to change the stop result using the winning result (special replay) in the special RT state, and it is possible to realize the above-mentioned suggestion effect using the stop result.

Here, by providing a plurality of stop rolls for one result and making the stop roll different depending on the stop order, the stop roll can be set without complicating the lottery result. While it is possible to realize a production using , If push order notifications are made for game results that may have different advantages depending on the stop order, such as a push order bell or a push order replay, the configuration may be contrary to the purpose of restricting the execution of advantageous zone transition lottery. . In other words, if press order notification is performed in such a carryover state, press order notification may be performed indefinitely due to the act of intentionally delaying bonus winnings. In this regard, according to the above embodiment, the push order notification performance during special replay is performed as a push order notification performance that does not cause a change in the advantage for the player. It becomes possible to realize an effect that utilizes the difference in the number of stop results within a range that does not go against the purpose of restricting execution.

The structure is such that the suggestion performance using the stop result is performed by the cumulative number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol. By doing this, it becomes difficult to judge the content of the suggestion based on the suggestion from one game.In other words, the content is predicted based on the suggestions from multiple games, making it possible to enjoy the suggestion performance for a longer period of time. becomes.

In this case, in various special replays, by setting a stop order that results in a stop result in which no "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row, the above cumulative number of stops has already reached the upper limit of the suggested content. It becomes possible to generate a press order notification effect (generate a press order notification effect in which 0 pieces are stopped) even when the press order is not executed, and it becomes possible to eliminate the feeling of being in a race due to the fact that the effect is not performed.

By configuring the special replay winning notification performance in the special RT state to be executed according to the notification scenario that is set when transitioning to the special RT state, the suggestion performance that can be performed over multiple games as described above can be performed. , it is possible to easily carry out the special replay without using a configuration in which the special replay is performed while matching with the previous suggestion content at the time of winning.

When winning a special replay, even if the stop order happens to match the stop order corresponding to the black BAR stop in a situation where the press order notification effect is not occurring, the black BAR stop counter addition process and the addition time notification effect may not be performed. The configuration was such that it would not be performed. In addition, when winning a special replay, even if a press order notification effect occurs, if you fail to press the "black BAR" symbol, the 16th replay or 17th replay where the black BAR symbol does not stop The game wins. In this case as well, the addition process of the black BAR stop counter is not performed, the addition time notification effect is not performed, and the background color does not change. By doing this, during the special RT state, first of all, it creates a sense of anticipation for the press order notification effect to occur, and when the press order notification effect occurs, the press corresponding to the black BAR stop is created. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the fact that it is a sequential announcement performance. Furthermore, in order to change the background color, it is not only necessary to match the pressing order, but also to aim at the "black BAR" symbol and perform a stop operation, which changes the effect and leads to improved expectations after the special RT state. and the player's operations are closely associated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the level of expectation after the special RT state is changed depending on the skill of the player's stop operation, and it is possible to further improve the fun of the game operation.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration regarding the addition of the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section and the upper limit number of games (1500) in the advantageous section will be explained in detail.

First, the first specific combination processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 124. As already explained, the first specific combination process is a process that is performed when the lottery result of the game becomes a specific combination mainly in a situation where the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode.

As a change in this embodiment, in each of the above embodiments, the challenge mode lottery process (step S813) is carried out regardless of whether the challenge mode is in progress, and if the challenge mode is won again during the challenge mode, the challenge mode The configuration in which an additional number of games is added will be changed to a mode transition lottery or an additional lottery depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

That is, the processing related to the lottery for transition to the attack mode in steps S6001 to S6012 is the same processing as the steps S801 to S812 described above. If a negative determination is made in step S6005 and it is determined that the attack mode is not selected, the process advances to step S6013. In step S6013, it is determined whether the challenge mode is in progress. If the challenge mode is not in progress, a challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S6014. The process in step S6014 is a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition the display mode from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and is a transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section.

In step S6015, it is determined whether the lottery process in step S6014 has been won. If the winning combination has not been won, the first specific combination processing is immediately ended. If the player has won, the process advances to step S6016, and a challenge mode winning flag is set. The processing from step S6016 to step S6020 is similar to the processing from step S816 to step S820 described above.

If it is determined in step S6013 that the game is in challenge mode, in this embodiment, as described above, in step S6021, a lottery process for increasing the number of games in challenge mode is executed. In step S6022, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S6021 has been won, that is, whether or not an additional number of games in the challenge mode will be added. If the number of games in the challenge mode is increased, the process proceeds to step S6023, and the current specific winning combination is determined. Determine whether or not it is a combination with a bonus. The processing from step S6023 to step S6027 is similar to the processing from step S821 to step S825 described above. If it is determined in step S6022 that no add-on occurs, the first specific combination processing is directly ended.

Next, the second section display process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 125.

The changes in this embodiment include processing for understanding and managing the number of remaining games that can be added in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section after performing addition processing for the number of games AG in the advantageous section (remaining game number management). The process, step S6103) is performed.

That is, in step S6101, as in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the section display is being displayed. If it is being displayed, in step S6102, as in step S2802, the number of advantageous section games AG is determined. Execute the addition process. Then, in step S6103, remaining game number management processing is executed. The processing from step S6104 to step S6111 is similar to the processing from step S2803 to step S2810 described above.

A supplementary explanation will be given of the data initialization processing in step S6107.

As already explained, by performing the initialization process, various counters and various flags used during the advantageous section are cleared. For example, even if the number of continuations in challenge mode or the number of continuations in attack mode remains, they are forcibly set to 0, and flags for display mode transition such as attack notification flag and attack mode flag (press order notification flag) is also cleared, so attack mode etc. will be forcibly terminated.

In this case, since the number of continuations of attack mode is forcibly set to 0 as described above, in the game number management process (FIG. 40), for example, the number of continuations of attack mode is set to 0 (in step S1414). Based on the affirmative determination (affirmative determination), an attack mode end command is output to the display control device 81. In addition, in the case of forced termination during VB mode or specialized zone, a VB mode termination command is output based on the number of VB mode continuations being forcibly set to 0, or the number of continuations of specialization zone is forcibly reduced to 0. The specialized zone end command will be output based on the fact that the command becomes 0. However, if the display control device 81 receives these various end commands overlappingly, it will receive the attack mode end command. The configuration is such that processing based on the above (processing for performing attack mode end effect) is performed with priority. As a result, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the attack mode end effect based on receiving the attack mode end command (step S2306).

As mentioned above, even when an advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the display effect for normal mode does not suddenly change, but the attack mode end effect occurs as a display effect, which may cause malfunctions of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that he/she has done so. In addition, when the game is forced to end, a different effect from the normal attack mode ending effect may be set, so that it is possible to more clearly understand that the game has been forced to end. Furthermore, if the main controller 101 is in the VB mode or the like when forcedly terminating, the main controller 101 may not output a VB mode termination command or the like, but may output only an attack mode termination command.

<Remaining number of games management process>
The remaining game number management process will be explained with reference to FIG. 126. In the remaining games management process, the remaining number of continuous games in various modes scheduled to be played in the advantageous section is grasped, and it is possible to add on the total number of remaining continuous games and the number of games already played in the advantageous section. Calculate the number of free games (number of remaining games).

That is, in step S6201, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. The number of portent games G1 represents the remaining number of games in the portent mode when the current situation is in the portent mode in an advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6202, the challenge mode continuation number G2 is determined. For example, if the current challenge mode is in an advantageous section, the challenge mode continuation number G2 represents the number of remaining challenge mode games, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6203, the number G3 of attack mode continuations is determined. For example, if the current attack mode is in an advantageous section, the attack mode continuation number G3 represents the number of remaining attack mode games, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (Figure 40). . In step S6204, the number of VB mode continuations G4 is determined. For example, when the current VB mode is in an advantageous section, the VB mode continuation number G4 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). . In step S6205, the specialized zone continuation number G5 is determined. For example, if the current specialized zone is in an advantageous zone, the number of continued specialized zones G5 represents the number of remaining specialized zone games, and is set by 1 for each game in the game number management process (Figure 40). Subtracted. In step S6206, the number of remaining BB games G6 is determined. The remaining number of BB games G6 represents the remaining number of games in the BB mode, for example, when the current situation is in the BB mode (bonus state) in an advantageous section, and each time the number of games management process (FIG. 40) is started. 1 is subtracted by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown) on the condition that the BB mode is in effect.

Here, for these continuation numbers G1 to G6, a value of 0 or more may be input even if the current mode or zone is not the corresponding one. Specifically, for example, in a situation where you have won a lottery to shift to VB mode but have not yet shifted to VB mode, the current mode is attack mode, and the number of VB mode continuations G4 is the continuation of VB mode. The situation is such that "60", which is the initial value of the number of games, remains input. In addition, if you win the lottery to enter Super Attack Mode during Challenge Mode, but have not yet entered Super Attack Mode, the current mode is Challenge Mode, and the special zone continuation number G5 is special. The initial value of the number of consecutive games in the attack mode, "5", remains input in the zone, and the initial value of the number of consecutive games in attack mode, "50", remains input in the attack mode continuation number G3. becomes.

In step S6207, a process is performed to calculate the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section by integrating G1 to G6 obtained in each process of steps S6201 to S6206. By performing such processing, it becomes possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section will continue. In the subsequent step S6208, processing is performed to calculate the total number of advantageous section games SG by adding the number of advantageous section games played so far (number of advantageous section games AG) and the remaining number of games ZG. Then, in step S6209, the number of free games (number of free games that can be added on, number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total number of advantageous section games SG from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous section. Perform processing.

After performing the process in step S6209, it is determined in step S6210 whether the number of free games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether there is a number of free games and it is possible to add more. If the number of free games FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the number of free games FG is 0 or less, in step S6211 a process is executed to set an excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d, and then the remaining game number management process is ended. The CPU 102 understands that the excess flag indicates a situation in which it is not possible to add on the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section, or more specifically, a situation where even if the number of games is added, the additional games will not be played due to forced termination at the 1500th game. This is a flag for

For example, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when an advantageous section is started by setting the challenge mode winning flag in the game ta1, the measurement of the number of advantageous section games AG is started from that game. After that, even if the advantageous section continues while repeating the mode transition such as challenge mode from ta1 to ta2, attack mode from ta2 to ta3, VB mode from ta3 to ta4, attack mode from ta4 to ta5, even if the advantageous section continues, The number of games up to ta5 is grasped by the number of games in the advantageous period AG. In addition, at the time of ta5, the number of remaining attack modes, etc. to continue is determined by the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG (integration of G1 to G6), and it is confirmed that the advantageous section will continue until ta6 at the time of ta5. are doing. In FIG. 127(a), ta6 is a game before ta7, which is 1500 games from ta1, and ta6 to ta7 correspond to the number of free games FG that can be added at the time of ta5. That is, in FIG. 127(a), the excess flag is not set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the advantageous section starting from tb1 passes through challenge mode from tb1 to tb2, attack mode from tb2 to tb3 and tb4 to tb5, and VB mode from tb3 to tb4 and tb5 to tb6. , it is assumed that the attack mode continues until tb7. In this case, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games from tb1 to tb7, and when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section at the time of tb7 ZG is added to the number of games in the advantageous section AG, it exceeds 1500. In other words, the advantageous section is forcibly ended at the time tb8 without using up the remaining number of games ZG of the advantageous section at the time tb7. In this case, the excess flag is set.

In a situation where the excess flag is set as described above, that is, in a game where the remaining number of games in the advantageous section from tb7 to tb8 is ZG, even if you win a specific combination and have an opportunity to add attack mode, in the end, Since the game is forcibly terminated at tb8, the games from tb7 to tb8 can become so-called exhaustion games, and the player's interest in the game may be greatly reduced.

Further, FIG. 127(c) shows an example of a case where a large number of additional games occurs in the specialized zone. For example, suppose that the super attack mode is won in the challenge mode that started from tc1, and the specialized zone is implemented from tc2 to tc3. In such specialized zones, a large number of consecutive games in attack mode is added, and even after completing the attack mode that started from TC3 to TC4, there is still a large number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. shall be. If the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG at the time of tc4 exceeds 1500 when added to the number of games in the advantageous section AG from tc1 to tc4, then the number of remaining games in the advantageous section remaining in large amount ZG at the time of tc4 is Everything becomes a digestion game as described above. If this happens, not only will the interest in the game drop significantly, but even though a large amount of extra money has been generated, it may actually become a factor that leads to a decrease in the level of attention. There may also be concerns about a decline in interest. In addition, the more advantageous sections that can become such an exhaustion game remain, the higher the possibility that an opportunity to increase will occur in the expansion game, and the greater the number of times that an opportunity for increase will occur. There is also a high possibility that players will be discouraged by the occurrence of meaningful additional opportunities.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in such a situation where the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less and adding the number of games may become meaningless, measures are taken to prevent the player from being disappointed. . Below, regarding this configuration, we will first explain the process when the number of free games FG is greater than 0, that is, when the additional opportunity is not meaningless, and then explain the process when the number of free games FG is 0 or less. explain.

<When the number of free games FG is greater than 0>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the game number addition lottery process in challenge mode and attack mode. For example, the challenge mode game number addition lottery process is carried out in step S6021 of the first specific combination process (FIG. 124). Further, the game number addition lottery process in the attack mode is carried out in step S914 (FIG. 33) in the second specific combination process and step S1001 (FIG. 34) in the third specific combination process. Since the process configuration is basically the same for the game number addition lottery process in either case, the case where it is carried out during the challenge mode, the case where it is carried out during the attack mode, etc. will be collectively explained below.

In step S6301, it is determined whether the above-mentioned excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set and the number of available games FG is greater than 0, the process advances to step S6302 and a process is performed to understand the type of the current specific combination. Then, in step S6303, an additional lottery table is acquired, and then in step S6304, an additional lottery is executed, and then the game number additional lottery process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 129, the bonus lottery table is set so that the bonus winning rate differs depending on the type of specific combination and the mode when the specific combination is won (the mode in which the bonus is applied).

In the challenge mode game number addition lottery, for example, the strong cherry has a 15% chance of winning the additional prize, and the weak watermelon has a 5% probability of winning the additional prize. It is possible to win an additional prize even in combinations with the 1st BB, with strong cherry duplication 1, there is a 5% probability of winning an additional prize, and weak watermelon duplication 1, there is a 15% probability of winning an additional prize. In other words, even for the same strong cherry or weak watermelon, the additional winning probability differs depending on whether or not there is overlap with the first BB, and there are some cases where the additional winning probability is higher and some cases where it is lower when there is overlap.

In the attack mode game number add-on lottery held during the attack mode or VB mode, for example, the strong cherry has a 15% chance of winning the add-on, and the weak watermelon has a 5% chance of winning the add-on. On the other hand, with strong cherry stack 1 and weak watermelon stack 1, there is a 100% probability that you will win an additional win, and if it is a duplicate role with the 1st BB, there is a high probability (both with a 100% probability) that you will win the number of games in attack mode. It is set up so that a surcharge will occur.

In the attack mode game increase lottery held during the special zone, it is set to have a high probability (100% probability) of winning the additional game regardless of the type of specific role, and various types other than the specific role. It is set up so that you can win additional prizes through push order replays and various push order bells. Therefore, the flowchart of the specialized zone processing (FIG. 42) shows a processing configuration in which the game number addition lottery processing is omitted.

If an additional winning is achieved in the game number addition lottery process of FIG. 128, an affirmative determination is made in the determination process (step S6022, step S915, step S1002) carried out after the game number addition lottery process, and an additional game number lottery process (step S6024, Steps S917 and S1004) are performed. Note that the additional game number lottery process may also be performed at the end of the bonus (FIG. 41, steps S1512, S1516) or during the specialized zone (FIG. 42, step S1602), and the process in this case is similar. It has a processing configuration. Therefore, the additional game number lottery process will be explained together with reference to FIG. 130.

In step S6401, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. In this case (in the case of additional winning), the excess flag is not set, so a negative determination is made and the process advances to step S6402. In step S6402, processing is performed to understand the type of specific combination. Then, in step S6403, the process of acquiring the number of additional games lottery table is performed, and then, in step S6404, the number of games lottery is executed, and then the number of additional games lottery process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 131, the add-on game number lottery table is set so that the number of add-on games differs depending on the type of specific winning combination and the mode at the time of winning the specific winning combination (mode subject to addition).

In the challenge mode lottery for the number of additional games, for example, in the case of strong cherry, the number of additional games will be any one of 2 to 20 games, and the average value is 15 games. In addition, in weak watermelon, the number of additional games will be increased from 5 to 15 games, and the average value is 6 games. Depending on the type of specific combination, not only the average number of additional games, The width is also set to be different.

In the attack mode extra game lottery that occurs during attack mode or VB mode, for example, in strong cherry, the extra game number will be between 20 and 200 games, and the average value is 30 games. , a higher number of games than in challenge mode may occur. In addition, for weak watermelon, an additional number of games occurs between 50 and 150 games, and the average value is 60 games. Regarding the width, it is set so that the number of games can be larger than that in challenge mode.

In the lottery for the number of additional games in attack mode that occurs during the special zone, for example, in the case of strong cherry, an additional number of games between 20 and 200 games will occur, which is the same as when it occurs in attack mode etc. However, the average value is 50 games, and the number of additional games may be greater than that occurring in attack mode or the like. Also, for weak watermelons, an additional number of games occurs between 50 and 150 games, and although the range is similar to that when it occurs in attack mode, the average value is 70 games. In any specific combination, the number of games is set to be more likely to be selected than in the case of attack mode or the like.

After the number-of-addition games lottery process is executed, the number-of-games addition process is performed in step S6025, step S918, step S1005, step S1513, step S1517, step S1603, and the like. Since the processing configurations for all of the game number addition processes are the same, they will be collectively described below with reference to FIG. 132.

In step S6501, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. Since the excess flag is not set this time, a negative determination is made and the process advances to step S6502. In step S6502, processing is performed to grasp the number of additional games based on the processing result of the above-described number of additional games lottery process. After that, in step S6503, the process of adding the number of additional games to the target number of consecutive games is performed, and then the main game number addition process is ended.

As a result of the above, the number of consecutive games in challenge mode and attack mode will be increased. As already explained, when an additional effect occurs, an additional effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65. Then, the player understands that it is now possible to play the advantageous section by adding the number of games notified in the additional effect.

<If the number of free games FG is 0 or less>
Next, a description will be given of processing when the number of free games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set.

Since the excess flag has been set, in the game number addition lottery process of FIG. 128, an affirmative determination is made in step S6301, and the process proceeds to step S6305 instead of the process for the additional lottery on the step S6302 side. In other words, even if a specific winning combination that triggers a bonus is won in a situation where the excess flag is set, the execution of the process for the bonus lottery is restricted and the process for the bonus lottery is not executed.

In step S6305, processing is performed to understand the type of the current specific combination. Then, in step S6306, after executing the process of acquiring the first special notification lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, in step S6307, the first special notification lottery determines whether or not to execute the first special notification. Execute processing.

As shown in FIG. 133, the first special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of executing the first special notification differs depending on the type of specific combination and the mode at the time of winning the specific combination. In other words, the first special notification lottery table corresponds to the additional lottery table, and the process of determining whether or not there is an excess flag when winning a specific winning combination is performed by combining the reference lottery table with the additional lottery table and the first special notification lottery table. It can also be said to be a process of making a difference.

In the present embodiment, the first special notification is a notification that presents information that may be useful to the player, and specifically, the first special notification is a notification that suggests setting values set in the slot machine 10. has been done. In other words, in a situation where the excess flag is set, instead of performing an additional lottery for the number of games in an advantageous section when a specific winning combination is won, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the first special notification as a suggestion of the set value. conduct.

Regarding the first special notification lottery table, specifically, between the first special notification lottery during attack mode or VB mode and the first special notification lottery in a specialized zone, the one in the specialized zone has a higher probability of winning. 1. The winning probability for each specific combination is set so that you can win the special notification lottery. For example, for a strong cherry that does not overlap with the 1st BB, there is a 15% chance of winning the first special notification lottery in attack mode or VB mode, but a 100% chance of winning the first special notification lottery in the specialized zone. 1 Win the special lottery. Also, regarding the weak watermelon, which does not overlap with the 1st BB, there is a 5% chance of winning the first special announcement lottery during attack mode or VB mode, but a 100% chance of winning the first special announcement lottery during the special zone. 1 Win the special lottery.

As already explained, it is easier to win the additional lottery when you are in the specialized zone than when you are in attack mode or VB mode, and it is easier to win the additional lottery when you are in the specialized zone than when you are in the attack mode or VB mode. If you win in the middle lottery, you can expect to win more games. In the first special notification lottery table, the winning probability of the first special notification lottery is set in accordance with the difference in the winning probability of such additional lottery and the expected value of the number of additional games at the time of winning, and the probability of winning the additional lottery is set. The more the first special announcement lottery is executed instead of the easier lottery, and the more the first special announcement lottery is executed instead of the additional lottery that is expected to increase the number of games, the more the first special announcement lottery is executed to players as the first special announcement. It is now easier to present potentially useful information, that is, suggest setting values.

In the first special notification lottery process during challenge mode, special combinations such as strong cherry and weak cherry that do not overlap with the 1st BB will have a high probability (100% probability) of winning the first special notification lottery. It is set. Therefore, in the challenge mode, if a specific winning combination is won in a situation where the excess flag is set, a setting value suggestion will occur with a high probability (100% probability). On the other hand, in the combination of strong cherry overlap 1 and weak cherry overlap 1, which overlap with the 1st BB, it is set so that you will win the first special notification lottery with a lower probability (30% probability) than in the case of non-overlap. There is. Therefore, in a situation where the excess flag is set during challenge mode, if a stopping result that wins a prize such as a strong cherry appears as a specific combination, there is a high probability that the set value will be suggested unless it overlaps with the 1st BB. If the effect occurs and it overlaps with the first BB, the setting value suggestion effect will occur with a lower probability.

In the first special notification lottery process during attack mode or VB mode, for specific combinations such as strong cherry or weak cherry that do not overlap with the 1st BB, there is a high probability (100% probability) that the first special notification lottery will be selected. He is set to win. Therefore, if a specific winning combination is won in a situation where the excess flag is set in these modes, a setting value suggestion will occur with a high probability (100% probability). On the other hand, in the combination of strong cherry overlap 1 and weak cherry overlap 1, which overlap with the 1st BB, it is set so that you will win the first special notification lottery with a lower probability (30% probability) than in the case of non-overlap. There is. Therefore, in these modes, if the excess flag is set and a stopping result that wins a prize, such as a strong cherry, appears as a specific combination, there is a high probability that the set value will be achieved unless it overlaps with the 1st BB. A suggestive effect occurs, and if it overlaps with the first BB, a suggestive effect of the set value will occur with a lower probability.

Here, the present slot machine 10 is configured such that once the challenge mode is shifted to the attack mode or the like, it does not return to the challenge mode even if the attack mode ends (FIG. 30). Therefore, during challenge mode in a situation where the excess flag is set, it means that challenge mode does not win the lottery to switch to attack mode etc., and as a result of repeating additions and bonus wins, etc., the upper limit of the advantageous section A situation can be considered when the number of games is reached, and it can be said that this is a situation that almost never occurs in reality. However, if such a situation were to occur, it would be a case where the player continues to miss the lottery to switch to attack mode, etc., so in order to follow up on such a situation, the first special notification is generated with a high probability. . The reason why the occurrence rate of the 1st special notification is lower when there is an overlap with the 1st BB is that in the case of an overlap with the 1st BB, you can at least benefit from winning the 1st BB. This is to ensure a balance between

Comparing with the top-up lottery, if we focus on whether there is overlap with the first BB, for example, in the top-up lottery, during attack mode or VB mode, a weak cherry that does not overlap with the first BB will have a 10% chance. You will win with a 100% probability in the Weak Cherry Duplication 1, which is a combination with the 1st BB, and you will win the additional lottery with a 10 times higher probability. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery, during attack mode or VB mode, there is a 10% probability of winning with a weak cherry that is not a duplicate role with the 1st BB, and with a weak cherry duplicate 1 that is a duplicate role with the 1st BB. There is a 30% probability of winning, and although the probability of winning in the first special notification lottery is higher for the combination with the 1st BB, it is lower than the ratio in the case of the additional lottery.

Furthermore, in the additional lottery in the specialized zone, both the weak cherry, which is not an overlapping combination with the 1st BB, and the weak cherry overlap, which is an overlapping combination with the 1st BB, will be won with a 100% probability. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery in the specialized zone, there is a 100% probability of winning with a weak cherry that does not overlap with the 1st BB, and a 30% probability with a weak cherry overlap 1 that overlaps with the 1st BB. The probability of winning is lower for the winning combination with the 1st BB.

In other words, in the additional lottery, those who overlap with the 1st BB have a higher chance of winning the additional lottery, and in the 1st special notification lottery, those who overlap with the 1BB have a higher chance of winning the 1st special notification lottery. The percentage is set to be lower than the percentage in the case of an additional lottery. In other words, when a stop result that results in a special winning prize appears, if an additional lottery is held, the person who overlaps with the 1st BB is likely to win the additional lottery. In the case where the first special notification lottery is held without the additional lottery, even if it overlaps with the first BB, there is less hope for winning in the notification lottery than in the additional lottery.

Here, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and forced termination processing of the advantageous section (steps S6105 to S6107) is performed, various counters and various flags related to the display mode and push order notification are initialized. On the other hand, information regarding the gaming state (eg, RT setting flag and bonus winning flag) is held without being initialized. In other words, if the game that undergoes the forced termination process is in a bonus state or is in a carryover state with the bonus winning flag set, such bonus state or carryover state will not be erased but will be retained. . As already explained, in the bonus state, you can expect to win bonus small/medium winning combinations 1 to 3 with a high probability, regardless of whether or not there is press order notification, and you can expect an increase in medals. In other words, if the forced termination process is performed during the bonus state, although the game does not return to the attack mode or the like after the bonus ends, it does not affect the expected medal acquisition value during the bonus state.

In this case, if you win a winning combination with the 1st BB in a situation where the excess flag is set, the additional lottery will not be held, but at least you will be able to enjoy the benefits based on the 1st BB winning. Therefore, it can be said that this is a more favorable result for the player than the case where there is no overlap with the first BB. Therefore, in this embodiment, if it is a combination with the first BB, the probability of winning the first special notification lottery is set low to ensure a balance with the benefits of winning the first BB.

After executing the first special notification lottery in step S6307, it is determined in step S6308 whether or not the first special notification lottery has been won. If you have won the notification lottery, the first special notification execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S6309. If you have not won the notification lottery, step S6309 is performed. In S6310, processing is performed to set the first special notification non-execution command as an output target to the display control device 81. The first special notification execution command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the first special notification lottery has been held and that the notification lottery has been won, and the first special notification non-execution command is , is a command for causing the display control device 81 to understand that the first special notification lottery was held and that the person did not win the notification lottery. After executing the process of step S6309 or step S6310, the game number addition lottery process ends.

Here, in the game number addition lottery process, if each process for the first special notification is performed due to the excess flag being set, the subsequent process of determining whether or not there is an additional winning (step S6022, step S915, Step S1002, etc.) is configured to make an affirmative determination. More specifically, in the process of determining whether or not there is an additional lottery win, an affirmative determination is made when the additional lottery is won and the excess flag is set.

If the excess flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S6401 of the number-of-addition games lottery process in FIG. 130, and the number-of-additions-games lottery process is ended without performing a lottery for the number of additional games. Also, in the game number addition process in FIG. 132, an affirmative determination is made in step S6501, and the game number addition process is ended without performing the game number addition process. That is, when the number of free games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, no processing is substantially performed in the additional game number lottery process or the additional game number process.

On the other hand, additional command setting processing (step S6026, step S919, step S1006, step S1514, step S1518, step S1604) is carried out after the additional game number lottery process or the additional game number addition process that does not perform these substantive processes. Now, regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag, processing is performed to set the additional command. By doing this, even in a situation where the excess flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45) on the display control device 81 side, and the additional effect setting process is activated. That will happen.

<Setting process for additional effects>
Next, the processing of the display control device 81 when receiving the first special notification execution command or the first special notification non-execution command will be described with reference to FIG. 134. As already explained, the additional effect setting process is a process executed in step S1907 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45).

In step S6601, it is determined whether either the first special notification execution command or the first special notification non-execution command is received. The case where no command is received is the case where only the additional command is received without the excess flag being set in the main controller 101. In this case, the process advances to step S6602, and processing for determining the number of add-on games is performed based on the received add-on command. The processing from step S6602 to step S6608 is similar to the processing from step S2101 to step S2107 described above.

In this case, for example, if you win a specific combination in attack mode, etc., a chance notification effect will occur as shown in FIG. The operation prompts the player to establish such a game result winning prize. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(b), an additional notification effect corresponding to the current number of additional games is generated, and it becomes possible to understand that an additional number of consecutive games such as attack mode has occurred.

If it is determined in step S6601 that any first special notification command has been received, the process advances to step S6609. In step S6609, first special notification setting processing is performed. After performing the first special notification setting process, the additional effect setting process is ended.

In the first special notification setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 135, it is determined in step S6701 whether the first special notification command received this time is a first special notification execution command. If the command is not the first special notification execution command but the first special notification non-execution command, the first special notification setting process is immediately terminated. That is, in this embodiment, the first special notification non-execution command is used to inform the display control device 81 that an additional opportunity has occurred and that neither the additional effect nor the first special notification will be performed even though the additional opportunity has occurred. It can also be said to be a command to do so.

If it is determined in step S6701 that the command is the first special notification execution command, the process advances to step S6702, and a process of determining the current setting value is executed. Note that when the winning probability setting process is performed in the main processing of the main control device 101, a setting value command including information on the corresponding setting value is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81, by storing such setting value commands in a predetermined area, it is possible to grasp the current setting values.

In step S6703, a first special notification type lottery process is executed. The first special notification type lottery process is a process of lottery for the type of the first special notification, which is either the first special notification A shown in FIG. 137(a) or the first special notification B shown in FIG. 137(b). This is a process of determining the first special notification by lottery. In the first special notification A, the auxiliary display section 65 displays, for example, an image of a military man who is the main character, and more specifically, an image of the military man holding a weapon. Further, in the first special notification A, an image of a character corresponding to a winning combination corresponding to the type of the current game result is displayed. Then, when the first special announcement A is performed, the speaker 64 emits, for example, the line "I will win and survive!!" in a deep male voice as a sound effect. In the first special notification B, the auxiliary display section 65 displays, for example, an image of the main character raising a battle cry while holding a weapon in one hand. Furthermore, in the first special notification B, an image of a character corresponding to a winning combination is displayed. When the first special notification B is issued, the sound effect is, for example, a man's roar, ``Oooooo!'', emitted from the speaker 64. In other words, the player can clearly understand the difference between the first special notification A and the first special notification B based on the content displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64.

The probability of which of the first special notification A and the first special notification B will be selected differs depending on the setting value. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 137(c), if the setting value is "1", the first special notification A will be selected with a probability of 100% and the first special notification B will not be selected. Moreover, if the setting value is "2", the first special notification A will be selected with a probability of 75%, and the first special notification B will be selected with a probability of 25%. If the set value is "3", both the first special notification A and the first special notification B are selected with a probability of 50%. If the set value is "4", the first special notification A will be selected with a probability of 25%, and the first special notification B will be selected with a probability of 75%. If the set value is "5" or "6", the first special notification B will be selected and the first special notification A will not be selected with a probability of 100%.

That is, in the first special notification type table in the above example, when the first special notification A is performed, the setting value is likely to be low, and when the first special notification B is performed, the setting value is likely to be high. Become. More specifically, by performing the first special notification B, it is determined that the set value is "2" or more, and by performing the first special notification A, it is determined that the set value is not more than "4". is confirmed.

In this way, it is possible to predict the current setting value from the type of first special notification that may be executed when a specific winning combination is won. In addition, if the setting value is "2" to "4", the ratio of the first special notification A and the first special notification B when the first special notification is generated multiple times is "2" to "4". It is also possible to narrow down the search to find out which one.

After performing the first special notification type lottery process in step S6703, it is determined in step S6704 whether the result of the lottery process is the first special notification A, and if it is the first special notification A, After controlling the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 to execute the first special notification A in step S6705, the first special notification setting process ends. If it is determined in step S6704 that it is not the first special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to execute the first special notification B in step S6706, and then the first special notification setting is performed. Finish the process.

FIG. 138 shows a difference in the notification contents when a specific winning combination is won while the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section has been exhausted in the example of FIG. 127.

That is, as shown in FIG. 138(a), when the number of free games FG is larger than 0, and when the specific combination is won while the remaining number of games ZG is being used up, an additional lottery is executed. If the player wins the additional lottery, a lottery for the number of additional games is performed, the corresponding number of games is added, and an additional notification effect for the corresponding number of games is generated.

Here, in a situation where the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the lottery table for the additional lottery and the lottery table for the number of additional games are configured to use a common table regardless of the size of the value of the number of available games FG. . In other words, if the number of available games FG is greater than 0, for example, if you win Strong Cherry Duplication 1 as the specific combination, you will win the additional lottery with a 100% probability (FIG. 129). Then, regardless of the value of the number of free games FG, a lottery is held for the number of additional games of 10G to 200G (30G on average), and an additional amount is generated according to the lottery result (FIG. 131). Therefore, an additional number of games that is larger than the number of free games FG may occur.For example, even though the number of free games FG is 5, an additional production of 200 games may occur. obtain.

By doing so, not only the configuration regarding the additional lottery can be simplified, but also the following effects can be expected. In other words, assuming that the upper limit of the advantageous section is defined, as the number of free games FG decreases, there is a possibility that even if a specific combination that triggers an additional lottery is won, there will be no interest in the number of additional games. expensive. On the other hand, assuming that information useful to the player can be presented by the occurrence of an addition exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous zone, that is, by the number of free games FG becoming 0 or less, the number of free games In a situation where the number of free games FG is around 0, it is preferable for FG to be less than or equal to 0. Furthermore, if players are given the impression that exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section is desirable as described above, it will be more advantageous for the player to have a payout that greatly exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous section than to barely exceed the upper limit. It is thought that it is easy to expect that such an event will occur. Therefore, as mentioned above, if the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the number of additional games is determined regardless of its value, so that the actual advantage and disadvantage will differ depending on the size of the number of additional games when the upper limit is exceeded. It becomes possible to realize a gaming experience as if it had an influence on the player's advantage or disadvantage, by using the impression that the player can feel, without making the game more difficult.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less, if a specific winning combination is won while the remaining number of games ZG is being used, the first special notification may be executed. In this case, since it is possible to narrow down the set value depending on the type of the first special notification, the winning of the specific winning combination that is currently in progress can be made favorable without giving the impression that it is a so-called loss. This can be used as a motivation for continuing the game after the end of the section, or as a basis for deciding whether to continue the game or not.

As shown in Figure 138(c), if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less early in the advantageous zone due to a large amount of additions occurring in specialized zones, etc., it will take a long time to use up the remaining number of games ZG. It may take place over a period of time. On that point, in the first special notification type table, the setting values can be narrowed down by the occurrence of the first special notification multiple times, so the game itself that narrows down the setting values will also end early. The occurrence of events that would otherwise occur is suppressed. Therefore, even if it takes a long time to play the remaining number of games ZG as shown in FIG. 138(c), it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the situation where the number of free games FG in the advantageous section is 0 or less, if a specific combination is won as an additional opportunity role, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the first special notification will be performed as a suggestion of the set value. The configuration is such that it is possible to do so. By doing this, it can be used as a remedy against the fact that even if an increase based on winning a specific winning combination occurs, it may be meaningless, and in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less, the game can be considered as an exhaustion game. It is possible to avoid a decline in interest in

In particular, in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less, if a specific combination is won, each time the specific combination is won during the advantageous period, without waiting for the advantageous period to end forcibly, the 1. By making special announcements possible, it is possible to ensure the significance of the lottery results of each game, which can be a so-called extinguishing game, especially the special combination, and to suitably increase the attention to the game. Become.

If you win a specific role as an additional opportunity role in a situation where the number of free games FG in the advantageous section is 0 or less, in the configuration where the setting value is suggested, the specific role as an additional opportunity role is won. The winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value, and the winning probability of the additional lottery when winning the particular combination and the number of additional games are also the same regardless of the setting value. In other words, the winning probability of the specific combination that triggers the occurrence of a set value suggestion effect is the same regardless of the set value, and the chance of the suggestion effect occurring is equal regardless of the set value. Therefore, for example, the probability of occurrence of a setting value's suggestion effect itself differs depending on the setting value, and compared to a configuration in which the probability of occurrence is low at a low setting, there is an event where even the suggestion effect cannot be enjoyed due to a low setting. This makes it possible to equally provide a chance to enjoy the setting value suggestion effect, that is, the first special notification, regardless of the setting value.

In this case, the higher the probability of winning the additional lottery for a specific role, the higher the probability of occurrence of the set value suggestion effect, which makes it easier to understand that the suggestion effect occurs as a substitute for the increase in the number of games. By making it possible to easily predict the likelihood of a suggestive performance based on the probability of an additional lottery, and preparing mentally for the occurrence of a suggestive performance, it is possible to suitably increase the attention to the suggestive performance. Become.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, a mode transition lottery during an advantageous section that occurs in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less will be described. The mode transition lottery during the advantageous section includes the attack mode (super attack mode) transition lottery during challenge mode, the VB mode transition lottery during attack mode, the specialized zone transition lottery during VB mode, and the like. If you win the lottery to enter attack mode, you will be transferred to attack mode with an initial number of games of 50. Therefore, winning the lottery to enter attack mode means that the 50 games in the advantageous section will be added. It can also be said to be destroyed. In addition, if you win the lottery to transition to VB mode, you will transition to VB mode with an initial number of games of 60 games, so winning the lottery to transition to VB mode means that you will be able to add 60 games in the advantageous section. It can also be said that If you win the lottery to move to the specialized zone, you will move to the 5-game specialized zone, so winning the lottery to move to the specialized zone means that the 5 games in the advantageous zone will not be added. It can also be said to be destroyed.

In other words, even if you win a lottery for each mode transition, the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section will be added, and even if you win the lottery for the mode transition in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less, the game It can be meaningless to some people. Therefore, in this modification, special notification can be executed even when the player wins such a mode shift lottery.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing lottery processing in challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode in this modification. The challenge mode lottery process is a process carried out in step S6014 in the first specific combination process (FIG. 124), and the attack mode lottery process is carried out in step S6004 in the first specific combination process (FIG. 124). The VB mode lottery process is a process executed in step S903 in the second specific combination process (FIG. 33). Since these processes generally have the same processing configuration, they will be explained together below.

That is, in these mode lottery processes, in step S6801, the type of specific combination is grasped, and in step S6802, a process of acquiring a mode lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed. Then, in step S6803, a mode transition lottery is performed.

As shown in FIG. 141, the mode lottery table is set so that the probability of winning each mode transition lottery differs depending on the current display mode and the type of specific combination that triggers the lottery. For example, during challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery to enter attack mode is 90% with strong cherries, while 30% with weak cherries, and strong cherries are better than weak cherries. The probability of winning the migration lottery is high. On the other hand, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to attack mode in a similar challenge mode is 30% with strong cherry stack 1, which is a duplicate role with the 1st BB, and 40% with weak cherry stack 1. There is a probability of winning, and the probability of winning the transfer lottery is higher with 1 weak cherry overlap than with 1 strong cherry overlap.

The probability of winning the lottery for switching to VB mode during attack mode differs depending on the rank of attack mode. For example, in the lottery to transition to VB mode based on strong cherries, if the rank of attack mode is 1, there is a 15% probability of winning, and if the rank of attack mode is 4, there is a 60% probability of winning, and if the rank of attack mode is 4, there is a 60% probability of winning. It is set so that the higher the value, the higher the probability of winning the lottery for switching to VB mode. On the other hand, in the transition lottery to the VB mode, the winning probability is set for each specific combination that is an overlapping combination with the first BB so that it is difficult to win (not win) the transition lottery. However, the bonus lottery is set so that it is easier to win in the case of duplicates than in the case of non-overlaps (Figure 129), and if a stop result corresponding to a specific role appears, it is called 1st BB plus bonus. It is now possible to play the game while looking forward to seeing which benefit will be enjoyed, the benefit or the benefit of the VB mode.

In the various mode lottery processing of FIG. 139, after the mode transition lottery is performed in step S6803, it is determined in step S6804 whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the mode lottery process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S6805.

In step S6805, processing is executed to grasp the type of specific combination. Then, in step S6806, a process for acquiring a second special notification lottery table is executed, and in step S6807, a second special notification lottery process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 142, the second special announcement lottery table has a high probability (100% probability) of the execution lottery of the second special announcement, which is held in place of the attack mode transition lottery during the challenge mode. is set to win. As already explained, a challenge mode in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less is a case where the challenge mode continues indefinitely without winning the attack mode etc. during the challenge mode. is a situation that almost never occurs. Therefore, if such a situation were to occur, the second special notification is generated with a high probability in order to compensate for the previous effort, that is, to reward the effort.

On the other hand, in the second special notification lottery performed as a substitute for the VB mode transition lottery during the attack mode, the winning probability of the second special notification execution lottery is set to vary depending on the type of specific combination. As already explained, if a specific winning combination is won in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the first special notification execution lottery is performed instead of the additional lottery. That is, if a specific winning combination is won in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the execution lottery of the first special notification and the execution lottery of the second special notification are performed. Each mode transition lottery and additional lottery are a processing system in which the mode transition lottery is conducted first, and then the additional lottery is implemented, and the execution lottery for the second special announcement is higher than the execution lottery for the first special announcement. It is done first. In this modified example, detailed explanation with reference to the drawings will be omitted, but if the lottery for executing the second special notification is won, the lottery for executing the first special notification is not won. In other words, the first special notification and the second special notification are not executed overlappingly in the same game.

In the second special notification lottery, which is executed in place of the transition lottery from attack mode to VB mode, the second special notification lottery is set to have the same probability of winning in the second special notification lottery as the winning probability in the first special notification lottery ( Figure 133). In other words, in this modification, if a specific combination is won during the attack mode, the execution lottery for the second special notification is held, and the execution lottery for the first special notification is also held, and the probability of winning is the same in either execution lottery. They have something in common. Therefore, the lottery table can be shared in both lottery executions, and the configuration is simplified.

In this case, the winning probability is set not to exceed 50% for any specific combination, and the winning probability is 30% or less for each particular combination. Therefore, an event in which a player does not win in the second special notification lottery and also does not win in the first special notification lottery occurs in about half (49%) of the times when a specific winning combination is won. By suppressing the probability of special announcements occurring in this way, it is possible to ensure the rarity of special announcements in a configuration where both special announcements can be made, and it is possible to suitably increase the attention level when special announcements occur. becomes.

After executing the second special notification lottery in step S6807 in the various mode lottery processing, it is determined in step S6808 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, the second special notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S6809, and then the mode lottery process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6808 that the notification lottery has not been won, the present mode lottery process is immediately ended. The processing of the display control device 81 when receiving the second special notification command will be described later.

Next, the specialized zone lottery in the VB mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 shows part of the winning result handling process.

As already explained, the VB mode is basically executed in the third RT state, and the lottery process for each game is performed with reference to the third RT state lottery table (FIG. 25). Then, the player moves to the specialized zone based on the 7th replay winning prize, which has a 5% probability of winning in the case of winning BAR Replay 1 (IV=11). In other words, if winning BAR Replay 1 is used as a trigger for a lottery to move to a specialized zone, the probability of winning a lottery to move to a specialized zone triggered by the BAR Replay 1 is 5%, and other game results ( If other special combinations) are used as an opportunity, the specialization zone transfer lottery will not be won (FIG. 142).

In the winning result handling process, if a negative determination is made in step S1310, it is determined in step S6901 whether or not the seventh re-game winning has been achieved. If the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S6902 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current seventh re-game winning occurred during the VB mode. If it is the seventh re-game win in the VB mode, it is assumed that the conditions for transition to the specialized zone are satisfied, and the process advances to step S6903. If a negative determination is made in step S6901 or step S6902, it is determined that the conditions for transition to the specialized zone are not satisfied, and the winning result handling process is immediately terminated.

In step S6903, processing is executed to set a specialized zone flag, in step S6904, processing is executed to set a specialized zone start command as an output target to the display control device 81, and in step S6905, specialized zone continuation is executed. Start counting. The processing from step S6903 to step S6905 is similar to the processing from step S1318 to step S1320.

In the following step S6906, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S6907. In step S6907, a process for acquiring a second special notification lottery table is executed, and in the subsequent step S6908, a second special notification lottery is executed.

In the second special notification lottery, which is executed instead of the transition lottery to the specialized zone in VB mode, as shown in FIG. The probability of winning is determined so that the second special notification is executed. Furthermore, in the second special notification lottery executed instead of the special zone, the probability of winning is determined so that the second special notification will not be executed for other game results (other specific combinations). In other words, the conditions for executing the second special notification are determined to be equivalent to the conditions for transition to the specialized zone.

After executing the second special notification lottery in step S6908, it is determined in step S6909 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the player has won the notification lottery, the second special notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S6910, and then the winning result handling process ends. Further, if it is determined that the player has not won the notification lottery, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated.

The second special notification setting process of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described with reference to FIG. 143. The second special notification setting process is executed as one of the other processes (step S1711) of the effect setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81.

First, in step S7001, it is determined whether a second special notification command has been received. If it has not been received, the second special notification setting process is immediately ended. If it has been received, the process advances to step S7002, and a process of adding 1 to the second special notification counter TH is performed. The second special notification counter TH is a counter for keeping track of the number of times the second special notification has been performed. In the following step S7003, processing is performed to understand the setting values. After executing the process of acquiring the second special notification type table in step S7004, the second special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7005.

In the second special notification type table, the type of second special notification is set to differ depending on the value of the second special notification counter TH and the set value. Specifically, as the second special notification, a second special notification A shown in FIG. 144(a) and a second special notification B shown in FIG. 144(b) are provided. In the second special notification A, for example, a snake hub character is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the sound effect of the snake sticking out its tongue is emitted from the speaker 64 as a sound effect. . In the second special notification B, for example, a mongoose character is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the sound effect of the mongoose is emitted from the speaker 64 as a mongoose cry. That is, the player can clearly understand the difference between the second special notification A and the second special notification B based on the display content on the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), the second special notification type table is set such that the second special notification to be selected differs between setting values 1, 3, and 5 and setting values 2, 4, and 6. There is. Specifically, if the second special notification counter TH is 1, then the second special notification A is selected at 60% and the second special notification B is selected at 40% at set values 1, 3, and 5. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 1, at set values 2, 4, and 6, the second special notification A is selected at 40%, and the second special notification B is selected at 60%. If the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, the second special notification A is selected at 80% and the second special notification B is selected at 20% at set values 1, 3, and 5. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, at set values 2, 4, and 6, the second special notification A is selected at 20% and the second special notification B is selected at 80%. If the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second special notification A is selected at 100% and the second special notification B is not selected at the set values 1, 3, and 5. On the other hand, when the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second special notification B is selected at 100% with the setting values 2, 4, and 6, and the second special notification A cannot be selected.

In other words, the setting value of the second special notification can be narrowed down to even/odd numbers depending on its type, and the larger the value of the second special notification counter TH, the more the number of executions of the second special notification increases. The easier it is to narrow down the even/odd numbers.

As already explained, in a configuration where the execution lottery for the second special announcement and the execution lottery for the first special announcement can be held at the same time, if the lottery for the execution of the second special announcement is won, the lottery for the execution of the first special announcement The structure is such that no one wins in the actual lottery. In other words, the second special notification is easier to execute than the first special notification.

This is because the second special notification is a setting value suggestion that allows you to narrow down the setting value to an even/odd number, while the first special notification is a setting value suggestion that allows you to narrow down the setting value to be high or low. The second special notification is a setting value suggestion that may be narrowed down by multiple executions, while the first special notification is a setting value suggestion that may be narrowed down by one execution. This is due to differences such as . In other words, due to the above-mentioned differences, it is possible to gradually narrow down the setting values with the second special notification, and it is possible to enjoy the game in which the setting values are narrowed down for a long time. If the configuration is such that the second special notification is executed with priority, it becomes possible to suitably implement a game that performs the narrowing down.

After executing the second special notification type lottery process in step S7005, the process advances to step S7006, and it is determined whether or not the result of the type lottery process is second special notification A. If it is the second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification A is performed in step S7007, and then the second special notification setting process is ended. If it is not the second special notification A, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification B is performed in step S7008, and then the second special notification setting process is ended.

As mentioned above, even if it is not an additional number of games, even if it is a mode transition lottery, if the mode transition as a result of the lottery does not affect the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section, then If the configuration is such that the second special notification as a setting value suggestion is made, it is possible to compensate for the mode transition lottery being held in a situation where the excess flag is set.

When a mode transition lottery is held, instead of a configuration in which the second special notification is performed instead of the mode transition lottery, the second special notification is executed together with the mode transition lottery, so that, for example, an excess flag is set. In certain situations, a transition to VB mode may occur, and a transition to a specialized zone may also occur. In particular, the specialized zone is a zone where it is easy to win the additional lottery, and in a situation where the excess flag is set, it can also be said to be a zone where the first special notification is likely to be executed. In other words, especially with regard to specialized zones, by configuring the setting value suggestion along with the transition lottery, rather than performing the first setting value suggestion as a substitute for the transition lottery, it is possible to move to a zone where it is easy to make the setting value suggestion. At the same time, it may be configured to suggest a set value as compensation for the additional number of games (additional 5 games) due to the transition to the specialized zone.

By making the second special notification a setting value suggestion whose ease of narrowing down the setting value differs depending on the number of times it is executed, it becomes easier to narrow down the setting value when the excess flag is set early. . By doing so, it is possible to provide enjoyment when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less relatively early.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, a value corresponding to the number of additional games is stored in a predetermined area based on an additional opportunity that occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set. First, changes in the number of additional games lottery process and the number of additional games lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 145.

In the game number addition lottery process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 145(a), in step S7101 a process is executed to grasp the type of specific combination, in step S7102 an additional lottery table is obtained, and in step S7103 After executing the additional lottery at , the game number additional lottery process ends. That is, in this modification, the additional lottery is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

In addition, in the add-on game number lottery process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 145(b), in step S7111, a process for grasping the type of specific combination is executed, and in step S7112, an add-on game number lottery table is acquired. After executing the game number lottery in step S7113, the main additional game number lottery process ends. That is, in this modified example, the lottery for the number of additional games is also executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

The game number addition process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 146.

First, in step S7201, it is determined whether an excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the number of additional games is added in steps S7202 and S7203, and then the main number of games added processing is ended. These steps S7202 and S7203 are similar to steps S6502 and S6503.

If it is determined in step S7201 that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S7204. In step S7204, a process for understanding the processing result of the number-of-addition games lottery process, that is, a process for understanding the number of additional games is performed. Then, in step S7205, the number of additional games grasped in step S7204 is added to the number of eliminated games EG provided in the various counter areas 106e. After executing the process of step S7205, the game number addition process ends.

In other words, in this modified example, even if an opportunity for addition occurs in a situation where the number of free games FG in the advantageous section is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform addition. A lottery will be held for the number of games to be played. Then, the result of the game number lottery is not added to the corresponding number of continuations of the advantageous section, but is added to a separately provided number of extinguished games EG.

Next, the additional command setting process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 147. The additional command setting process includes step S6026 of the first specific combination process (FIG. 124), step S919 of the second specific combination process (FIG. 33), step S1006 of the third specific combination process (FIG. 34), and end determination process ( This process is executed in steps S1514 and S1518 in FIG. 41), step S1604 in the specialized zone process (FIG. 42), and the like.

In step S7301, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, in step S7302, the target additional command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the additional command setting process ends. In this case, the display control device 81 performs an additional notification effect.

If it is determined in step S7301 that the excess flag is set, the process advances to step S7303, and a process of determining the number of extinguished games EG is executed. Then, in step S7304, a process of acquiring a third special notification lottery table is executed, and in step S7305, a third special notification lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 148(a), the third special notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the third special notification lottery differs depending on the value of the number of eliminated games EG, and It is set so that the larger the number, the easier it is to win. More specifically, if the number of extinguished games EG is 0, that is, if no additional prize has been won in the current game number additional lottery, the third special notification lottery is not won. When the number of eliminated games EG is from 1 to 50, that is, when the number of games from 1 to 50 is selected as the number of additional games this time, there is a 10% probability of winning the third special notification lottery. When the number of eliminated games EG is 51 to 100 and the number of games between 51 and 100 is selected as the number of additional games this time, there is a 30% probability of winning the third special notification lottery. If the number of eliminated games EG is between 101 and 200, and the number of games between 101 and 200 is selected as the number of additional games this time, there is a 50% probability of winning the third special notification lottery. If the number of eliminated games EG is 201 or more and the number of games of 201 or more is selected as the number of additional games this time, the third special notification lottery will be won with an 80% probability. In other words, the setting is such that the larger the number of games that are expected to be added, the easier it is to win the third special notification lottery.

After executing the third special notification lottery in step S7305, it is determined in step S7306 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If it has been won, a third special notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S7307. If a negative determination is made in step S7306, or after executing the process in step S7307, the process to clear the number of extinguished games EG to the initial value (0) is performed in step S7308, and then the additional command setting process ends. do.

The display control device 81 performs processing for executing the third special notification based on receiving the third special notification command. The processing configuration of this process is generally the same as the first special notification setting process and the second special notification setting process, so although the diagram is omitted, it is necessary to grasp the setting values and obtain the third special notification type table. , after performing the third special notification type lottery, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the corresponding type of third special notification.

As the type of the third special notification, for example, third special notification A, third special notification B, third special notification C, third special notification D, third special notification E, and third special notification F are set. The display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects of the speaker 64 are set to be different from each other, so that the player can understand which type of third special notification is being sent.

In the third special notification type table, as shown in FIG. 148(b), the type of third special notification to be selected is set to differ depending on the setting value. For example, if the set value is 1, the third special notification A will be selected with a probability of 100%, and the other third special notifications B to F will not be selected. If the set value is 2, the third special notification B will be selected with a probability of 60%, the third special notification C will be selected with a probability of 40%, and the other third special notifications will not be selected. If the setting value is 3, the third special notification A will be selected with a probability of 55%, the third special notification C will be selected with a probability of 45%, and the other third special notifications will not be selected. If the setting value is 4, the third special notification B will be selected with a probability of 50%, the third special notification C will be selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D will be selected with a probability of 5%, Other third special notifications are not selected. If the setting value is 5, the third special notification A will be selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification C will be selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D will be selected with a probability of 8%, The third special notification E is selected with a probability of 2%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the setting value is 6, the third special notification B will be selected with a probability of 40%, the third special notification C will be selected with a probability of 45%, the third special notification D will be selected with a probability of 11%, The third special notification E is selected with a probability of 1%, the third special notification F is selected with a probability of 3%, and the third special notification A is not selected.

That is, when the third special notification A is selected, it is determined that the set value is 1, 3, or 5, and when the third special notification B is selected, the set value is determined to be 2, 4, or 6. It is confirmed that one of the following is true. Further, when the third special notification C is selected, it is determined that the set value is 2 or more, and when the third special notification D is selected, it is determined that the set value is 4 or more, and similarly, the set value is determined to be 4 or more. In the third special notification E, it is determined that the set value is 5 or more, and in the third special notification F, it is determined that the set value is 6. Therefore, the setting values can be narrowed down by combining the types of the third special notification.

As described above, by temporarily storing the number of games that were supposed to be added to the number of extinguished games EG, and then drawing a lottery to execute the third special notification according to the value of the number of extinguished games EG, , it becomes possible to adjust the profit and loss with respect to the benefit (number of games) that the player was supposed to receive, depending on the ease with which the third special notification is executed.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, in Modification 2, the third special notification lottery is performed based on the set value as well as the value of the number of extinguished games EG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the additional command setting process in this modification.

In this modification, if it is determined in step S7401 that the excess flag is set, the number of extinguished games EG is determined in step S7403, and then the set value is determined in step S7404. After executing the process of acquiring the third special notification lottery table in step S7405, the third special notification lottery is executed in step S7406.

As shown in FIG. 150, the third special notification lottery table in this modification uses the value of the number of eliminated games EG and a set value as parameters, and is set so that the probability of winning the third special notification lottery is different. There is. For example, if the number of eliminated games EG is 50 or less, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 1/256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 6/256. Even if it is the number of eliminated games EG, it is set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of winning the third special notification lottery becomes. Further, even with the same set value, the larger the value of the number of eliminated games EG is, the higher the winning probability of the third special notification lottery is, which is similar to the second modification described above.

In the additional command setting process, the processes in step S7402 and steps S7407 to S7409 are the same as the processes in step S7302 and steps S7306 to S7308 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, by using not only the value of the number of extinct games EG but also the set value as a parameter for the third special announcement lottery itself, the number of branches for predicting the set value when various third special announcements are made increases. , it is possible to enhance the game in which the set value is predicted from the third special notification.

More specifically, if any of the third special announcements is made, it means that you have won the third special announcement lottery regardless of the setting value, in other words, the number of free games FG is 0. In the following situations, a case where the third special announcement is not made despite winning a specific role is a case where the player did not win the additional lottery, or a case where he won the additional lottery but the number of additional games. In addition to the case where the setting value is low, the cause is also the case where the setting value is low. In other words, the fact that any third special notification is performed can be weighted in predicting that the set value is high. In this case, assuming that the player desires a high setting value, even if the type of the third special notification may suggest a low setting that is undesirable for the player, the third special notification will be Based on the fact that the setting is being made, the player may judge that the setting is high rather than low, and the judgment becomes dull, and the enjoyment of the game of predicting the setting value increases.

<Modification 4>
In the above-mentioned variations 2 and 3, the third special notification is made each time a specific winning combination is won (when a bonus occurs), but in this variation, the third special notification is made when the advantageous section is forcibly ended. . FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this modification.

In step S7501, it is determined whether the section indicator is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the second section display process is ended. If it is being displayed, in step S7502, the number of games AG in the advantageous section is added, and in step S7503, remaining game management processing is executed. Then, in step S7504, it is determined whether the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit (1500). If the upper limit has been reached, in step S7505, processing is performed to grasp the total number of extinguished games TEG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The total number of eliminated games TEG corresponds to the number of eliminated games EG in the third modification, and is a counter to which a value corresponding to the number of games corresponding to the additional winning is added.

In other words, although a detailed explanation with figures is omitted, in this modification, the number of extinguished games EG is added in the process (step S7205) of adding the number of extinguished games to the number of extinguished games EG in the process of adding on the number of games (FIG. 146). Instead, processing is performed to add the number of additional games to the total number of extinguished games TEG. In addition, in this modification, if it is determined that the excess flag is set in the additional command setting process (step S7301, step S7401), the output setting of the target additional command is not performed. The configuration is such that each process related to the third special notification (steps S7303 to S7308, and steps S7403 to S7409) is not performed.

After determining the total number of extinguished games TEG in step S7505, a third special notification lottery table is obtained in step S7506, and a third special notification lottery is performed in step S7507. In the third special notification lottery table, for example, the parameter referred to in the table of FIG. 148(a) is replaced with the total number of extinguished games TEG from the number of extinguished games EG. That is, the larger the value of the total number of extinguished games TEG, the easier it is to win the third special notification lottery.

After executing the third special notification lottery in step S7507, it is determined in step S7508 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, the third special notification command is executed in step S7509. Perform the process of setting the output. If it is determined in step S7508 that the winning result has not been won, or after executing the process in step S7509, a process is performed in which the total number of extinguished games TEG is cleared to the initial value (0) in step S7510.

Each process for termination from step S7511 to step S7513 is similar to the process from step S6105 to step S6107 described above. Furthermore, in this modification, even if an affirmative determination is made in both steps S7514 and S7515 and the advantageous section ends before the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the process proceeds to steps S7511 to S7513. It is structured as follows. That is, the configuration is such that the data initialization process (step S7513) is executed even when the advantageous section ends before the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached. By doing so, it becomes possible to further clarify the distinction between advantageous sections and normal sections.

In addition, when executing the third special notification when forcibly ending the advantageous section as described above, for example, the third special notification may be configured to be executed as the end effect of the attack mode, or it may be configured to be executed as the end effect of the attack mode. It is also possible to perform the third special notification before or after the end effect, that is, separately from the end effect.

By doing as described above, even if the number of single top-up games is small, if a plurality of top-up opportunities occur, the third special notification is likely to be executed. Therefore, for example, even if a specific winning combination with a small average number of additional games, such as Weak Cherry, is won, it can be given meaning, and the gameplay will be improved after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less. can be improved.

Moreover, the longer the number of games since the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, the more likely the additional opportunity will occur multiple times, so in the above configuration, the third special notification is more likely to be executed. Therefore, even if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less quickly after moving to the advantageous zone, it is not possible to fully enjoy the games after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less. can.

In addition, in the above configuration, the third special notification lottery table is basically configured to use the numerical values of the table using the number of eliminated games EG, but it is also possible to create a separate table that uses the total number of eliminated games TEG as a parameter. Good too. Since the total number of eliminated games TEG corresponds to the integrated value of the number of additional games after the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, it can be said that the value tends to be larger than the number of eliminated games EG. For example, if the winning probability of the third special notification lottery is different depending on whether the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG exceeds the upper limit of the number of additional games (300 games in the above example) or not. , it is possible to further ensure the significance of the value being the cumulative value of multiple additions.

In addition, a third special notification may be made based on the total number of eliminated games TEG when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and a third special notification may also be made based on the number of eliminated games EG when an additional opportunity occurs during the advantageous section. good. In this case, the third special notification based on the total number of eliminated games TEG and the third special notification based on the number of eliminated games EG may have different performance contents, different lottery tables, or different type tables.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, in a configuration in which information that may be beneficial to the player is presented by setting value suggestion as compensation for setting a maximum number of games in an advantageous section, the game situation of the day at the time the maximum number of games is reached is taken into account. We will present the above information that may be useful. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this modification.

In step S7601, it is determined whether or not the section display is being displayed, and if it is not being displayed, the second section display process is directly ended. If it is being displayed, the number of advantageous section games AG is added in step S7602, and the number of remaining games is managed in step S7603. Then, in step S7604, it is determined whether the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit (1500).

If the upper limit value has been reached, in step S7605, processing for determining the set value is executed. Then, in step S7606, by checking the total number of games TG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, processing is executed to grasp the total number of games on the day. The total number of games TG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games played (total number of games) on the day. For example, this counter is cleared to the initial value (0) based on the process of setting the winning probability, that is, the process of clearing the RAM, and the game number management process (FIG. 40) is activated once. Each time, the number is increased by 1 in an increase process (not shown) regardless of the number of bets, the gaming state, etc.

In the subsequent step S7607, a fourth special notification lottery table is obtained, and in step S7608, a fourth special notification lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 153, the fourth special notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the fourth special notification differs depending on the value of the total number of games TG and the set value. Specifically, it is set so that the larger the value of the total number of games TG is, the easier it is to win the fourth special notification lottery, and the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win the fourth special notification lottery. For example, if the value of the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 1/256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 6/256. . Also, if the value of the total number of games TG is 4001 to 6000, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 4/256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 256/256. do.

After executing the fourth special notification lottery in step S7608, it is determined in step S7609 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, a process of setting the fourth special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S7610. If it is determined in step S7609 that the notification lottery has not been won, or after executing the process in step S7610, the process for ending the advantageous area is performed in steps S7611 to S7613, and then the second process for displaying the area is performed. end. Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S7604, determination is made as to whether the termination conditions are met in steps S7614 and S7615, and if the advantageous section is to be terminated, the processes in steps S7611 to S7613 are performed. The processing from step S7611 to step S7615 is similar to the processing from step S7510 to step S7514.

Next, the setting process for the attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 154. Note that the attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed in step S2306 in the full stop effect setting process (FIG. 51), and is executed based on receiving the attack mode end command. As already explained, based on the initialization process such as step S7614 being performed, the attack mode end command is output in the game number management process, and the attack mode end effect is performed. .

In step S7701, the total number of medals to be paid out during the advantageous section is determined. Note that the total number of coins to be paid out can be grasped by referring to the total number of coins to be paid out counter in the various counter areas 183b. The total number of medals paid out counter is a counter that is added according to the number of medals paid out as a result of the game during the advantageous period, and is initialized when the advantageous period ends. Note that the counter may be configured to perform a subtraction process according to the number of bets based on bets made at the start of each game, and to grasp the number of coins that corresponds to the number of coins obtained by subtracting the number of coins from the number of payouts.

In the following step S7702, processing is performed to ascertain the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section. Then, in step S7703, it is determined whether the fourth special notification command has been received. If it has not been received, the processing for setting the normal end effect is performed in step S7704, and then the process for setting the attack mode end effect is ended. As shown in FIG. 155(a) and FIG. 57(b), the normal end effect is that the attack mode ends, and the number of consecutive games and the total number of coins to be paid out are displayed.

If it is determined in step S7703 that the fourth special notification command has been received, the process of acquiring the fourth special notification type table is executed in step S7705, and the fourth special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7706. do. Regarding the fourth special notification type table, a detailed explanation using figures will be omitted, but for example, even if the second special notification type table in FIG. 144(c) suggests an even/odd set value, good. As the fourth special notification, for example, a fourth special notification A illustrated in FIG. 155(b) and a fourth special notification B illustrated in FIG. 155(c) are provided. The fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B are, for example, configured to display the number of consecutive games and the total number of payout coins instead of the winning compatible character in the display contents of the first special notification A and the first special notification B. You can also use it as

After executing the fourth special notification type lottery process in step S7706, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not it is the fourth special notification A. If it is the fourth special notification A, the fourth special notification type is selected in step S7708. The auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to execute notification A. Moreover, if it is the fourth special notification B, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the fourth special notification B in step S7709. After executing the process of step S7708 or step S7709, the setting process of the attack mode end effect is ended.

By doing the above, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated, it becomes possible to suggest a setting value according to the gaming situation of the day.

When an advantageous period ends forcibly, players who think they should have continued playing the game lose their desire to play due to the forced end, and are more likely to end the game. can also be considered. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if the configuration is such that a setting value is suggested when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less and a forced termination occurs, for example, a high setting is predicted, etc. Even in situations where the player's desire to play the game may be weakened as described above, it is possible to support the decision to continue playing the game. In particular, when a forced termination occurs, it is assumed that the player has acquired a large amount of medals, and if the player sees such a large amount of medals, he or she will be biased toward the higher setting, even if the player guesses the setting value. It is thought that it is easy to make such inferences. In other words, it can be said that by providing an opportunity to perform setting value estimation in conjunction with forced termination, it is possible to stimulate the desire to continue playing the game, compared to a configuration in which only forced termination is performed.

On the other hand, for example, in the case where a forced termination occurs shortly after the opening of a game hall, if a suggestion effect that suggests a high setting or confirms a high setting occurs for the game machine, the game machine will be closed. Although this will encourage the player to continue playing the game, others who look sideways at the suggested performance may predict that the setting values of other game machines are low in relation to the game machine in question. In other words, in the stage or situation where the game hall has just opened, if a suggestive effect suggesting a high setting occurs, it can be said to be unfavorable for the game hall as a whole. On the other hand, near the end of the game hall's business hours, it is considered preferable as a business strategy for the game hall to generate a suggestive effect that suggests setting the price as high as possible.

Therefore, when suggesting a setting value based on forced termination, we have created a configuration in which the setting value is suggested by taking into consideration the gaming situation of the day. This makes it possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of a decrease in the operating rate of other gaming machines due to a setting suggestion, a decrease in the operating rate of the corresponding gaming machine due to a suggestion of a low setting, etc.

In particular, in this modified example, since the total number of games TG is used to take into account the gaming situation of the day, the conventional configuration of the gaming machine is used and that information is reflected in the setting value suggestion. can do. In addition, the total number of games TG is not only managed by the gaming machine side, but also can be grasped by the player from the data display installed in the gaming hall, and can be obtained from the data display, etc. After weighting the information, it becomes possible to play a game in which a setting value is predicted from the setting value suggestion notification, and the enjoyment of the game in which the setting value is predicted increases.

Furthermore, the total number of games TG is configured to be cleared to the initial value based on the winning probability setting process, and is not cleared to the initial value simply by turning the power on/off of the gaming machine concerned. It is said that Therefore, if the set value is not changed or updated when the gaming hall opens or closes, and the winning probability setting process is not performed, the previous day's total number of games TG will be carried over. In this way, when predicting the set value, it becomes possible to make the prediction based on the presence or absence of a change in the set value, and the enjoyment of the game of prediction is further enhanced.

<Modification 6>
The fourth special notification lottery table may be changed as follows.

FIG. 156(a) shows a fourth special notification lottery table in which not only the total number of games TG at the time of forced termination but also the time at the time of forced termination are used as parameters. Specifically, not only when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, but also when the time is before 13:00, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 1 in 256; If the number is 6, the probability of winning is 6/256. Also, not only when the total number of games TG is 4001 to 6000, but also when the time is before 7pm, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 4/256, and the setting value is 6. If so, the probability of winning is 256/256.

By doing the above, for example, when the forced termination condition is met with a small total number of games, such as when the game machine starts operating after noon or in the evening instead of when the store first opens in the morning. Even if there is, if the time when the forced termination condition is satisfied is late, the fourth special notification as a setting value suggestion is likely to be executed. Therefore, setting values can be suggested more in accordance with the business style and operating status of the hall.

In addition, when referring to the fourth special notification lottery table, the time at the time of forced termination may be determined from a predetermined built-in clock or the like provided in the gaming machine.

<Modification 7>
FIG. 156(b) shows a fourth special notification lottery table in which the lower the setting, the easier it is to execute the fourth special notification as a setting value suggestion when the forced termination condition is satisfied with a small number of games or an early time. . In other words, if the total number of games TG is less than 2000 or the time is before 13:00, if the setting value is 1, the probability of winning is 128/256, and if the setting value is 6, the probability of winning is 256 minutes. The probability of winning is 4. On the other hand, if the total number of games TG is 2001 or more and 4000 or less, or if the time is before 16:00, if the setting value is 1, you will win with a probability of 2/256, and if the setting value is 6, you will win. The probability of winning is 12/256.

By doing the above, when forced termination occurs relatively early, the occurrence rate of suggestion notifications for low settings can be adjusted by taking advantage of the fact that it tends to be determined that the setting is high. I can do it. In other words, as mentioned above, even if a low setting value suggestion occurs in a situation where it is easy to judge that the setting is high based on the number of games played and the number of medals earned, the impression is that the setting is already high. It is considered that the player is likely to continue playing the game without accepting the set value suggestion at face value. Therefore, by generating a setting value suggestion for a low setting in such a situation, it is difficult to cause an event in which only the probability of occurrence of a setting value suggestion for a low setting is low out of the total probability of occurrence of a setting value suggestion. be able to.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, the fourth special notification lottery type table is changed depending on the total number of games at the time when the forced termination condition is satisfied. Specifically, when acquiring the fourth special notification type table in step S7705, the total number of games is grasped by grasping the counter corresponding to the total number of games TG on the main control device 101 side, and the total number of games is The fourth special notification type table to be obtained is different depending on whether the number is 2000 games or less and when the number is 2001 games or more.

FIG. 157(a) shows the fourth special notification type table obtained when the total number of games is 2000 games or less, and FIG. 157(b) shows the fourth special notification type table obtained when the total number of games is 2001 games or more. The fourth special notification type table to be acquired is shown. In addition, in this modification, the fourth special notification A, the fourth special notification B, the fourth special notification C, the fourth special notification D, the fourth special notification E, and the fourth special notification F are set as the fourth special notification. The contents of the performance are set so that they can be distinguished from each other. The fourth special notification A to fourth special notification F correspond to the third special notification A to third special notification F in FIG. 148(b). That is, the fourth special notification A suggests an odd number setting, and the fourth special notification B suggests an even number setting. Further, the fourth special notification C suggests a setting value of 2 or more, the fourth special notification D suggests a setting value of 4 or more, the fourth special notification E suggests a setting value of 5 or more, and the fourth special notification F suggests a setting value of 6. It is something.

In the type table of FIG. 157(a), the fourth special notification A to fourth special notification C are likely to be selected, and the fourth special notification D to fourth special notification F are set not to be selected. That is, in a situation where the total number of games is small and the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied, even/odd set value suggestion is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, the type table in FIG. 157(b) is set so that not only the fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B but also the fourth special notification C to fourth special notification F can be selected. In other words, unless the total number of games is small, it is easier to narrow down the setting values based on the fact that the forced termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied than when the total number of games is small.

By doing the above, by progressing the game (increasing the total number of games), it becomes easier to gradually narrow down the setting values, and it is possible to guess the setting values while progressing the game and aiming to acquire medals. It can provide fun to do.

In particular, by configuring the type table to be different depending on the gaming situation, it is possible to realize completely different suggestive effects depending on the gaming situation, such as having different type tables in the morning and afternoon. It is possible to prevent players from getting bored with playing games throughout the day and to motivate them to continue playing games.

<Modification 9>
In this modification, when an advantageous section is forcibly terminated, a special section is set in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section using the total number of eliminated games TEG. First, the second section display process in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 158.

The processing from step S7801 to step S7807 is similar to the processing from step S6101 to step S6107 described above, and includes processing for terminating the display of the section indicator and data initialization based on the satisfaction of the forced termination condition for the advantageous section. Perform processing.

The data initialization process in step S7807 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

As already explained, the data initialization process executed when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated is a process that initializes various counters, various flags, etc. related to the gameplay that changes the advantageous degree by notification of the pressing order. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159, the RAM 106 of the main controller 101 includes a winning flag storage area 106a, a stop information storage area 106b, a status information storage area 106c, as well as various flag storage areas 106d, and various counter areas 106e. is provided. Each of these areas 106a to 106e includes an area for storing various information (advantageous information, specific information) used in advantageous sections, and an area for storing various information (normal information) used also for normal sections. are provided separately. More specifically, an area for storing various information used in advantageous sections and an area for storing various information used also for normal sections are provided separately as areas that do not overlap with each other.

Specifically, the winning flag storage area 106a is provided with a winning flag storage area 201 for advantageous sections and a winning flag storage area 202 for normal sections. The stop information storage area 106b includes an advantageous section stop information storage area 203 and a normal section stop information storage area 204. The status information storage area 106c is provided with an advantageous section corresponding status information storage area 205 and a normal section corresponding status information storage area 206. The various flag storage area 106d is provided with a various flag storage area 207 for advantageous sections and a various flag storage area 208 for normal sections. The various counter areas 106e are provided with various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections and various counter areas 210 corresponding to normal sections.

Among these areas, there is an area for storing flags for understanding various display modes, such as challenge mode flags and attack mode flags, and flags for understanding that additional conditions have been met, such as challenge mode addition flags and attack mode addition flags. The area for storing the flag and the area for storing the excess flag are provided in the various flag storage area 207 corresponding to advantageous sections. On the other hand, there is an area for storing the number of bets flag for understanding the number of bets for each game, an area for storing the freeze effect flag for understanding that the conditions for generating the freeze effect are met, and an area for storing the payout process. An area for storing a payout flag for understanding that a payout is in progress is provided in the various flag storage area 208 corresponding to the normal section.

Additionally, there is an area for storing the number of omen games G1, an area for storing the number of challenge mode continuations G2, an area for storing the number of attack mode continuations G3, an area for storing the number of advantageous section games AG, and an area for storing the number of free games FG. etc. are provided in various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections. On the other hand, the area for storing the total number of games TG, the area for storing the number of games between BB counter for counting the number of games between bonuses, the area for storing the payout medal counter for counting the number of medals paid out, etc. , are provided in various counter areas 210 corresponding to the normal section.

In the data initialization process in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 160, in step S7901, a process to initialize the advantageous section corresponding winning flag storage area 201 is performed. In the following step S7902, processing is performed to initialize the advantageous section corresponding stop information storage area 203. In the following step S7903, processing is performed to initialize the advantageous section corresponding state information storage area 205. In the subsequent step S7904, processing is performed to initialize the various flag storage areas 207 corresponding to advantageous sections. In the subsequent step S7905, processing is performed to initialize various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections. Then, in step S7906, information or parameters related to other advantageous sections are initialized, and then the data initialization process ends.

That is, in the data initialization process executed based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the advantageous section, the various areas 201, 203, 205, 207, and 209 related to the advantageous section are initialized, and the areas related to the advantageous section are initialized. Initialization processing for the various areas 202, 204, 206, 208, and 210 that are not used or are used without distinguishing between normal sections and advantageous sections is not performed. As mentioned above, various areas related to these advantageous sections and various areas not related to advantageous sections or used without distinguishing between normal sections and advantageous sections are provided as separate areas so as not to overlap. Therefore, when the above initialization process is performed, an error may occur where an area that should be initialized is not initialized or an area that should not be initialized is initialized. is suitably suppressed.

Returning to the explanation of the second section display process, after data initialization processing is performed in step S7807, special section setting processing is performed in step S7808, and then the second section display process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S7804, it is determined in step S7809 or step S7810 whether the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and if the end condition is satisfied, step S7805 to step S7808 is performed. After performing the process, the second section display process ends. If the termination condition is not satisfied, the second section display process is terminated without performing the processes in steps S7805 to S7808. Note that the processing in step S7809 and step S7810 is similar to the processing in step S6108 and step S6109 described above.

The special section setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 161.

In step S8001, processing is performed to ascertain the total number of extinguished games TEG. Here, the total number of extinguished games TEG is stored in the normal section corresponding counter area 210 of the RAM 106, as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if the data initialization process is performed, the total number of deleted games TEG is not initialized. In other words, when performing the additional game number processing in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less, the additional number is added to the counters of various continuation numbers in the various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections such as the number of attack mode continuations G3 etc. Instead, a value corresponding to the total number of extinguished games TEG in the various counter areas 210 corresponding to the normal section is added.

In other words, in this modification, when an opportunity for top-up occurs, the process of storing the number of top-up games as information used during the advantageous section in various areas for the advantageous period, and the case where the number of top-up games is Information that is also used during the normal section is the total number of deleted games TEG, which is stored in various areas for the normal section. The process of determining whether or not a flag is set can also be said to be a process of selecting which area should be subjected to storage processing. In this way, in this modification, it is possible to change the area in which information on events that occur during advantageous sections is stored depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag. By doing so, it is possible to carry over information on events that occurred during the advantageous section to the normal section, while assuming that the initialization process is performed at the end of the advantageous section.

In the following step S8002, a special section table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. Here, the special section is provided as a section in which a setting value suggestion effect is likely to occur in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 162(a), the special section table is set so that the number of games in the special section varies depending on the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG. Specifically, if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 0, no special section is set, and if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 1 to 50, a special section of 10 games is selected, and if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 51. ˜100, a special section of 30 games is selected, and the larger the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG is, the longer the special section is selected.

After the number of games in the special section is specified in steps S8001 and S8002, a process is performed in step S8003 to input a value corresponding to the specified number of games into the number of games in the special section PG. Then, in step S8004, it is determined whether or not the input number of special section games PG is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, a process is performed to set a special section flag in step S8005, and the process proceeds to step S8006. Then, processing is performed to set the special section command as an output target to the display control device 81. The number of games in the special section PG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the special section, and the special section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is a special section. Further, the special section command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that it is a special section.

If it is determined in step S8003 that the number of games in the special section PG is 0, or after executing the process in step S8006, the process advances to step S8007. In step S8007, processing is performed to clear the total number of extinguished games TEG to an initial value (0). After that, the special section setting process ends. That is, if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 0 at the end of the advantageous section, the special section flag is not set and the special section is not set.

In the special section in this modification, a press order notification effect is generated when a predetermined special replay is won. As shown in the second embodiment, etc., special replay means that although the type of winning replay results differs depending on the stopping order, the benefits that will be awarded will be the same regardless of which replay result wins. This is a result of re-gaming and no transition of gaming states such as RT state.

FIG. 163 shows a lottery table for the normal game state in this modification. In this modification, it is possible to win special replays 1 and 2 as special replays in the normal game state. Special replay 1 and special replay 2 are as explained in FIGS. 95 and 96, and special replay 1 is a combination of the 1st replay, 9th replay, 11th replay to 15th replay. , Special Replay 2 is a combination of the first replay and the 10th to 15th replays. The winning re-games differ depending on the stopping order, and the corresponding re-gaming prizes will be awarded for each stopping result: right-down replay, black BAR tenpai missing, black BAR double tenpai missing, black BAR single, black BAR double. To establish. Note that the total value of the winning probabilities of special replay 1, special replay 2, and normal replay is set to be the same probability as the winning probability of normal replay in the normal gaming state lottery table in each of the above embodiments.

The processing during the special section will be explained below.

FIG. 164(a) is a flowchart showing the number of games management process in this modification.

In this modification, when it is determined in step S1401 that the number of bets is 3, it is determined in step S8101 whether or not the above specific section flag is set. If set, it is determined in step S8102 whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the case of the normal gaming state or the first RT state, in step S8103, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of special section games PG is performed. Thereafter, in step S8104, it is determined whether or not the number of special section games PG has become 0. If it has become 0, a process of clearing the specific section flag is performed in step S8105. If a negative determination is made in step S8101, step S8102, or step S8104, or after executing the process in step S8105, the process advances to step S1402.

FIG. 164(b) is a flowchart showing the push order processing in this modification.

In this modification, if a negative determination is made in step S4419, the process advances to step S8111. In step S8111, it is determined whether the game result of the current game is the above-mentioned special replay 1 or special replay 2 win. If either special replay 1 or special replay 2 has been won, the process advances to step S8112, and it is determined whether the specific section flag is set. If the specific section flag is set, the press order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S8113, and then the main press order processing is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S8111 or step S8112, the pressing order processing is ended without setting the output of the pressing order notification command.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing special replay notification processing in this modification. The special replay notification process corresponds to the special RT notification process in the second embodiment and the like. That is, this is a process executed in step S4515 when it is determined in step S4514 of the press order notification process (FIG. 98) that a special replay win has been won.

In step S8201, processing for determining setting values is executed. In the subsequent step S8202, a process is executed to obtain a press order notification lottery table at the time of special replay winning from the various table storage areas 182a. As shown in FIG. 162(b), the special replay winning press order notification lottery table is set so that the occurrence rate of the press order notification effect differs depending on the setting value, and the winning mode when the press order notification effect occurs also differs. has been done.

Specifically, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability that the press order notification effect will occur, and the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability that the press order notification effect will occur, the black BAR single set or the black BAR double when the press order notification effect occurs. It is set so that the ratio of press order notification performances with matching winning modes being selected is high. For example, if the set value is 1, the press order notification performance will occur with a probability of 25%, and the winning mode at the time of occurrence will be the press order notification performance in which the black BAR double tenpai is missed. Also, if the setting value is 2, the press order notification effect will occur with a 25% probability as in the case where the setting value is 1, but some of the press order notification effects will be selected as black BAR singles. be done. The press order notification effect of all black BAR singles corresponds to a suggestion effect that suggests a set value of 2 or more. When the set value is 4 or more, when the push order notification effect occurs, the push order notification effect that results in double black BAR alignment will also be selected. It corresponds to a suggestive performance.

In step S8203, a push order notification lottery is executed based on the push order notification lottery table acquired in step S8202. In this lottery process, whether or not to generate press order notification and the type of press order notification performance (corresponding winning mode) in the case of generation are determined by lottery. Then, based on the lottery result, in step S8204, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a corresponding press order notification effect is performed.

As described above, depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the storage area is different depending on whether the number of games drawn based on the addition trigger is stored as the number of additional games or when it is stored as the total number of eliminated games TEG. The number of games is subject to initialization processing at the end of the advantageous period, and the total number of eliminated games TEG is excluded from the initialization processing. As a result, as a configuration in which initialization processing is performed at the end of an advantageous section, it is possible to clearly indicate an advantageous section with a section display, etc., and to avoid over-increasing the successive winning performance. It becomes possible to take over event information after the advantageous section. Thereby, it is possible to fill the gap between the advantageous section and the normal section, which may occur due to forced termination of the advantageous section, and to improve the interlocking performance of both sections.

Based on the value of the total number of extinguished games TEG, a special section is set after the end of the advantageous section in which a setting value suggestion effect is likely to occur. As a result, the more an unfavorable event occurs for the player, such as the occurrence of an opportunity to add money in a situation where the excess flag is set during an advantageous period, the more likely it is possible to estimate the set value. It can be used as compensation for the above-mentioned unfavorable events.

In particular, even if an opportunity for additional play occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the game will eventually be forcibly terminated when the maximum number of games is reached, so normally, the more the opportunity for additional play occurs, the less the intention to continue playing will weaken. , it is thought that the game will end immediately when the game is forced to end. On the other hand, since we have made it possible to set a special section that is long enough to trigger the increase, instead of immediately ending the game when it is forced to end, it is recommended that you at least finish the special section before ending the game. This makes it possible to encourage If a setting value suggestion favorable to the player occurs during the special section, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game, which can lead to an improvement in the operating rate.

In this modified example, since the setting value suggestion is made by the stop result (stop order) of the special replay, it gives the impression that the player has made the suggestion of the preferable setting value appear by his/her own operation. The degree of attention to the effect that suggests the setting value is suitably increased.

In the special replay, the stop result differs depending on the stop order, so if the player does not want to have a suggestion of the set value, it is better to operate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a stop order different from the notified stop order. . By doing this, it is possible to avoid suggestions of setting values from occurring against the player's will. That is, for example, a player who already knows that the setting is high may consider it undesirable for other players around him to know that his game machine is set high. Therefore, by doing as described above, it is possible for the player himself to select whether or not to generate a setting value suggestion, thereby making it possible to create the content of the performance as desired by the player.

<Modification 10>
In this modification, in place of or in addition to the configuration in which the press order notification effect is generated during the special section, the table for the number of precursor games during the special section is varied. FIG. 166(a) shows a table of the number of bonus precursor games in the normal mode in a situation other than the special section, and FIG. 166(b) shows a table of the number of bonus precursor games in the normal mode during the special section. ing.

Regarding FIG. 166(a), it is as explained in FIG. 35, and the number of precursor games is set so that any one of 1 to 32 games is selected. The number of portent games that are likely to be selected is set to vary depending on the content of the advantageous section in which bonuses and multiple winnings occur. Specifically, it is more likely that a long precursor game number will be selected for a multiple win with Attack mode than a multiple win with Challenge mode, and even more likely to be selected for a multiple win with Super Attack mode than a multiple win with Attack mode. A long precursor game number is likely to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 166(b), during the special section, the number of precursor games is set to select one of 0 to 4 games, which is shorter than in the case of FIG. 166(a) above. The number of games is likely to be a precursor. In addition, during the special section, the larger the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG that triggered the setting of the special section, the easier the short number of precursor games will be selected, and furthermore, the more advantageous the mode with duplicate winnings, the shorter the precursor game number. The number of games is set so that it is easy to select.

More specifically, in the case of multiple winnings with challenge mode, if the total number of disappeared games TEG that triggered the setting of this special section is 1 to 50, the number of foreshadowing games of 4 games will be selected, while the total number of disappeared games will be selected. If the TEG is 201 or more, the number of precursor games of 0 games is selected. In addition, in the case of multiple winnings with attack mode, if the total number of disappearing games TEG that triggered the setting of this special section is 1 to 50, the number of precursory games of 2 games or 4 games will be selected, while the total number of disappearing games If the number TEG is 201 or more, the number of precursor games of 0 games is selected.

In this case, for example, as a special section flag, if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 1 to 50, the special section flag 1 is set according to the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG, and if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 51 to 100, the special section flag 1 is set. If so, set special section flag 2, set special section flag 3 if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 101 to 200, set special section flag 4 if the total number of eliminated games TEG is 201 or more, etc. However, it is preferable that the total number of extinguished games TEG when setting the special section can be determined after the fact.

As described above, the superiority of the special section is not limited to setting value suggestions, but can also be ensured by the number of bonus precursor games. In particular, when a player wins a bonus such as the first BB, the player loses less if he or she wins the bonus quickly, since the bonus winnings do not occur twice. From this point of view, by making it easier for the number of precursor games to become shorter during the special section as described above, it becomes possible to compensate for the additions that were invalidated during the advantageous section.

<Modification 11>
In this modification, special notification is executed based on the occurrence of an addition in which the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the game number addition process in this modification.

In step S8301, it is determined whether the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the process for adding on the number of games is immediately terminated. If the excess flag is not set and the number of available games FG is still 0 or more, the process advances to step S8302 and subsequent steps. In step S8302, processing is executed to determine the current number of additional games. Then, in step S8303, by determining the number of free games FG, it is determined whether the current number of additional games is greater than or equal to the number of free games FG, that is, whether the number of free games FG is less than or equal to 0 due to this additional addition. Determine whether or not. If the number is not equal to or less than 0, the number of additional games is added to the target number of consecutive games in step S8304, and then the number of additional games processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less as a result of this addition, the number of additional games is added to the target number of continuous games in step S8305, and then the number of free games FG is added in step S8306. After setting the 1 special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81, the game number addition process ends.

In this case, when addition occurs, there are cases in which an addition command is output, and cases where an addition command and a first special notification execution command are output. When the addition command and the first special notification execution command are received, for example, as shown in FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b), together with the first special performance A and the first special performance B, the number of additional games is A configuration may also be adopted in which a character is displayed so that the occurrence of the addition and the setting value suggestion can be recognized at the same time.

With regard to the addition that triggers the setting of the excess flag, at least with respect to the excess of the maximum number of games, it is not possible to fully benefit from it, but according to this modification, such losses are also covered. , it becomes possible to compensate by presenting information that may be useful to the player, such as setting value suggestions. In addition, for example, if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less at the time of addition that occurs at the very end of the maximum number of games, or in a situation where there is no hope for special effects to occur in subsequent games (situation where the number of games is small), etc. Special notification can be suitably generated even if

Moreover, as mentioned above, by making it possible to simultaneously grasp the information that an add-on has occurred (the character corresponding to the number of add-on games) and the information that suggests the setting value (first special notification A and first special notification B). This makes it possible to present setting value suggestion information in close relation to events favorable to the player, such as addition, thereby further strengthening the impression that setting value suggestion information is beneficial to the player. becomes possible. That is, for example, it is assumed that luck is involved in the outcome of a game, and for a player who disregards the height of the set value, even if information suggesting the set value is presented, it may not be useful information at all. It will be done. In this regard, as mentioned above, by presenting information on setting value suggestions in conjunction with additional effects that have a strong element of luck, we can help people understand that the element of luck is strongly reflected in setting value suggestions as well. It becomes possible to give an impression that the setting value suggestion is useful.

Note that the setting value suggestion information and the information that a mark-up has occurred need not be presented at the same time; the information that a mark-up has occurred is presented first, and the set value suggestion is then provided. Any configuration is sufficient as long as there is at least a period in which both are presented overlappingly, such as information on the occurrence of the addition is presented together with information on the occurrence of the addition.

<Modification 12>
The configuration may be such that the values of the number of eliminated games EG and the total number of eliminated games TEG are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the third special notification setting process in this modification. The third special notification setting process is a process that is executed instead of or in addition to the first special notification setting process, and is a process that is executed as one process of the additional production setting process.

As already explained, the third special notification is a special notification executed based on the number of extinguished games EG and the total number of extinguished games TEG. In this modification, in the additional command setting process shown in FIG. 147, information on the number of extinguished games EG is set for the third special notification command and then output to the display control device 81. Therefore, in the display control device 81, by receiving the third special notification command, it becomes possible to grasp the number of additional games of additional effects that were supposed to occur this time. Note that information on the total number of extinguished games TEG may be set in the third special notification command.

In step S8401, processing is performed to grasp information corresponding to the number of extinguished games EG based on the received third special notification command. Then, in step S8402, the number of additional games that were supposed to occur this time is determined. In step S8403, an additional effect is generated with the corresponding number of additional games. In this case, it may be the same effect as the normal additional effect (for example, FIG. 136(b)), or it may be different from the normal additional effect by, for example, changing the background etc. It may be configured so that the player can understand it. Then, in step S8404, the special game number display section TGH is updated, and then the third special notification setting process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 170(a), the special game number display section TGH is a normal game number display that displays the remaining number of games in an advantageous section (attack mode, etc.) taking into account the upper limit of 1500 games on the auxiliary display section 65. The special game number display section TGH is set in a different area from the normal game number display section GH.More specifically, the special game number display section TGH is provided in an area adjacent to the normal game number display section GH. Therefore, when attempting to visually check the normal game number display section GH, the special game number display section TGH is naturally easily visible, and the special game number display section TGH is provided in an area that is difficult for the player to overlook. Note that both display sections GH and TGH are set in areas that do not overlap with the press order notification effect.

In addition, the counter that displays the number of games in the special game number display section TGH is set to be different in color, size, shape, etc. from the counter that displays the number of games on the normal game number display section GH, so that both displays are different. This tends to give the impression that the meanings of the counters GT and TGH are different. Moreover, the counter that displays the number of games in the special game number display section TGH is displayed larger than that on the normal game number display section GH, and the counter on the special game number display section TGH is more conspicuous. Rather, it is easy to give the impression that the content is meaningful to the player.

Here, the number of normal games display section GH is updated in accordance with the progress of the game during the advantageous period. That is, each time one game is played, the counter in the normal game number display section GH is updated as a counter that is decremented by one. On the other hand, the counter in the special game number display section TGH is updated based on the occurrence of an additional opportunity, and is not decremented when the game is played. In particular, when the special game number display section TGH is updated, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the counter is updated so that it is increased rather than subtracted based on the occurrence of an additional opportunity. be done. Therefore, compared to the counter in the normal game number display section GH that is decremented, the counter on the special game number display section TGH is a counter that increases as the advantageous section approaches the end, and as the counter increases, It is easy to imagine that some kind of beneficial event will occur, and it can also be expected to have the effect of alleviating the sense of loss caused by the forced termination of an advantageous section.

This modification also has a configuration in which the setting value is suggested according to the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG at the time of forced termination of the advantageous section (a configuration in which the setting value is suggested as an effect at the end, and a configuration in which the setting value is suggested by setting a special section). (configuration that suggests value). That is, in fact, as the value of the special game number display section TGH increases, information useful to the player is more likely to be presented, and it becomes possible to provide a game performance that matches the player's expectations.

As mentioned above, in a configuration in which a maximum number of games is set in an advantageous section, if an additional amount exceeding the maximum number of games occurs, the additional amount exceeding the maximum number of games would normally be meaningless to the player. Therefore, it is thought that the player does not want to know that the additional amount has occurred or the number of additional games. Based on this premise, the usual idea is to hide the fact that a top-up has occurred and the number of top-up games in such a situation, so that the player does not notice it, or in other words, not to notify the player. be.

On the other hand, as described above, in this embodiment, the occurrence of such additional games and the number of additional games are considered significant, and the setting value is suggested from the value displayed by the special game number display section TGH. It becomes possible to have the player play the game while expecting the game to be played. In this way, by deliberately displaying the number of games that would normally not be displayed, it becomes possible to suitably realize a game in which setting values are suggested based on the number of games.

Moreover, since it is deliberately displayed in this way, even if the configuration does not suggest setting values, the player can assume that the display has some meaning. It is thought that they play games while doing so. In other words, since it is deliberately displayed, it can be expected that the player will be able to predict the significance and benefit of the displayed information, and that the prediction itself will be entertaining.

The special game number display section TGH may also be displayed at the end of an advantageous section, such as at the end of the attack mode. By doing this, the player can calculate the total number of consecutive games and the total number of medals obtained if the advantageous section is not forcibly terminated from the special game number display section TGH. It is also possible to use it as a basis for reminiscing with friends, such as ``I should have won a medal.''

<Modification 13>
In this modification, notification is performed using the relationship between the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG and the number of remaining games on the display. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG and the number of remaining games on the display.

In this modification, as a predetermined additional effect, a post-add effect is set in which a part or all of the number of additional games is announced in a game subsequent to the game in which the additional opportunity has occurred. That is, a part of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is first reported as the remaining number of games in the advantageous section, and the remaining number of games in the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section is notified later. If the number of games to be notified first is the remaining number of display counters HG, and the number of games to be notified later is the number of games remaining for display, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG is the number of remaining games for display, HG, and the number of remaining games for display, BG. It becomes equal to the total value of counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is played, and the post-addition counter BG is not subtracted even after the game is completed unless a post-addition effect occurs. Note that the remaining display counter HG and the post-load counter BG are both managed by the various counter areas 183b of the display control device 81, but they may also be managed by the main control device 101.

For example, if the number of remaining games on the display reaches a predetermined number (1 in this modification) while the attack mode is being played, that is, the remaining display counter HG reaches the predetermined number (1). If this occurs, an additional effect will occur. In the add-on effect, for example, similarly to the case of the add-on effect, it is notified that the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the add-on counter BG (150) has been added. As a result, the post-addition counter BG is subtracted by the notification amount (in the figure, it becomes 0), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated with the notification amount due to the post-addition effect added, and the display is also updated with the notification amount due to the post-addition effect. The value corresponds to the counter HG (in the figure, 150 after one game).

Processing for performing the post-ride effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. FIG. 172 shows the additional effect setting process in this modification, and FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the additional effect setting process. The post-add effect setting process is performed in other processes of the effect setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81.

In the add-on effect setting process, if it is determined in step S8501 that the first special notification command has not been received, a process to ascertain the number of add-on games is performed in step S8502. Then, in step S8503, a later ticket lottery process is executed. The post-add lottery process is a lottery process for deciding whether to notify the current number of add-on games in the current game or in a subsequent game, that is, whether to make the post-pay lottery process. For example, the percentage of later additions is set to differ depending on the type of specific combination.

In the following step S8504, it is determined whether or not the player has won in the post-draw lottery. If the player has not won, that is, if it is determined that the current number of additional games is to be announced in the game, the process advances to step S8505, and a process of adding the current number of additional games to the display remaining number counter HG is performed. After that, in steps S8506 to S8511, the execution timing of the additional notification effect is selected by lottery and the additional notification effect is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of add-on games will be announced in a later game, a process of setting a post-add flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is performed in step S8512. It should be noted that if the post-driver flag has already been set in step S8512, that state is maintained. Then, in step S8513, the process of adding the current number of add-on games to the add-on counter BG is performed, and then the add-on effect setting process is ended.

Note that when the first special notification command is received in step S8501, the first special notification setting process is performed in step S8514, but the first special notification setting process in this modification will be explained later.

In the post-add effect setting process, in step S8601, it is determined whether the remaining display counter HG is 1 as a predetermined value. As mentioned above, the display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 by a subtraction process (not shown) every time one game is played during the advantageous period, and the display on the auxiliary display section 65 is updated in accordance with the subtraction process. be done. If the display remaining number counter HG is 1, it is determined in step S8602 whether the post-loading flag is set. If the display remaining number counter HG is not 1 or if the post-add flag is not set, the post-pay effect setting process is directly terminated.

If the display remaining number counter HG is 1 and the post-loading flag is set, then in step S8603, a process for determining the value of the post-loading counter BG is executed. Then, in step S8604, the number of games for this post-addition performance is determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether to notify all of the rear-load counters BG as rear-load effects or to notify a part of the rear-load counters BG as rear-load effects. In such a lottery, it is preferable to change whether the lottery is for all or part of the lottery depending on the value of the post-add counter BG, and when it is for a part of the lottery, to change the ratio. In addition, in this modification, the configuration is such that in any case, the entire event is notified as a post-addition effect.

In the subsequent step S8605, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that an additional effect for the number of games to be announced is performed. In the subsequent step S8606, a process is performed in which the value of the post-load counter BG corresponding to the notified amount is added to the remaining number counter HG for display. Then, in step S8607, the value added to the notification and display remaining counter HG is subtracted from the post-addition counter BG, and in step S8608, on the condition that the post-payment counter BG is 0, In step S8609, processing is performed to clear the post-ride flag. If the post-ride counter BG is not 0 in step S8608, or after performing the process of step S8609, the post-pay effect setting process is ended.

In the configuration that performs the post-add effect as described above, for example, a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, such as when a large amount of additional money is added to the post-add counter BG. Even so, a specific event may occur in which it is not possible to determine from the number of remaining games on the display that the number of remaining games has reached the upper limit. In this modification, the specific event is used to eliminate the feeling of loss when winning a specific combination.

The first special notification setting process in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 174.

In step S8701, it is determined whether or not the post-ride flag is set. If the post-boarding flag is not set, the process for the first special notification is performed in steps S8702 to S8707. The processing from step S8702 to step S8707 is similar to the processing from step S6701 to step S6706.

If the rear pick-up flag is set, the process advances to step S8708, and processing for determining the rear pick-up counter BG is performed. Then, in step S8709, the number of games in which a pseudo addition is to be made is determined by lottery. In this case, the number of pseudo additional games is set to the upper limit of the additional game counter BG, and for example, if the additional game counter BG is 100, it is determined by lottery so that any number of games less than or equal to 100 is selected.

Specifically, for example, the display control device 81 also stores a lottery table similar to the add-on game number lottery table in the normal case (when the add-on is actually generated) in FIG. Then, based on the lottery table and the current game result, a pseudo number of additional games is selected by lottery. If the number of games selected by the lottery is less than or equal to the post-addition counter BG, that number of games is determined as the current number of pseudo-additional games. On the other hand, if the number of games selected by the lottery is larger than the deferred addition counter BG, the value of the deferred addition counter BG is determined as the current number of pseudo additional games. By doing this, it is possible to prevent pseudo-additions exceeding the post-addition counter BG from occurring while making it appear as if an actual addition is being made in relation to the specific combination that triggered the addition. .

In the subsequent step S8710, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to perform an additional effect based on the number of pseudo additional games determined in step S8709. In this case, if the effect is the same as the additional effect that normally occurs, it is possible to give a strong impression that the additional effect has occurred due to the current game result.

In the subsequent step S8711, the notification amount is added to the display remaining counter HG, and in step S8712, the notification amount is subtracted from the post-addition counter BG. Then, in step S8713, it is determined whether or not the rear load counter BG has become 0. If it has become 0, the rear load flag is cleared in step S8714. If it is determined in step S8713 that the post-ride counter BG is not 0, or after executing the process in step S8714, the first special notification setting process ends.

As described above, even if the number of free games FG is 0 or less, a pseudo additional effect is performed using the unreported number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (for the post-addition counter BG). With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the feeling of loss when an opportunity for addition occurs in a situation where the number of free games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set.

In particular, since the pseudo-addition of the unreported amount is performed within the range of the post-addition counter BG, and the configuration is such that it is performed after the actual addition lottery/additional game number lottery, the pseudo It is possible to strengthen the impression that it is not a real bonus, but an actual bonus based on the winning of a specific combination, and it is possible to make the player feel pure joy at the fact that the pseudo bonus is performed.

<Modification 14>
In this modification, setting value suggestion is performed using the pseudo addition in modification 13 described above. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the pseudo add-on game number lottery process in this modification. The pseudo add-on game number lottery process is the process executed in step S8709 above.

In step S8801, processing is performed to understand the setting values. In the following step S8802, a setting value suggestion lottery process is performed. In the setting value suggestion lottery process, it is determined by a lottery whether or not to make a setting value suggestion at the time of this pseudo addition. Specifically, from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, a table for the number of pseudo-additional games for setting value suggestion is obtained, and a lottery is made to determine whether or not to perform a pseudo-additional addition based on the number of games including the content of the setting value suggestion.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), the pseudo add-on game number table for setting value suggestion is set so that the number of pseudo add-on games to be selected differs depending on the setting value. For example, a pseudo add-on effect with the same number of games as the post-add counter BG as the number of pseudo add-on games can be selected at all setting values, but is set so that the higher the setting, the more likely it is to be selected. Further, the pseudo additional effect of adding the number of games, for example, 10, as a first number to the post-addition counter BG is selected in settings 1 to 3, and is set such that the lower the setting, the more likely it is to be selected. A pseudo additional effect of the number of games by adding, for example, 56 as a second number to the post-addition counter BG is set to be selected in settings 5 and 6. A pseudo additional effect of the number of games by adding, for example, 77 as a third number to the post-addition counter BG is set to be selected only with setting 6.

After performing the lottery process for setting value suggestion in step S8802, it is determined in step S8803 whether or not a pseudo-addition effect for each number of games including the contents of setting value suggestion has been won. If it has been won, in step S8804, the number of games corresponding to the winning details is set as the current number of pseudo additional games, and then the main number of pseudo additional games lottery process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), the table for the number of pseudo additional games for setting value suggestions shows that no matter what the setting value is, a setting suggestion failure is selected in which the number of games that include the content of these setting value suggestions is not selected. It is set to get. If the setting suggestion is not selected, the number of games for the pseudo additional effect is determined by lottery through the following process.

That is, if the result of the lottery process in step S8802 is outside the suggested set value, a negative determination is made in step S8803, and in this case, the process advances to step S8805. In step S8805, a normal pseudo additional game number lottery process is performed. The pseudo extra game number lottery process for normal use is the same as that described in the above modification 13, and is based on the same lottery table as the extra game number lottery table for the normal time in FIG. 131 and the current game result. The number of pseudo additional games is selected by lottery.

In the following step S8806, it is determined whether the number of games selected in step S8805 is less than or equal to the post-addition counter BG. If it exceeds the post-addition counter BG, in step S8807, the value of the post-payment counter BG is set as the current number of pseudo-addition games, and then the pseudo-additional game number lottery process is ended. If the number of games selected in step S8805 is less than or equal to the post-addition counter BG, in step S8808, the selected number of games is set as the number of pseudo-additional games of this time, and then the number of pseudo-additional games is drawn. Finish the process.

In this case, for example, if the number of games announced in the additional effect (pseudo additional effect) is added to the total number of games and the remaining number of games to reach the upper limit of 1500, the number of pseudo additional games for setting value suggestion There is a possibility that the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG was selected in the lottery. As described above, the higher the setting, the more likely the number of games equal to this later pick-up counter BG will be selected, so it is possible to predict the higher setting. However, the additional effect of the same number of games as the number of games to be added to the later counter BG may also occur when the number of games equal to or greater than the number of games to be added to the later game is selected in the normal pseudo number of additional games lottery process. In this case, it is not only necessary to generate an additional effect of the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG, but also the difficulty level of predicting the set value is increased, and the interest of the game is added.

For example, in the table for the number of additional games to be played based on winning a strong cherry during the attack mode, the maximum number of games to be selected is set as 200 games (FIG. 131). Therefore, for example, if an additional effect of 250 games occurs when the number of games exceeds 200 when a strong cherry is won, there is a high possibility that it is a pseudo additional effect, and if the number of games is the same as the additional effect counter BG ( If the upper limit is reached when added to the total number of games and the number of remaining games), the high setting will result in an increased level of expectation.

On the other hand, even if the same 250-game additional effect occurs, if it is triggered by winning a weak cherry, the number of games will be within the range selected for the weak cherry (Figure 131), and if the additional effect is Even if the number is the same as BG, it cannot be denied that the number of games greater than or equal to the post-addition counter BG may have been selected in the normal pseudo-additional game number lottery process.

In addition, in the above example, even if an additional effect exceeding 200 games occurs when a strong cherry is won, if it is the number of games (260) that is the addition of the first number (10) to the additional effect counter BG, the low setting This increases the possibility that On the other hand, if it is an additional effect triggered by the winning of a weak cherry, it cannot be determined that the setting is low.

Here, if the number of free games on the display, which is determined from the total number of games and the number of remaining games on the display, is greater than the upper limit of the number of additional games at one time, as described above, the post-addition counter BG and When an additional effect for the same number of games occurs, it is clearly understood that it includes the content of setting value suggestion. On the other hand, if the number of free games on the display is less than the upper limit of the number of additional games at one time, and an additional effect of the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG occurs, it is assumed that the contents of the setting value suggestion are included. cannot be determined. In other words, in a situation where the number of free games on the display is large, additional effects including setting value suggestions are more likely to occur, and even if the excess flag is set early, the setting value This can bring about benefits such as being able to enjoy suggestions. In addition, if the number of free games on the display becomes less than the upper limit for the number of additional games at one time, players who wish to receive additional effects that include setting value suggestions may not be able to receive additional effects based on a specific role with a small upper limit number of games (for example, Players will want up to 50 games (additions based on Chance A and Chance B). In other words, players will want to increase the number of games in a completely opposite way to the normal situation where they would expect to increase the number of games, and it becomes possible to realize innovative gameplay that has never existed before.

Also, for example, if the additional effect that has occurred is for the number of games that is the addition of the second number (56) or third number (77) to the additional effect counter BG, a high setting is expected as described above. It is now possible. However, this content also differs in the number of games that appear depending on the progress of the game, such as the number of remaining games on the display, and the suggested content.

For example, in FIG. 176 (b1), in a situation where the total number of games is 1045, the number of remaining games on the display is 102, and the post-add counter BG is 353, the number of additional games that appear and the content suggested by the setting value are It shows a relationship. In this case, if the number of additional games is 353 games, a high setting is suggested, and if the number of additional games is 363 games, a low setting is suggested. Further, if the number of additional games is 409 games, setting 5 or setting 6 is suggested, and if the number of additional games is 430 games, setting 6 is confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176(b2), even if the total number of games is 1045, in a situation where the number of remaining games on the display is 56 and the add-on counter BG is 399, the number of add-on games is 409. If it's a game, it suggests a low setting. In other words, in the case of Fig. 176 (b1) above, the number of games that suggests setting 5 or setting 6 suggests a low setting in the situation of Fig. 176 (b2), and even if the same number of games is added, , the content of the suggestions will be completely different.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 176 (b3), even if the total number of games is 1045, in a situation where the number of remaining games on the display is 35 and the add-on counter BG is 420, the number of add-on games is 430. If it's a game, it suggests a low setting. In other words, in the case of Fig. 176 (b1) above, the number of games for which setting 6 is confirmed suggests a low setting in the situation of Fig. 176 (b3), and even if the number of games is the same, the suggested content is becomes completely different.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the specialized zone is different from each of the above embodiments. In each of the above embodiments, there is a pattern in which the transition to the specialized zone is based on the occurrence of the seventh replay prize during the VB mode, and a transition to the specialized zone is based on winning the transition lottery to the super attack mode. In this embodiment, a pattern that changes based on winning of a specific combination in attack mode or VB mode will be explained.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the second specific combination process is a process that is performed when a specific combination is won, and is a process that is performed when the display mode is mainly the attack mode.

In the second specific combination processing in this embodiment, the processing when the game number addition lottery processing in the attack mode is not won is different. That is, the processing from step S10001 to step S10020 is the same as the processing from step S901 to step S920 described above, and based on the winning of a specific combination, there is a lottery for transition to the VB mode according to the rank of the attack mode, and a selection of the rank of the attack mode. A promotion lottery and a lottery to increase the number of games in Attack Mode will be held, and if you win each of these lots, a process will be carried out to grant you the corresponding benefits (transition to VB mode, rank promotion, increase in the number of games). It will be done.

In the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S10015 that the player has not won in the attack mode game number addition lottery process performed in the immediately preceding step S10014, the process advances to step S10021. In step S10021, a lottery for moving to the specialized zone is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, if a specific combination is won during attack mode, but the lottery to move to the VB mode or the lottery to increase the number of games in attack mode is not won, the lottery to move to the specialized zone is held. It will be done. In the specialized zone lottery process, a table for specializing zone shift lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to shift the display mode to the specialized zone using a lottery counter or the like. conduct.

As shown in FIG. 179, the specialized zone transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery varies depending on the type of specific combination.

Here, in this embodiment, the winning probabilities of specific combinations in the lottery process (FIG. 16) are different from those of the above embodiments, and in particular, strong cherry (IV = 13), weak cherry (IV = 14), strong cherry (IV = 14), The winning probabilities of watermelon (IV=15) and weak watermelon (IV=16) are different. Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a strong cherry is about 1/600, and the probability of winning a weak cherry is about 1/200. Also, the probability of winning a strong watermelon is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon is approximately 1/60. That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a strong cherry or a weak cherry (these are collectively referred to simply as "cherry") is about 1/150 in total, The probability of winning a ``Watermelon'' (collectively, simply referred to as ``Watermelon'') is about 1/50 in total, making it far more likely to win a Watermelon than a Cherry. These cherries and watermelons are set so that there is no difference in winning probability regardless of the setting values. For example, the probability of winning a cherry in setting 1 and the probability of winning a cherry in setting 6 are the same, and the probability of winning a cherry in setting 3 is the same. The winning probability and the watermelon winning probability of setting 5 are common. The winning probabilities of other specific combinations are the same as in each of the above embodiments. Furthermore, the probabilities of game results other than the specific combination (normal replay, push order replay, push order bell, 1st BB, 2nd BB, CB, loss, etc.) are the same as in each of the above embodiments.

In the specialized zone transition lottery table, for example, in the specialized zone transition lottery based on strong cherries, there is a 5% probability of winning, and in the specialized zone transition lottery based on weak cherries, there is a 0.5% probability of winning. On the other hand, there is a 15% probability of winning in the specialized zone transition lottery based on strong watermelons, and a 5% chance of winning in the specialized zone transition lottery based on weak watermelons. In other words, watermelon is set not only to have a higher probability of winning as a game result than cherry, but also to have a higher probability of winning in the specialized zone transition lottery.

These winning probabilities for each specific role in the specialized zone transition lottery are set as a common winning probability regardless of the set value, and are set so as not to differ depending on the set value.

In step S10022, based on the processing result of step S10021, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. If the winning combination has not been won, the second specific combination processing is immediately ended. If it has been won, in step S10023, processing is performed to set a specialized zone winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d. Then, in step S10024, a process of acquiring a portent game number table is performed, a process of lottery for the number of portent games is performed in step S10025, a process of setting the number of portent games is performed in step S10026, and a portent command command is executed in step S10027. After performing the process of setting , the second specific combination process ends. The processing from step S10024 to step S10027 is, for example, similar to the processing from step S906 to step S909, and is processing for setting the precursor mode.

Next, the third specific combination processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 178. As already explained, the third specific winning combination process is a process that is performed when a specific winning combination is won, and is a process that is performed when the display mode is mainly the VB mode.

In the third specific combination processing in this embodiment, similar to the changes in the second specific combination processing described above, the processing when the game number addition lottery processing in the attack mode is not won is different. That is, the processing from step S10101 to step S10107 is similar to step S1001 to step S1007 above, and a lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode based on the winning of a specific combination is carried out, and if the lottery for adding the number of games is won, the number of games is increased. Additional processing, etc. is performed.

In the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S10102 that the player has not won in the attack mode game number addition lottery process performed in the immediately preceding step S10101, the process advances to step S10108. In step S10108, a lottery for moving to the specialized zone is executed. That is, in this embodiment, even if a specific winning combination is won during the VB mode, but the game number addition lottery in the attack mode is not won, a lottery for shifting to the specialized zone is performed. The specialized zone lottery process is similar to the process in step S10021 described above, and is performed based on the specialized zone transfer lottery table.

Similar to the table for specialized zone transition lottery in VB mode, the probability of winning the transition lottery differs depending on the type of specific role, as shown in Figure 179, similar to the table for specialized zone transition lottery in attack mode. It is set as follows. For example, in a specialized zone transition lottery based on strong cherries, there is a 10% probability of winning, and in a specialized zone transition lottery based on weak cherries, there is a 1% probability of winning. On the other hand, there is a 30% probability of winning in the specialized zone transition lottery based on strong watermelons, and a 10% chance of winning in the specialized zone transition lottery based on weak watermelons. In other words, even in the VB mode, the probability of winning the specialized zone transition lottery is set to be higher for watermelons than for cherries. In addition, the probability of winning the specialized zone transition lottery including other specific combinations is set to be higher in VB mode than in attack mode.

The winning probability for each specific role in the specialized zone transfer lottery during VB mode is also set as a common winning probability regardless of the setting value, similar to the winning probability during the attack mode above, and does not vary depending on the setting value. It is set as follows.

In step S10109, it is determined whether the transfer lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S10108. The processing from step S10109 to step S10114 is generally similar to the processing from step S10022 to step S10027 described above, and is the processing for setting the omen mode when the lottery for moving to the specialized zone is won. However, in step S10113, the number of games obtained by adding the remaining number of games in the VB mode to the number of precursor games determined by the lottery process for the number of precursor games is set as the current number of precursor games. That is, although the foreshadowing performance indicating the winning of the specialized zone is performed during the VB mode, the transition to the specialized zone is made after the VB mode ends. Note that the remaining number of games in the VB mode may be set as the number of precursor games, and in this case, it is possible to omit the lottery process for the number of precursor games.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is carried out based on the fact that an additional winning is not possible based on a specific combination in the attack mode or the VB mode. With this configuration, the potential profit that can be obtained if a specific combination is won during attack mode or VB mode is not limited to a direct increase in the number of games played, and the expectation is higher. It will be done. In addition, the transition routes to specialized zones are diversified, making it possible to significantly improve gameplay.

As a process for transitioning the display mode to the specialized zone, a supplementary explanation will be given of the mode transition notification process and the push order process in this embodiment with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. The specialized zone in this embodiment is shifted based on the establishment of the seventh re-game winning, similarly to each of the above-described embodiments. However, in this embodiment, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is not performed by the lottery at the time of winning the BAR replay (the lottery to determine whether or not to win the 7th replay), but by the lottery for winning the specific combination as described above. A transfer lottery will be held from time to time. Then, if you win the transfer lottery when winning the specific winning combination, the special zone winning flag will be set and you will be able to transfer.After that, if you win BAR Replay 1, you will be given the push order to establish the 7th replay prize. The configuration is such that the notification is carried out and the zone moves to the specialized zone.

That is, in the mode transition notification process in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 180, in steps S10201 to S10216, it is determined that the number of precursor games has become 0, similar to the processes in steps S1101 to S1116 above. Based on this, processing for transitioning to a corresponding display mode and processing for generating push order notification when a push order combination is won that becomes a shift hand to a corresponding gaming state are performed.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S10213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S10217. In step S10217, it is determined whether the specialized zone winning flag is set. If it has not been set, the mode transition notification process ends. If it has been set, processing to clear the specialized zone winning flag is performed in step S10218. Then, in step S10219, processing is performed to set a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing press order notification corresponding to the seventh re-game winning. After executing the process of step S10219, a specialized zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S10220, and then this mode transition notification process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the special zone has been won. This process may be executed on the condition that the specialized zone winning notification command is received, for example, in the other bet effect setting process (step S1809) of the bet effect setting process (FIG. 44). .

In the push order processing in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Press order notification (press order notification for 3rd re-game to fifth re-game) and press order notification (press order notification for 1st re-game) to prevent falling to the first RT state are performed.

When a negative determination is made in step S10309, in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S10314 whether or not the current game result is BAR replay 1 of the BAR replays. If it is BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S10315 whether the attack notification flag is set, and in step S10316 it is determined whether the specialized zone notification flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S10315, the press order process is directly ended without executing press order notification in the current BAR replay 1 winning game. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S10316, the process advances to step S10307, and processing for press order notification to establish the first re-game winning is performed.

If both the attack notification flag and the specialized zone notification flag are set, press order notification corresponding to the 7th re-game winning is executed in step S10317, and in step S10318, the 7th re-gaming winning is announced. After performing a process of setting a press order notification command including a stop order corresponding to the stop order as an output target to the display control device 81, the press order combination process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the relationship between the stopping order and the winning mode when winning BAR Replay 1 is set so that the stopping order is different for the 7th replay winning, the 1st replay winning, and the 6th replay winning. It is recommended to set this (Fig. 23(c)). Thereby, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the press order notification corresponding to the seventh re-game win as described above, it becomes possible to more reliably achieve the seventh re-game win. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S1316 of the winning result handling process (FIG. 39) that the seventh replay winning has been achieved, instead of determining the presence or absence of the VB notification flag in step S1317, The configuration is such that the presence or absence of the specialized zone notification flag is checked. That is, when the seventh re-game winning is established and the special zone notification flag is set, the special zone start process (from step S1318) is performed. By doing this, it is possible to avoid shifting to the specialized zone even if the stop order happens to match the stop order corresponding to the seventh re-game winning.

Also, in the pressing order combination processing of this embodiment, when a negative determination is made in step S10314, processing for the pressing order bell is performed in steps S10319 to S10322, which is similar to the processing in steps S1219 to S1222 described above. It is.

Next, the setting process of the additional effect in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 182. As already explained, the setting process for the additional effect is a process executed by the display control device 81 based on receiving the additional command from the main control device 101.

In step S10401, it is determined whether or not the specialization zone is in progress. If it is not in the specialization zone, in steps S10402 to S10413, it is determined whether or not the current addition is to be added as a later addition, in the same manner as in steps S8502 to S8513 above, and if it is not to be added as an additional , it is determined at which timing of the game the additional effect should be generated or not.

In the following explanation, as a comparison with the post-add performance, the add-on performance that occurs in the add-on winning game (add-on performance that occurs at a timing earlier than the post-add performance) is also referred to as an immediate performance.

If the command is an add-on command received during the specialized zone in step S10401, the add-on process for the specialized zone is executed in step S10414, and then the process for setting the add-on effect is ended.

Here, before explaining the specialization zone addition process, the effects in the specialization zone in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185.

As shown in FIG. 183(a), when moving to the special add-on zone, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "Add-on probability increasing". As a result, the player can clearly understand that the probability of winning the game number addition lottery is high. Further, in the auxiliary display section 65, the total number of added games in the specialized zone is displayed as the number of added games in the specialized zone TUG. The number of additional games in the specialized zone TUG is placed, for example, in the upper center of the auxiliary display section 65, and is placed in a position where it particularly attracts the attention of the player.

In this embodiment as well, in the specialized zone, you can win not only the specific combination but also the push order bell and push order replay (FIG. 129). Therefore, an additional number of games occurs in every game, a corresponding additional effect is performed, and the display of the number of additional games TUG in the specialized zone is updated every game.

In this embodiment, among the specific combinations in the specialized zone, especially for watermelon and cherry, when an instant payout effect is selected in which an additional effect is performed in the winning game, and when the specialization zone ends. There are cases where a post-addition performance is selected in which the notification of the number of add-on games is carried over until the end of the game.

In the following explanation, as a contrast to the instant pay-off effect and post-pay effect outside of the specialized zone, the additional effect that occurs in the winning game during the specialized zone is also referred to as the immediate pay-off effect during the zone, and when the special zone ends. The additional performance that is generated (additional performance that is generated at a later timing than the immediate mid-zone performance) is also referred to as the late mid-zone performance.

As shown in FIG. 184(a), for example, when a watermelon is won and the zone instant payout effect is selected, the above-described additional payoff effect occurs. This additional effect is an effect in which the winning notification of the additional winning and the content notification of the number of additional games are performed at the same time. On the other hand, when a watermelon is won, if the mid-zone pick-up effect is selected, the first pick-up character BUP1 is displayed as a character imitating a green treasure box corresponding to the watermelon, for example, as a winning notification that the watermelon has won an additional win. At the same time, the characters "Get!!" are displayed to indicate that the first additional character BUP1 (additional right based on the watermelon opportunity) has been acquired. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 184(b), when the zone instant payout effect is selected when a cherry is won, the above-described additional effect occurs, similar to when the instant payoff effect is selected when a watermelon is won. . On the other hand, when the second pick-up effect in the zone is selected when a cherry is won, the second pick-up character BUP2 is displayed, for example, as a character imitating a red treasure box corresponding to the cherry, as a winning notification that the additional win has been won due to the cherry. At the same time, the characters "Get!!" are displayed to indicate that the second additional character BUP2 (additional right based on the cherry opportunity) has been acquired. The first back-up character BUP1 and the second back-up character BUP2 have different display contents so that they can be identified by the player, and specifically, the colors of the characters are different as described above (BUP1 is shown in green, BUP2 is shown in red, and the dot hatches are different in the figure).

The acquired first add-on character BUP1 and second add-on character BUP2 are displayed side by side in the number of add-on games TUG in the specialized zone, as shown in FIG. 183(b). In FIG. 183(b), three first rear-position characters BUP1 are displayed, and one second rear-position character BUP2 is displayed, indicating that the rear-position effect occurs three times during the watermelon-triggered zone. It also shows that a cherry-triggered late-in-the-zone performance occurs once. In addition, FIG. 183(b) shows a situation in which the number of additional games in the specialized zone TUG has been updated to "150", and such a situation means that the number of additional games in the specialized zone TUG is updated to "150", and in this situation, each game in the specialized zone has an immediate bonus effect in the zone. This shows that a total of 150 games were added. More specifically, the situation in which the display in FIG. 183(b) is displayed means that 150 game additions occur in the specialized zone, and furthermore, the later addition effect occurs 4 times (3 times + 1 time) in the zone. This means that there is potentially an even larger number of additional games than the 150 games displayed in the number of additional games in the specialized zone TUG.

When the number of consecutive games in a specialized zone becomes 0 and the specialized zone ends, a post-post performance corresponding to the first post-post character BUP1 and second post-post character BUP2 is generated. Specifically, at the end of the final game in the specialized zone (after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped; more specifically, after the medal payout is completed), as shown in FIG. The characters ``Judge'' are displayed to indicate that the situation is such that a late ride performance in the zone will be generated as content notification of the winning notification by the first rear ride character BUP1 and the second rear ride character BUP2. In addition, there is a first number of post-add games BUG1 indicating the total number of additional games (post-add) that occurred due to the watermelon trigger, and a second number of post-add games BUG2 indicating the total number of additional games (post-add) that occurred due to the cherry. is displayed. In FIG. 185(a), the situation before the occurrence of the late play effect in the zone is shown, and both the numbers of late play games BUG1 and BUG2 are 0 games.

In the middle-of-the-zone rear-loading performance, for each of the plurality of rear-loading characters BUP1 and BUP2 displayed, a mid-zone rear-loading performance is generated as content notification sequentially (for example, every time the performance switch 66 is operated). For example, one of the plurality of displayed first rear characters BUP1 is moved to the approximate center of the auxiliary display section 65 and displayed in an enlarged manner, and the content corresponding to the winning notification indicated by the first rear character BUP1 is displayed. An announcement will be made. As the content notification, for example, a display is made as if a treasure box shown as the first back-up character BUP1 has been opened and the contents are popping out. The content corresponds to the number of additional games, and FIG. 185(b) shows that 10 additional games (additional addition) have occurred. In this case, the display is updated by adding 10 games to the first number of add-on games BUG1, and the display of the number TUG of add-on games in the specialized zone is also updated by adding 10 games. Thereafter, the content notification is performed sequentially for the remaining first character BUP1.

When the content notification regarding the first rear-mounted character BUP1 is completed, the content notification regarding the second rear-mounted character BUP2 is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 186(a), the second rear character BUP2 is moved to the approximate center of the auxiliary display section 65 and displayed in an enlarged manner, and the winning notification shown by the second rear character BUP3 is displayed. A content notification corresponding to the above will be made. For example, a treasure box shown as the second rear-mounted character BUP2 is opened and the contents appear to pop out. As in the case of the first post-add character BUP1, the content corresponds to the number of additional games, and FIG. 186(a) shows that 90 games have been added (post-add). In this case, the display is updated by adding 90 games to the second number of additional games BUG2, and the display of the number TUG of additional games in the specialized zone is also updated by adding 90 games.

When all content notifications regarding the additions that occurred during the specialization zone (intra-zone later addition effects) are completed, as shown in FIG. 186(b), regarding the additions between watermelon and cherry that occurred during the specialization zone, Ratio notification indicating the selection ratio (selection ratio) between immediate pick-up and later pick-up is performed.

Specifically, regarding the bonus that occurred due to the watermelon, the number of times the content of the number of bonus games was notified in the game in which the watermelon was won (the number of immediate wins), and the bonus that was triggered by the watermelon winning at the end of the specialized zone. The number of times content notification of the number of games has been made (number of post-additions) is displayed as a first ratio display HP1. In addition, regarding the top-up that occurred due to the cherry winning, the number of times the content of the number of top-up games was notified in the game where the cherry was won (the number of immediate top-up games), and the number of top-up games triggered by the cherry winning at the end of the specialized zone. The number of times content notification has been performed (number of post-additions) is displayed as a second ratio display HP2.

In Figure 186(b), the first ratio display shows that in this specialized zone, the number of immediate rides triggered by winning a watermelon is 1, and the number of delayed rides triggered by winning a watermelon is 3. It is shown as HP1 in a stacked bar graph. In addition, in this specialized zone, the number of immediate rides triggered by winning a cherry is 2, and the number of late drives triggered by winning a cherry is 1, which is shown in the stacked bar graph as the second ratio display HP2. is shown. In these stacked bar graphs, the area showing the number of immediate wins and the area showing the number of late wins are shown in different colors, allowing players to clearly understand the difference between these areas. (The figure shows different dot hatches.) More specifically, in this specialized zone, one-fourth (25%) chose to add immediately after watermelon, and three-quarters (75%) chose to add later. In this specialized zone, two-thirds (approximately 66%) of the top-ups that occurred due to cherries chose immediate pickup, and one-third (approximately 33%) chose later pickup. Visually and easily understandable.

In this embodiment, with regard to top-up in the specialized zone, the ratio of immediate pick-up and later pick-up selection (probability of winning the pick-up lottery) is set to differ depending on the setting value. ing. In other words, with regard to the specialized zone, by notifying the ratio of immediate pick-up and later pick-up as described above, it becomes possible for the player to predict and understand the set value. Hereinafter, the process for performing additional notification in the specialized zone, including the process for performing such ratio notification, will be described in detail.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing specialization zone addition processing.

In step S10501, processing is executed to determine the current number of additional games. In the subsequent step S10502, a lottery process for placing the player in the middle of the zone is executed. In the mid-zone post-add lottery process, the additional performance timing table for the specialized zone is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a, and whether the current additional performance is to be immediately applied or to be subsequently applied is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 188, in the special zone additional performance timing table, the execution timing of the additional performance is set to differ depending on the game result (winning combination) that triggered the additional win and the set value. . Specifically, the execution timing of the top-up effect will be different depending on the game result that triggered the top-up win: watermelon (common to strong watermelon and weak watermelon), cherry (common to strong cherry and weak cherry), and others. is set to .

For watermelon, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 40%, and later loading is selected at 60%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 45%, and later pick-up is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 55%, and later pick-up is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 60%, and later pick-up is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 65%, and later pick-up is selected at 35%. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for later pick-up, and the higher the selection rate for immediate pick-up.

For Cherry, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 10%, and later loading is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 30%, and later pick-up is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 70%, and later pick-up is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 80%, and later pick-up is selected at 20%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 90%, and later pick-up is selected at 10%. In other words, the higher the setting value is, the lower the selection rate for later pick-up and the higher the selection rate for immediate pick-up, which is similar to Watermelon.

On the other hand, compared to the case where the additional opportunity is a watermelon, in the case of a cherry, the difference depending on the set value of the ratio of immediate addition and later addition is set to be larger. That is, for example, in predicting the setting value when the instant pick-up option is selected, cherries have a higher degree of contribution as a prediction material than watermelons. In other words, predicting the setting value from the immediate loading/later loading ratio of Cherry is more accurate and easier to predict the setting value than predicting the setting value from the immediate loading/later loading ratio of Watermelon. It is now possible.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the winning probability is set so that it is overwhelmingly easier to win a watermelon than a cherry (FIG. 179). The winning probability is the same even in the specialized zone, and it is easier to win the watermelon than the cherry in the specialized zone. Then, in a game where the set value is predicted from the immediate/post-load ratio in the specialized zone, it is easy to win a watermelon with low prediction accuracy, and it is difficult to win a cherry with high prediction accuracy. By doing this, the benefit of winning a cherry with a low winning probability is not only a benefit related to the advantage such as the number of additional games, but also a presentation of information that may be useful to the player such as predictive material for the setting value. It becomes possible to add benefits and prevent the ratio of benefits related to the advantage level from becoming too high.

After executing the zone last pick lottery process in step S10502, it is determined in step S10503 whether or not the zone last pick lottery process has been won. If the prize has not been won, that is, if the instant win is selected, it is determined in step S10504 whether or not the current trigger for the win was a watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process advances to step S10505, and a process of adding 1 to a watermelon instant pick-up counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The watermelon instant pick-up counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of times when a watermelon triggers an additional pick-up during the current specialized zone and the instant pick-up is selected.

If it is determined in step S10504 that it is not a watermelon trigger, the process advances to step S10506. In step S10506, it is determined whether or not the current opportunity for addition was a cherry. If it is a cherry, the process advances to step S10507, and a process of adding 1 to a cherry immediate pick-up counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The instant loading counter for cherry is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when an additional loading occurs due to a cherry during the current specialized zone and the immediate loading is selected.

After executing the process in step S10505 or step S10507, or if a negative determination is made in step S10506, in step S10508, an additional effect is added so that an additional effect (immediate effect in the zone) can occur in the current game. Set. In this case, the additional effect generation timing is set to be when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in this embodiment, but other timings such as when the first reel is stopped or when the second reel is turned off are possible. It may also be configured such that an immediate ride effect occurs during the zone.

After that, in step S10509, at the timing when the instant payout effect occurs in the zone (or at a timing slightly delayed from the timing when the instant payout effect occurs in the zone), the number of add-on games in the specialized zone TUG is determined to be the current number of add-on games. After setting the update effect so that the display is updated to the one with the added value, the specialized zone addition process is ended.

As already explained, the data for the additional effects in steps S10508 and S10509 are temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area. The CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area at the timing of occurrence of the above-mentioned additional performance (immediate performance within the zone), and causes the additional performance to be performed. This also applies to other additional effects below.

If it is determined in step S10503 that the late-in-zone pick-up lottery has been won, that is, if the pick-up is selected as the current pick-up, the process advances to step S10510. In step S10510, it is determined whether or not the current opportunity for addition was watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process advances to step S10511, and a process of adding 1 to a watermelon post-loading counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The watermelon later loading counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of times when a watermelon triggers an additional loading during the current specialized zone and the later loading is selected.

In the subsequent step S10512, processing is executed to store the current number of add-on games in the watermelon post-pay individual area provided in the RAM 106. In this embodiment, a plurality of areas are provided as separate areas for watermelons, and specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set to be able to store the number of games from 0 to 999, and the number of games added based on the watermelon trigger can be read out after the fact. For example, if 10 games are stored in the first area and 50 games are stored in the second area, the first add-on occurs when a watermelon triggers an add-on in the specialized zone, and the add-on is selected later. It becomes possible to know after the fact that the number of additional games for the first one was 10 games, and the number of additional games for the next one was 50 games. In step S10512, processing is performed to store the number of add-on games triggered by the current watermelon in the area with the smallest number among the areas where the number of games is not stored in the individual watermelon add-on areas.

After that, in step S10513, the data is temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the first trailing character BUP1 is displayed as the trailing character for watermelon when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Finish the specialization zone addition processing. Note that the display timing of the first post-ride character BUP1 is preferably the same timing as the generation timing of the zone immediate ride effect or a timing slightly later than that.

If it is determined in step S10510 that it is not the watermelon trigger, the process advances to step S10514. In step S10514, it is determined whether or not the current opportunity for addition was a cherry. If it is a cherry, the process advances to step S10515, and a process of adding 1 to the cherry post-load counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The post-load counter for cherry is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of times when a cherry-triggered add-on occurs during the current specialized zone and the post-load is selected.

In the subsequent step S10516, a process is executed to store the current number of add-on games in the individual after-play area for cherry provided in the RAM 106. The individual rear loading area for cherries corresponds to the individual rear loading area for watermelons. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of areas are also provided for the rear-loading individual areas for cherries, and specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set to be able to store the number of games from 0 to 999, and the number of games added based on the cherry opportunity can be read out after the fact. In step S10516, processing is performed to store the number of add-on games triggered by the current cherry in the area with the smallest number among the areas where the number of games is not stored in the individual areas for add-on cherry.

After that, in step S10517, the data is temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the second rear character BUP2 is displayed as the rear character for cherry when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Finish the specialization zone addition processing. Note that the display timing of the second post-ride character BUP2 is also preferably the same timing as the generation timing of the zone immediate ride effect or a timing slightly later than that. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S10514, the specialized zone addition processing is directly ended.

Note that in this embodiment, in the specialized zone, immediate loading is selected regardless of the setting value for additional triggers other than watermelon and cherry (FIG. 188), so a negative determination is made in step S10514. Never. In other words, it can be said that the determination process in step S10514 is provided for expansion in the case where later addition occurs also in other addition opportunities.

In addition, in step S10513 or step S10515, if there is already displayed first character BUP1 or second character BUP2, the first character BUP1 or second character BUP2 that has already been displayed is It is preferable that the production data is set so that the characters that will be added later this time are displayed side by side. By unifying the rules for the order of arranging (for example, by arranging them in the order of upper left → upper right → lower left → lower right), the after-effect effect at the end of the specialized zone, which will be described later, will be implemented. In such cases, it is possible to clearly understand which number of additional winnings corresponds to the additional winnings. Although the first rear character BUP1 and the second rear character BUP2 are displayed in separate areas (in FIG. 185, the first rear character BUP1 is displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the second rear character BUP2 is displayed in separate areas). (at the top right of the screen), a configuration may be adopted in which the rules for the order of arranging are unified while mixing them. By doing this, it becomes easier to know when the extra winnings correspond to the extra winnings in the special zone game where the extra winnings occur for watermelon and cherry.

In addition, if the total number of characters that have already been displayed and the character that has been displayed as a successor reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), the number of characters that have been displayed as a successor and the character that has been displayed as a successor are combined It may also be configured to display an integrated display character. For example, in a situation where four first post-add characters BUP1 are displayed, if a new display opportunity for the first post-post character BUP1 occurs, a total of five post-post characters triggered by a watermelon will occur. A first integrated display character (for example, a treasure box of a different color or shape) is displayed to indicate the situation. By doing this, when displaying characters that correspond to multiple add-on opportunities using a limited display area, if there is no or small display area, the upper limit (limiter) of the add-on opportunities can be set. It is possible to avoid giving the impression that there is.

Next, the special zone end effect setting process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 189. The specialized zone end effect setting process is a process executed based on receiving the specialized zone end command from the main controller 101 in the full stop effect setting process (FIG. 51) (step S2316). .

As already explained, in this embodiment, at the end of the specialized zone, a rear-loading effect is performed and a ratio notification of the immediate-load/later-load ratio is performed. Specifically, first, in step S10601, processing is performed to understand the instant loading counter for watermelon and the instant loading counter for cherry. In the following step S10602, processing is performed to determine the watermelon later loading counter and the cherry later loading counter. Then, in step S10603, the immediate/post-load ratio of the watermelon-triggered top-up and the immediate-load/later-load ratio of the cherry-triggered top-up are determined based on the results of step S10601 and step S10602, respectively. Execute the process to calculate. In step S10604, the calculated result is temporarily stored in a register or the like.

After that, in steps S10605 to S10620, a process is executed to generate a post-add effect triggered by watermelon and cherry. That is, in step S10605, it is determined whether the watermelon later loading counter is larger than 0, that is, whether it is 1 or more. If the number is 1 or more, the process advances to step S10606, and a process is executed to grasp the number of additional games from the area with the smallest number among the areas where the number of games is stored in the individual watermelon additional area. Then, in step S10607, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a pre-effect in the watermelon rear-end effect is performed. In this case, the first rear-position character BUP1 displayed first is selected from among the first rear-position characters BUP1, and the first rear-position character BUP1 is moved to approximately the center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction performance for prompting the operation of the performance switch 66 is also generated.

After executing the process in step S10607, it is determined in step S10608 whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated, and the process waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which an affirmative determination is made in step S10608 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, regardless of whether or not there is an operation.

After an affirmative determination is made in step S10608, the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled in step S10609 so that an additional effect is performed. In this case, the character of the treasure chest as the first post-additional character BUP1 placed approximately in the center of the screen is opened, and a display effect is performed in which the number of additional games appears to pop out as the treasure inside (FIG. 185(b)) ).

In the subsequent step S10610, display control is performed so that the first number of post-add games BUG1 is displayed as the number of post-add games for watermelon so that the number of add-on games of the add-on effect performed in step S10609 is added and updated. In step S10611, the display of the number TUG of additional games in the specialized zone is controlled to be updated by adding the number of additional games of the additional effect performed in step S10609. Then, in step S10612, the watermelon post-loading counter is decremented by 1, and then the process returns to step S10605.

Since the watermelon post-loading counter becomes 0, a negative determination is made in step S10605, and the process proceeds to step S10613. The processing from step S10613 to step S10620 is a processing for performing rear loading based on cherry, and is substantially the same as the processing from step S10605 to step S10612.

That is, in step S10613, it is determined whether the cherry post-loading counter is larger than 0, that is, whether it is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, the process advances to step S10614, and a process is executed to grasp the number of additional games from the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is stored in the individual area for additional cherry. Then, in step S10615, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that a pre-effect of the rear-loading effect for cherry is performed. In this case, the first displayed second rear character BUP2 is selected from among the second rear character BUP2, and the second rear character BUP2 is moved to approximately the center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction performance for prompting the operation of the performance switch 66 is also generated.

After executing the process of step S10615, it is determined in step S10616 whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated, and the process waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. Note that, similarly to step S10608, the configuration may be such that an affirmative determination is made in step S10616 regardless of whether or not there is an operation after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

After an affirmative determination is made in step S10616, the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled in step S10617 so that an additional effect is performed. In this case, the character in the treasure box as the second post-additional character BUP2 placed approximately in the center of the screen is opened, and a display effect is performed in which the number of additional games appears to pop out as the treasure inside (FIG. 186(a)) ).

In the subsequent step S10618, display control is performed so that the display of the second add-on game number BUG2 is updated by adding the number of add-on games of the add-on effect performed in step S10617 as the display of the number of add-on games for cherry. In step S10619, the display of the number of additional games TUG in the specialized zone is controlled to be updated by adding the number of additional games of the additional effect performed in step S10617. Then, in step S10620, the cherry post-loading counter is decremented by 1, and then the process returns to step S10613.

Since the post-loading cherry counter becomes 0, a negative determination is made in step S10613, and the process proceeds to step S10621. In step S10621, based on the information stored in step S10604, the first ratio display HP1 of immediate entry/later entry based on the watermelon win and the second ratio display HP2 of immediate entry/later entry based on the cherry win are set. It is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (FIG. 186(b)).

Thereafter, in step S10622, various counters for the specialized zone, such as each immediate boarding counter and each subsequent boarding counter, are initialized, and then the processing for setting the specialized zone end effect is ended.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The configuration is such that the execution timing of additional notification differs depending on the setting value. More specifically, the notification of the results of the additional lottery, which is set so that there is no difference in the probability of winning or the number of additional games at the time of winning depending on the setting value, is performed at different timings depending on the setting value. By doing so, it becomes possible to cause a difference depending on the setting value, especially in the game in the attack mode where it is difficult to cause a difference in gameplay depending on the setting value.

As productions with different execution timings of additional notifications, we provide an immediate performance that performs an additional performance in the game where the opportunity for addition occurs, and a post-addition performance that performs the additional performance in a game after the game in which the opportunity for addition occurs. Furthermore, in any performance, the notification of the bonus winning is executed in the game where the bonus opportunity occurs. More specifically, even in the case of performing a rear-loading effect, the first rear-loading character BUP1 and the second rear-loading character BUP2 are displayed in the game. As a result, when a post-add effect is selected, the player can be made aware that the additional effect will occur before the additional effect in the post-add effect occurs, and the player who understands this can , the player can play the game while looking forward to the additional performance being performed in the post-addition performance. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period during which the user can enjoy the first additional performance.

Even if the post-add effect is selected as described above, the notification of winning the add-on lottery is made in advance, and the higher the setting value is, the more likely it is that the immediate add effect will be selected. did. In this way, even if an additional effect is selected, by notifying the player in advance that he or she has won the additional lottery, the additional effect can be performed while making the player more than a little happy. Even if it is predicted and understood that the setting is low due to the additional performance in the post-addition performance, it is not possible to compensate for the degree of disappointment of the player due to the prediction and understanding (low setting). It becomes possible.

The selection ratio of immediate pick-up/later pick-up based on the cherry opportunity is made different from the selection ratio of immediate pick-up/later pick-up based on the watermelon trigger. By doing this, when predicting and understanding the setting value based on the selection ratio, it is possible to not only set the incidence rate for presentation, but also to determine the result of the lottery process (cherry or watermelon). It will be reflected. Therefore, a player who wants to predict and understand the setting value can play the game while hoping that the lottery result in each game will be a result with the desired selection ratio (in the above embodiment, a cherry with a setting difference in the selection ratio). This makes it possible to increase the attention to the lottery results of each game.

The configuration is such that the selection ratio of immediate pick-up/later pick-up based on a cherry opportunity with a low probability of winning has a larger setting difference than the selection ratio of immediate pick-up/later pick-up based on a watermelon trigger with a high winning probability. By doing this, the advantage of winning a cherry can be secured by factors other than factors directly connected to the player's profits, such as the number of medals paid out based on winning a cherry and the additional performance based on winning a cherry. can. Therefore, it is possible to set benefits for each lottery result within a range that does not affect the ball payout rate.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the additional performance timing table for the specialized zone is changed depending on the timing of transition to the specialized zone. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the zone extra lottery process. As already explained, the mid-zone add-on lottery process is the process performed in step S10502 in the special zone add-on process (FIG. 187).

In step S10701, it is determined whether the current specialization zone transition trigger is a cherry (either a strong cherry or a weak cherry). If the transition trigger is not cherry, then in step S10702, a process is executed to obtain a normal additional notification timing table from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10701 that the trigger for moving to the specialized zone this time was a cherry, then in step S10703 a process is executed to obtain a special additional notification timing table from the various table storage areas 182a. . After acquiring any of the notification timing tables, in step S10704, a later lottery is executed based on the notification timing table, and then the zone later lottery process is ended.

The differences between the normal additional notification timing table and the special additional notification timing table will be explained with reference to FIG. 191. The normal add-on notification timing table is as shown in FIG. 188, and in FIG. 191, the parameters (immediate pay/later pay selection percentage) is shown as a reference value.

That is, in the special add-on notification timing table, the parameters (immediate pay/later pay selection rate) when a pay-up occurs triggered by a watermelon win are different from those in the above-mentioned normal add-on notification timing table. Specifically, in the special add-on notification timing table, in setting 1, immediate pay-off is selected at 10%, and post-pay is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 30%, and later pick-up is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 70%, and later pick-up is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 80%, and later pick-up is selected at 20%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 90%, and later pick-up is selected at 10%. In other words, the higher the setting value is, the lower the selection rate for later rides is, and the higher the selection rate for immediate rides is, similar to the parameters at the time of winning a watermelon in the normal add-on notification timing table.

On the other hand, compared to the normal additional notification timing table, the special additional notification timing table is set to have a larger difference depending on the set value of the ratio between immediate loading and later loading. In other words, for example, when predicting the set value when immediate boarding is selected, the specialized zone that was transferred due to the cherry opportunity is more useful as a prediction material than the specialized zone that was transferred due to other specific role opportunities. High contribution. In other words, it is better to predict the set value from the immediate/later load ratio in a specialized zone that transitioned to a cherry opportunity than to predict the setting value from the immediate/later load ratio in a specialized zone that transitioned to another specific role trigger. The prediction accuracy is higher than that of the previous model, and it is possible to predict the setting value more easily. In other words, it can be said that the specialized zone to which the transition is triggered by the cherry is a zone in which the setting value can be more easily predicted.

Moreover, in the special add-on notification timing table in this modification, the immediate/post-pay ratio based on the watermelon and the immediate/post-pay ratio based on the cherry are the same in both setting values. By doing so, when predicting and understanding setting values based on these ratios, each additional opportunity can be treated as common data, and the parameter can be increased.

By doing the above, it is possible to set specialized zones that have completely different gameplay in predicting and grasping set values, without changing the additional performance in the specialized zones. As a result, it is possible to create a new gameplay experience that goes beyond the traditional gameplay of simply wanting a specialized zone with a large number of additional games, and instead wanting a specialized zone with easy-to-predict set values.

In particular, by changing the specialized zone that transitions to a cherry with a low probability of winning to a specialized zone whose set value is easy to predict and understand, the benefits of winning a result with a low probability of winning can be reduced to the ball payout rate. It becomes possible to add it within a range that does not have any influence.

Moreover, the specialized zone that moves with the cherry opportunity and the specialized zone that moves with other specific role opportunities are only different in the additional notification timing table used in the selection of immediate/post-load, and the small role winning It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent gameplay with a very simple configuration that does not require changes to the probability, additional winning probability, etc.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the zone immediate performance is selected, the additional performance timing table is changed. FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing the middle-of-zone last pick lottery process in this modification.

In step S10801, processing is performed to obtain the table counter ATK from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. The table counter ATK is a counter for the CPU 181 to specify the additional effect timing table to be acquired in this post-add lottery. That is, in step S10802, processing is performed to obtain an additional notification timing table corresponding to the value of the table counter ATK obtained in step S10801 from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182.

In this embodiment, as the additional notification timing table, a plurality of additional notification timing tables are provided as shown in FIG. 193, and four additional notification timing tables, ie, the first to fourth additional notification timing tables, are provided. It is provided. In addition, in this modified example, there is no difference between cherry, watermelon, and other specific combinations in terms of selection rates for immediate placement and later placement. A selection is made. Therefore, the characters that are displayed when the late-playing effect is selected during the zone are not those that are associated with the roles for which the late-playing character is selected, such as the first late-playing character BUP1 and the second late-playing character BUP2. Instead, common characters are displayed. Further, in this modification, ratio notification at the end of the specialized zone is not performed.

The first additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 1. In this table, the selection rates for immediate pick-up and later pick-up are both set as 50%, regardless of the set values.

The second additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 2. In this table, in setting 1, immediate pick-up is selected at 40%, and later pick-up is selected at 60%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 45%, and later pick-up is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 55%, and later pick-up is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 60%, and later pick-up is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 65%, and later pick-up is selected at 35%. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for later pick-up, and the higher the selection rate for immediate pick-up.

The third additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 3. In this table, in setting 1, immediate pick-up is selected at 30%, and later pick-up is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 40%, and later pick-up is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 60%, and later pick-up is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 70%, and later pick-up is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 80%, and later pick-up is selected at 20%. In other words, although the higher the setting value is, the lower the selection rate for later pick-up and the higher the selection rate for immediate pick-up is, which is common to the second additional notification timing table, the setting value for the ratio of immediate pick-up and later pick-up is The difference is larger in the third additional notification timing table than in the second additional notification timing table.

The fourth additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 4 or more. In this table, in setting 1, immediate pick-up is selected at 10%, and later pick-up is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 30%, and later pick-up is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 70%, and later pick-up is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 90%, and later pick-up is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 100%, and later pick-up is selected at 0% (not selected). In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for later pick-up, and the higher the selection rate for immediate pick-up, which is common to the second additional notification timing table and the third additional notification timing table, but The difference depending on the setting value of the ratio with the additional information is larger in the fourth additional notification timing table than in the second additional notification timing table and the third additional notification timing table.

Returning to the explanation of the mid-zone later lottery process, after obtaining one additional notification timing table from each of the above-mentioned additional notification timing tables in step S10802, the subsequent lottery process is executed in step S10803. Then, in step S10804, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S10803 is an immediate win. If it is an immediate ride, a process of adding 1 to the table counter ATK is executed in step S10805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10804 that the vehicle is not immediately loaded but is loaded later, a process of setting the table counter ATK to 1, which is an initial value, is executed in step S10806.

That is, in this modified example, when the immediate win is selected in the later win lottery, the table counter ATK is incremented by 1, and when the later win is selected, the table counter ATK returns to the initial value of 1. As mentioned above, the value of the table counter ATK is associated with the type of additional notification timing table used in the post-add lottery, and the notification timing table obtained in a situation where the value of the table counter ATK is larger is more immediate. It is set so that the difference depending on the set value of the pick-up/post-ride ratio becomes large.

More specifically, basically, in all notification timing tables (except for the first additional notification timing table), the higher the setting, the more likely it is that immediate pickup will be selected, and the lower the setting, the more difficult it will be to select immediate pickup. has been done. Then, as the notification timing table is acquired in a situation where the value of the table counter ATK is large, the difference between the ease with which immediate pick-up is selected with a high setting and the ease with which immediate pick-up is selected with a low setting becomes larger. For example, in the second add-on notification timing table obtained in a situation where the table counter ATK is 2, with setting 6, immediate add is selected with a probability of 65%, and with setting 1, immediate add is selected with a probability of 40%. , the difference is about 1.6 times the probability. On the other hand, in the fourth add-on notification timing table obtained in a situation where the table counter ATK is 4, in setting 6, immediate pay-off is selected with a 100% probability, and with setting 1, it is selected with a 10% probability, and the difference between them is is 10 times more likely. Therefore, the larger the value of the table counter ATK becomes, that is, the more the immediate pick-up is selected consecutively, the easier it becomes to estimate the set value from the selection ratio of the immediate pick-up and the later pick-up.

Furthermore, the more consecutively "Immediate Pick-up" is selected, the higher the setting is and the more likely "Immediate Pick-up" is selected, the more likely the notification timing table is to be selected. It can be used as material to support (predict) this fact. For example, as shown in FIG. 193, when switching from the first additional notification timing table to the fourth additional notification timing table is used, the probability that immediate payment will be selected four times in a row is 0.6% with setting 1. In contrast, it is 2.7% for setting 2, 6.2% for setting 3, 11.6% for setting 4, 18.9% for setting 5, and 26% for setting 6. The difference with 6 is about 43 times the probability difference. As mentioned above, since the configuration switches to the additional notification timing table in which immediate loading is more likely to be selected as the setting is higher, in order to predict the set value based on the continuity of such immediate loading, it is necessary to set the consecutive probability. This results in a configuration in which the difference expands at an accelerating pace.

In other words, for example, in the case of a configuration that uses only the second additional notification timing table (a configuration that does not cause switching to the third and fourth additional notification timing tables), the probability that immediate addition will be selected four times in a row is The probability is about 2.7% for setting 6, and about 17.9% for setting 6.The difference between setting 1 and setting 6 is about 7 times the probability, and the notification timing table is switched as in this modification. The difference is smaller than the difference in configuration. On the other hand, if you try to create a setting difference without switching the notification timing table, it is necessary to increase the difference in the immediate loading/later loading ratio depending on the setting value, and as in the 4th additional notification timing table, once By adding , it becomes possible to determine to some extent whether the setting is high or low.

Therefore, by using the switching of the notification timing table as in the above configuration, it is possible to gradually narrow down the set values, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in which the set values are predicted.

In the zone late pick lottery process (FIG. 192(a)), after performing the process in step S10805 or step S10806, display background change processing is performed in step S10807, and then the zone late pick lottery process ends. do. In the display background change process, the display background color in the specialized zone presentation of the auxiliary display section 65 is changed in association with the value of the table counter ATK. For example, as shown in FIG. 192(b), if the table counter ATK is 1, the background color is displayed in white, and if the table counter ATK is 2, the background color is displayed in yellow. If the table counter ATK is 3, the background color is displayed in green, and if the table counter ATK is 4 or more, the background color is displayed in red. By doing this, the player can easily grasp the current value of the table counter ATK, that is, the number of consecutive times instant wins have been selected, and accumulate instant wins to help predict the set value. It is possible to liven up the game by changing the presentation (changing the background color).

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the additional notification timing table is switched based on the number of games during the advantageous section in which the specialized zone is executed. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the middle-of-zone last pick lottery process in this modification.

In step S10901, processing is performed to grasp the current number of games in the advantageous section. As mentioned above, the number of advantageous period games AG is managed by the main control device 101, but in this modification, the display control device 81 side is also configured to have a similar counter, and the main control device 101 The configuration is such that the display control device 81 side can also grasp the number of games played in the current advantageous section by outputting a command from the display control device 81 side.

In step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the current number of advantageous period games is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S10903, a later lottery is executed, and then this zone later lottery process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), the add-on notification timing table in this modified example is such that the immediate pay/post-pay ratio differs depending on the number of games played in the advantageous section (number of games AG in the advantageous section) and the setting value. It is set. Specifically, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, both immediate entry and later entry are selected with a probability of 50%, regardless of the set value. When the number of games played is 100 to 499, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 40% and post-loading is selected at 60%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 45%, and later pick-up is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 55%, and later pick-up is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 60%, and later pick-up is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 65%, and later pick-up is selected at 35%. That is, when the number of games played is 100 to 499, the higher the set value is, the more likely it is that immediate riding will be selected.

When the number of games played in the advantageous section is between 500 and 999, in setting 1, immediate boarding is selected at 30% and post-boarding is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 40%, and later pick-up is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 60%, and later pick-up is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 70%, and later pick-up is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 80%, and later pick-up is selected at 20%. Further, when the number of games played is 1000 to 1399, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 10% and post-loading is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 30%, and later pick-up is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 70%, and later pick-up is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 90%, and later pick-up is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 100%, and later pick-up is selected at 0% (not selected). Then, when the number of games played reaches 1400 to 1500, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 0% (not selected), and post-loading is selected at 100%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 10%, and later pick-up is selected at 90%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 80%, and later pick-up is selected at 20%. In settings 5 and 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 100%, and later pick-up is selected at 0% (not selected).

That is, as the number of games played in the advantageous section increases, the higher the set value is, the more likely it is that immediate pick-up will be selected, and the difference in the setting value in the selection rate between immediate pick-up and later pick-up becomes larger. By doing this, the more you use the advantageous section, the easier it will be to predict the set value when adding on during the specialization zone, and it will be a bonus for continuing the advantageous section for a long time. It becomes possible to provide benefits other than the number of medals.

As already explained, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. Therefore, if the number of games played approaches 1,500, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to fully obtain the benefits (additional benefits) even if he moves to the specialized zone. In this regard, by configuring the above configuration, even in situations where the number of games played is close to the upper limit and expectations for additional gains in the specialized zone may be lowered, the benefits of moving to the specialized zone can be realized. can be caused.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the parameters of the additional notification timing table in Modification 3 are different. FIG. 195(b) shows an additional notification timing table in this modification.

In the additional notification timing table in this modified example, the relationship between the number of games played in the advantageous section and the set value is reversed from that in the third modified example. More specifically, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, in setting 1 or setting 2, immediate boarding is selected at 100%, and post-boarding is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 80%, and later pick-up is selected at 20%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 10%, and later pick-up is selected at 90%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected (not selected) at 0%, and later pick-up is selected at 100%. That is, at the beginning of the advantageous section, the lower the setting, the more likely it is to select immediate pick-up, and the higher the setting, the easier it is to select later pick-up.

When the number of games played is 100 to 499, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 100%, and post-loading is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 90%, and later pick-up is selected at 10%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 70%, and later pick-up is selected at 30%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 30%, and later pick-up is selected at 70%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 10%, and later pick-up is selected at 90%. In other words, when comparing the cases where the number of games played is 1 to 99 and the case where the number of games played is 100 to 499, it is common to the above modification 3 that the higher the setting value is, the more likely it is that immediate boarding will be selected. In a situation where the number of games is small, the difference in the selection rate between immediate pick-up and delayed pick-up based on the setting value is overwhelmingly large. In other words, it is easier to predict and understand the set value at the beginning of the advantageous section.

When the number of games played in the advantageous section is between 500 and 999, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 80% and late loading is selected at 20%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 70%, and later pick-up is selected at 30%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 60%, and later pick-up is selected at 40%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 40%, and later pick-up is selected at 60%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 30%, and later pick-up is selected at 70%. Further, when the number of games played is 1000 to 1399, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 65% and post-loading is selected at 35%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 60%, and later pick-up is selected at 40%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 55%, and later pick-up is selected at 45%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 45%, and later pick-up is selected at 55%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 40%, and later pick-up is selected at 60%. When the number of games played reaches 1400 to 1500, both immediate play and post play are selected with a probability of 50%, regardless of the set value.

That is, as the advantageous section progresses, the difference in selection rate between immediate pick-up and later pick-up becomes smaller. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency of predicting and understanding the setting values. That is, for example, the initial number of games in the attack mode in the advantageous section is 50 games, and if an opportunity for increase occurs between these 50 games, it is possible to at least predict and understand the set value. By doing so, it becomes easier to play a game in which the set value is predicted and grasped, and it becomes possible to enjoy such a game to the fullest.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, a display remaining number counter HG is used instead of the number of games played in the advantageous section as a parameter of the additional notification timing table in the third and fourth modifications. As already explained, the display remaining number counter HG represents the number of remaining games in the attack mode displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.

In step S10901 of this modification, instead of determining the number of games in the advantageous section, processing is performed to determine the remaining number of display counters HG. Then, in step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the remaining display counter HG is obtained, and in step S10903, an additional lottery is performed.

In the additional notification timing table in this modification, as shown in FIG. 195(c), the immediate/later addition ratio is set to differ depending on the display remaining number counter HG and the set value. Specifically, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, in settings 1 and 2, immediate loading is selected at 80%, and later loading is selected at 20%. In setting 3 and setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 85%, and later pick-up is selected at 15%. In settings 5 and 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 90%, and later pick-up is selected at 10%. When the display remaining number counter HG is 100 to 299, in setting 1, immediate loading is selected at 30%, and later loading is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate pick-up is selected at 40%, and later pick-up is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate pick-up is selected at 50%, and later pick-up is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 60%, and later pick-up is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate pick-up is selected at 70%, and later pick-up is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 80%, and later pick-up is selected at 20%. When the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more, in settings 1 and 2, immediate loading is selected at 20% and late loading is selected at 80%. In settings 3 and 4, immediate pick-up is selected at 15%, and later pick-up is selected at 85%. In settings 5 and 6, immediate pick-up is selected at 10%, and later pick-up is selected at 90%.

In other words, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 and when it is 300 or more, the immediate load/later load ratio is the same for setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6. are doing. Therefore, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 or 300 or more, when narrowing down the setting values based on the immediate load/later load ratio, setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, setting 5 and setting 6 cannot be distinguished. On the other hand, when the display remaining number counter HG is 200 to 299, the immediate loading/later loading ratios are set to be different for all settings 1 to 6. Therefore, from the viewpoint of narrowing down the set values, it is particularly preferable for the remaining display counter HG to be 200 to 299 rather than 300 or more. In other words, rather than being notified that there are a large number of remaining games in Attack Mode and expecting to win a large amount of medals, the notification of the remaining number of Attack Mode games is being announced with a smaller number of games than that. Situations where it is more preferable to do so occur, and it becomes possible to create new gameplay that departs from the conventional game where the goal is to obtain medals.

Furthermore, when comparing the case where the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99 and the case where it is 300 or more, the immediate load/later load ratio is reversed in any setting value. Specifically, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, immediate loading is more likely to be selected than later loading at any setting value, and when the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more, either Regarding the set values, later loading is more likely to be selected than immediate loading. In other words, in a situation where there is a notification that the number of remaining games in attack mode is small, it is likely that the player will choose to immediately pick up the number of remaining games, and in a situation where there are many remaining games in attack mode In a situation where a notification to that effect is given, it is easy to select a later addition in which the number of remaining games is increased after the fact. By doing this, the former provides a sense of security by increasing the small number of remaining games, and the latter provides a sense of superiority by saving the right to increase the remaining number of games. This makes it possible to create performances that match the situation and the player's emotions.

<Modification 6>
The configuration regarding the immediate pick-up/later pick-up ratio is not limited to the specialized zone in the attack mode, and may be applied to other zones as well. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the additional effect setting process in this modification.

In step S11001, it is determined whether or not it is a specialized zone. If it is a specialized zone, specialization zone addition processing is executed in step S11026. Such addition processing is as described above. If it is determined in step S11001 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the current number of additional games is ascertained in step S11002, and an additional lottery is performed in step S11003. In the later-load lottery, the additional-load notification timing table uses a table with different immediate-load/later-load ratios for watermelons and cherries as shown in FIG. 188 in this modification example, but other tables may be used. . In step S11004, it is determined whether or not the post-loading lottery has been won. If it is determined that the lottery has not been won and the immediate loading has been selected, the process advances to step S11005.

In step S11005, it is determined whether or not the current addition is triggered by a watermelon. If it is a watermelon trigger, in step S11006, a process is executed in which the total watermelon ready-to-load counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is incremented by 1. The total watermelon instant loading counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times that an instant loading effect occurs due to a watermelon opportunity in the current attack mode. If it is determined in step S11005 that the trigger is not a watermelon, it is determined in step S11007 whether or not the trigger is a cherry. If it is a cherry opportunity, in step S11008, a process is executed in which the total cherry immediate placement counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is incremented by 1. The total cherry instant placement counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times that an instant cherry placement effect occurs due to a cherry in the current attack mode. These processes from step S11005 to step S11008 correspond to the processes from step S10504 to step S10507.

After executing either step S11006 or step S11008, or if a negative determination is made in step S11007, the process advances to step S11009. The processing from step S11009 to step S11015 is similar to the processing from step S10405 to step S10411 described above.

If it is determined in step S11004 that the winning bidder has been won, the process advances to step S11016. In step S11016, a process of setting a post-installation flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 is executed. The post-add flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that there is at least one additional post-add effect. After executing the process in step S11016, processes for post-add effects are performed in steps S11017 to S11024. The processing from step S11017 to step S11024 corresponds to the processing from step S10510 to step S10517 described above.

That is, in step S11017, it is determined whether or not the current addition is triggered by a watermelon. If it is a watermelon trigger, in step S11018, a process of incrementing the watermelon post-loading counter by 1 is executed. In the subsequent step S11019, processing is executed to store the current number of add-on games in the watermelon post-pay individual area. Then, in step S11020, the display setting of the first back-mounting character BUP1 is performed as the back-mounting character for watermelon.

If it is determined in step S11017 that the trigger is not a watermelon, it is semi-determined in step S11021 whether or not the trigger is a cherry. If it is a cherry trigger, in step S11022, a process of adding 1 to the cherry post-loading counter is executed. In the subsequent step S11023, a process is executed to store the current number of add-on games in the individual after-play area for cherry. Then, in step S11024, display settings are made for the second rear character BUP2 as the rear character for cherry.

After executing either step S11020 or step S11024, or if a negative determination is made in step S11021, the process advances to step S11025. In step S11025, the process of subtracting the current number of add-on games from the add-on counter BG is executed, and then the add-on effect setting process is ended. The process in step S11023 corresponds to the process in step S8607 above.

Although a detailed explanation using the figures will be omitted, as described above, by setting the add-on flag, the add-on effect occurs when the number of remaining games on the attack mode display reaches a predetermined number of games. In this case, similar to the processing from step S10605 to step S10620 in FIG. While performing information acquisition and deletion processing, a post-addition effect is generated for each additional opportunity.

In this case, when executing the post-addition effect, the value of the post-addition counter for watermelon is added to the total post-addition counter for watermelons provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and the value of the post-addition counter for cherry is added. After executing the process of adding the total number of cherries to the rear-loading counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, the processing corresponding to the above-mentioned steps S10605 to S10620 in the rear-loading effect is performed. In this case, as mentioned above, the watermelon post-add counter and the cherry post-add counter are decremented by 1 each time an additional effect occurs, while the values of the total watermelon post-add counter and the total cherry post-add counter are It does not change even if you perform additional effects. By doing so, it becomes possible to calculate the immediate pick-up/later pick-up ratio after the fact, as shown below.

The setting process for the attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 197. As already explained, the attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops in the attack mode end game.

First, in step S11101, a repair is performed to ascertain the total number of acquired medals. In the following step S11102, a process of determining the number of consecutive games is executed. As already explained, the total number of acquired medals and the number of consecutive games are displayed in the attack mode end effect, and the processing in step S11101 and step S11102 is the processing for displaying them.

In step S11103, a process is executed to grasp the total watermelon instant loading counter and the total cherry instant loading counter. In the subsequent step S11104, a process is executed to grasp the total watermelon later loading counter and the total cherry later loading counter. As mentioned above, these total watermelon later loading counter and total cherry later loading counter are counters to which the values of the watermelon later loading counter and the cherry later loading counter are added when performing the later loading performance.

Then, in step S11105, processing is performed to calculate the immediate loading/later loading ratio for all watermelons and the immediate loading/later loading ratio for all cherries, and in step S11106, these calculated ratios are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Perform the processing to display it. Thereafter, in step S11107, processing for ending the display at the end of the attack mode, such as initialization processing of various counters, is executed, and then the setting processing of the attack mode end effect is ended.

An example of an attack mode end effect is shown in FIG. 198. In this example, as shown in FIG. 198(a), the number of consecutive games and the number of acquired medals are displayed to notify that the attack mode has ended. For example, as an operation instruction character that prompts the operation of the production switch 66, a character imitating a button is displayed, as well as an arrow character indicating the direction of operation of the button, and a word "PUSH" indicating that the button should be pressed. Displays characters. When the effect switch 66 is operated, as shown in FIG. 198(b), as the third ratio display HP3, a graph corresponding to the total watermelon immediate loading/later loading ratio in the current attack mode is displayed, and the third ratio display HP3 is displayed. As the 4-ratio display HP4, a graph corresponding to the total immediate/post-load ratio for cherry in the current attack mode is displayed. In the example of FIG. 198(b), the third ratio display HP3 and the fourth ratio display HP4 are displayed as a pie chart, but the first ratio display HP1 and the second ratio display HP2 in FIG. 196(b) are It may also be a stacked bar graph.

By doing the above, it becomes possible to enjoy the gameplay based on the immediate/post-load ratio of the additional performance not only in the specialized zone but also throughout the attack mode. In particular, considering that the probability of winning a cherry is about 1/150 and the probability of winning a watermelon is about 1/50, the number of games called specialized zones is limited (5 games in each of the above embodiments). The chance to win these cherries and watermelons is extremely rare. In this case, even if you try to use the cherry or watermelon opportunity you have prepared to play a game of predicting and understanding the set value in the specialized zone, the opportunity to do so may not occur very often. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to solve this problem by increasing the probability of winning cherries or watermelons, or increasing the number of consecutive games in the specialized zone, there is a concern that the ball payout rate will rise. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by making cherries and watermelons in attack mode subject to playability based on the immediate/post-load ratio, such playability can be suitably achieved while avoiding a rise in the ball payout rate. It can be realized.

<Modification 7>
Regarding the information regarding the execution timing of additional notification such as the immediate boarding/later boarding ratio, the configuration is not limited to displaying it on the auxiliary display section 65. In this modification, a configuration will be described in which information regarding the execution timing can be read by a mobile terminal or the like owned by the player. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the mobile terminal processing executed by the display control device 81. The mobile terminal process is, for example, a process that is executed periodically in the display control device 81. In addition, in this modification, among the processes for the mobile terminal, particularly the process for information regarding the above-mentioned immediate pick-up/later pick-up ratio during the advantageous section will be described.

In step S11201, it is determined whether an advantageous section has started. When the advantageous section has started, in step S11202, each counter starts counting: a total watermelon immediate loading counter, a total watermelon later loading counter, a total cherry immediate loading counter, and a total cherry later loading counter. More specifically, for example, a process is executed to set a flag that allows it to be determined whether or not measurement is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S11201, or after executing the process in step S11202, it is determined in step S11203 whether or not the user has been logged out. In addition, in this modification, especially information regarding the immediate/later pick-up ratio, the user information etc. are input on the management screen of the gaming machine and can be output only when logged in. In S11203, an affirmative determination is made because the logged-in user has logged out, while a negative determination is not made in a situation where the user has not logged in to begin with. If an affirmative determination is made in step S11203 and the logged-in user logs out, in step S11204, a total watermelon immediate loading counter, a total watermelon later loading counter, a total cherry immediate loading counter, a total cherry later loading counter are set. At the same time, the initialization processing of each of these counters is executed. That is, each counter is initialized by logging out. On the other hand, when the advantageous period starts, each counter starts counting regardless of whether there is a login or not. This prevents the player's own game data from being read by another user who is his/her successor, while avoiding a situation where the counter is not counted due to the user forgetting to log in.

If a negative determination is made in step S11203, or after executing the process in step S11204, the process advances to step S11205. In step S11205, it is determined whether there is an operation requesting ratio display. This requested operation is, for example, an operation corresponding to the operation instruction character (FIG. 198(a)) during the attack mode end effect shown in the above modification 6, and includes the operation of the effect switch 66. If an affirmative determination is made in step S11205, the process advances to step S11206, and it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section. If it is not within the advantageous section, in step S11207, processing is performed to display the total immediate loading/later loading ratio for all watermelons and the immediate loading/later loading ratio for all cherries. Incidentally, in the end game of the advantageous section (game in which the attack mode end effect is executed), it is determined that the game is not in the advantageous section.

In this case, instead of displaying these ratios on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. 198(b), as shown in FIG. 200(a), a code display (two-dimensional code, barcode, etc.). By reading the displayed code, the player can perform data analysis afterwards using his or her own mobile terminal. Furthermore, by doing so, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displayed contents will be read by other players, and it is possible to secure the advantage of having this information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S11206 and it is determined that the vehicle is in the advantageous zone, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled in step S11208 so that a restricted display is performed. As shown in FIG. 200(b), the "restricted display" means that the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "restricted", but does not display the immediate/later pick-up ratio. That is, when the request operation for ratio display is in an advantageous period, the output of information regarding the ratio display for the request operation is restricted. In this way, by making it impossible to infer the setting value from the ratio display during the advantageous section, and by making it possible to see it after the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to avoid the advantageous section because you are distracted by the ratio display. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon of not being able to enjoy the game.

After executing the process in step S11207 or step S11208, other processes are executed in step S11209, and then the mobile terminal process ends. Note that other processing corresponds to processing for managing other information (total games played, number of jackpots, number of child actor wins, etc.) that can be read by the mobile terminal. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S11205, the mobile terminal processing is directly terminated.

By doing the above, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the execution timing of the additional notification after the fact. In particular, although the number of occurrences and details of advantageous events such as an additional win or the number of additional games are likely to remain in the memory of players who desire advantageous events, the timing of notification of such advantageous events may be It is considered that such an event is likely to be erased from the player's memory once it occurs, and it is difficult to remember the notification timing after the fact. In this regard, by configuring the notification timing to be readable to the mobile terminal as in the above configuration, the notification timing can be of great use when analyzing data.

<Modification 8>
In a configuration in which the immediate load/later load ratio is displayed (output) at the end of the attack mode, this display (output) may be performed during a part of the time the attack mode ends. In this modification, when the attack mode is forcibly terminated due to the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games), the above ratio is displayed (output). FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the attack mode end effect in this modification.

The setting process of this modification is generally similar to the flowchart of FIG. 197. The difference is that in step S11301 and step S11302, the same processing as in step S11101 and step S11102 is performed, and then in step S11303 it is determined whether or not it is forced termination. In the case of forced termination, processing for displaying (outputting) the ratio is performed in steps S11304 to S11307, similar to steps S11103 to S11106. Thereafter, in step S11308, each counter is initialized, and then the attack mode end effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of remaining games becomes 0 before reaching the upper limit instead of forced termination, the process of step S11308 is performed without executing steps S11304 to S11307, and then the attack mode ending effect is executed. Finish the setting process.

As described above, by outputting information regarding the immediate loading/later loading ratio based on the forced termination of the attack mode, it is possible to compensate for the forced termination of the attack mode.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the player can select the execution timing of the additional effect. FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining how the execution timing of the additional effect is selected in this embodiment. In addition, in this embodiment, all games that perform additional effects are configured to be executed as effects when the game is completely stopped. That is, in this embodiment, the selection of the execution timing of the additional effect will be explained as meaning the selection of the game in which the additional effect is to be executed.

In this embodiment, in a game in which a specific winning combination is won as an opportunity for an extra winning during the attack mode, it is possible to select the execution timing of the extra effect when an extra winning is won as an opportunity for the specific winning. In this embodiment, the execution timing is selected based on which of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is to be stopped first. The additional effects that have different execution timings include the immediate effect shown in the fifth embodiment and the like, in which the additional effect occurs in the game where the additional effect is won, and the additional effect that occurs in a later game than the game in which the additional effect is won. A post-add effect occurs in a game where the number of remaining games on the display such as attack mode becomes a predetermined number (1), and a precursor mode is carried out for a predetermined number of games from the game where the add-on win is won. After that, a prelude effect is set in which an additional effect occurs.

For example, as shown in FIG. 202(a), when a specific winning combination is won during the attack mode, the text "Choose your fate by stopping the reels!!" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as a notification mode selection effect. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44, it is announced that the mode of the additional performance at the time of winning the additional prize can be selected. In this embodiment, when the left reel 32L is stopped first, the immediate pay effect is selected, when the middle reel 32M is stopped first, the post pay effect is selected, and the right reel 32R is the first to be stopped. It is assumed that when the stop operation is performed, the performance via the precursor is selected. Therefore, in the notification mode selection effect, characters imitating the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are associated with corresponding characters that are selected when the respective stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. and is displayed. Specifically, a first corresponding character TP1 (for example, the character "Immediately") is displayed corresponding to the character of the stop switch 42 to indicate an immediate ride effect, and a first corresponding character TP1 (for example, the character "Immediately") is displayed corresponding to the character of the stop switch 43 to indicate a later ride effect. A second corresponding character TP2 (for example, the characters ``back'') is displayed, and a third corresponding character TP3 (for example, the characters ``front'') indicating the omen-mediated effect is displayed in correspondence with the character of the stop switch 44. . In addition, a chance notification effect (exclamation mark) indicating that the game has won a specific winning combination is also generated, and this chance notification effect and each display for selecting the execution timing of the above-mentioned additional effect are as follows. They are displayed so that they do not overlap with each other.

When the player first performs a stop operation on the left reel 32L in the game, the left reel 32L stops based on the stop operation, and then the other reels also stop, as shown in FIG. 202 (b1). A performance occurs.

When the player first operates to stop the middle reel 32M in the game, the middle reel 32M stops based on the stop operation, and then the other reels also stop, and then the second reel stops. A performance for subsequent rides corresponding to the selection of the ride performance is generated. In this example, as a performance for rear-loading, a first rear-loading character BUP1 is displayed, which indicates that the right for additional loading based on the watermelon opportunity has been acquired. The rear-loading effect based on the first rear-loading character BUP1 and the like is as described in the fifth embodiment and the like.

When the player first operates the right reel 32R to stop in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b3), the right reel 32R stops based on the stop operation, and after that, the other reels also stop, and then the omen appears. A precursor transit performance is generated corresponding to the selection of the transit performance. In this example, the characters "chance" are displayed approximately in the center of the auxiliary display section 65 as effects for passing through the omen, and a band display indicating "opportunity in progress" is generated on the auxiliary display section 65, and the system enters the omen mode. It will be shown that what has been done. The additional performance via this precursor mode will be explained later, but the precursor mode continues for the set number of games, and when the set number of games becomes 0, the additional performance occurs.

The processing configuration for realizing the above effects will be explained below.

FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the additional effect setting process in this embodiment. As already explained, the setting process of the additional effect is a process executed when the display control device 81 starts rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the specific combination winning game.

In step S12001, processing is performed to grasp the current number of additional games. Then, in step S12002, it is determined whether the precursor transit flag is set. The omen route flag is a flag that is set when the player selects the omen route performance based on the additional opportunity. The case where the omen route flag is set in step S12002 means that an additional opportunity has occurred in a game before the game, the omen route effect has been selected, and the omen mode is in progress based on this selection, i.e. , which means that no additional effects have occurred yet. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12002, in step S12003, the number of additional games in the precursor mode, that is, the number of additional games in which the effect via the precursor has been selected and the additional effect has not yet occurred, is determined, and the determined number of additional games is determined. A process is performed to add this to the current number of additional games. Then, in step S12004, processing for clearing the precursor transit flag is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S12002, or after executing the process in step S12004, in step S12005, the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are activated so that the notification mode selection effect (FIG. 202(a)) is executed. Control. Then, in step S12006, the process of setting the notification mode selection flag is executed, and then the process of setting the additional effect is ended. The notification mode selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to understand that the stop operation of the first reel in the current game is a stop operation targeted for the notification mode selection effect.

Next, in a game in which the notification mode selection effect is executed, the process when the first reel is stopped (first stop ON effect setting process) will be described with reference to FIG. 204. This process is a process executed in step S2204 in each stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 49). More specifically, this is the process performed in step S2204 when it is determined in step S2203 that the first stop ON operation is set as the target reel.

In step S12101, it is determined whether the notification mode selection flag is set. If not set, in step S12102, other already set first stop ON effects are executed, and then the first stop ON effect setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S12101 that the notification mode selection flag is set, a process for clearing the notification mode selection flag is executed in step S12103. Then, in step S12104, it is determined whether the instant pay effect was selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, whether the current first stop ON operation was a stop ON operation of the left reel 32L (left stop switch 42). Determine. When an affirmative determination is made in step S12104, a process of setting an immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12105, and then the first stop ON effect setting process is ended. The instant ride selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the instant ride effect has been selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S12104, it is determined in step S12106 whether the post-add effect has been selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, whether the current first stop ON operation is the middle reel 32M (middle stop switch 43) It is determined whether or not it was a stop ON operation. When an affirmative determination is made in step S12106, a process of setting a post-ride selection flag is executed in step S12107, and then the first stop ON effect setting process is ended. The later pick-up selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the later pick-up effect has been selected.

The case where a negative determination is made in step S12106 means that the foreshadowing effect has been selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, the current first stop ON operation has caused the right reel 32R (right stop switch 44) to stop ON. It means that it was a manipulation. In this case, in step S12108, the process of setting the omen selection flag is executed, and then the first stop ON effect setting process is ended. The omen selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the omen-mediated effect has been selected.

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing processing for additional notification effect at full stop in this embodiment. The process for additional notification effect at full stop is a process executed in step S2309 and step S2319 in the full stop effect setting process (FIG. 51). Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, all of the additional effects are executed as full-stop effects, and are not executed during the first stop ON operation or the second stop OFF operation.

In step S12201, it is determined whether the immediate ride selection flag is set. If the immediate ride selection flag is set, in step S12202, processing to clear the immediate ride selection flag is executed. Thereafter, in step S12203, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute an additional effect triggered by the current game (see FIG. 202(b1)).

If a negative determination is made in step S12201, it is determined in step S12204 whether or not a rear-ride selection flag is set. If the rear pick-up selection flag is set, a process for clearing the rear pick-up selection flag is executed in step S12205. Thereafter, in step S12206, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to perform a performance for rear passengers (see FIG. 202(b2)). Then, in step S12207, the process of storing the current number of add-on games in the individual area is executed, and in step S12208, the process of setting the add-on flag is executed. The processing in steps S12207 and S12208 corresponds to the processing in step S11016, step S11019, step S11023, etc., and is a storage process for generating additional effects after the fact.

If a negative determination is made in step S12204, it is determined in step S12209 whether or not a precursor selection flag is set. If the omen selection flag is set, a process for clearing the omen selection flag is executed in step S12210. Thereafter, in step S12211, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to execute the effect for the sign route (see FIG. 202(b3)). Then, in step S12212, a process is executed to store the current number of additional games in the individual area, and in step S12213, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed. Then, in step S12214, the process of inputting the number of portent games drawn in step S12213 to the continuous effect counter is executed, and in step S12215, the process of setting the continuous effect flag and the portent via flag is executed. The process of setting the continuous effect flag in step S12213, step S12214, and step S12215 corresponds to the process of step S2506, step S2507, and step S2509 described above, and is the process of setting the precursor mode on the display control device 81 side. This is a process when executing a continuous performance based on the following. In addition, by setting the omen passage flag in step S12216, if the additional effect setting process is performed in subsequent games (games until the number of omen games set in step S12212 is exhausted), An affirmative determination is made in step S12002.

After executing any one of steps S12203, S12208, and S12215, or after making a negative determination in step S12209, the process advances to step S12216. The processing from step S12216 to step S12220 is the processing when it is selected to generate an additional effect not in the additional winning game but in a subsequent game, that is, when an additional effect or an effect via a precursor is selected. .

That is, in step S12216, it is determined whether or not the add-on flag is set and the current game is a game that generates an add-on effect. More specifically, if the post-loading flag is set and the display remaining number counter HG is 1 as a predetermined value, an affirmative determination is made in step S12216. When an affirmative determination is made in step S12216, a process for setting a post-add effect is executed in step S12217.

Here, the setting process for the post-add effect in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 206. In addition, in the rear pick-up effect in this embodiment, basically the same effect as the mid-zone rear pick-up effect (content notification) shown in the fifth embodiment occurs.

That is, in step S12301, a process is executed to refer to the individual area in which the oldest data is stored among the plurality of individual areas and obtain the data (number of additional games) of the individual area. In this case, the corresponding trailing characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are enlarged and displayed approximately in the center of the auxiliary display section 65. In the following step S12302, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated as the effect operation section, and waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. If the operation has been performed, the process advances to step S12303, and the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled to display the number of additional games as well as the opening of the treasure chest as content notification (FIG. 185(b)). ). In the subsequent step S12304, a number corresponding to the number of games of the additional effect executed in step S12303 is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding display is updated. do. Then, in step S12305, the data of the current individual area is erased, and then, in step S12306, it is determined whether data of the unannounced individual area remains.

In step S12306, if data of unannounced individual areas remains, the process returns to step S12301 and repeats the processing of steps S12301 to S12305. In other words, the post-add effects are configured to be performed sequentially in the order in which the add-on opportunities occur, and the player can enjoy the subsequent add-on effects while remembering at what timing the add-on opportunities occurred. Become.

If it is determined in step S12306 that there is no data remaining for the unannounced individual area, the process advances to step S12307, and a process of clearing the post-installation flag is executed. After that, in step S12308, as an end process for the post-add performance, for example, the total number of games added in the current post-add performance is notified, and then the post-add performance setting process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the process for additional notification at full stop, if a negative determination is made in step S12216, or after executing the process in step S12217, the process advances to step S12218. In step S12218, it is determined whether the precursor passing flag is set and the continuous performance counter is 0. As already explained, the continuous performance counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games in the precursor mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game. In other words, the game in which the continuous performance counter becomes 0 is the final game in the omen mode. In this case, the process advances to step S12219, and a process of reading the number of add-on games from the individual area is executed. Then, in step S12220, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that an additional effect for the corresponding number of games is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S12218, or after executing the process in step S12220, the additional notification process at the time of stop is ended.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the relationship between the winning modes of various specific combinations and the first reel, which is the selection operation in the notification mode selection performance.

When the specific combination is a strong cherry, as already explained, a strong cherry prize is established when the symbol combinations corresponding to the 28th minor role, 32nd minor role to 35th minor role stop on the active line (Fig. 17). The corresponding symbol on the left reel 32L for any of the 28th minor prize, 32nd minor prize to 35th minor prize is the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol (FIG. 10). In this case, the "cherry" symbol is placed fourth on the left reel 32L, and the "second replay" symbol is placed sixth on the left reel 32L. That is, in a 3-bet game, the left stop switch 42 is activated from the timing when the 18th "Black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row until the timing when the 4th "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row. If is operated (ON operation), the corresponding symbol of strong cherry can be stopped on the active line. In other words, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is the timing when the 17th "White BAR" symbol from the 5th "LUCKY" symbol to the 17th "White BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the corresponding symbol of the strong cherry is on the active line. The vehicle cannot be stopped immediately, resulting in a so-called missed operation.

On the other hand, in the strong cherry, the corresponding symbols on the middle reel 32M are, for example, the "red bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol, or "cherry" symbol in the 28th small combination (Figure 10), and these are , on the middle reel 32M, the symbols are not spaced apart by more than 5 symbols, and any symbol can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43. In addition, for strong cherry, the corresponding symbols on the right reel 32R are also the "cherry" symbol, "first replay" symbol, or "second replay" symbol in the 28th small role, for example (Figure 10). Regarding these symbols, any one of the symbols can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the right stop switch 44.

In other words, when the additional win is a strong cherry, if you try to select the immediate pay effect by first stopping the left reel 32L in the notification mode selection effect, the strong cherry will be won due to the stop operation. There is a possibility that the project will not be completed and the project will be missed. On the other hand, in the notification mode selection performance based on the strong cherry, if you try to stop the middle reel 32M or right reel 32R first to select a later performance or a performance via a sign, the stop operation may cause a missed performance. There is no case. In this way, in selecting the execution timing of the additional effect based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to have a different possibility of being missed. The presence or absence of the missed game can be taken into consideration in the selection game of the execution timing of the additional performance.

For example, as a player who is concerned about the possibility of missing out due to competition between the selection operation and the stop operation, in the notification mode selection effect triggered by a strong cherry win, the middle reel 32M or the right reel It is conceivable to perform a stop operation on 32R first. In this case, as the additional performance, a later performance or a performance via a sign has been selected, and the additional performance will occur in a later game than the current game, which is a performance that carries over expectations. On the other hand, if the left reel 32L is operated to stop for the first time knowing that there is a possibility of losing the winnings, it means that the instant payout effect has been selected, and a payout will occur in the game. As a result, even if a player fails to win, an additional effect will be generated in the game, making it possible to clearly understand whether the player did not win a small role or missed out. By doing this, it is possible to create an effect that takes into account the risk of missing out when the selection operation and the stop operation compete, and the gameplay of these selection operations is enhanced.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a game in which a specific winning combination is won during the attack mode, the execution timing (execution game) of an additional performance triggered by the winning of a specific winning combination is changed based on the stop operation mode of the game. More specifically, in a specific winning game, if the left reel 32L is stopped first, an immediate pay-off effect will occur, if the middle reel 32M is stopped first, a post-pay effect will occur, and the right reel 32L will be stopped first. When the 32R is stopped for the first time, a premonitory effect occurs. In this way, by configuring the timing for executing the performance at the time of top-up depending on the stop operation mode of the top-up winning game, it is possible to realize the top-up performance according to the player's preference.

In particular, since the execution timing of the additional effect is selected in the additional winning game, for example, the execution timing is selected by comparing it with the configuration in which it is selected at the start of attack mode or before transitioning to attack mode. The timing is likely to be close to the timing at which the additional opportunity occurs. As a result, it becomes possible to select the execution timing according to the situation of the attack mode that changes from moment to moment, and it becomes possible to better reflect the player's wishes.

During the attack mode, press order notifications occur frequently, but press order notifications do not occur in the specific combination winning game that serves as an opportunity for additional winnings. In other words, the notification mode selection effect and the press order notification effect are set so as not to conflict with each other. As a result, in the notification mode selection performance, a phenomenon in which the press order for winning a desired result is so set that there is no room for selection of additional performance does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the gaming experience based on the notification mode selection effect.

As mentioned above, while press order notifications occur frequently during attack mode, press order notifications do not occur when a specific winning combination is won, so as a player, while aiming to win medals through press order notifications, It is thought that the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that a game in which the press order notification does not occur will occur. In other words, since the above-mentioned notification mode selection effect is generated in a game where press order notification does not occur, the notification mode selection effect is performed in a situation where the degree of attention is already high, and the gameplay by such a presentation is improved. It becomes possible to realize this.

As already explained, the attack mode is mainly executed in the second RT state, and in the second RT, the probability of winning any replay is high, and replay winnings are frequently achieved. Replays that can be won during the second RT state include push order replays such as fall replays 1 to 3 and second promotion replays 1 and 2, as well as replays that are not subject to push order notification such as normal replays. In other words, in the second RT state where replay winnings occur frequently, there are not only games in which a desired replay winning is achieved by press order notification, but also games in which a replay winning is achieved without relying on press order notification. Based on this premise, it is configured to generate a notification mode selection effect when a specific role is won, so whether or not the notification mode selection effect occurs will determine whether it is a specific role win or a normal replay win. It will function as a branch performance. As a result, by utilizing the high level of interest in the notification mode selection performance, the degree of attention in the normal replay winning game is also increased, making it possible to improve the degree of attention throughout the attack mode as a whole.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, in a situation where the number of games in the advantageous period is close to the upper limit, it is made impossible to select the effect via the omen. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the first stop ON effect setting process in this modification.

The processing from step S12401 to step S12407 is the same as the processing from step S12101 to step S12107 described above, and when the left reel 32L is made the first stop, the immediate loading selection flag is set, and when the middle reel 32M is made the first stop, the immediate loading selection flag is set. Set the pick-up selection flag. If it is determined in step S12406 that the middle reel 32M is not at the first stop, it is determined in step S12408 whether the number of games executed in the current advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number of games (1450 games). . That is, assuming that the predetermined number of games is 1450 games, the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S12408 is the case where there are less than 50 games remaining until the upper limit of the advantageous section. In this case, even if the right reel 32R is first stopped and the precursor effect is selected, the process proceeds to step S12405 and a process of setting the immediate ride selection flag is executed. In other words, when an opportunity for top-up occurs in a situation close to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the top-up effect is generated with the assumption that the immediate pay-off effect has been forcibly selected even if the effect via a precursor has been selected. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the advantageous section is forcibly terminated during the precursor mode. Note that if it is determined in step S12408 that the number of games to be executed in the current advantageous section is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, similarly to step S12108, the precursor selection flag is set in step S12409, and then this 1 Stop ON effect setting processing is ended.

As described above, in relation to the forced termination game of the advantageous section, by creating a configuration that can restrict the execution of the effect selected in the notification mode selection effect, it is possible to limit the execution of the effect selected in the notification mode selection effect. ) can be avoided.

In addition, in the above configuration, explanation has been made on the premise that the third corresponding character TP3 is displayed when the right reel 32R is stopped first, and the effect via the omen is selected. However, in a situation similar to a forced termination game in an advantageous section, 3 compatible character TP3 may not be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to display the first compatible character TP1 corresponding to the instant ride effect instead of the third compatible character TP3. However, the above configuration has the advantage that the presentation configuration can be simplified since it is not necessary to change the notification mode selection presentation itself. Furthermore, when the right reel 32R is brought to the first stop in the notification mode selection performance, it may be configured to forcibly perform the subsequent performance.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 32M is the first stop and a post-loading effect is selected, the immediate loading effect is forced depending on the number of games played in the advantageous section (if the number of executed games is 1450 or more). It is also possible to have a configuration in which Even in this case, the configuration may be such that the second compatible character TP2 corresponding to the later pick-up performance is not displayed, or the configuration may be such that the first compatible character TP1 corresponding to the immediate pick-up performance is displayed instead of the second compatible character TP2. good.

Depending on the number of top-up games at the time of top-up winning, the correspondence between the selection operation performed in the notification mode selection performance and the selected top-up notification execution timing may be configured to be different. Specifically, for example, if the number of additional games is a predetermined number of games (100 games) or more, the additional effect will be executed at a different execution timing from the execution timing selected by the selection operation with a predetermined probability (50%). It is also possible to have a configuration in which More specifically, when the number of additional games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, even if a performance via a sign is selected, the configuration may be such that an immediate performance is executed with a predetermined probability, instead of a performance via a selected omen. good. By doing this, the surprise at the number of additional games is added to the surprise that the game was executed at a timing different from the player's intention, and it is possible to create an effect that makes the player even more surprised.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, a notification mode selection performance is performed in a game that wins the normal replay (a game that is different from the additional winning game). FIG. 208(a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process during normal replay. This process is executed in the display control device 81 during the start effect setting process as the start effect of the normal replay winning game in the attack mode.

In step S12501, it is determined whether the selected counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is 1 or more. The selected counter indicates the number of games for which the execution timing of the additional effect selected in the notification mode selection effect is valid, and a predetermined value (20) is input by the selection operation, and the counter is counted by 1 each time one game is completed. This is a counter that is decremented.

If the selected counter is 1 or more, the effect setting process during normal replay is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the selected counter is 0, a notification mode selection flag is set in step S12502, and then the present effect setting process is ended. That is, in the normal replay winning game, the notification mode selection effect can be executed as the first stop ON effect.

In the first stop ON effect setting process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 209, in steps S12601 to S12608, the same processes as the above steps S12101 to S12108 are executed. After executing any of the processes in step S12605, step S12607, and step S12608, the process advances to step S12609, and after executing the process of inputting, for example, "20" as a predetermined value into the selected counter, the first stop ON is executed. The time effect setting process ends. As a result, an affirmative determination will be made in step S12501 for the next 20 games. More specifically, by performing the selection operation when winning the normal replay, the notification mode selection effect will not occur even if the player wins the normal replay again within 20 games thereafter.

As described above, the processing for setting various types of additional effects is executed in the additional notification processing at full stop (FIG. 205). More specifically, by generating a notification mode selection effect when winning a normal replay and having the user perform a selection operation, one of the immediate pick-up selection flag, late pick-up selection flag, and omen selection flag is set, and after that, within 20 games, If you win an additional win, the game will be completely stopped based on the above selection operation performed in the game before the game in which you won the additional win (based on the immediate selection flag, later selection flag, and omen selection flag). In the additional time notification process, the execution timing of the additional effect is set.

That is, when the left reel 32L is first stopped and the instant payout effect is selected in the above normal replay winning notification mode selection effect, the immediate payout selection flag is set, and if the payout is won in the subsequent game, the said payout is An additional effect will occur in the winning game (an immediate effect will occur). In addition, in the above-mentioned normal replay winning notification mode selection effect, if the middle reel 32M is the first stop and the post-pay effect is selected, the post-pay selection flag is set, and if the post-pay effect is won in the subsequent game, the attack When the number of remaining games on the mode display reaches a predetermined number of games, an additional effect occurs (an additional effect occurs). In the above-mentioned normal replay winning notification mode selection performance, if the right reel 32R is set to the first stop and the omen route effect is selected, the omen selection flag is set, and when an additional win is made in the subsequent game, the omen mode After that, an additional effect occurs (a premonitory effect occurs).

In this way, by making the execution game for the notification mode selection performance and the additional winning game different games, it is possible to prevent the selection operation in the notification mode selection performance from conflicting with the eye press operation for winning a specific role. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of an event in which a user is too focused on the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect and fails in the push-button operation and misses out on selection.

In this modification, selected counter processing for managing selected counters will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 208(b). The selected counter process is executed in the display control device 81 as one process in the full stop effect setting process (FIG. 51).

In step S12511, it is determined whether the selected counter is 1 or more. If it is not 1 or more, that is, if it is 0, the selected counter processing is immediately terminated. If it is 1 or more, in step S12512, a process of decrementing the selected counter by 1 is executed. Then, in step S12513, it is determined whether the selected counter has reached 0 or not, and if it is not 0, the selected counter processing is directly terminated. If the value is 0, it is determined in step S12514 whether or not the later pick-up selection flag or the precursor selection flag is set. If any of these flags is set, the corresponding flag is cleared in step S12515, and the immediate pick-up selection flag is set in step S12516, and then the selected counter processing ends. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S12514 and the immediate pick-up selection flag is set, the selection flag is not deleted even if the selected counter reaches 0, but is maintained as it is, and processing for the selected counter is performed. finish.

As described above, the notification mode selection effect is generated in the normal replay winning game during attack mode, and the selection operation in that game is considered valid for a predetermined number of games. If an opportunity for top-up occurs before a replay win, the system is configured to generate an immediate pay-off effect. In other words, by setting the immediate payoff effect as the default, and by selecting the notification mode of the normal replay winning game, the add-on for a predetermined number of games after that will be performed at a different execution timing from the default immediate payoff effect, such as a later payoff effect or a performance via a precursor. The configuration is such that the user can choose to do so. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the selection operation at the time of winning the normal replay is considered valid until the end of the attack mode. However, with this configuration, even if the player's desired execution timing changes due to a change in the gaming situation (increase or decrease in the number of remaining games in attack mode, increase in the number of acquired medals, etc.) after the selection operation is performed, , it becomes difficult to respond to such changes. On the other hand, by doing as described above, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player himself/herself selects the execution timing of the additional performance depending on the situation of the attack mode, which can change from moment to moment.

Furthermore, by setting the predetermined number of games to be a shorter number of games (20 games) than the initial number of games in attack mode (50 games), for example, if the notification mode selection effect occurs immediately after the start of attack mode, , there is still room for the notification mode selection effect to occur at least once more. As a result, even if an add-on does not occur, players who want to change the execution timing of the add-on effect in the first half and the second half of the attack mode and change the effect in the attack mode in case it does occur. It will also be possible to meet your needs. Therefore, it is possible to realize game performances that meet the diverse needs of players.

Furthermore, since the system is configured to generate a notification mode selection effect based on a randomly occurring event such as a normal replay win, as mentioned above, an element of luck is added to whether or not the notification mode can be selected. The enjoyment of the game can be improved.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the execution timing of the additional notification selected by the selection operation can be changed after the fact. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing processing for additional notification at full stop in this modification.

The difference between the full stop additional notification process in this modification and the flowchart of FIG. 205 is the process when the immediate ride selection flag is set. That is, if it is determined in step S12701 that the immediate ride selection flag is set, a process of clearing the immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12702. Then, in step S12703, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to execute an additional effect of the current game. The processing in steps S12701 to S12703 is similar to the processing in steps S12201 to S12203 described above.

In step S12704, it is determined whether the post-ride flag is set. The case where it is determined that the post-addition flag is set in step S12704 means that in the additional-addition event that occurred before the current additional-addition opportunity, a later-addition effect was selected, but in the current additional opportunity, an immediate addition effect was selected. means selected. In this case, correction processing is executed in step S12705. If the post-installation flag is not set in step S12704, or after the correction process is executed in step S12705, the process advances to step S12718. The processing from step S12706 to step S12722 is similar to the processing from step S12204 to step S12220 described above.

The correction process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 211.

First, in step S12801, a presentation that can be brought forward is set. A performance that can be brought forward is a performance that informs that the additional performance that was supposed to occur near the end of the attack mode can be performed in this game ahead of time when the additional performance is selected. . More specifically, to notify the situation in which it is possible to generate an additional effect in this game based on the first follow-up character BUP1, second follow-up character BUP2, etc. acquired as the follow-up right. For example, on the auxiliary display section 65, characters such as "Would you like to open the saved treasure chest?" are displayed. Furthermore, in the performance that can be brought forward, the words "YES" and "NO" are displayed, and the player can select whether or not to generate the additional performance by moving forward by operating the performance switch 66 or the like.

After the effect that can be brought forward is generated in step S12801, it is determined in step S12802 whether or not an operation for instructing to move forward is performed to generate an additional effect by bringing it forward. In the above example, it is preferable that the selection operation of displaying the characters "YES" in the presentation that can be moved forward is an operation that instructs moving forward.

In step S12802, if a move-forward instruction operation has not been performed, it is determined in step S12803 whether or not a move-back maintenance operation has been performed that does not cause an additional performance to be moved forward. In the above example, it is preferable that the selection operation of displaying the characters "NO" in the presentation that can be moved forward may be regarded as the operation to maintain the later loading. Furthermore, for example, the operation of any of the credit input switches 56 to 58 may be used as a subsequent credit maintenance operation. This is because such an operation can be regarded as an indication of the intention to start the next game, and can also be regarded as an indication of the intention not to generate additional effects in advance in the current game.

If it is determined in step S12803 that the rear-loading maintenance operation has been performed, the correction processing is immediately ended. If a negative determination is made in step S12803, the process returns to step S12802 and loops until either the forward movement instruction operation or the rear loading maintenance operation is performed.

If it is determined in step S12802 that a move-forward instruction operation has been performed, the number of stored individual areas is displayed in step S12804. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 212(a), the first rear-position character BUP1 and the second rear-position character BUP2 are displayed side by side according to the order in which the rear-position effect was supposed to be performed. Thereby, the player can grasp how many later play rights exist. In FIG. 212(a), three first post-ride characters BUP1 are displayed side by side, and it is shown that they have three post-subscription rights triggered by winning a watermelon.

In the following step S12805, it is determined whether an operation for selecting an individual area has been performed. For example, in FIG. 212(a), a cursor such as an arrow is displayed for the lined up right to pick up (treasure box), and by moving and determining the cursor, it is possible to select the right to pick up (treasure box). . It is preferable to use a production switch 66 to select the right to pick up the driver.For example, the cursor is automatically moved at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2-sec cycle), and a desired right to pick up is designated. It is assumed that when the production switch 66 is operated in this state, the selection of one right to ride later is performed, and the selection operation of an individual area is performed. If the individual area selection operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S12805 and waits until the selection operation is performed.

If a selection operation has been performed, in step S12806, a process is executed to read data on the number of additional games in the selected individual area. Then, in step S12807, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that an additional effect is performed in the corresponding individual area (FIG. 212(b)). In step S12808, the current number of add-on games is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and in step S12809, data deletion processing of the individual area corresponding to the add-on effect generated in step S12807 is executed.

In step S12810, it is determined whether there is an unannounced individual area. If it exists, the process returns to step S12802 and steps S12802 to S12809 are repeated. If there is no longer an unreported individual area, a negative determination is made in step S12810, and the process proceeds to step S12811, where a process of clearing the post-boarding flag is executed. After that, in step S12812, after executing the finishing process of the post-add effect, the present correction process is finished. The processing in step S12811 and step S12812 is similar to the processing in step S12307 and step S12308 described above.

In the modification process in this modification, the characters corresponding to the acquired late-ride rights are displayed in order as shown in FIG. 212(a), and each character can be selected regardless of the acquisition order. In other words, it is possible to generate a later performance regardless of the order in which the additional opportunities that triggered the later performance occur.For example, the first right to add later occurs first, and the second right occurs later. If there is a right to add later, it is possible to select to perform the additional performance based on the second right to add later than the additional performance based on the first right to add later.

More specifically, in FIG. 212(a), as the three additional rights, from the left, the treasure box on the left shows the additional right based on the first additional opportunity that occurred, and the middle treasure box shows the additional right that occurred second. It shows the right to add on based on the opportunity, and the treasure box on the right shows the right to add on based on the third opportunity to add on. The cursor shown in FIG. 212(a) points to the treasure box corresponding to the second right to add. In this situation, if it is determined that the selection operation for the individual area has been performed (step S12805: YES), in step S12806 the number of additional games is obtained from the individual area corresponding to the second post-add right, and in step S12806 An additional performance based on the second right to add later is generated (FIG. 212(b)). In this case, the add-on performance of the later add-on right based on the add-on opportunity that first occurred has not yet occurred. In other words, it is possible to make the order in which the add-on opportunities occur and the order in which the add-on effects occur in the post-add effects to be different.

As mentioned above, even if the additional effect is selected by the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, the additional effect corresponding to the additional effect should be performed after the fact. By making it possible to execute the game at a timing earlier than the specified timing, it becomes possible to respond to the player's change of mind in response to the ever-changing gaming situation. For example, if an additional opportunity occurs in the early stages of attack mode, even if you anticipate that an additional opportunity will occur later and select an additional effect based on this additional opportunity as a subsequent effect, the probability of that effect is There is also a possibility that the user changes his or her mind and wants the additional effect selected as the above-mentioned post-add effect to occur before the execution timing of the post-add effect. In this regard, as described above, by making it possible to change the selected post-pay performance to the instant pay-on performance after the fact, it becomes possible to flexibly respond to the player's change of mind.

The above change was made possible when the instant payout effect was selected at the time of the add-on opportunity. If the trigger that enables changes, that is, the trigger for executing correction processing, is configured to be able to be changed without limit, such as a configuration where it occurs every game, for example, the effect of whether or not to make a change (effect that can be brought forward) is frequently required. This may cause a sense of inconvenience, and the configuration may not respect the intention of the person who selected the post-addition effect. In this respect, if the immediate pay effect is selected after the later pay effect is selected, there is a high possibility that a change of mind has occurred, and in the above configuration, it is possible to execute the correction process in response to a change in the player's mind. It is structured as follows. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of the peripheral processing and to realize a performance that meets the needs of the player within a range that does not cause the player to feel that the performance is bothersome.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments and each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments and each modification. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modified examples, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) Advantageous sections include attack mode where push order notifications are made more frequently than normal mode, challenge mode where the probability of winning the lottery to enter attack mode is higher than normal mode, and super special zones that include additional special zones. The configuration includes attack mode, VB mode, and a mode that has won each of these modes and has not yet transitioned, but if it includes a mode that improves at least the function related to press order notification than the normal mode, the above is applicable. but not limited to. For example, the challenge mode may not be set.

(2) Although the configuration is such that the VB mode as a pseudo bonus can be transferred only during the attack mode, it may also be configured such that it can be transferred from the normal mode as well. In this case, if a lottery to switch to VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the starting game, and the section indicator starts displaying at a timing before the operation of the game following the starting game is allowed. And it is sufficient. Further, in this case, if the first BB or the second BB is won at the same time as the VB mode, the game in which the first BB or the second BB is won may be set as the starting game.

(3) Small roles with medal payouts such as Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Strong Watermelon, and Weak Watermelon are used as special roles that trigger a lottery to move to an advantageous section or an additional lottery, etc., and winnings with these strong cherries, etc. Although specific re-games with common aspects and combinations of these minor roles and specific re-games and bonuses have been described as examples, the results that trigger the lottery are not limited to these results. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined bonus is used alone or a lottery to move to an advantageous section is performed even in normal replay. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a transfer lottery or the like is performed based on the number of games played, the accumulated number of points separately given based on each result, or the like. In any case, it is sufficient as long as the trigger for the lottery to shift to the advantageous section does not cause a difference in the probability of winning or the frequency of occurrence depending on the set value.

(4) The prize-winning mode of the game result in which the lottery for moving to the advantageous section is performed is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings are realized in a common winning mode for all specific winning combinations, or a configuration may be adopted in which winning modes are common among some specific winning combinations. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning mode of a game result in which a transfer lottery is not performed (for example, normal replay) and the winning mode of a specific combination are partially or completely the same.

(5) Although the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display portion N9 have been described as examples of the section display, the configuration of the section display is not limited to the above. The section indicator may be configured to clearly display whether or not it is an advantageous section by at least switching the display mode, for example, the arrangement position and size of the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display section N9. Also, the display mode (lighting mode) during the advantageous section may be different from that described above. For example, a part or all of the operation part of the start lever 41 and predetermined credit input switches 56 to 58 may be configured to be able to emit light, and the operation part or credit input switches 56 to 58 may be configured to emit light based on the advantageous section. It may be configured so that the function as a section indicator is ensured by a predetermined operation section. As described above, the configuration is such that the display of the section display starts at a timing before the operation of the next game after the starting game is allowed, and the above-mentioned predetermined operation section is the operation target at the end of the start timing. By displaying the advantageous section at or near a predetermined operating section as described above, it becomes easier to understand the transition to the advantageous section.

Further, the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 may include a display section having the function of a section display. In this case, it is preferable that at least the display section having the function of the section indicator is controlled by the main controller 101, and the auxiliary display section 65 itself is controlled by the main controller 101, and the function of the section indicator is controlled by the main controller 101. A configuration may also be adopted in which the main control device 101 controls the main controller 101 together with the display section.

Furthermore, as a section indicator, an accessory that can be displaced between a predetermined first position and a second position different from the first position is provided at a position that is visible to the player (for example, on the front of the gaming machine), and the It is notified whether or not it is an advantageous section based on the display mode including the accessory due to the accessory being placed in the first position and the display aspect including the accessory due to the accessory being placed in the second position. It may also be a configuration.

(6) Regarding the section indicator, it is also possible to have a plurality of section indicators in addition to the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display section N9. That is, the configuration may include one section indicator, or the configuration may include two or more section indicators. When a plurality of display units are provided, they may be combined with a section display unit having another configuration as described in (5) above.

(7) Regarding the section indicator, the notification mode of a predetermined notification means attached to or adjacent to the section indicator may be changed in accordance with the display mode of the section indicator. The predetermined notification means attached to the section indicator includes, for example, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 attached to the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the instruction monitor 68. Can be mentioned. Examples of the predetermined notification means adjacent to the section display include the auxiliary display section 65 and the payout number display section 62.

For example, if the section indicator is configured to be able to start displaying at a predetermined timing, the predetermined notification means is set to the first notification mode at the predetermined timing, and the above-mentioned notification means is set to the first notification mode at a specific timing different from the predetermined timing. The predetermined notification means has a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. In this case, if the predetermined notification means is in the first notification mode and in the second notification mode, the visibility of the display on the section indicator and the display content can be understood to be different. It is possible to change the appearance of the section display without changing the display mode of the section display.

Furthermore, by combining a configuration that changes the display mode of the section indicator with a configuration that changes the notification mode of the predetermined notification means, it is also possible to make the section indicator appear more diverse.

For example, the predetermined notification means is constituted by a plurality of light emitting units such as LEDs, and the light emitting units are arranged in a matrix (for example, in a grid of x columns and y rows). Then, one element (for example, the element in the a-th column and the b-th row) of the matrix is replaced with an interval indicator. When the section indicator in the a-th column and the b-th row is illuminated, the surrounding a+n-th column to the a-n-th column and the b-th row and the a-th column and the b+n-th column to the b-nth row are displayed. The light-emitting part of the light-emitting part is displayed as being lit, and the light-emitting part on the outer periphery thereof is displayed as being turned off. In addition, when displaying the section indicator in the a-th column and the b-th row as off, the surrounding a+n-th column to the a-n-th column and the b-th row, the a-th column and the b+n-th row to the b-nth column The light-emitting parts of the light-emitting parts are turned off, and the light-emitting parts on the outer periphery of the light-emitting parts are turned on (x, y, a, b, and n are all natural numbers). By doing so, the section indicator that is one element in the matrix can be easily recognized in relation to the light emitting parts of other elements. Further, when the section indicator in the a-th column and the b-th row is lit up, the adjacent light-emitting parts in the a+1st column and the b-th row are turned off, and the other light-emitting parts are turned on. Further, when displaying the section indicator in the a-th column and the b-th row in an unlit state, the adjacent light-emitting parts in the a-th column and the b+1th row, etc. are turned on and the other light-emitting parts are displayed in an unlit state. By doing this, the lighting/extinguishing of the section indicator in the a-th column and the b-th row is the same as the lighting/extinguishing of the light-emitting unit in the a+1st column and b-th row, and the lighting/unlighting of the light-emitting unit in the a-th column and the b+1th row. This makes it difficult to distinguish between them, making it difficult to recognize the section indicator that is one element in the matrix in relation to the light emitting parts of other elements. In this case, the light-emitting parts to be displayed on/off instead of the section indicator are not limited to the light-emitting sections adjacent to the section indicator; for example, which light-emitting sections are to be displayed on/off. It may also be configured to be randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned other predetermined notification means may be configured to differ between the notification mode in the starting game and the notification mode during the advantageous period.

(8) The brightness of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator and the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine are made higher to display the section more than other display sections (surrounding display sections, other predetermined notification means). However, when displaying the section indicator, the brightness and illuminance of other display sections (surrounding display sections, other prescribed notification means) are lowered to improve visibility. It may also improve sex. Furthermore, the difference in brightness and illuminance from other display sections is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, 10 times as bright or illuminant.

Furthermore, it may be configured to improve visibility in relation to the display colors of other display units. In other words, by setting the luminescent color of the interval indicator and the display color (emitting color) of other display units to have a complementary color (opposite color) relationship, for example, the visibility of the interval indicator and other display units can be improved. It may also be configured to make the difference easier to distinguish.

Conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which the brightness and illuminance are set in a relationship opposite to the above relationship to reduce the visibility of the section indicator. In this case, it is possible to make the section display difficult to see and make it difficult for people to notice that the display is being performed, thereby improving the presentation effect of the auxiliary display section 65, etc. Since the visibility of the display section becomes high, it is also possible to improve the degree of attention paid to other display sections. Regarding the display color, for example, by making the luminescent color of the section indicator and the display color (emitting color) of other display sections similar, it is possible to distinguish between the section indicator and other display sections. This makes it possible to strengthen the impression that these section indicators and other display sections are an integrated presentation device that is related to each other.

(9) The display start mode table of the section display is not limited to the above table. For example, in addition to the game results that triggered the start of the display, the table may include parameters such as the number of bonus wins on the same day or over multiple days, the number of transitions to advantageous sections, or the number of wins, and based on these parameters. , the display start mode may be different. In this case, for example, if the display start mode table is such that the more times you win bonuses or advantageous sections on the same day or over multiple days, the easier it is to predict the contents and setting values of the advantageous sections, the display start mode table can be set so that the contents and setting values of the advantageous sections can be predicted more easily. This configuration gradually makes it easier to predict the game content and setting values, and it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which the player seems to be developing the performance content of the gaming machine.

(10) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the section display is set according to the contents of the advantageous section, advantageous degree, etc., the display start mode is set one-to-one with the contents of the advantageous section, advantageous degree, etc., without going through a lottery for the display start mode. It is also possible to use an associated display start mode.

(11) The display end mode table of the section display is not limited to the above table. For example, in addition to the contents of the advantageous section at the end, the number of games played at the end (the value of the number of games in the advantageous section AG) may be included as a parameter, or the time at the end may be included as a parameter. However, it may be configured to include the time at the start of the advantageous section as a parameter, or may be configured to include the length of time required to complete the advantageous section as a parameter, and the display end manner differs based on these parameters. It is better to do this. For example, in the case of a configuration that includes the number of games played at the end of the game as a parameter, the more games played (the more benefits the player would have obtained during the advantageous period), the more useful information can be provided to the player. The display end mode table may be a display end mode table that provides information useful to the player as the number of games played is small (as the number of benefits obtained during the advantageous period is likely to be small). Good too.

(12) Although the configuration has been described in which information useful to the player can be presented in the display end mode table of the section display, a configuration related to the display start mode table may be applied. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which setting values and the like can be presented as information useful to the player depending on the display start mode of the section display.

(13) Information regarding setting values has been explained as an example of information useful to the player that is presented at the end of the display of the section display. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which discount coupons, coupons, etc. for products are presented. In addition, in a configuration where the display start mode table is changed in a specific state, when an advantageous display start mode table is selected according to the cumulative number of wins or non-wins in bonuses, advantageous sections, etc., the cumulative number It may be a configuration that is presented or suggested.

(14) By setting a freeze state in the start game, the configuration restricts the start of the next game after the start game. It may also be configured to restrict starting of the next game.

(15) A predetermined effect may be generated during a frozen state in the starting game. For example, during the freeze state, a specific rotation control is performed to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in reverse or at low speed, or after performing the specific rotation control, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "Red") is performed at the end of the freeze state. 7'' pattern alignment) may be configured to generate an effect in which the line stops or temporarily stops at a predetermined line (for example, middle line L2). In this case, depending on the length of the period of the frozen state, that is, depending on the content and degree of advantageous section when the section indicator starts displaying, the rotation direction and rotation speed may be different. The configuration may be such that the manner of rotation control is different, or the types of predetermined symbol combinations to be stopped or temporarily stopped (for example, "Red 7" symbols aligned and "Black BAR" symbols aligned), or the predetermined pattern to be stopped or temporarily stopped. It is also possible to configure the types of lines (for example, the upper line L1 and the middle line L2) to be different.

(16) In a configuration in which the length of the freeze state period is set according to the content or advantage of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section indicator, the freeze state is generated multiple times, and The total length of the frozen state periods may be associated with the contents or advantageousness of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section display, or the number of times the freeze state has occurred multiple times may be associated with the advantageous section. It may be associated with the content, advantageousness, or display start mode of the section display.

(17) In a configuration where the section indicator can be lit in multiple colors like the ninth display section N9, the display start mode is configured to vary which color is lit, but the display end mode is It may also be configured to vary which color is used to turn off the light. In this case, it is preferable to switch the white lighting state during the advantageous section in the end game to the corresponding color lighting state, and then turn the light off.

(18) If you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section based on a combination of a bonus and a specific combination (for example, 1 strong cherry overlap, 1 strong watermelon overlap, etc.), a freeze state will occur in the game in which you won the overlap combination. At the same time, the length of the freeze state period is set according to the contents of the advantageous period and the degree of advantage, etc., and after passing through the carryover state, the period is displayed until the bonus winning game is the starting game and operation of the next game is allowed. It may be configured to start displaying the device. Furthermore, if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section due to a combination of the above-mentioned bonus and a specific combination, you can win a game that is later than the game in which you won the overlapped combination and is earlier than the bonus winning game. In addition to generating a freeze state, the length of the freeze state period is set according to the contents of the advantageous section and the degree of advantage, etc., and the section display is set until the bonus winning game is the starting game and operation of the next game is allowed. The configuration may be such that the display starts. Furthermore, if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section due to a combination of the above-mentioned bonus and a specific combination, a freeze state will occur in the bonus winning game that is a later game than the game in which you won the said combination. At the same time, the length of the freeze state period is set according to the contents of the advantageous section, the degree of advantage, etc., and the section indicator starts displaying the relevant bonus winning game as the starting game before allowing operation of the next game. It may also be a configuration. In a configuration in which a freeze state occurs during a carryover state, the freeze state may occur multiple times in multiple games, and in this case, the total length of the multiple freeze state periods is the content of the advantageous section or Alternatively, the number of occurrences of multiple freeze states may be associated with the content or advantage of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section display. Good too.

(19) If you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section based on a winning replay, the winning game of the winning replay is the starting game, and in the game following the starting game, the start operation of the start lever 41 is performed instead of the bet operation in the section. Although the end of the start timing of the display is set as the end, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether the end of the start timing is the bet operation or the start operation during winning replay. Alternatively, a plurality of winning replays may be provided, and depending on the type of winning replay, whether the betting operation is the final stage or the starting operation is the final stage may be configured. In this case, it is preferable that the stop rolls are different in each winning replay, and the stop rolls corresponding to other payout minor roles (for example, all bells) are stopped on a line that is different from the active line on the side where the start operation ends. With this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of surprise when the section display starts displaying based on the start operation. Even in this case, it is more preferable to adopt a configuration in which the start operation is allowed based on the bet operation.

(20) Although the first BB and the second BB are used as winning combinations to transition to the bonus state, a configuration may also be adopted in which the system transitions to the bonus state and is awarded a re-game based on the winning of the first BB or second BB. In this case, since a replay will be awarded, if the first BB winning is the starting game, the starting operation of the start lever 41, rather than the betting operation of the next game, will be the end of the display start timing of the section display. It is also possible to do so.

(21) In a configuration that determines the display start mode of the section display based on the display start mode table for the specific state when the gaming state becomes a specific state, conditions for transition to the specific state and conditions for continuation of the specific state The parameters of (termination condition) are not limited to those mentioned above. For example, the parameters for the conditions for transitioning to a specific state include a configuration in which transition to a specific state is set or a transition lottery is performed depending on the number of games played since the RAM is cleared or the power is turned on, or a configuration in which the transition to a specific state is set or a transition lottery is performed depending on the number of games played since the RAM is cleared or the power is turned on. A configuration that performs transition settings or a transition lottery depending on the number of games, a configuration that performs transition settings or a transition lottery depending on the number of games between bonuses, a configuration that performs transition settings or a transition lottery depending on the number of games between bonuses, a specific role, replay, small role, loss, bonus, advantageous. A conceivable configuration is to perform transition setting or transition lottery based on the number of wins, prize winnings, transition times, etc. in a section, etc. Further, when determining whether these transition conditions are met, the number of consecutive games may be determined by lottery or the like, and the length of the determined number of consecutive games may also be changed depending on each of the above parameters. Parameters for the continuation conditions (termination conditions) of a specific state include a configuration in which continuation to the specific state is set or continuous lottery is performed depending on the number of games played after transitioning to the specific state, a specific role in the specific state, replay, A conceivable configuration is such that a continuation setting or continuation lottery is performed depending on the number of winnings of small prizes, winnings, bonuses, etc., the number of winnings, the number of transitions, etc. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the probability of winning the transition lottery or the continuous lottery differs depending on the number of transitions to a specific state or the number of times transition triggers occur.

(22) When starting the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator at the start of an advantageous section, depending on the type of advantageous section that has been won (challenge mode, attack mode, or super attack mode) Although the display mode such as the display start timing and display start color is varied, the display mode may be changed depending on the number of consecutive games in the winning advantageous section. For example, the initial number of games in the challenge mode, attack mode, and specialized zone may be made variable, and the initial number of games may be determined by a lottery or the like at the time of a transition lottery for these modes (at the time of winning). Then, the display start mode of the section display may be determined in accordance with the determined initial number of games. When changing the display end manner at the end of an advantageous section, the display end manner may be changed depending on the length of the continuous advantageous section. Further, in addition to the number of initial games, the display start/end manner may be changed depending on a parameter that changes the advantage (for example, ease of transition to VB mode in attack mode, etc.). The display start/end mode may be configured to vary depending on the combination of these parameters and the type of advantageous section.

(23) The trigger for transition to the special RT state and the termination conditions are not limited to those described above. For example, a specific combination that involves a medal payout (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), a combination of the specific combination with a bonus (strong cherry stack 1, strong watermelon stack 1, etc.), or a specific winning combination that is replaced by a specific replay. , or any combination of these may be used. In addition, as a termination condition, when bonuses overlap, the special RT state is terminated based on the bonus win, but even when bonuses overlap, the special RT state can be terminated by playing a predetermined number of games or stopping the transition roll. It may be configured to end.

(24) In a configuration in which a person wins a lottery to move to an advantageous section based on a bonus overlap combination and moves to a special RT state, the special replay during the special RT state is determined by the stop roll of the game that resulted in the bonus overlap combination. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the stop numbers are different. For example, if the duplicate combination is Strong Watermelon 1, then in a game in which the Strong Watermelon duplicate 1 is won, a strong watermelon win (30th minor prize win) is achieved, and a strong watermelon The special replay is configured to have a different stop result depending on the case where the 30th small role is missed (the 30th minor role is not won). It is also possible to have a configuration in which the stop roll of the special replay is made different so that the content and advantage of the game can be easily predicted.

(25) In the configuration in which the transition to the special RT state is made, the display control device 81 may not set the pseudo-warning mode as an effect. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which continuous effects are not generated.

(26) Regarding the special replay winning press order notification effect during the special RT state, not only the stop roll that results in a black BAR ten pie, but also the stop roll that results in a black BAR double, and the stop roll that results in a black BAR single. The notification of the order of presses may also be configured to be performed when a winner is won through an execution lottery of notification of the order of presses.

(27) Regarding the press order notification performance at the time of special replay winning during the special RT state, an upper limit may be set on the number of times the press order notification performance occurs. For example, if the upper limit is set to once in one special RT state, and a press order notification effect such as black BAR double alignment, black BAR single alignment, etc. is performed, and the corresponding stop result appears once, the subsequent A configuration may also be adopted in which a similar press order notification effect is not performed when a special replay is won. In this case, if a stop result different from the executed press order notification effect appears due to a failure in the eye press operation or an incorrect stop order operation, the press order notification effect may be generated again.

(28) Special replay during special RT state When winning, a predetermined stop result (black BAR double set, black BAR single set, etc.) appears to indicate the contents and advantageous level of the advantageous section by pressing order notification effect when winning. In the configuration, the content and degree of advantage of the advantageous section may be suggested based on the number of appearances of the predetermined stop result. For example, if the first number (once) of black BAR singles appears as a predetermined stop result, it is confirmed that you have won the lottery to enter the challenge mode, and the black BAR single appears as a predetermined stop result. If a second number of singles appears (twice) which is greater than the first number, it may be determined that the player has won the lottery to enter the attack mode, which is more advantageous than the challenge mode. In this case, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the pressing order notification performance at the time of special replay winning is changed so that the corresponding number of appearances is obtained.

(29) In a configuration in which a notification cancellation lottery is held triggered by a specific combination in a special RT state, the cancellation lottery is conducted if the lottery for transferring to an advantageous section has already been won. A configuration may be adopted in which a cancellation lottery is performed even if the lottery is not completed. In this case, if you win the cancellation lottery without winning the transfer lottery, a press order notification effect will be generated, but the stop roll will determine an advantageous section such as a stop roll that will result in double black BAR. It is preferable to have a configuration that generates a press order notification effect that does not appear.

(30) In a configuration in which a notification cancellation lottery is performed using a specific combination in the special RT state as a trigger, the winning probability of the cancellation lottery table is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of winning may be set to be uniform regardless of the type of specific combination. Alternatively, the number of winnings of a specific combination during the special RT state may be stored, and the probability of winning may vary depending on the number of winnings. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the higher the number of winnings, the higher the cancellation winning probability. Further, the probability of winning the notification cancellation lottery may be different depending on the specific combination that triggered the transition to the special RT state and the specific combination that won during the special RT state, for example, the probability of winning the notification cancellation lottery may differ. If the specific combination and the specific combination won during the special RT state are of the same specific combination (same index value IV), the configuration may be such that it is easier to win the notification cancellation lottery than when this is not the case.

(31) In a configuration in which a notification cancellation lottery is performed using a specific combination in the special RT state as a trigger, the contents to be notified after cancellation may be different from those described above. Specifically, it may be the content of a lottery that has already been executed to transition to an advantageous section, for example, a transition to an advantageous section that was performed based on a game result that preceded the result that triggered the transition to the special RT state. It may be the content of the lottery, or it may be a notification that the transition lottery is non-winning or a notification that the transition lottery has been held regarding the result that triggered the transition to the special RT state.

(32) In a configuration in which a notification cancellation lottery is triggered by a specific combination in the special RT state, a lottery for an advantageous section carried out based on the game result (combined combination with a bonus) that triggered the transition to the special RT state The setting of the precursor mode was explained as an example of a configuration that makes it difficult for the content of the transition lottery to be notified in the game that resulted in the game, but it is restricted from being notified in the game that resulted in the game. For example, it may be configured such that notification is not performed in the game. In this case, the portent mode may not be set.

(33) In a configuration having a plurality of special RT states and different types of special replays that can be won in each special RT state, the winning probability of the special replay may be higher than the winning probability of the normal replay. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only the special replay is won while the normal replay is not won. By doing this, it is possible to increase the frequency (possibility) of special replays occurring, and if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol in each game, it is possible to make the desired stop result appear relatively smoothly. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game in which the player aims at the "black BAR" symbol in each game.

(34) In a configuration in which there are a plurality of special RT states and the probability of winning a special replay that can be won in each special RT state is different, the types of special replays are not limited to those described above. For example, the probability of winning the special replay 3 may be different. In addition, the number of special replays that can be won may be not one but multiple types. In this case, the type of RT state is predicted based on the difference in the winning probability of each special replay (based on the balance of winning probabilities), Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which a game is played that predicts the contents of the advantageous section. More specifically, for example, in the 6th RT state, it is easy to win the special replay 3 and difficult to win the special replay 4, and in the 7th RT state, it is difficult to win the special replay 3, and it is easy to win the special replay 4. You may do something like this. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined special replay can be won only in a predetermined RT state. For example, it may be possible to win special replay 5 only in the 5th RT state.

(35) In a configuration where the number of stopped black BAR symbols during a special RT state indicates the presence or absence of a bonus win or the contents of an advantageous section, if a bonus is won during a special RT state that is not based on a bonus win, the "black BAR" symbol The count (black BAR stop counter), notification scenario, and upper limit value may be reset.

(36) In the configuration in which the stopping result during the special RT state indicates the presence or absence of a bonus win or the contents of an advantageous section, the symbol to be stopped is not limited to the "black BAR" symbol, and the stopping position is not limited to the middle row. For example, when the stopping positions are the upper, middle, and lower rows, a plurality of corresponding symbols may be stopped on one reel.

(37) In a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of a bonus win and the contents of an advantageous section depending on the number of stops of corresponding symbols during the special RT state, a notification scenario is set according to the content of the suggestion, but the notification scenario is the same as above. Not limited to things. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of notification scenarios are set for one suggestion content, and one notification scenario is selected by lottery or the like from among the plurality of types. In this case, the configuration may be such that the multiple types of notification scenarios include notification scenarios that do not match the suggested content, for example, there is a notification scenario that suggests a bonus win but the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter is 2. .

(38) A configuration in which the count of the corresponding symbols (black BAR stop counter) is decremented at a predetermined trigger, in a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of a bonus win or the contents of an advantageous section based on the number of stops of the corresponding symbols during the special RT state. You can also use it as For example, if the corresponding symbol does not stop even though the stopping order that allows the corresponding symbol to be stopped is notified (if the eye press operation fails), the count of the corresponding symbol is subtracted. It may also be a configuration. Further, when a stop order in which a corresponding symbol cannot be stopped is notified, the count of the corresponding symbol may be subtracted.

(39) In the configuration in which the presence or absence of a bonus win and the contents of an advantageous section are suggested by the stop result during the special RT state, the type of bonus may also be suggested. For example, the content of the suggestion may be different depending on whether the special RT state is based on the first BB or the second BB (for example, the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter or the notification scenario may be different).

(40) After shifting the gaming state to a special RT state, the game state was configured to suggest whether or not a bonus has been won and the contents of an advantageous section based on the stop result during the special RT state. It may be configured such that, while the first RT state is maintained, the presence or absence of a bonus win or the content of an advantageous section may be indicated based on the stopped roll. In this case, regarding the special replay, it is possible to win not only in the carryover state but also in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, and the state corresponding to the carryover state and fake special RT state (BB non-winning and advantageous section non-winning) In a game (after winning a specific combination), a configuration may be adopted in which a push order notification effect of the corresponding stop order is generated based on the special replay win. In other words, if the game result (specific role, duplicate role, etc.) is the trigger for transitioning to the special RT state, the content of the press order notification effect at the time of special replay winning is different (predetermined stop result and It may be configured to shift to a mode in which it is easy to generate a push order notification effect.

(41) In a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of a bonus win or the details of an advantageous section based on the number of stops of corresponding symbols during the special RT state, the cumulative number of stops of corresponding symbols over multiple games and the stoppage of corresponding symbols in a single game It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the suggestions of whether or not there is a bonus win or the content of the advantageous section are different depending on the number of games, or a configuration in which the weighting of the suggestions is different depending on the cumulative number of stops and the number of stops related to a single game. Specifically, for example, in a configuration where a bonus win is confirmed when the cumulative number of stops is 3 or more, when the number of stops related to a single game becomes 3, that is, the cumulative number of stops corresponding to the bonus win is cleared in one game. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a bonus win and an attack mode win are determined, or a configuration in which a bonus win is determined when the number of stops related to a single game becomes 2 or more.

(42) In a configuration in which the number of stopping corresponding symbols is varied by changing the number of stops of the special replay during the special RT state depending on the press order notification effect, the number of stopping corresponding symbols is 0 as the stopping order of one special replay. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not include the stopping order.

(43) In a configuration in which the number of stopping corresponding symbols is varied by changing the number of stops of the special replay during the special RT state depending on the pressing order notification effect, the stopping order of one special replay is one corresponding symbol. It may be configured to include a first number (one) as described above and a stopping order in which the number of corresponding symbols is one or more and is a second number (two) different from the first number.

(44) In a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of a bonus win or the details of an advantageous section based on the number of stops of the corresponding symbol during the special RT state, if the suggested content is determined by the cumulative number of stops or the number of stops in a single game, the background color In addition to the change, a configuration may also be adopted in which a confirmation effect of the corresponding content is performed. For example, in a configuration in which a bonus win is confirmed when the cumulative number of stops of the "Black BAR" symbol reaches 3 or more, a bonus win notification effect is generated in a game where the cumulative number of stops (black BAR stop counter) reaches 3. You can also use it as

(45) As a special RT state, the total replay probability is higher than the normal gaming state, but in any special RT state or all special RT states, the total replay probability is higher than the normal gaming state. It may be a configuration in which the height is lowered.

(46) In a configuration with multiple special RT states, the total replay probability in each special RT state is set to be the same, but although the probabilities are not completely the same and there are slight differences, the player's The probabilities may be similar to the extent that they can be visually recognized as the same thing. More specifically, for example, if the difference in replay probabilities between special RT states is smaller than one-tenth of the replay probabilities, it is considered that the special RT states are recognized as having similar probabilities. Further, the relationship between the total replay probability and other RT states (the second RT state and the third RT state) is also similar, and the probabilities may not be completely the same, but may be similar.

(47) The advantageous section may be defined as follows. A section in which push order notification corresponding to a winning amount related to the maximum number of payout coins occurs at least once. More specifically, at the push order bell where 9, 3, or 0 medals may be paid out depending on the stop order, push order notification that 9 medals will be paid out is generated at least once. An interval.

(48) Even when the advantageous section ends without reaching the continuation upper limit, the initialization process may be performed.

(49) Even when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won individually, it may be configured to perform a transition lottery for an advantageous section, an additional lottery, etc. In each of the embodiments shown above, since there is no difference in the probability of winning depending on the set value when winning the first BB or the second BB individually, even if a lottery is conducted regarding the advantageous section when winning the first BB or the second BB individually, It is thought that no inconvenience will occur.

(50) Regarding the bonuses of the first BB and the second BB, the winning probabilities including the winning probabilities of duplicate combinations have been configured to vary depending on the set values, but bonuses may be provided whose winning probabilities do not vary depending on the set values. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery for transition to attack mode or the like can be performed during a bonus carryover state in which the probability of winning does not vary depending on the set value. In other words, there may be a case where a lottery to shift to an attack mode or the like is performed when a specific winning combination is carried over, and a case where a lottery is not performed. In addition, although the individual winning of the first BB and the second BB has the same winning probability depending on the set value, it may be different.

(51) In addition to the 1st BB and 2nd BB, CBs (1st CB to 4th CB) were provided as transitional roles whose small role probability can change depending on the transition of the gaming state, but in addition to or in place of these transitional roles, Other transition roles may also be provided. Other transitional roles include MB (middle bonus), which has no limit on the number of sliding pieces, REG (regular bonus), which has a lower maximum number of acquisitions than the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and the JAC game that can be played in one game. SB (Single Bonus) etc. can be considered. Furthermore, the maximum number of bonuses that can be acquired for each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit acquisition number during the CB state may be set to 3 pieces, which is less than 15 pieces, or may be set to 0 pieces.

(52) Although the configuration has been described in which medals are not paid out when a transitional combination (first BB, second BB, CB) is won, a configuration may be adopted in which medals are paid out.

(53) A configuration may be adopted in which a transition lottery to an attack mode, an additional lottery, etc. are performed during the bonus. In this case, the lottery will be conducted at the time of a bonus win or during a bonus where there is no difference in the winning probability, the number of coins won, the probability or advantage of the transition lottery to attack mode, etc. during the bonus, or the additional lottery. It is preferable to configure such a system that these drawings are not performed when a certain bonus is won.

(54) In order to avoid any difference in the probability or advantage of the transition lottery to attack mode etc. or the additional lottery depending on the setting value, we designed the lottery to be conducted based on the lottery results with no particular setting difference. Although a lottery is performed based on a certain lottery result, the benefits at the time of winning (probability, probability of winning in transition lottery, etc., number of additional games) may be adjusted so that setting differences do not occur. For example, setting 1 provides a specific winning combination that has a probability of 1/100, and setting 6 provides a specific winning combination that has a probability of 1/10. In setting 6, it is set to 1/2, and in setting 6, it is set to 1/20. By doing this, the total additional winning probability will be 1/200 no matter which setting value is used, and there will be no setting difference.

(55) As a performance using other notification means of the section display section, the contents of the performance using the auxiliary display section 65 have been mainly explained, but another display section is provided as another notification means, and the performance can be performed on such another display section. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is generated.

(56) Although it has been decided that basically an event advantageous to the player will occur by winning the transition lottery to attack mode, etc. or the additional lottery, but for example, it may be configured to perform an end lottery for attack mode, etc. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is performed to subtract the number of consecutive games.

(57) Although the description has mainly been given to a game in a situation where the number of bets is 3, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game where the number of bets is 1 or a 2-bet game where the number of bets is 2. For example, if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section in a 1-bet game or a 2-bet game, and if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section in a 3-bet game, the display start mode table of the section display will be changed. By making the difference, the display start mode of the section display may be configured to be different.

(58) The setting value is suggested when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set. A configuration may also be adopted in which a specific zone is provided where it is more likely to be carried out, and when an opportunity for addition occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, it is easier to move to the specific zone.

(59) Although the set value is suggested when an additional opportunity such as winning a specific combination occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the additional opportunity is not limited to the above. For example, an opportunity to increase may occur depending on the number of games played during an advantageous period, or an opportunity to increase may occur depending on the number of small winnings, the number of prizes won, the number of medals paid out, etc. during an advantageous period. It is preferable to have a configuration in which setting values are suggested when these additional triggers occur in a situation where the excess flag is set.

(60) When an opportunity to increase the number of games occurs, the setting value is suggested as an alternative to adding the number of games. However, it may be configured to suggest the setting value after adding the number of games.

(61) In a situation where the excess flag is set, if you win a mode transition lottery such as from challenge mode to attack mode or from attack mode to special zone, etc., the setting value is suggested after changing the mode. , a configuration may be adopted in which mode transition is not performed.

(62) The setting value is suggested when an opportunity for an increase occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, but even if an opportunity for an increase occurs in a situation where the excess flag is not set, the If the lottery is not won, a setting value suggestion may be made. Furthermore, if the additional lottery is not won, the number of additional games may be added to the total number of extinguished games TEG, etc. even if the additional lottery is won.

(63) In the configuration in which the setting value is suggested by referring to the total number of deleted games TEG at the time of forced termination, the display mode at the time of forced termination may be taken into account. For example, a table (a third special notification lottery table, a third special notification type table, etc.) with setting value suggestions is prepared depending on the display mode at the time of forced termination. In the case of forced termination during the specialization zone, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting value suggestion is more likely to occur with a smaller total number of eliminated games TEG than in the case of forced termination during the attack mode.

(64) When a forced termination game occurs during a bonus, processing such as setting value suggestion may be performed differently than when the game occurs outside of a bonus. For example, if the game is forcibly terminated when a bonus is not in progress, a setting value is suggested in the game to be forcibly terminated, while if the game is forcibly terminated during a bonus, a setting value is suggested after the bonus ends. You can also use it as Furthermore, processing such as setting value suggestion may be made different depending on the type of bonus. For example, if a game is forced to quit during the first BB when the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value, the setting value is suggested, but if the game is forced to quit during the second BB when the winning probability is different depending on the setting value. If a certain game occurs, the setting value suggestion may not be made, or vice versa. Furthermore, if the game is in the first BB, the setting value is suggested in the forced termination game, and if it is in the second BB, the setting value is suggested after waiting for the end of the bonus, or vice versa. In the case where these processes such as setting value suggestion are made to be different, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is used to determine which process to perform, and the winning probabilities thereof are different.

(65) The number of forced termination games in the advantageous section is not limited to the above number (1500), and may be greater or less than that.

(66) The additional lottery table and the number of additional games lottery tables are not limited to those mentioned above, and may be configured to perform additional lottery based on other opportunities (small roles or replays), and the winning probability and the additional games at the time of winning. The range of numbers, average, etc. are also arbitrary. For example, the number of games that exceeds the upper limit number of advantageous sections (2000 games, etc.) may be selected as the number of additional games.

(67) In a situation where the excess flag is set, when an opportunity to increase occurs, information useful to the player is presented by suggesting a set value as compensation, but information useful to the player It is not limited to setting value suggestion. For example, it may be the above-mentioned advertisement or coupon, or it may be a configuration in which benefits such as rare images are provided.

In addition, if an opportunity to increase occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, useful information for the player is presented by changing the format of the press order bell and the press order notification when a press order replay is won. It is also possible to have a configuration in which special benefits are provided. For example, the push order bell can be set to the 1st role where 1 or 0 medals are paid out, the 2nd role where 9 medals are paid out which is more than the 1st role, and 15 medals which is more than the 2nd role. It is assumed that the role in which the medals are paid out overlaps with the role in which the medals are paid out. In the normal section other than the advantageous section, if the push order is not announced, the first prize is likely to be won, and if the push order is notified in the advantageous section, the second or third prize will be won. The configuration should be such that it is easy to establish. Then, until the excess flag is set, the push order of the second combination is likely to be announced, and after the excess flag is set, the push order of the third combination is announced based on the opportunity to add. The configuration is designed to make it easier. By doing so, it is also possible to provide a benefit when an opportunity for additional bonus occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set.

In this case, when betting 3 coins, you can expect an increase of 6 medals by winning the 2nd prize, and an increase of 12 medals by winning the 3rd prize, but the winning of the 3rd prize is the same as winning the 2nd prize twice. It can be said that we can expect an increase in the number of medals. Therefore, when the push order notification that establishes the third winning combination is generated as described above, the number of games equivalent to two winnings of the push order bell is subtracted from the upper limit number of games. It may also be configured such that forced termination occurs when the maximum number of games is reached. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the advantage of ending the advantageous section early without substantially changing the total number of medals acquired.

(68) The forced termination condition may be defined by the total number of medals paid out or the total number of medals acquired (total number of medals paid out minus the total number of bets) instead of the number of games. In this case, it is best to manage the attack mode, etc. based on the specified number of total medals paid out or the total number of medals acquired, rather than the number of games (a configuration in which attack mode, etc. ends when the specified number is reached). Even when this occurs, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the specified number is increased instead of the number of games. For example, the advantageous section is configured to be forcibly terminated when the total number of medals acquired reaches 3000. Then, as a result of adding the specified number of sheets in the attack mode, etc., when the specified number reaches 3000 sheets, the excess flag is set. With such a configuration, even if the push order that results in a winning combination with a large number of paid out medals is announced in a situation where the excess flag is set as in (67) above, the total number of medals that the player can obtain will be reduced. It is possible to enjoy the advantage of being able to complete the advantageous section with a small number of games while keeping the advantageous level unchanged.

(69) It is also possible to store the number of times for each type of additional opportunity that has occurred in a situation where the excess flag is set, and to have a configuration in which the lottery table or type table for setting value suggestion differs depending on the number of times. For example, in a situation where a strong cherry has been won once and a weak cherry has been won four times since the excess flag was set, the setting value is suggested if a weak cherry is won, and a strong cherry is selected after the excess flag is set. Narrow down the setting value when the winning probability and setting value are suggested by suggesting the setting value when winning the weak cherry in a situation where the cherry has been won 4 times and the weak cherry has been won once. It is also possible to have a structure with different easiness, and since it is difficult to win a strong cherry, the latter may be configured to suggest setting values that are more advantageous to the player (suggesting setting values that make it easier to narrow down the setting values). good.

(70) In the configuration in which the setting value is suggested by taking into account the gaming situation of the day, the total number of games TG is initialized by changing the winning probability, that is, by clearing the RAM. However, the configuration may be such that it is initialized by turning the power ON/OFF.

(71) In the configuration in which setting values are suggested taking into consideration the gaming situation of the day, information other than the total number of games TG and the time may also be taken into account as the gaming situation of the day. For example, instead of or in addition to the time, it may be configured to take into account the time elapsed since the power was turned on. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which bonuses, the number of winnings of a predetermined small role, the number of winnings, etc. are taken into account. It may also be configured to take into consideration the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out. It may also be configured to take into consideration the number of forced terminations.

(72) In a configuration in which setting value suggestions are made taking into account the gaming situation of the day, if the game is forcibly terminated at a relatively early stage, setting value suggestions are difficult to occur, or setting value suggestions for low settings are likely to occur. However, when forced termination occurs at a relatively early stage, it may be possible to have a configuration in which a high setting value suggestion is likely to occur, or a configuration in which a low setting value suggestion is unlikely to occur, or a configuration in which a high setting value suggestion is likely to occur. It may be configured such that suggestions are unlikely to occur.

Furthermore, if we assume that the operating rate is high first thing in the morning or in the evening, and if we configure a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is likely to occur if forced termination occurs during the daytime, etc., then the operating rate of players who anticipate the setting value suggestion will be can be expected to increase. In this case, for example, the operating rate of the previous day or for multiple days up to the previous day can be grasped from the built-in clock or the number of games counter, etc., and based on this operating rate, a table for suggesting the setting value (special notification lottery table) , special notification type table, etc.).

(73) In a configuration in which setting values are suggested taking into consideration the gaming situation of the day, the data to be referenced, such as the total number of games TG, is data that can be managed over multiple days, and the multiple days when forced termination occurs. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that takes into consideration the gaming situation over the following years. For example, the total number of games TG is configured so that it is not initialized even if the winning probability is changed, and the setting value is suggested by taking into account the total number of games since the game machine was installed in the game hall. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which setting value suggestions are unlikely/easy to occur at the time of introduction (initial installation).

(74) When an advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the setting value is suggested taking into account the current day's gaming situation; however, when another advantageous period is forcibly terminated, the setting value is suggested taking into account the current day's gaming situation. It may be configured to suggest a value. Other advantageous states include, for example, when the bonus state is not limited to the number of paid out coins, but also when other forced termination conditions are met (for example, when a specific ending combination is won or when the specific ending combination is won, The bonus status is configured to end when a so-called blowout occurs), and if the bonus state ends based on the forced termination condition being met before the maximum number of payout coins is reached, the setting value is suggested taking into account the gaming situation of the day. It may also be a configuration.

(75) Although the storage area for advantageous sections and the storage area for normal sections are provided in separate areas so as not to overlap, it is sufficient that the CPU 102 can distinguish between them. There may be duplicate parts.

As a configuration in which they are provided in separate areas, a RAM for an advantageous section and a RAM for a normal section may be provided, respectively, instead of a configuration in which one RAM is provided in separate areas. In this case, although the CPU can access both RAMs, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which information in both RAMs is not directly communicated with each other (without going through the CPU).

(76) Depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, information in the event of an additional increase is stored in the storage area for advantageous sections or in the storage area for normal sections, but the excess flag If an opportunity for top-up occurs in a situation where is set, information based on the chance for top-up (number of top-up games) is stored in a predetermined area provided in a storage area for the advantageous section. Then, at least at a timing before the initialization process is performed, the information stored in the predetermined area is re-stored in the storage area for the normal section (total number of deleted games TEG and number of deleted games EG). You can also use it as

(77) Depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, information on when an additional opportunity occurs is stored in the storage area for advantageous sections or in the storage area for normal sections. If a problem occurs, the corresponding information may be stored in any storage area. Specifically, for example, if an opportunity for additional games occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the number of additional games is added to the number of continuations such as attack mode, and the number of additional games is added to the total number of eliminated games. It is also possible to perform a process of adding to the TEG and the number of extinguished games EG. Even in this case, the initialization process at the time of forced termination initializes the number of additional games such as attack mode that have been added since the excess flag was set, while the total number of deleted games TEG and the number of deleted games are initialized. Since the EG is not initialized, the total number of extinguished games TEG, etc. can be used in the normal period.

(78) Store information corresponding to the event that occurred during the advantageous section in the storage area for the normal section, and set a special section in the normal section after the forcibly terminated advantageous section based on the stored information. However, the situation in which information corresponding to an event that occurs during the advantageous section is used is not limited to the normal section after forced termination. For example, it may be configured to be used when moving to an advantageous section again after forced termination (for example, a configuration in which setting value suggestions are more likely to occur in the advantageous section to which the transition is made again), or it may be configured to be used when the power is turned on/off after forced termination. It may be a configuration that is used when the bonus is won (for example, a configuration where setting value suggestions are likely to occur first thing in the morning of the next day), or a configuration that is used during the bonus when the bonus is won after forced termination. For example, it may be configured such that setting value suggestions are likely to occur during bonuses.

(79) During the special section, special replays 1 and 2 were pressed in order to be notified as special notifications, and a short precursor game number was selected when a bonus was won, but these special replays 1 and 2 The pressing order notification performance and the special notification as a short number of precursor games may be configured not only to occur during the special section, but also to occur during other normal sections or advantageous sections. In this case, a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of special notification is higher during the special section than in other normal sections or advantageous sections, or notifications that are beneficial to the player (press order notifications that make it easy to narrow down the setting values, short number of precursory games, etc.) ) is preferable.

(80) Although the configuration is such that the number of eliminated games EG and the total number of eliminated games TEG are displayed as the special number of games display section TGH on the auxiliary display section 65, the configuration may be such that they are displayed on another display section.

(81) Although the special game number display section TGH is configured to display the number of games corresponding to the number of additional games as the total number of eliminated games TEG, for example, when a setting value suggestion is generated based on the value of the total number of eliminated games TEG. In this case, the total number of extinguished games TEG, which is a threshold value for the presence or absence of the occurrence, may be set to 100%, and the percentage up to the total number of extinguished games TEG may be displayed on the special number of games display section TGH. In this case, each time the total number of eliminated games TEG is added, the percentage of the special game number display section TGH approaches 100%, and by reaching 100%, it gives a strong impression that some kind of benefit is obtained. becomes possible.

Further, the special game number display section TGH may be a light emitting section capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, and the emitted light color may be configured to suggest that some kind of benefit will be obtained (to make it expected that a setting value suggestion will occur). In this case, the multiple colors of light are emitted in colors that correspond to the expected levels of light emitting colors of other general expected effects, such as white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that some kind of benefit can be obtained by changing the luminescent color.

(82) In the configuration in which the number of eliminated games EG and the total number of eliminated games TEG are displayed on the special number of games display section TGH, the configuration is such that the total number of eliminated games TEG, etc. is simply displayed and does not suggest a setting value, etc. You can also use it as

(83) By displaying the number of extinguished games EG and total number of extinguished games TEG on the special number of games display section TGH, the configuration that makes people expect compensation for invalidation of additional fees due to forced termination is limited to forced termination of advantageous sections. may be applied to force termination of other advantageous conditions. For example, by setting a high probability state and a low probability state in which the probability of winning a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, etc.) or VB mode is relatively high or low, and setting an upper limit on the number of winnings of the bonus or VB mode in the high probability state. will be established. For example, if you have a configuration where you can win multiple bonuses or VB mode with one win, or a configuration where you can win bonuses or VB mode even during the bonus or VB mode, after the number of wins reaches the upper limit, You can also win bonuses and VB mode. In such a configuration, by displaying the number of wins in bonuses and VB mode after reaching the upper limit, it is possible to display the number of wins in bonuses and VB mode after reaching the upper limit, so that the bonus and VB mode after reaching the upper limit will be invalidated. Even if there is, the fact that the number of wins after reaching the upper limit is deliberately displayed makes it possible to make people expect that they will receive some sort of benefit.

(84) Assuming that there is a post-addition performance, if an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, if there is an unreported amount (if the post-addition flag is set), the range of the unreported amount In this case, the number of pseudo add-on games is determined by referring to the normal add-on game number lottery table. A configuration may also be adopted in which the number of pseudo-additional games is determined. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a pseudo addition of a large number of games is likely to occur when there is a large number of unreported portions, and a pseudo addition of a small number of games is likely to occur when there is a small number of unreported portions.

(85) Assuming that the excess flag is set and an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, if there is an unreported amount, a pseudo additional amount may be performed within the range of the unreported amount, and In this case, a setting value is suggested when a pseudo addition is made in excess of the unreported amount, but a setting value is suggested within a range that does not exceed the unreported amount. You can also use it as

For example, if a pseudo addition of the number of times 10 is subtracted as the first number from the post-add counter BG occurs, settings 1 to 3 are suggested, and if a pseudo addition of the number of times 56 is subtracted as the second number from the post-add counter BG occurs. A configuration may be adopted in which setting 5 or setting 6 is suggested, and setting 6 is suggested when pseudo addition occurs for the number of times that 77 is subtracted as the third number from the post-addition counter BG. In this case, the pseudo-addition of the number of times each of the first to third numbers are subtracted from the post-addition counter BG not only occurs as a set value suggestion, but also can be selected based on the normal addition game number lottery table. Become something. Therefore, when these pseudo-additions occur, the setting value is predicted by taking into account whether or not it occurred as a setting value suggestion, which improves the enjoyment of the predicted game. .

Furthermore, with the above configuration, the situation in which the set value suggestion occurs is that the post-load counter BG must be equal to or higher than the first to third numbers, and from this point of view, the set value suggestion does not occur. It becomes difficult to judge whether or not the settings are being made, which improves the enjoyment of predicting the set values.

It goes without saying that the values of the first to third numbers are not limited to the above values.

(86) If an opportunity for top-up occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set on the premise of a late-pay performance, even in a configuration in which a pseudo-top-up occurs if there is an unreported portion, the target sections are limited to advantageous sections. However, it may also be applied to other advantageous conditions or sections. For example, by setting a high probability state and a low probability state in which the probability of winning a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, etc.) or VB mode is relatively high or low, and setting an upper limit on the number of winnings of the bonus or VB mode in the high probability state. will be established. For example, if you have a configuration where you can win multiple bonuses or VB mode with one win, or a configuration where you can win bonuses or VB mode even during the bonus or VB mode, after the number of wins reaches the upper limit, You can also win bonuses and VB mode. In such a configuration, there is also a configuration that may notify you later that the upper limit has been reached, and if you win a bonus or VB mode in a situation where there is an unreported amount even if the upper limit has been reached, a pseudo It may also be configured to notify the winner of the winning bid.

(87) In the additional game number lottery process (FIG. 130) and the number of games additional process (FIG. 132), it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set, and the subsequent processing is determined to be executed or not. However, if the excess flag has been set in at least the previous game number addition lottery process (Figure 128), the game number addition lottery has not been conducted, and the additional winnings will be determined in the subsequent determination process. It is determined that this has not been done. Therefore, in a situation where the excess flag is set, the additional game number lottery process (FIG. 130) or the additional game number process (FIG. 132) is not actually carried out, and for this reason, In these processes, the excess flag determination process may be omitted.

(88) As compensation for forced termination due to the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, the setting value is suggested, etc., but the set value is used as compensation when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated due to other factors that can be grasped in advance. It may also be configured to provide suggestions. For example, when the game is forcibly terminated due to the closing time of the gaming hall (when the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section cannot be played all within business hours), a setting value suggestion etc. may be provided.

(89) The explanation was based on the premise that the number of games can be increased if a specific winning combination is won during an advantageous period, but the number of games can be subtracted and added based on predetermined opportunities such as winning a specific winning combination. It may be possible to have a game feature in which any of the above occurs, or it may be a game feature in which only subtraction can occur. Assuming that the number of games can be subtracted, even if the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less, it does not necessarily mean that the maximum number of games will be reached, and it is possible to enjoy subsequent games more. In this case, after moving to the advantageous section, the number of remaining games that exceeds the maximum number of games is visually displayed, and when the maximum number of games is reached or the game progresses close to the maximum number of games, the maximum number of games is displayed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the number of remaining games on the display is subtracted.

(90) When winning the push order bell or push order replay, the winning combinations differ depending on the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the benefits given are different, and the stop order is announced. Although the configuration is such that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether or not the game is stopped, it may be any combination that uses a combination in which the degree of advantage for the player differs by notifying the player of the stop operation.

For example, on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first symbol (for example, "Black BAR" symbol) and the second symbol (for example, "Red 7" symbol) cannot be aimed at at the same time (at least 5 symbols apart). )Deploy. Then, the first symbol on the left reel 32L, a predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol), and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (for example, a "first replay" symbol or The first result winning is established when the "Second Replay" symbol) stops on the active line, and the second symbol on the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, the "First Replay" symbol or " The second result winning is established when the "Second Replay" symbol) and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (for example, the "First Replay" symbol or the "Second Replay" symbol) stop on the active line. The winning mode for the first result and the second result is set. In this case, if you perform the stop operation aiming at the 1st symbol when winning the 1st result, the 1st result winning can be achieved, but if you aim at the 2nd symbol instead of the 1st symbol and perform the stop operation, the 1st result winning will not be possible. It is not established and the corresponding benefit will not be granted. Similarly, if you aim at the second symbol when you win the second result, you can win the second result, but if you aim at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result will not be won. It is not established and the corresponding benefit will not be granted. Then, we set up a specific combination in which either the first result or the second result is won, and when the specific combination is won, it is determined whether the first result or the second result has been won (the first symbol and the second result). Which of the two symbols should be aimed at to stop the left reel 32L) can be notified. Even in such a configuration, the notification makes it possible to win a winning result (either the first result or the second result), and the degree of advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. Then, at least one of a mode in which such notification is more likely to be performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to the mode in which such notification is more likely to be performed is high, or a mode in which a person who has won a lottery for transition to these modes but has not yet transitioned. The advantageous section may be defined as a situation including the above modes, or the advantageous section may be a situation including at least one of the above modes, including each mode based on the pressing order.

In addition, by notifying the black BAR press (Figure 106) at the time of winning a special replay, a configuration is established in which the 15th replay prize is established instead of the 1st replay, by notifying the press order at the time of each special replay win. It may be applied to a configuration in which the number of stop rolls is different.

In other words, the stopping operation to make the stopping result different even for the same winning combination is not limited to the stopping order, but may be any stopping operation mode including the stopping operation timing, and there is no need to notify the stop operation mode to perform such a stopping operation mode. is not limited to the press order notification, but may be any mode notification related to the operation mode.

(91) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the section display is varied depending on the result that triggers the lottery when winning a lottery for transition to an advantageous section, and the stop result is associated with the display start mode of the section display. The display start mode of the section display may also be configured to vary depending on the winning mode of the result that triggers the lottery and the presence or absence of a winning. For example, the strong cherry with IV=13 is set as a combination of the 28th minor role and the 32nd to 35th minor roles, and it depends on which of these overlapping roles will result in a strong cherry prize. , the display start mode of the section display may be different. More specifically, there are cases where the "Cherry" symbols line up on the active line and stop, forming the 28th small winning combination, resulting in a strong cherry prize, and cases where the "Cherry" symbols do not line up on the active line and stop, resulting in a strong cherry prize. The display start mode of the section display may be configured to be different depending on whether any of the 32nd minor win to the 35th minor win is established and a strong cherry prize is won. In addition, for specific winning combinations that may be missed, the section indicator will be displayed depending on whether the winning is achieved when the specific winning combination is won, or when the specific winning combination cannot be achieved due to the winning of the specific winning combination. The display start mode may be different.

In these cases, the section indicator will not start lighting up until the orbiting object stops, which will cause a divergence in the winning mode, stop result, and whether or not there is a loss. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the section indicator starts lighting at certain timings, and then the timing and mode (color, etc.) of lighting start to vary depending on the branch. Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the stop operation is performed in the order of left reel 32L → middle reel 32M → right reel 32R, and when the middle reel 32M is stopped, the winning mode etc. branches (in the case of strong cherry) , branching from the 28th small role winning and the 32nd to 35th small role winning), at the timing after the second stop OFF so that the section indicator starts lighting up after the middle reel 32M stops. A certain third stop ON time is set as a default lighting start timing. If the winning mode etc. branches to the first mode (the 28th minor prize winning side in the case of strong cherry) by performing the stop operation, the lighting starts when the third stop is ON as specified above, and the winning mode When the mode, etc. branches to the second mode (32nd small role to 35th small role winning side in strong cherry), the lighting for change is turned on instead of the above prescribed lighting start timing (when the third stop is ON). The lighting is started when the third stop is OFF as the start timing. By doing so, it is possible to provide fun by utilizing the relationship between whether the eye press operation is successful or not and the timing at which winning of an advantageous section can be recognized by the start of lighting of the section display.

(92) Regarding advantageous sections, the winning probability of the transfer lottery and the benefits upon winning (transfer mode, number of additional games, etc.) are the same regardless of the setting value, but the winning probability etc. is different depending on the setting value. Good too. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers a lottery, such as a transition lottery, there are cases where there is a difference in the probability and benefits upon winning depending on the set value, and there are cases where there is no difference in the probability or benefits upon winning depending on the set value. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(93) On the instruction monitor 68, the display mode of the press order information (“1” to “6”) using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the above. For example, the winning combination differs depending on the stop switches 42 to 44 that are stopped first, and the stopping order of the second and third reels includes three-choice pressing combinations that are not related to the winning combination. In this case, the press order information (display of "7") displayed by lighting the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7, and the press order information (display of "7"), Press order information displayed by lighting segment N7 for display 7 (display of "8"), segment N1 for first display to segment N3 for third display, segment N6 for sixth display, and segment for seventh display It may be configured such that the pressing order of these three options is notified by the pressing order information (display of "9") displayed by lighting the segment N7.

(94) In the instruction monitor 68, the timing of turning off the press order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the third reel stop ON operation, but at least the press order information is turned off when the press order information is turned off. It is sufficient that the pressing order notification is performed until the stop switch 42 to 44 to be pressed is recognized (it is sufficient that the pressing order information is displayed). For example, it may be during the second reel stop ON operation, or may be during the second reel stop OFF operation. Further, when the pressing order of the three-choice pressing order combination is to be notified, it may be performed at the time of the first reel stop ON operation or at the time of the first reel stop OFF operation. Further, the light may be turned off after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed since these operations.

Further, the timing may be later than the third reel stop ON operation, the third reel stop OFF operation may be later, or a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) after the third reel stop OFF operation. The light may be turned off after a certain period of time has elapsed, or it may be at the end of the medal payout.

(95) The instruction monitor 68 may also be used as the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, or the payout number display section 62. In these cases, at the timing when the press order notification is performed, the press order notification is performed on each display section 60 to 62, while at the timing when the press order notification is not performed, the original display of each display section 60 to 62 is displayed. It is best to configure the configuration to do so.

When used as the credit display section 60, it is preferable that the credit display section 60 displays the credits at least until a bet operation is performed, and then notifies the push order (based on the operation of the start lever 41). The press order notification ends at least at a timing before the timing when the number of medals acquired (paid out) in the game increases and is updated (the timing at which medal payout starts) (the press order information is turned off) For example, it may be configured such that the process ends by the third reel stop ON operation, and the display is switched to credit display when medal payout is started.

The remaining payout number display section 61 is a display section that displays the remaining payout number in the bonus. The configuration is such that notification is not performed (playability that is different from the gameplay in which medals are increased by press order notification), and a game in which the remaining payout number is displayed by the remaining payout number display section 61 and a game in which press order notification is performed. It may be possible to avoid duplication. In this case, during the bonus, the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display section 65 may be generated.

If it is also used as the payout number display section 62, it is preferable that the press order notification is ended at least at a timing before the payout number display section 62 starts displaying the number of payout medals for the game. For example, when the third reel stop is turned ON, the push order notification is ended (the push order information is turned off), and if the payout combination is won, the number of coins to be paid out is displayed when the third reel stop is turned OFF. It's good to do that. Such a configuration may be applied to the remaining payout number display section 61.

Furthermore, the display units 60 to 62 may be used to notify the pressing order. In the gaming panel 25, the credit display section 60 is arranged on the left, the remaining payout number display section 61 is arranged in the middle, and the payout number display section 62 is arranged on the right (FIG. 1), in association with each stop switch 42 to 44. , when the left stop switch 42 should be operated, the credit display section 60 is displayed, when the middle stop switch 43 should be operated, the remaining payout number display section 61 is displayed, and when the right stop switch 44 should be operated, the credit display section 60 is displayed, and when the right stop switch 44 should be operated, the credit display section 60 is displayed. It may be configured to notify the pressing order by displaying the number display section 62 or the like. In this case, as described above, after the bet operation is performed until the third reel stop ON operation, the push order is notified on any of the display sections 60 to 62. However, in order to ensure that the original display function is maintained, the period after such a bet operation is performed until the third reel stop ON operation is the period in which the press order notification is performed by these display sections 60 to 62, and other than that. During the period, it is preferable to configure each display section 60 to 62 to perform the original display.

(96) The number of consecutive games in an advantageous period is managed by the number of games in an advantageous period AG, etc., but for example, until a predetermined number of games are played (for example, 50 games) or until a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, It is also possible to set one set of replays (until three consecutive wins) and manage the number of sets. Specifically, in the attack mode, a predetermined number of games (50 games) is set as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery at the time of starting the attack mode or at the time of the attack mode transition lottery. Then, the attack mode is ended when the determined number of sets is consumed. In this case, if the measurement conditions are met, such as winning a specific combination in attack mode, etc., an additional lottery for the number of sets will be conducted as an additional lottery for attack mode, and if you win such a lottery, depending on the winning content, It is preferable to have a configuration in which the number of sets added is added.

In such a configuration, in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games), for example, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) may be set as one set, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, replay (until 3 consecutive wins) or a specific number of games (for example, 50 games), if one set is the maximum number of games divided by the predetermined number of games or the specific number of games (30 sets). It may be configured such that an upper limit set number is set, and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by exhausting the upper limit set number. In this case, it is preferable to use a predetermined counter to keep track of the number of sets of advantageous sections, and to forcibly terminate the process when the counter reaches the upper limit (30). If challenge mode and omen mode are to be taken into consideration, the configuration is such that these challenge modes and omen modes are also taken into account in the number of sets (for example, the number of games is determined so that the total number of games for omen mode and challenge mode is one set). In this case, including these modes, when the counter reaches the upper limit value, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached. In addition, in a configuration in which the number of games per set can fluctuate (a configuration in which one set is defined as whether a predetermined ending condition is met or a specific number of games are played), the number of games less than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. The above set number counter can become the upper limit value.

In relation to the excess flag, it is preferable to set the excess flag when the sum of the number of completed sets and the number of unused sets in the set number counter described above reaches the upper limit of the number of sets. .

(97) A configuration may also be adopted in which press order notification is performed also in the challenge mode and the omen mode. More specifically, when transitioning to a specific game state even in an advantageous section, including attack mode, challenge mode, omen mode, etc., the advantageous section will continue until the push order notification occurs at least a predetermined number of times (one time). It is also possible to have a configuration that does not end.

(98) As a lottery result during an advantageous section, the timing of notification of the result of the additional lottery was configured to be different between the immediate payout effect and the later payoff effect depending on the set value, but the lottery result is announced at different timing depending on the set value. is not limited to an additional lottery, but may be any other lottery as long as it is within an advantageous area. For example, the timing of notification of the results of the lottery for the number of add-on games may be configured to vary depending on the setting value. In this case, the timing of notification of immediate/post-add depending on the number of add-on games may be configured to vary depending on the setting value. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the difference in setting of the loading/rear loading ratio is different. Further, the lottery is not limited to the instruction function, and for example, the timing of announcing the results of the BB lottery during the advantageous section may be configured to vary depending on the setting value. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the Furthermore, the notification timing of the winning result of a small winning combination such as cherry may be configured to vary depending on the setting value, and in this case, the notification timing in the winning game may be configured to vary depending on the setting value.

(99) When performing a back-up effect, the first back-up character BUP1, the second back-up character BUP2, etc. are configured to notify the winning result, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which these characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are not displayed. . In this case, on the premise that the additional performance includes result notification (winning notification) and content notification (number of winning games notification), in the additional performance, the result notification is at the same timing as the content notification of the subsequent performance, or slightly later than that. The configuration may be such that it is performed at an early timing, and the result may not be announced in the game in which the additional lottery is held.

In addition, in the post-addition performance, the first post-post character BUP1, the second post-post character BUP2, etc. are displayed when the lottery is won, but these characters BUP1 and BUP2 are also displayed when the lottery is not won. It may also be a configuration. In this case, the characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. become characters indicating that an additional lottery has been conducted. If these characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are displayed with no additional winnings, the result will be changed at the time of content notification, such as by showing that the treasure chest is empty or that the number of additional games is 0 games. It may also be configured to provide notification.

(100) As a lottery with no setting difference, the notification timing of the additional lottery is different depending on the setting value between the immediate payout performance and the post-payoff performance, but if the lottery does not have a setting difference, it is not limited to the additional lottery. Other lottery may also be used. For example, it may be possible to meet by lottery for the number of additional games, or the timing of notification of the result of the lottery for the number of additional games may be configured to vary depending on a set value.In this case, the timing of notification of immediate/post-adjustment depending on the number of additional games. may be configured to differ depending on the set value, or may be configured to have a different set difference in the immediate loading/later loading ratio. In addition, it is not limited to the lottery related to the instruction function, and for example, the timing of notification of the result of the BB lottery during the normal section or advantageous section may be configured to vary depending on the setting value. In this case, the number of precursory games at the time of winning the BB may be set. It may be configured to vary depending on the value. Furthermore, the notification timing of the winning result of a small winning combination such as cherry may be configured to vary depending on the setting value, and in this case, the notification timing in the winning game may be configured to vary depending on the setting value.

(101) The table counter ATK is added and the additional notification timing table is switched based on the continuous immediate effect as an additional effect in the specialized zone, but based on the continuous subsequent effect. It may also be configured to switch the additional notification timing table. In this case, it is preferable to configure the table counter ATK to be initialized (1) based on the occurrence of the instant ride effect.

In addition, the continuity of immediate and post-add effects is not limited to only during the specialized zone, but as an additional effect that occurs during attack mode, the continuity of immediate-on and post-add effects can be increased due to consecutive immediate and post-on effects. A configuration may also be adopted in which the notification timing table is switched.

In addition, the trigger for switching the additional notification timing table is not limited to the continuity of the selected performances, but the additional notification timing table may be changed if the additions due to the same type of small role are consecutive (for example, if the additions of cherry triggers are consecutive). It is also possible to have a configuration in which the table counter ATK is initialized when the addition of small winning combinations of other types continues.

(102) Although the configuration is such that the additional notification timing table is switched depending on the successive instant pay effects, the additional notification timing table is switched simply depending on the number of selections of the immediate pay effects even if they are not consecutive. You can also use it as In this case, for example, the first additional notification timing table is selected when the number of selections (table counter ATK) of the instant payoff effect is 1 to 3, and when the number of selections of the immediate payoff effect (table counter ATK) is 4 to 5 times. Settings based on the selected additional notification timing table, such as when the fourth additional notification timing table is selected and the number of selections (table counter ATK) of the immediate effect is 6 or more, the first additional notification timing table is selected. The difficulty level of guessing a value may not change uniformly depending on the number of times (the difficulty level increases as the number of times increases, or the difficulty level decreases as the number of times increases). .

(103) The difficulty level of estimating the set value based on the additional notification timing selected as the number of consecutive instant pay-off effects increases, but the difficulty level of estimating the setting value based on the additional notification timing selected as the number of consecutive instant pay-off effects increases; A configuration may also be adopted in which the difficulty level of estimating the setting value based on the additional notification timing increases.

(104) In the configuration of switching the additional notification timing table, the initial value of the table counter ATK may be different depending on the timing of transition to the specialized zone. Specifically, for example, if the trigger for transitioning to the specialized zone is a watermelon, the initial value of the table counter ATK is set to 1, while if the trigger for transitioning to the specialized zone is a cherry, the initial value of the table counter ATK is set to 1. For example, the value may be set to 3. By doing so, the difficulty level of estimating the setting value can be varied based on the trigger of transition to the specialized zone.

(105) The specialized zone that is triggered by a cherry is set to a specialized zone where a special additional notification timing table with a large difference in setting of the immediate load/later load ratio is used, but the transition to the specialized zone is triggered by a watermelon. It may be configured to do so, or it may be configured to move to the specialized zone at the opportunity of another specific role.

(106) The specialization zone that moves with a cherry opportunity and the specialization zone that moves with another specific role opportunity have different additional notification timing tables, but the specialization uses different additional notification timing tables. The number of zones is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

(107) In a game feature in which a set value is predicted based on the immediate payout/later payout ratio, a configuration may be adopted in which an additional payoff effect can occur at a timing different from the immediate payoff effect and the postage payoff effect. For example, it may be a game feature in which the set value is predicted based on the selection rate including effects via signs.

(108) At the end of the specialized zone or attack mode, information regarding the immediate/later loading ratio was configured to be output. If there is no winner, that is, if the watermelon or cherry is not won, the information regarding the immediate/later pick ratio may not be output.

(109) A configuration may be adopted in which information regarding the notification timing, such as the immediate pick-up/later pick-up ratio, can be outputted by lottery. For example, an output lottery may be performed at a predetermined probability at the end of the attack mode, and if the output lottery is won, information regarding the notification timing may be output. The winning probability of the output lottery is arbitrary, but the winning probability may be different depending on the setting value. In this case, the higher the setting value is, the higher the winning probability is, or vice versa. Furthermore, the probability of winning may vary depending on the number of games played in the attack mode (advantageous section). In this case, the probability of winning may increase as the number of games played increases, or vice versa.

(110) The output timing of the information regarding the notification timing, such as the immediate pick-up/later pick-up ratio, is not limited to the end of the specialized zone or the end of the attack mode, and may be configured to be output at other timings. For example, it may be configured to be output based on the fact that the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 1000 games) before the upper limit. Further, it may be configured to be output at the start or end of a bonus state won during the attack mode, or during the bonus state. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the output can be triggered by winning a specific combination (for example, winning a cherry) during the attack mode.

(111) In the configuration that outputs information regarding the notification timing, such as the immediate/post-load ratio, it may be configured to also output information about the fact that the additional lottery was conducted but the additional lottery was not won. Furthermore, when outputting information regarding the notification timing of additional effects triggered by winning combinations such as cherries that are missed, it may be configured to output information including the presence or absence of missed wins.

(112) In the configuration that outputs information regarding the immediate pick-up/later pick-up ratio, only the ratio may be output, and information regarding the number of times of each immediate pick-up effect or later pick-up effect may not be output. By doing this, it is possible to avoid, for example, suppressing a negative impression given to the player due to a small number of additional winnings.

(113) In the notification mode selection performance, when a reel that is missed is selected, the immediate loading effect is selected, but when a reel that is missed is selected, the post-loading effect is selected. A configuration may also be adopted in which a performance via a sign is selected. In addition, in relation to the reel where a dropout occurs and the reel where a dropout does not occur, the selection operation and the execution timing of the selected additional notification are associated. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection operation and the execution timing of the selected additional notification are associated in accordance with the height of the possibility. More specifically, for example, it may be configured such that when a reel with the highest possibility of being missed (a reel with a small number of winning symbols) is operated to select, an immediate payout effect is selected.

(114) In the notification mode selection performance, the execution timing of the additional performance was selected by the stop operation of the first reel, but the execution timing was selected by the stop operation of the second reel or the third reel. Good too. In addition, on a predetermined reel, a first specific symbol, a second specific symbol, and a third specific symbol are provided that cannot be stopped at the same time, and the execution timing is selected depending on which specific symbol is to be stopped. Good too.

(115) Through the modification process, the data for each post-ride performance is individually changed to the instant-ride performance in a situation where the post-ride performance is selected, but it is possible to uniformly change each data to the instant-ride performance. It is also possible to have a configuration in which: Further, a configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to select whether to change to the immediate loading effect or not depending on the type of opportunity for adding data to be added later. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to select whether to change to the instant payout effect depending on the number of payout games.

(116) Although the modification process is configured to change the data for which the post-ride effect is selected to the immediate effect, it may also be configured to change to the effect via the omen, or the data for which the effect via the omen is selected. It may be configured to change to an immediate ride effect or a later ride effect.

(117) The configuration of the individual area to be stored when the post-addition effect or the omen-mediated effect is selected/determined is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of games that can be stored may be smaller or larger than the above. Furthermore, the number of individual data can also be changed.

(118) Regarding the individual areas that store added data, if there are more storage opportunities than the number of individual areas provided (selection of post-add effects, etc.), the data in one or more of the individual areas will be On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the current number of additional games is added. In the case of a configuration in which data is added to data in a plurality of areas, the current number of additional games may be divided equally and added, or may be added in a biased manner.

(119) When the back-up effect is selected, the first back-up character BUP1, the second back-up character BUP2, etc. are displayed depending on the chance of winning the top-up, but these back-up characters are the ones mentioned above. but not limited to. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which different characters are displayed depending on the number of additional games.

(120) The configuration of varying the execution timing of the additional performance is not limited to the performance when the additional lottery is won, but may be applied when the additional lottery is not won.

(121) In a configuration where the execution timing of the additional effect is determined based on the player's selection operation, the execution timing differs from the execution timing selected by the player through the selection operation due to the relationship between the number of additional games and the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an additional effect is executed at a timing. More specifically, for example, in a situation where there are 50 games left to reach the maximum number of games in the advantageous section (a situation where the number of executed games is 1450 games), if an additional 100 games occurs, which is more than 50 games, the immediate playback effect will be applied. Even if is selected, an additional performance is generated as an additional performance. By doing this, it becomes possible to grasp that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated due to the addition of more than the upper limit number of games, through the addition of the effect at a timing different from the player's own selection operation.

Note that this configuration may be used for setting value suggestion. More specifically, the configuration is such that, with a predetermined probability, the additional performance occurs at a timing different from the execution timing according to the player's selection operation. Then, when the set value is the first set value (for example, setting 1), the additional effect is executed at a timing different from the selection operation with the first probability (for example, 10%) as the predetermined probability, and the set value is the first set value. If the second set value is different from the first set value (for example, setting 6), the additional effect is performed at a timing different from the selection operation with a second probability (for example, 80%) that is different from the first probability as the predetermined probability. The configuration is to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new game feature in which the set value is predicted by the additional effect occurring at an execution timing different from the player's own selection operation.

Furthermore, if an additional number of games occurs that is greater than the number of free games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, the additional effect can occur at a different execution timing from the selection operation described above, and the different The probability that an additional effect will occur at the execution timing may be configured to vary depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to have the advantage of being able to predict the set value when an addition that exceeds the upper limit occurs, and it is possible to ensure that the upper limit is not exceeded due to addition.

(122) The ball output rate changes depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 having the highest ball output rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease in the amount changes. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball payout rates for some setting values are the same and the ball payout rates for other setting values are different, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate. Further, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out. In addition, settings 1 and 5 increase the number of balls in a short period of time and decrease the number of balls in a long period of time, while settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the number of balls than in settings 1 and 5. It takes a shorter time than settings 1 and 5 to reduce the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have a configuration in which almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls produced occurs. In these cases, the ball payout rate for each set value may be the same.

(123) Although a slot machine has been described that includes three reels and three stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a slot machine including five reels and five stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel. It may also be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and stop switches corresponding thereto. Furthermore, although a slot machine has been described in which the active line is set to 1 line when the number of bets is 3, the present invention is not limited to this configuration; for example, the active line may be 5 lines.

(124) Although a specific example has been shown for the slot machine 10, the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, the slot machine may be a gaming machine (a so-called reel-type gaming machine using balls) that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

For example, if a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls is configured to have multiple levels of setting values that change the ball payout rate, etc., each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest and teach these setting values. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine that has a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and the ball enters the predetermined entry section. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state where the ball rate varies, the above inventions may be applied by setting the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 to the high ball entry state.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The inventions shown in each feature group below are as follows: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines.In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions. There is a known configuration in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.Specifically, in the case of a slot machine, when a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, an internal lottery is carried out, and the reels start rotating.If the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reel stop result is determined by the internal lottery. If the game machine corresponds to the result of It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics AA group>
Feature AA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
A transition lottery means (which executes a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) which is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and executes a lottery to transition to the specific gaming state. function) and
Notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific notification is started based on the end of the specific gaming state. A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification by turning off the notification means;
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
A first means for starting or terminating the notification by the specific notification means in a predetermined first mode (for example, executing a process for starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation in the main control device 101) function) and
In a second aspect different from the first aspect, a second means for starting or terminating the notification by the specific notification means (for example, a process for starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the main control device 101) ) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is awarded by a privilege awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the first result may be a winning result or the second result may be won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the orbiting body. Results such as winning a prize are set, and there are cases where notifications are made regarding these stop operation conditions, creating a gameplay that changes the presence or absence of winning depending on the presence or absence of notification of the conditions, thereby creating a gaming experience in which the degree of advantage varies. Ru.

In this case, when the game shifts to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of the notification from the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the mode notification.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the start and end of notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first mode or in the second mode. In this way, it is possible to fully expect the performance effect in a game by using a specific notification means that simply starts notification when transitioning to a specific gaming state and ends notification when the specific gaming state ends. is also possible. Furthermore, if the above configuration is used, for example, the notification by the specific notification means can be started by winning a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, or the notification by the specific notification device can be ended by playing a specific gaming state. It becomes possible to provide information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state to the player who played the game in the start/end manner of notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure equality between players depending on whether or not notification is made by the specific notification means, while also ensuring superiority over the player who played the game that triggered the notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the "specific gaming state notification means", "based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, notification is started by turning on the specific notification means, and the specific gaming state ends." Based on this, the notification is terminated by turning off the specific notification means based on the specific notification state. The notification by the specific notification means may be terminated based on the end of the gaming state. This also applies to the "specific game state notification means" in other features below.

Feature AA2. The specific gaming state notifying means may start or end notification by the specific notifying means by the first means, or start or end notification by the specific notifying means by the second means, depending on the advantage of the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature AA1, wherein the gaming machine can be terminated in different cases.

According to the above configuration, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means will differ depending on the advantage of the specific gaming state depending on whether it is performed in the first mode or in the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the specific notification means when the notification by the specific notification means starts/ends.

Feature AA3. The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) that have different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific game state notification means is
When the specific gaming state is a predetermined first predetermined state, the first means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means,
Feature AA1 or AA2 is characterized in that when the specific gaming state is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the second means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of the specific gaming state differs between the first aspect and the second aspect depending on the type of the specific gaming condition. Considering that it is important to know what state to transition to in the gameplay based on the stop operation mode and mode notification of the first and second results, by doing the above, the notification of the specific notification means can be controlled. It becomes possible to suitably increase interest in the start. Furthermore, when the notification ends, if the notification of the specific notification means is ended in a manner that corresponds to the information on which state it is in, the lingering effects of these conditions can be reduced through the manner in which the notification of the specific notification means ends. It becomes possible to entertain.

Feature AA4. The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) that have different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific game state notification means is
When the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state, the first means starts the notification by the specific notification means,
The gaming machine according to feature AA3, wherein when the specific gaming state is the second predetermined state, the second means starts notification by the specific notifying means.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature AA3 at the time of starting the notification can be suitably achieved.

Feature AA5. The specific gaming state notification means performs notification during the specific gaming state in the same manner when the first means starts or ends the notification and when the second means starts or ends the notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA4.

According to the above configuration, since the notification mode is the same during the specific gaming state, the function of ensuring equality between players can be fulfilled by the notification from the specific notification means, and when the point at which the notification mode of the specific notification device differs is started. By aggregating the notifications at the end of the notification period, it becomes easy to understand the timing to pay attention to, and it is also possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification means.

Feature AA6. The specific gaming state notifying means starts the notification by the specific notifying means in either the first mode or the second mode depending on the content of the specific gaming state when starting the notification by the specific notifying device. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a start time setting means (a function for executing the section display first process by the main control device 101) for setting whether to display the section.

According to the above configuration, the content of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether notification is started in the first mode or in the second mode. This increases interest in which mode it is or not, thereby making it possible to suitably achieve the effect of increasing the degree of attention.

In addition, the above-mentioned "according to the contents of the specific gaming state" means, for example, "as the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, portent mode) that have different degrees of advantage for the player." etc.), and depending on whether the specific gaming state is a first predetermined state or a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state. It may also be expressed using the type of state. Further, it may be associated with the number of consecutive games, etc., such as "according to the length of the specific gaming state."

Feature AA7. The specific gaming state notifying means may cause the specific notifying means to make a notification in either the first aspect or the second aspect depending on the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state when starting notification by the specific notifying device. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a start time setting means (a function for executing the section display first process by the main control device 101) for setting whether to start.

According to the above configuration, the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first mode or the second mode. This increases interest in which mode it is or not, thereby making it possible to suitably achieve the effect of increasing the degree of attention.

Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to feature AA6, the "start time setting means" of feature AA6 may be replaced with "start time setting means" of this configuration, or the "start time setting means" of feature AA6 may be replaced with "start time setting means" of feature AA6. "first start time setting means" and "start time setting means" in this configuration may be read as "second start time setting means". In other words, if the "start time setting means" overlap when applying each feature, one "start time setting means" may be limited by the configuration of the other "start time setting means", or both "start time setting means" may be limited by the configuration of the other "start time setting means". A configuration may also be adopted in which a "start time setting means" coexists. Note that the relationship of limitations and duplication of each means is the same for each of the following features.

Features AA8. When the notification of the specific notification means is started or ended by the first means, the notification is started or ended at a first timing as the first aspect, and the specific notification is started or ended by the second means. Features AA1 to AA7 characterized in that when the notification of the means is started or ended, the second aspect is that the notification is started or ended at a second timing different from the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In addition to the difference in timing, the manner in which notification by the specific notification means is started/stopped includes differences in display content (different colors, different images, etc.), differences in sound, etc. In the above configuration, the first aspect and The second aspect differs in the notification start/end timing of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to make other differences (differences in display content, sound, etc.) the same, and the first means and second means share performance data at the time of starting/ending the notification of the specific notification means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects of each of the above features with a simple configuration.

Feature AA9. The second timing is a timing later than the first timing, and it is better to start the notification of the specific notification means at the second timing than to start the notification of the specific notification means at the first timing. The gaming machine according to feature AA8, characterized in that the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notification means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the notification starts.

According to the above configuration, if a later notification start timing is more advantageous for the player, it is preferable that the notification start later, and it is possible to enjoy the excitement of wondering whether or not the notification will start for a long time. becomes.

Feature AA10. In a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, a specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the valid position, thereby generating the specific result. A game in which a benefit corresponding to the above can be awarded by the benefit granting means is set as a starting game,
The specific game state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means at least at a timing before the operation of the next game after the start game is permitted;
The gaming machine according to feature AA9, wherein the first timing and the second timing are included in the start game.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means is started is more limited, so that it becomes difficult for the performance to be delayed in the game as to whether or not the notification will be performed. In addition, by setting the end of the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means starts, the points to be noted are concentrated on whether or not the notification will be made by the specific notification means (whether or not you won the transition lottery). If the later timing is more advantageous for the player, as in feature AA9, the notification will start at the earlier timing and give a sense of security. This makes it possible to realize a gaming experience in which the player can feel the thrill of the game, or whether the notification is not started until a later timing.

Feature AA11. The first means starts or ends notification by the specific notification means based on the operation of a first stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means,
The second means starts the notification by the specific notification means based on the operation of a second stop operation means that is operated after the first stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA10, characterized in that the game machine ends.

According to the above configuration, the notification by the specific notification means starts or ends in accordance with the operation of the plurality of stop operation means. In this way, for example, the user operates the stop operation means with anticipation while hoping that the notification by the specific notification means will start or not end, that is, the specific gaming state will be entered or the specific gaming state will continue. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to increase the fun of operating the stop operation means as each game progresses.

Note that, if the above configuration is applied to feature AA6, the following effects will be particularly achieved.

Since the content of the specific game state that is the target of notification by the specific notification device may differ depending on the end of the stop operation device that is operated, it is possible to Each stop operation means can be operated. In addition, in view of the gameplay in which the corresponding orbiting body stops based on the operation of each stop operation means, and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped by stopping all the orbiting bodies, the rear stop operation means It is more likely that the pattern combination corresponding to the above game result is closer to completion when the operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to link the degree of completion of the symbol combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification by the specific notification means is started and the content of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to make a notification by a specific notification means that utilizes the relationship with the pattern that stops on each orbiting object, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the notification. .

Furthermore, if the above configuration is applied to feature AA7, the following effects can be particularly achieved.

Since the degree of advantage of the specific game state that is the target of notification by the specific notification device may differ depending on the end of the stop operation device that is operated, the degree of expectation may be changed in stages in a game where notification by the specific notification device can be started. It is possible to operate each stop operation means at the same time. In addition, in view of the gameplay in which the corresponding orbiting body stops based on the operation of each stop operation means, and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped by stopping all the orbiting bodies, the rear stop operation means It is more likely that the pattern combination corresponding to the above game result is closer to completion when the operation is performed. Then, the degree of completion of the symbol combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification by the specific notification means is started can be linked to the degree of advantage of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to make a notification by a specific notification means that utilizes the relationship with the pattern that stops on each orbiting object, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the notification. .

Feature AA12. The stop operation means is movable from an initial position to an operation position,
The drive control means performs drive control to stop the corresponding orbiting body based on the stop operation means being operated from the initial position to the operation position,
Based on the first aspect, the predetermined stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position, depending on the advantage of the specific gaming state when the notification by the specific notification means is started. Setting whether to start notification by the specific notification means or to start notification by the specific notification device based on the return of the predetermined stop operation device from the operation position to the initial position as the second aspect. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a start time setting means (a function for executing the section display first process by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, the notification by the specific notification means is started based on the stop operation means being operated from the initial position to the operation position to stop the orbiting body, and the notification by the specific notification means is started based on the operation of the stop operation means from the initial position to the operation position. In some cases, the notification by the specific notification means is started based on the return to the initial position after the orbiting body has stopped (after the orbiting body has stopped), and the advantage of the specific gaming state that is the target of notification by the specific notification means is different in each case. ing. By doing this, it becomes possible to start the notification by the specific notification means based on the relationship between the act of stopping each orbiting body and the aftereffect after stopping, and the notification by the specific notification means is started. The degree of attention to this can be more suitably increased.

Feature AA13. The specific gaming state notifying means may perform the above operation in either of the first aspect and the second aspect depending on the content of the specific gaming state that was the subject of notification when the specific notifying means ends the notification. The present invention is characterized in that it includes an end time setting means (a function for executing a process of terminating the advantageous section display in the first section display process by the main controller 101) for setting whether to end the notification by the specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA12.

According to the above configuration, depending on the content of the particular gaming state that has been carried out, whether the notification is ended in the first mode or the second mode differs. By doing this, for example, if the content of a specific gaming state is not what the player wanted (such as when the game ended after a short number of games), It is possible to expect a dramatic effect at the end of the game by differentiating the manner in which the notification ends using the specific notification means in cases where the game would have been desired (such as when the game continues for a long number of games). becomes.

Feature AA14. A content notification means (a function of executing the additional notification performance in the display control device 81) that executes a content notification (additional notification performance) regarding the specific game state that is being executed, which is a performance executed during the specific gaming state. Equipped with
The content notification by the content notification means is likely to be more advantageous to the player as the period from when the opportunity for execution of the notification occurs to when the notification is made is longer;
The specific gaming state notifying means is arranged such that the content of the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notifying means is more advantageous to the player, the more the specific gaming state notifying means is arranged to be located at the rear of the first means and the second means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA13, characterized in that the means for starting or ending notification can easily start or end notification by the specific notification means.

According to the above structure, the content of the specific gaming state to which the specific gaming state is being notified becomes more advantageous to the player as the notification by the specific gaming state notification means starts and ends later. In relation to the execution timing relationship, the notification becomes familiar to and easy to understand for players. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a game that allows the player to enjoy the game by associating the start and end of the notification by the specific game state notification means with the content.

Feature AA15. The specific game state notification means is
Depending on the gaming situation when the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is a winner, the first means starts notification by the specific notification means, or the second device starts notification by the specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA14, characterized in that it is possible to vary whether the game is played or not.

According to the above configuration, the manner in which notification by the specific notification means starts differs depending on not only the winning of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state but also the gaming situation in which the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is won. By doing so, the notification mode can be diversified.

Feature AA16. Situation setting means (in the main control device 101) that sets the gaming situation to a specific situation with one condition that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is not won. Equipped with a function to execute processing for specific conditions),
The specific game state notification means is configured to provide information that may be useful to the player more easily in the specific situation than in a situation other than the specific situation, based on the manner in which the notification by the specific notification unit starts. The gaming machine according to feature AA15, characterized in that it is possible to change which of the first means and the second means starts the notification by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, the gaming situation can be set to the specific situation even if the lottery result is a specific result or the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is not won. When winning a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state during a specific situation, information that may be beneficial to the player is suggested by the start mode of notification by the specific gaming state notification means. In this way, the key to the game is not only whether or not you win the lottery for transitioning to a specific gaming state, but also whether or not you are set to a specific situation, and it is possible that you will not win the lottery for transitioning to a specific gaming state. You can try not to be too disappointed.

Note that "information that may be useful to the player" may include, for example, "information on setting values set by the setting means".

Feature AA17. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA16.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above structure, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) (9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game), and each of the stop operation means sets a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to provide the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. In this case, it is possible to more clearly indicate the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

Feature AA18. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA17, wherein the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting device. .

According to the above configuration, there is no difference in winning probability depending on the setting value regarding a specific gaming state, so no matter which of the multiple gaming machines installed in the gaming hall is selected, the equality of games regarding the specific gaming state is guaranteed. Guaranteed. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by specific notification means, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

Feature AA19. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA18, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and before the transition is made is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by means of the specific notification means, and to expect the production effect and improvement in interest described in feature AA1.

Features AA20. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
A transition lottery means (which executes a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) which is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and executes a lottery to transition to the specific gaming state. function) and
Notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific notification is started based on the end of the specific gaming state. A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification by turning off the notification means;
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
A first means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means at a first predetermined timing (for example, executing a process of starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation in the main controller 101) function) and
A second means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, starting the display on the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the main controller 101) function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is awarded by a privilege awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the first result may be a winning result or the second result may be won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the orbiting body. Results such as winning a prize are set, and there are cases where notifications are made regarding these stop operation conditions, creating a gameplay that changes the presence or absence of winning depending on the presence or absence of notification of the conditions, thereby creating a gaming experience in which the degree of advantage varies. Ru.

In this case, when the game shifts to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of the notification from the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the mode notification.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the notification by the specific notification means may start or end at the first timing or at the second timing. In this way, it is possible to fully expect the performance effect in a game by using a specific notification means that simply starts notification when transitioning to a specific gaming state and ends notification when the specific gaming state ends. is also possible. Furthermore, if the above configuration is used, a game in which notification by the specific notification means is started by winning a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, or where notification by the specific notification device is ended by playing a specific gaming state can be played. It becomes possible to provide information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state to the player who has played the game at the start/end timing of the notification by the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure equality between players depending on the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, and to ensure superiority over the player who played the game that triggered the notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature AA21. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
A transition lottery means (which executes a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) which is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and executes a lottery to transition to the specific gaming state. function) and
Notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific notification is started based on the end of the specific gaming state. A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification by turning off the notification means;
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
A first means for starting or terminating the notification by the specific notification means by turning on the lighting state or turning off the light in a predetermined first color (for example, displaying the section indicator in red in the main controller 101). (a function that executes the process of starting display), and
A second means for starting or terminating the notification by the specific notification means by setting the lighting state or the lighting off state in a second color different from the first color (for example, the main controller 101 displays a section in green). (a function that executes the process of starting display on the display unit),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is awarded by a privilege awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the first result may be a winning result or the second result may be won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the orbiting body. Results such as winning a prize are set, and there are cases where notifications are made regarding these stop operation conditions, creating a gameplay that changes the presence or absence of winning depending on the presence or absence of notification of the conditions, thereby creating a gaming experience in which the degree of advantage varies. Ru.

In this case, when the game shifts to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of the notification from the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the mode notification.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the start and end of notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first color or in the second color. In this way, it is possible to fully expect the performance effect in a game by using a specific notification means that simply starts notification when transitioning to a specific gaming state and ends notification when the specific gaming state ends. is also possible. Furthermore, if the above configuration is used, a game in which notification by the specific notification means is started by winning a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, or where notification by the specific notification device is ended by playing a specific gaming state can be played. It becomes possible to provide information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state to the player who has played the game by using different colors when the specific notification means starts/ends the notification. Therefore, it is possible to ensure equality between players depending on the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, and to ensure superiority over the player who played the game that triggered the notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Note that each configuration of the features AA1 to AA19 may be applied individually to the feature AA20 or the feature AA21, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

<Feature AB group>
Feature AB1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (a function for executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and,
Based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the state notification, and based on the end of the specific gaming state, A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state notification means is configured to display a specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result in the effective position in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery device is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won. A game in which the benefit corresponding to the specific result can be awarded by the benefit granting means by stopping is set as the starting game, and at least at a timing before the operation of the next game after the starting game is allowed. This is to start notification during the state by specific notification means,
At a timing prior to the start of the in-state notification by the specific gaming state notification means, a special notification corresponding to the content of the specific gaming state that is the target of the in-state notification is sent to a predetermined specific. Special notification means that can be executed by the notification means (eighth display segment N8, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, auxiliary display section 65, etc.) (execution of section display first processing and special RT state processing by main controller 101) and a function of executing special RT state notification means by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is awarded by a privilege awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the first result may be a winning result or the second result may be won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the orbiting body. Results such as winning a prize are set, and there are cases where notifications are made regarding these stop operation conditions, creating a gameplay that changes the presence or absence of winning depending on the presence or absence of notification of the conditions, thereby creating a gaming experience in which the degree of advantage varies. Ru.

In this case, when transitioning to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, the specific notification means starts the in-state notification, and when the specific gaming state ends, the in-state notification by the specific notification device also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of the notification from the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the mode notification.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, if the start of the state notification is timed, it will be difficult to decide whether or not the state notification will finally start (before the next game operation is allowed). In this case, the player only needs to determine whether or not the status notification has started when the operation of the game following the starting game is permitted. Therefore, the attention level of the starting game itself may decrease. Therefore, in this gaming machine, in addition to notifications during a state, notifications are provided during the start game, which is a timing before the start of the notification during the state, or at the timing of winning a transition lottery (mainly at the start timing of the start game). ), a special notification corresponding to the content of a specific gaming state can be executed by a specific notification means. By doing this, by paying attention to whether or not a state notification is started using the specific notification means, players who are interested in the game following the starting game can direct their interest to the starting game. can be moved to

Feature AB2. When the special notification is performed by the special notification means at a first timing and when the special notification is performed at a second timing that is later than the first timing, The gaming machine according to feature AB1, characterized in that the specific gaming states for which the notification during the state is started by the specific notification means have different advantages.

According to the above configuration, depending on the timing at which the special notification is performed by the special notification means, the advantage of the specific gaming state that is the target of the in-state notification that will be started thereafter differs. By doing so, interest in the special notification to the special notification means can be increased with a simple configuration.

Feature AB3. According to feature AB2, the more advantageous the content of the specific gaming state is for the player, the easier it is for the special notification means to make the special notification at the second timing than at the first timing. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the later the execution timing of the special notification is, the more likely the specific game state is to be advantageous to the player, it is possible to expect that the special notification will not be executed early in the starting game, and It is possible to allow the user to proceed with the starting game while expecting that the state notification will start before the next game operation is permitted. Therefore, by associating the game progress in the starting game with the level of expectation, it is possible to realize a game experience in which the level of expectation varies step by step.

In addition, since it is assumed that the notification is time-limited, such as the notification during the state starts before the operation of the next game after the starting game is allowed, the special notification that is performed before the notification during the state is assumed. If the configuration is such that the later the execution timing is, the more advantageous it is, the closer the execution/start timings of the special notification and the in-state notification are, the more advantageous it is to the player. In this way, it is possible to raise awareness of the start of notification during a state by using the advantage of a specific gaming state and the difference in execution timing of special notification, and the degree of freedom in notification mode is increased. Even if the notification is in a state where the target is low, it is possible to greatly change the impression of the notification.

Feature AB4. The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) that have different degrees of advantage for the player,
The special notification means is easy to make the special notification at a first timing when the specific gaming state that is the target of the notification during the state to be started is a predetermined first predetermined state, If the specific game state to be notified during the state to be started is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB3, characterized by having a configuration that facilitates special notification.

According to the above configuration, if the notification timing at which special notification is likely to be executed is different depending on the type of specific gaming state, the type of specific gaming state to which the transition will occur (in which notification will start during the state) can be predicted from the notification timing. , will be added to increase the variety of games.

Feature AB5. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB4, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification based on a predetermined operation of the stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, the special notification can be associated with the operation of each stop operation means until the state notification is performed, and the special notification can The stop operation means can be operated with expectations for what will happen.

In particular, in gaming machines that have added gameplay that utilizes the results of which benefits may differ depending on the stop order of the stop operation modes, players tend to focus only on the order in which each stop operation means is operated. There is a possibility that the original gameplay of the slot machine, such as stopping the symbols by operating each stop operation means, may be neglected. On the other hand, if the special notification is made based on the operation of the stop operation means as described above, it is possible to play passive games such as operating the stop operation means in the instructed order to stop the orbiting body. In addition to this, it is possible to realize active gameplay such as operating the stop operation means to generate special notifications, and by increasing the attention to each operation of each stop operation means, each stop operation It becomes possible to rekindle or maintain the original gameplay of a slot machine, such as stopping the symbols by operating the means.

Feature AB6. The stop operation means is movable from an initial position to an operation position,
The drive control means performs drive control to stop the corresponding orbiting body based on the stop operation means being operated from the initial position to the operation position,
The special notification means causes the predetermined stop operation means to move from the operation position more than when the special notification is made based on the predetermined stop operation means being operated from the initial position to the operation position. The gaming machine according to feature AB5, wherein the content of the specific gaming state is more likely to be advantageous to the player when the special notification is made based on the return to the initial position.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the stop operation means is displaced to the operating position and the corresponding orbiting body is stopped, and the special notification is not performed while the orbiting body is stopped, but after the orbiting body has stopped. It is more advantageous for the player if the special notification is made at In other words, it is more advantageous to check the stop result in conjunction with a special notification after the orbiting object has stopped, than when only the special notification is given before stopping. It is possible to strengthen the impression that there is an advantage due to the appearance of

Feature AB7. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB6, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, in addition to consolidating the configuration, it is possible to increase the attention to special notifications by taking advantage of the high level of interest in status notifications, and to take advantage of the high level of interest in special notifications. It becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the in-state notification, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to both notifications.

Feature AB8. The specific notification means is configured to be able to switch between a light-off state and a light-on state,
The specific game state notification means starts the notification during the state by switching the specific notification device from the light-off state to the light-on state, and starts the notification during the state by switching the specific notification device from the light-on state to the light-off state. This is to end the Chuhochi,
The special notification means is characterized in that, when the in-state notification is started, the special notification is performed by utilizing the timing of switching the specific notification means from the light-off state to the light-on state to perform the special notification. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification means can be realized with a simple configuration of switching between the off state and the on state, and even though it has a simple configuration, special notification by the special notification means such as a difference in timing of switching to the on state can be realized. It becomes possible to enhance the performance effect. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both contradictory effects such as simplifying the configuration and improving the presentation effect.

Feature AB9. In a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (1st BB) including the specific result and the lottery to transition to the specific gaming state is won, a transition card corresponding to the transition result is placed in the valid position. If the symbol combination does not stop and the benefit corresponding to the transition result is not awarded by the benefit granting means, it is possible to make the game that won as a result of the transition the winning game and reserve the win as a result of the transition. comprising a reservation means (a function for executing the process of step S609 by the main controller 101),
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, when the transition symbol combination stops at the valid position, the benefit corresponding to the transition result is awarded by the benefit granting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB8, characterized in that the game is set as the starting game.

According to the above configuration, by withholding the transfer result winning, the number of games for which special notification can be executed increases by the amount that is reserved, and the execution timing of the special notification is diversified. Therefore, through the special notification, it is possible to predict/understand the contents of the specific gaming state that is the target of the in-state notification, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Regarding the "transition result", "If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the valid position, it is advantageous for the player. By limiting the structure of ``transferring to an advantageous state (bonus state)'', it becomes clearer that the result is a so-called jackpot result (bonus) that can be reserved by the reservation means.

Feature AB10. Feature AB9 characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in games between the winning game and the start game in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, since special notification is given in the games between the winning game and the starting game, the delay in the game while the specific result winning is reserved is suppressed. In other words, by making the transfer result winnings reserved, it is possible to prolong the game in which it is decided whether or not the transfer result has been won, thereby maintaining the sense of anticipation. While this can be expected to have the effect of sustaining expectations, the longer the game is put on hold, the more likely it is that the game will be postponed, and the level of attention may decline. In this regard, if the configuration is such that the special notification is executed during the reservation, as in the above configuration, the feeling of delay is less likely to occur, and it is possible to suitably achieve the effect of sustaining the feeling of anticipation due to the reservation.

Feature AB11. The special notification means is capable of executing the special notification based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined notification compatible result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation unit. The gaming machine according to feature AB10.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to generate interest in the lottery results of each game that is on hold. In other words, instead of simply making a special announcement while on hold, if the special announcement is made based on the lottery result of the lottery means that is on hold, each game on hold can be played while waiting for a special announcement or waiting for a transfer result to win. It becomes possible to give meaning to the lottery of each game, rather than making it a game of consumption.

Feature AB12. If the lottery result by the lottery means is a first specific result that does not include the transition result among the specific results (for example, a strong watermelon single hand), the game in which the lottery result is the first specific result is It is considered as the starting game,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a second specific result that includes the transition result among the specific results (for example, a combination of Strong Watermelon + 1st BB), the game in which the transition result winning is established is selected as the starting game. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB9 to AB11.

According to the above configuration, whether the specific result is reserved or not depends on the type of the specific result. In this way, there will be cases in which the execution of special notification and the start of notification in the state are postponed, and cases in which the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification in the state are not postponed. The mode of starting medium notification will be greatly diversified.

Feature AB13. The gaming machine according to feature AB12, characterized in that a common symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position in the game in which the first specific result is won and the game in which the second specific result is won. .

According to the above configuration, it is no longer possible to determine from the stop roll whether or not the execution of the special notification and the start of the state notification will also be suspended. Thereby, even if special notification or state notification is not performed when a common symbol combination is stopped, it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation for the subsequent game.

Feature AB14. The gaming machine according to feature AB13, wherein the common symbol combination can be stopped even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result and the transition lottery is not won.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific result is a win, a common symbol combination is stopped regardless of whether or not there is a win in the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, and the stop result becomes a common one. Therefore, even if the result is the same, there are patterns in which the special notification and in-state notification are performed without being reserved by the reservation means, and patterns in which the special notification and in-state notification are performed after being reserved by the reservation means. In addition, there will be a pattern in which neither special notification nor notification during the state is performed in the first place. In this way, not only the game in which the common symbol combination is stopped, but also in subsequent games, it is possible to make the player play the game while creating a sense of expectation that the special notification or state notification will be performed.

Feature AB15. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB14.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above configuration, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) 9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game, and each of the stop operation means is set in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to issue order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order to the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device. In this case, it is possible to more clearly indicate the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

Feature AB16. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB15, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and before the transition is set is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality using the specific notification means, and to expect the production effect and improvement in interest described in feature AB1.

<Characteristic AC group>
Feature AC1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (a function for executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and,
Based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the state notification, and based on the end of the specific gaming state, A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means;
Equipped with
The specific gaming state notification means is configured to display a specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result in the effective position in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery device is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won. A game in which the benefit corresponding to the specific result can be awarded by the benefit granting means by stopping is set as the starting game, and the game is started at least at a timing before the operation of the next game after the starting game is allowed. This is to start notification during the state by specific notification means,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a restriction means (a function of executing a third section display process by the main control device 101) capable of restricting permission of operations in a game following the starting game.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is awarded by a privilege awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the first result may be a winning result or the second result may be won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the orbiting body. Results such as winning a prize are set, and there are cases where notifications are made regarding these stop operation conditions, creating a gameplay that changes the presence or absence of winning depending on the presence or absence of notification of the conditions, thereby creating a gaming experience in which the degree of advantage varies. Ru.

In this case, when transitioning to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, the specific notification means starts the in-state notification, and when the specific gaming state ends, the in-state notification by the specific notification device also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of the notification from the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the mode notification.

On the other hand, if you do the above, the timing at which the state notification can start will be shortened, resulting in a monotonous start effect with no expected effect at the start, or if the timing is shortened, There may also be concerns that this fact itself may be overlooked. In this regard, since this gaming machine is equipped with a restriction means that can restrict the permissible operations of the next game after the starting game, the permissible operations of the next game are restricted. It is possible to make the user aware that the notification will be made, and if the next game operation is restricted in this way, the period during which the notification can be started will be extended, and the period during which the notification can be started will be extended. The start mode of medium notification will be diversified.

Feature AC2. Comprising a progress processing execution means (a function for executing normal processing by the main control device 101) that performs a game progress processing,
Feature AC1 is characterized in that execution of a specific process (a function of executing a payout control process by the main control device 101) among the progress processes in the starting game is restricted by the restriction by the restriction means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the progress of the starting game is restricted by restricting the execution of a specific process among the progressing processes of the starting game, thereby restricting the permissibility of operations in the game following the starting game. can be done. In this way, while ensuring the independence of each game, the event of transition to a specific gaming state that occurs in the starting game can be reflected in the game following the starting game.

Feature AC3. The gaming machine according to feature AC1 or feature AC2, wherein during a restriction period in which the restriction is performed by the restriction means, operations in the starting game are also restricted.

According to the above configuration, by restricting the operations of the starting game, it is possible to restrict the progress of the starting game, thereby restricting the permissible operations of the game following the starting game. . In this way, while ensuring the independence of each game, the event of transition to a specific gaming state that occurs in the starting game can be reflected in the game following the starting game.

Features AC4. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC3, wherein the specific game state notification means is capable of starting the notification during the state during a restriction period by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, by restricting the operation, it is possible to make the user aware that the in-state notification is to be started, and to suitably confirm the start of the in-state notification.

Feature AC5. comprising a limit period setting means (a function for executing a freeze setting process in the third section display process by the main controller 101) for setting the length of the limit period during which the limit is limited by the limiter;
The restriction period setting means is configured such that a period from the start of the restriction by the restriction means until the start of the in-state notification corresponds to the content of the specific gaming state to be notified of the in-state notification. The gaming machine according to feature AC4, characterized in that the length of the restriction period can be set.

According to the above configuration, the period from when the permissible operation of the game following the starting game is restricted until the start of the state notification is associated with the content of the specific game state, so that the period is not restricted. By raising the degree of attention to the length of the period, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the start of the state notification.

Features AC6. The gaming machine according to feature AC5, wherein control corresponding to a predetermined operation performed by a player is limited by the restriction by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, compared to a configuration in which the progress of unilateral processing on the gaming machine side is restricted by restricting the control corresponding to the operation performed by the player, the player can perform the operation. This makes it difficult to understand when the restrictions start. Therefore, in a configuration where the length of the limited period is important, such as feature AC5, the length is difficult to clearly grasp, and if the start timing of the state notification (length of the period) is Even if the game is unfavorable to the player, it is possible to maintain the feeling of anticipation until the player moves to a specific gaming state.

Features AC7. comprising a limit period setting means (a function for executing a freeze setting process in the third section display process by the main controller 101) for setting the length of the limit period during which the limit is limited by the limiter;
The limit period setting means is configured such that a period from the start of the in-state notification until the end of the restriction by the limiter corresponds to the content of the specific gaming state corresponding to the in-state notification by the specific gaming state notifying device. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC4 to AC6, characterized in that the length of the limit period can be set in a corresponding manner.

According to the above configuration, since the period from when the in-state notification is started until the operation of the next game is permitted corresponds to the content of the specific game state, as a player, first the in-state notification is started. When attention is paid to this, and when the notification is started during the state, attention is paid to the timing at which the operation is permitted, and it becomes possible to create a performance over time or in stages.

Features AC8. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC7, wherein the specific game state notification means is capable of starting the notification during the state in a period different from a period limited by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, the period in which operations are restricted is considered to be a period in which the level of attention is heightened in terms of performance, and if the configuration is configured such that notification during the state can be started even outside of that period, it will affect the game. It becomes possible to evenly improve the level of attention.

Features AC9. comprising a limit period setting means (a function for executing a freeze setting process in the third section display process by the main controller 101) for setting the length of the limit period during which the limit is limited by the limiter;
Features AC1 to 1 are characterized in that the limit period setting means is capable of setting the length of the limit period in accordance with the advantage of the specific gaming state corresponding to the in-state notification by the specific gaming state notification device. The gaming machine described in any one of AC8.

According to the above configuration, a period is secured in which the next game operation is restricted and the state notification can be started, and the length of the secured period (limited period) is It will depend on the degree of advantage. In this way, it becomes possible to further enhance the feeling of excitement, depending on the length of the period during which the feeling of excitement increases, such as whether or not notification is started during the state. For example, if a specific game state is more advantageous as the period during which the state notification can be started is longer, the fun will not only be whether or not the state notification will start, but also that the period will continue for a long time even if it has not started. We can expect a synergistic effect of increasing the level of attention, such as the longer the period that the status notification has not started, the more people will expect that the status notification will start. In addition, if the specific game state is more advantageous as the period during which the state notification can be started is shorter, the period for enjoying whether or not the state notification will start is condensed, and it is possible to provide an intense feeling of excitement. Become.

Features AC10. The limit period setting means is characterized in that the more advantageous the contents of the specific gaming state corresponding to the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means, the easier it is to set the limit period longer. Game machine.

Generally speaking, based on the premise that the longer the performance time is, the more likely it is to be advantageous for the player, as in the above configuration, the longer the restriction period, the more advantageous the content of the specific game state is for the player. This configuration is easy to understand by players, and can provide a well-balanced performance with other performances.

Features AC11. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC10.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above structure, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) (9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game), and each of the stop operation means sets a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to provide the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. In this case, it is possible to more clearly indicate the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

Features AC12. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC11, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and the transition is yet to occur is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality using the specific notification means, and to expect the performance effects and interest improvement described in feature AC1.

<Characteristic AD group>
Feature AD1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (a function for executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and,
Based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the state notification, and based on the end of the specific gaming state, a specific gaming state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means;
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
In a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, a specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result stops at the valid position, thereby generating the specific result. A game in which a privilege corresponding to the above can be given by the privilege granting means is set as a starting game, and at least a state notification is made by the specific notifying means at a timing before allowing operation of a game next to the starting game. is to start,
When the first specific symbol combination stops at the effective position in the starting game, a first means (for example, when the super attack mode is won, the main control (a function of executing a process of starting display of a section display at the time of the first stop OFF operation of a game with a stop result corresponding to a strong cherry in the device 101);
When a second specific symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination stops at the effective position in the starting game, the notification during the state by the specific notification means is set in a second mode different from the first mode. a second means (for example, a function of executing a process of starting the display of the section display at the time of the third stop OFF operation of the game with a stop result corresponding to a weak cherry in the main control device 101 when the super attack mode is won) )and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is awarded by a privilege awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the first result may be a winning result or the second result may be won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the orbiting body. Results such as winning a prize are set, and there are cases where notifications are made regarding these stop operation conditions, creating a gameplay that changes the presence or absence of winning depending on the presence or absence of notification of the conditions, thereby creating a gaming experience in which the degree of advantage varies. Ru.

In this case, when transitioning to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, the specific notification means starts the in-state notification, and when the specific gaming state ends, the in-state notification by the specific notification device also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of the notification from the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the mode notification.

On the other hand, if the start of the in-state notification is limited as described above, the manner in which the in-state notification starts may be simplified. However, there is a limit to diversifying the start mode of state notification. In this regard, this gaming machine is configured to vary the start mode of the state notification depending on the stop roll in the starting game, that is, the type of specific result and the winning mode when the specific result is won. This makes it possible to start the in-state notification in relation to the stop roll of each orbiting body, and it is possible to greatly enhance the performance effect of the in-state notification without requiring a change in the configuration of the specific notification means.

Feature AD2. The identification results include a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) and a second identification result (for example, weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the first specific symbol combination (triple cherry) stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is granted;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the second specific symbol combination (single cherry) stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the second specific result is granted. The gaming machine according to feature AD1.

According to the above configuration, since the stop result differs depending on the type of specific result, in the gaming machine of feature AD1, the start mode of the in-state notification differs depending on the type of specific result. By doing so, it is possible to add the fun of predicting the subsequent development while grasping the trigger for winning the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Feature AD3. A third specific result (for example, strong cherry) is included as the specific result,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the third specific result, the first specific symbol combination stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the third specific result is awarded; and The gaming machine according to feature AD1 or feature AD2, wherein a benefit corresponding to the third specific result is given when the second specific symbol combination stops.

According to the above configuration, even if the third specific result is the same, there are two cases: the first specific symbol combination stops and a winning is established, and the second specific symbol combination stops and a winning occurs. , the start mode of the state notification is different. By doing this, it is possible to particularly intensify the interest in the stopping result.

Feature AD4. A fourth specific result (for example, strong watermelon) is included as the specific result,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth specific result, the first specific symbol combination stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the fourth specific result is awarded; and The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD3, wherein the bonus corresponding to the fourth specific result is not awarded when the second specific symbol combination stops.

According to the above configuration, in the case of the fourth specific result, the first specific symbol combination stops and a winning is established, and the second specific symbol combination stops and a winning is not established, resulting in a so-called missed prize. The start mode of the state notification differs depending on the case. By doing this, it is possible to particularly intensify the interest in the stopping result.

Feature AD5. The first means is performed before the specific orbiting body stops at a specific position (second for strong cherry and weak cherry) among the orbiting bodies (for example, if the super attack mode is won with a strong cherry, the first means stops). During the stop OFF operation), it is possible to start the notification during the state according to the first aspect,
The second means is capable of starting the in-state notification according to the second aspect after the specific orbiting body stops (for example, when the super attack mode is won with a weak cherry, at the time of the 3-stop OFF operation). The gaming machine according to any one of features AD2 to AD4.

According to the above configuration, the game result that triggers the in-state notification will differ depending on whether the in-state notification starts before or after the predetermined orbiting body stops. In other words, in a game where the orbiting body is stopped by operating each stop operation means, if the in-state notification is started based on the first identification result, the in-state notification is started before the specific operation, and the in-state notification is started before the specific operation. 2. When in-state notification is started based on the specified result, in-state notification is started after the specific operation. By doing this, for example, if it is not possible to determine whether the result of the current game is the first specific result winning or the second specific result winning before the specific operation, Even if the state notification has not started at that time, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of hoping that he has won the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state. In addition, if it is possible to determine that the result of the current game is the first specific result of winning, the game will proceed while hoping that the status notification will start by the specific operation. If it is possible to do so, and if it is determined that the result of this game is the second specific result winning, proceed with the game while hoping that the state notification will start at the specific operation transition. It is thought that it is. Furthermore, even in a situation where it can be determined that the third specific result has been won or the fourth specific result has been won, whether the state notification will start before the specific operation or after that. differs depending on the stop result, and the game progresses while predicting the start timing of the state notification based on the relationship (commonality, difference) of the stop result between the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination. In either case, the period during which the player is interested in whether or not the notification will start is concentrated, and it becomes possible to add tone to the game.

Feature AD6. The first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination may have common symbols that stop at the effective position up to the specific number (for example, the left reel of strong cherry and weak cherry). The gaming machine according to feature AD5.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to determine whether the first specific result is won or the second specific result is won up to the specific number from the stopped roll, and in the fourth specific result, there is no omission up to the specific number. Therefore, even if state notification has not started by the time a specific orbiting object is stopped, when you perform the stop operation of the orbiting object after the specific number, you will have won the lottery to enter a specific gaming state. You can play games while connecting your wishes.

Feature AD7. The gaming machine according to feature AD5 or feature AD6, wherein the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination have different symbols that stop at the effective position in the specific revolving body.

According to the above configuration, by stopping the specific orbiting body, it becomes possible to determine whether the first specific result is won or the second specific result is won, the winning mode of the third specific result is determined, and the fourth specific result is determined. It becomes possible to determine whether or not a prize has been won. Therefore, especially in a situation where state notification has not started before then, stopping the specific orbiting body is a good idea, for example, when the first specific result or the fourth specific result is won, the transition to the specific gaming state is triggered. This is the turning point that determines whether the possibility of winning the lottery is eliminated or not. Therefore, the operation of stopping the specific orbiting body becomes more interesting, and the interest is improved.

Features AD8. The identification results include a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) and a second identification result (for example, weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the first specific symbol combination (triple cherry) stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is granted;
If the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the second specific symbol combination (single cherry) stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the second specific result is granted;
In the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, if the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the lottery to transition to the specific gaming state is won with a first probability, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD7, wherein if the result is a specific result, the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won with a second probability.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition lottery differs depending on the type of specific result, so there are cases where the stop rolls stop resulting in a winning result that makes it easy to win the transition lottery, and cases where the stop roll stops resulting in a prize winning as a result of being unlikely to win the transition lottery. The possibility that in-state notification will start in the starting game differs depending on the case where the rolled numbers stop. In this way, whether the in-state notification is started in the first mode and the case in which the in-state notification is started in the second mode can be determined based on the stop roll, including the ease with which it will be started. This makes it possible to further increase interest in the stopping results.

Features AD9. The identification results include a first identification result (for example, strong cherry) and a second identification result (for example, weak cherry),
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is granted by stopping the first specific symbol combination (triple cherry) at the valid position;
If the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the second specific symbol combination (single cherry) stops at the valid position, and a benefit corresponding to the second specific result is granted;
Features AD1 to 8 are characterized in that the content of the specific gaming state may be different between the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means based on the first specific result and the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of AD8.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific symbol combination stops and the in-state notification is started in the first mode, and when the second specific symbol combination stops and the in-state notification starts in the second mode. The contents of the specific gaming state when the game is started are different depending on when the game is started. Therefore, the joy will be different when the first specific symbol combination stops and when the second specific symbol combination stops, and it is possible to further increase interest in the stopped result.

Features AD10. The specified results include a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and a replay result in which the next game can be played again without requiring new game media,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result, when the first specific symbol combination stops at the valid position, the predetermined number of game media are paid out as a benefit corresponding to the first specific result. I,
If the lottery result of the lottery means is the re-gaming result, the second specific symbol combination stops at the valid position and the re-gaming becomes possible as a benefit corresponding to the re-gaming result;
In the first aspect, when the specific result is the payout result, the first means provides notification during the state before allowing a reception operation (bet operation) to accept game media in a game following the starting game. start,
When the specific result is the replay result, the second means starts the notification during the state before allowing a starting operation of the starting operation means in a game following the starting game. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD9.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first specific symbol combination is stopped if it is a payout result, and the second specific symbol combination is stopped if it is a replay result, the in-state notification is started depending on which symbol combination is stopped. The end of the timing is different. More specifically, when transitioning to a specific gaming state based on the payout result, the first specific symbol combination stops in the starting game, and the state notification is issued until the next game's game media acceptance operation is permitted. When the game starts and moves to a specific game state based on the replay result, the second specific symbol combination stops in the start game, and the state notification is made until the start operation of the start operation means for the next game is permitted. is started. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the variations in the final stage until the state notification is started. Moreover, by associating the final variation with the stop roll, when a game hall manager or the like wants to check which result triggered the state notification, for example, if the first specific symbol combination is stopped. In such a case, if the in-state notification is started after the reception operation, etc., the start timing of the in-state notification and the starting game will be changed, such as confirming that the current game is the starting game rather than the previous game. It becomes possible to check from the stop result.

Feature AD11. The starting operation means is configured such that the starting operation is permitted when the accepting operation is performed on a predetermined accepting means (for example, the first credit input switch 56),
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-gaming result and the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the valid position, the second specific symbol combination is a position that is visible through the display unit and is different from the valid position. A pattern of each of the orbiting bodies is attached so that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result, means for enabling the replay by performing the reception operation on the reception means in the next game (when the main controller 101 operates The gaming machine according to feature AD10, further comprising a function of executing a process of setting a bet flag.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific symbol combination stops at the valid position and the replay results in a winning, the first specific symbol combination stops at a specific position different from the valid position. Therefore, visually, it is difficult to judge whether a winning result is achieved as a result of replaying or a winning result is achieved as a result of payout. Moreover, in the next game in which a replay winning is achieved, it is possible to replay the next game by performing a reception operation on a predetermined reception means, so it is difficult to determine whether new game media is required. Although there are differences, the operations performed by the player in the next game are the same for the payout results and the replay results. By doing this, in a configuration where the start timing of the in-state notification is different depending on the payout result and the re-gaming result, the player can tell which result will cause the in-state notification to start or whether it has started. can be made difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy the excitement of knowing when the status notification will start.

Features AD12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result winning, a first stopping means for stopping the first specific symbol combination (for example, when a winning combination of a strong watermelon and a bonus is won, the main control device 101 a second stopping means for stopping the second specific symbol combination (for example, when winning a winning combination of a strong watermelon and a bonus, the main controller The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of stopping the stop number that results in a watermelon prize in step 101.

According to the above configuration, even if the identification results are the same, there are cases where the first specific pattern combination stops and cases where the second specific pattern combination stops. Therefore, even if the specified result is the same, there are cases where the state notification is started in the first mode and cases where the state notification is started in the second mode, and even if the lottery results are the same. , it is possible to expect an effect of increasing attention through different stop results and different notification modes, within the range of not complicating the lottery results.

Note that the above configuration is a specific configuration of feature AD5.

Features AD13. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD12.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above structure, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) (9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game), and each of the stop operation means sets a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to provide the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

Feature AD14. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD13, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and before the transition is set is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality using the specific notification means, and to expect the production effect and improvement in interest described in feature AD1.

<Characteristic AE group>
Feature AE1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
The lottery is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the lottery has the same winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting device, and the lottery results in the lottery to the specific gaming state. A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery (a function for executing the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101);
At least by a predetermined specific timing in a specific game in which the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start a state notification, and A specific game state notification means that terminates the notification during the state by turning off the light of the specific notification means based on the end of the game state (section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main controller 101) function) and
Equipped with
The specific game state notification means is
If the first specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specific results wins the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state, the specific timing is the first specific timing (timing at which a bet operation is allowed). Start notification during the state,
If a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won based on a second specific result (for example, winning replay) that is different from the first specific result among the specific results, the specific timing may be from the first specific timing. A game machine characterized in that the notification during the state is started by a second specific timing that is later than the second specific timing.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is awarded by a privilege awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the first result may be a winning result or the second result may be won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the orbiting body. Results such as winning a prize are set, and there are cases where notifications are made regarding these stop operation conditions, creating a gameplay that changes the presence or absence of winning depending on the presence or absence of notification of the conditions, thereby creating a gaming experience in which the degree of advantage varies. Ru.

In this case, when transitioning to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, the specific notification means starts the in-state notification, and when the specific gaming state ends, the in-state notification by the specific notification device also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of the notification from the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the mode notification.

Here, the in-state notification is such that the notification is started at least by a specific timing in a specific gaming state that transitions to a specific gaming state, and the end of the notification start is determined, but if the end of the notification is exceeded, the in-state notification is There is a risk that the expectations for the game will suddenly fade, and the attention level of the game that can be in a specific game state will decrease. On that point, in the above configuration, by making the end period of the notification during the state different depending on the game result that triggered the winning of the transition lottery to a specific gaming state, even if one end period is exceeded, the end period of the notification during the state is changed. It is possible to continue playing the game while maintaining a sense of anticipation for the notification. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature AE2. The lottery results by the lottery means include a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and a replay result in which the next game can be played again without requiring new game media,
The first specific result is the payout result,
The gaming machine according to feature AE1, wherein the second specific result is the replay result.

According to the above configuration, the start and end time of the state notification by the specific game state notification means differs depending on whether it is a payout result or a replay result. In this way, by using a configuration that uses the conventional payout results and replay results to vary the start and end times of state notification, there is no need to set special game results, and with a relatively simple configuration, It becomes possible to achieve the effect of feature AE1.

Feature AE3. The specific game state notification means is
If the specific result is the payout result, start notification during the state by setting the first specific timing as the timing at which a reception operation (bet operation) for accepting game media is permitted in the specific game;
When the specific result is the replay result, the notification during the state is started by setting the second specific timing to the timing at which the starting operation of the starting operation means is permitted in the specific game, as described in feature AE2. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the player's operation is allowed is set as the end of each period, and if it is a payout result, the reception operation is allowed, and if it is the replay result, the start operation is allowed. It's the timing. In this way, by setting the timing at which the player's operation is permitted as the final stage, it becomes possible to actively advance the game instead of waiting until the notification starts. In addition, in general, re-gaming results allow starting operations without requiring reception operations, but the end period is set along with the operation mode according to each gaming result, which leads to a complicated configuration. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects without any problems.

Feature AE4. The starting operation means is configured such that the starting operation is permitted when the accepting operation is performed on a predetermined accepting means (for example, the first credit input switch 56),
The benefit granting means is configured to provide the predetermined prize as the benefit when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result and a first specific symbol combination corresponding to the first specific result is stopped at the valid position. It is configured to pay out a number of game media,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-gaming result and a second specific symbol combination different from the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the valid position, a position that can be visually recognized via the display unit; and the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies is attached so that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result, means for making the replay possible by performing the reception operation on the reception means in the specific game (the main controller 101 does not accept bets at the time of operation) The gaming machine according to feature AE3, further comprising a function of executing a process of setting a flag.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific symbol combination stops at the valid position and the replay results in a winning, the first specific symbol combination stops at a specific position different from the valid position. Therefore, visually, it is difficult to judge whether a winning result is achieved as a result of replaying or a winning result is achieved as a result of payout. Moreover, in the next game in which a replay winning is achieved, it is possible to replay the next game by performing a reception operation on a predetermined reception means, so it is difficult to determine whether new game media is required. Although there are differences, the operations performed by the player in the next game are the same for the payout results and the replay results. By doing this, in a configuration where the start timing of the in-state notification is different depending on the payout result and the re-gaming result, the player can tell which result will cause the in-state notification to start or whether it has started. can be made difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy the excitement of knowing when the status notification will start.

Feature AE5. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to an advantageous one for the player. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a first reservation means (in step S609 by the main controller 101) that reserves the transfer result winning until the transfer symbol combination stops at the valid position. functions) and
Equipped with
The identification result includes a third identification result of the replay result and the transfer result,
When moving to the specific gaming state based on the duplication result, the specific gaming state notification means has a second reservation function that suspends the start of notification during the state until the symbol combination for the transition stops at the valid position. The gaming machine according to any one of features AE2 to AE4, further comprising a means for executing the first section display process and the fourth section display process by the main control device 101.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result includes a transition result (so-called jackpot result) that becomes an opportunity to transition to an advantageous state, and also includes a result in which the replay result and the transition result overlap. In the case of duplicate results, the transfer result winning is reserved until the transfer result winning is established out of the re-gaming result and the transfer result. In such a configuration, when transitioning to a specific gaming state based on duplicate results, the specific game that is the game that transitions to the specific gaming state is reserved until a game in which a winning result is achieved as a result of the transition. By doing this, it is possible to strengthen the impression that you have won the transfer lottery to a specific game based on the transfer result winning among the duplicate results, and it is consistent with the reservation of transfer result winnings. It is possible to guarantee gender.

Feature AE6. The specific gaming state notification means is configured to, when winning a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state triggered by a third specific result of the specific results, to notify the in-state notification by the first specific timing as the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature AE5.

According to the above configuration, when the specific game itself is also reserved as a result of the transition result winning being reserved, the start and end of the state notification in the specific game matches that of the payout result. In this way, in the configuration (feature AE2) in which the start and end times of the state notification are different between the payout result and the replay result, by determining the start and end time for the third specific result that is a duplicate win for the replay result and the transfer result. Even if a re-game is not awarded based on a winning transition result, it is possible to prevent discrepancies between different game operations depending on the game result and the start and end period.

Feature AE7. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AE1 to AE6.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above configuration, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) 9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game, and each of the stop operation means is set in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to issue order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order to the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device. In this case, it is possible to more clearly indicate the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

Features AE8. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features AE1 to AE7, wherein the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting device. .

According to the above configuration, there is no difference in winning probability depending on the setting value regarding a specific gaming state, so no matter which of the multiple gaming machines installed in the gaming hall is selected, the equality of games regarding the specific gaming state is guaranteed. Guaranteed. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by specific notification means, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

Features AE9. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features AE1 to AE8, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and before the transition is set is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality using the specific notification means, and also to expect the production effect and improvement in interest described in feature AE1.

<Characteristic BA group>
Feature BA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (a function for executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to an advantageous one for the player. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (main control function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
In a situation where the gaming state is the specific gaming state and the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (for example, special replay 1, 2). In the case of A function that controls the replay winnings to be established visually),
In a situation where the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result (for example, special replay), the valid A second control means (in the main control device 101, for example, a black BAR non-control unit) executes stop control of each of the orbiting bodies so that a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at a position. (a function that controls so that a replay prize is established when a stop roll results in a stop result);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, the winning as a result of the transition is reserved. In such a configuration, there is also a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the manner in which the orbiting body is stopped, and the degree of advantage varies depending on whether or not there is notification of the manner in which the stopping operation is performed. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery to shift to a specific gaming state can be performed, so a chain of advantageous states and specific gaming states can occur in each game, and the gameplay is significantly improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is performed in a state where the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for transition may be performed. There is a possibility that an act may be performed in which a transition to an advantageous state is made difficult to occur and a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is generated without limit. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the transfer symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and from the perspective of the fairness of the game. This is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, when the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, the intended payout rate can be achieved, and the fairness of the game can be improved. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve winnings as a result of transition, if the transition to an advantageous state is internally determined and the game is played while hinting at this through production, etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to an advantageous state. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. However, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state will not be held, so although expectations for an advantageous state may be improved, from the perspective of expectations for a specific gaming state Then, it can be said that the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means is not desirable for the player.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop roll at the time of special result winning is made to differ depending on whether or not the transfer lottery to a specific gaming state is won. There is. Specifically, if the player is in a specific gaming state and the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop roll at the time of winning the special result is set to the first specific symbol combination, and the normal gaming state is, In addition, if the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop roll at the time of special result winning is set to the second specific symbol combination. By doing this, even in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition lottery to a specific gaming state is restricted, if the first specific symbol combination appears, the transition result winning is reserved and the transition to the specific gaming state is restricted. It is recognized that the player has won the transition lottery, and it becomes possible to have the player play the game while maintaining the sense of expectation for the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature BA2. In a situation where the gaming state is the specific gaming state and the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, special means (for example, , a function of executing the notification lottery process 1 in the display control device 81, and a lottery table for special RT states with different special replay winning probabilities).

According to the above configuration, in a specific game state, the frequency at which the first specific symbol combination stops can be changed by the special means. However, the fact that the player is in the specific gaming state is not completely denied, and the expectation for the specific gaming state can be maintained. In other words, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, a game is added in which it is predicted whether or not it is a specific game state from the stop frequency of the first specific symbol combination. Interest can be suitably improved.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, for example, "If the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first control means executes a specific control that enables the first specific symbol combination to be stopped." means for determining whether or not to win (a function for executing notification lottery process 1 in the display control device 81), or means for changing the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result (a function that changes the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result) A lottery table for different special RT states) may be provided.

Feature BA3. The gaming machine according to feature BA2, wherein the special means is capable of varying the frequency at which the first specific symbol combination stops depending on the content of the specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, a game is added in which the content of the specific game state is predicted based on the stop frequency of the first specific symbol combination. In this way, if it is possible to predict not only whether or not a specific gaming state is in place but also its content based on the stop result, the gameplay during reservation will be greatly improved.

Feature BA4. The first specific pattern combination includes a first type specific pattern combination (for example, black BAR single set) and a second type specific pattern combination different from the first type specific pattern combination (for example, black BAR tenpai off). ) and are set,
The special means is characterized in that it is possible to vary the stop frequency of the first type specific symbol combination and the second type specific symbol combination depending on the content of the specific gaming state. A gaming machine described in BA3.

According to the above configuration, the content of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether the first type specific symbol combination or the second type specific symbol combination among the first specific symbol combinations stops. , it becomes possible to further increase interest in the stopping result.

Feature BA5. The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) that have different degrees of advantage for the player,
The special means performs the special notification so that the first type specific symbol combination is more likely to stop when the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state, and when the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state. The gaming machine according to feature BA4, characterized in that, when the second type is in a different second predetermined state, the second type specific symbol combination is more likely to stop.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature BA4 with a specific configuration.

Feature BA6. The special means changes the execution frequency of a special notification (black BAR push notification performance) that allows stopping the first specific symbol combination when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA2 to BA5, characterized in that the frequency of stopping the first specific symbol combination is changed.

According to the above configuration, in order to adjust the stop frequency of the first specific symbol combination depending on the presence or absence of the notification, the configuration is such that the suggestion, teaching, etc. that the mode is before transition is performed as an effect, and the gameplay is enhanced by such suggestion, teaching, etc. can be realized with a relatively easy configuration.

Feature BA7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when each of the orbiting objects is stopped in a first specific stop order, the first control means controls to stop the first specific symbol combination. and when each of the orbiting bodies is stopped in a second specific stopping order different from the first specific stopping order, the second controlling means performs a control that enables the second specific symbol combination to be stopped. I,
The gaming machine according to feature BA6, wherein the special means provides notification regarding the first specific stopping order as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, depending on the stopping order at the time of winning the special result, whether the first specific symbol combination or the second specific symbol combination stops is different, and the special means is configured as a special notification. , by notifying the first specific stopping order corresponding to the first specific symbol combination, the stopping frequency of the first specific symbol combination is made different, so that the stopping operation mode including the stopping order can be changed. The affinity with the specific gaming state in which the advantage level changes based on this increases, and it becomes easier for the player to understand that the special notification is a suggestion of the specific gaming state (pre-transition mode).

Feature BA8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when a specific orbiting body in each of the orbiting bodies is stopped at a first timing, the specific symbols constituting the first specific symbol combination are stopped at the valid position. If the specific rotating object is stopped at a second timing different from the first timing, the specific symbol cannot be stopped at the effective position,
The gaming machine according to feature BA6 or feature BA7, wherein the special means is capable of notifying, as the special notification, that the specific orbiting body will be stopped at the first timing.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to stop the first specific symbol combination by pressing the specific rotating object, so that the original gameplay of the slot machine can be specified by aiming at the symbol and performing the stopping operation to obtain a bonus. The structure incorporates the presentation of suggestions and teachings about the game state. In this way, it is possible to make the player feel as if he or she has won the specific game state by his or her own stop operation, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game (stop operation).

Feature BA9. The benefit granting means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the first specific symbol combination stops at the valid position, a special benefit (replay) is granted as a benefit corresponding to the special result;
In any one of features BA6 to BA8, the special benefit is granted when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the second specific symbol combination stops at the valid position. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when winning a special result, the stop roll may differ depending on the stop order and stop timing, but the benefits obtained are the same no matter which stop result (stop order, stop timing). becomes. By doing so, in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, it is possible to ensure consistency with the restriction on the execution of the lottery by the transfer lottery means. In other words, the advantage at the time of winning a specific result does not change due to the special announcement, so even if you intentionally delay winning the transition result in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the benefit based on the specific result will not be unfairly It will not be enjoyed.

Feature BA10. a first control means (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the mode notification means;
a second control means (display control device 81) having at least the special means;
has
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result or the second result, the manner notification is performed by the aspect notification means in the first control means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special notification by the special means in the second control means is performed, while the aspect notification by the aspect notification means in the first control means is not performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA6 to BA9.

According to the above configuration, especially in the feature BA9 that quotes the feature BA7, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first result and the second result, which have different winning results, when notifying the stop order of the special results. In other words, by consolidating the lottery means and mode notification means that are related to the player's profits into the first control means, it becomes easier to take measures to appropriately avoid fraudulent acts, and functions that mainly perform effects that are not related to the player's profits. The functions are concentrated in the second control means to decentralize the functions. In such a configuration, if the special notification by the special means is a function of the second control means, it will be made clear that the change in the stop result based on the special result is not directly related to profit, For example, when changing the design of the special means, this can be done without the need to calculate a new ball payout rate. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize excellent gaming performance using special means with a relatively easy configuration.

Feature BA11. Notification is started by lighting a specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the notification is started based on the end of the specific gaming state. Equipped with a specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main controller 101) that ends the notification by turning off the specific notification means,
As the specific result, a duplicate result including the transition result (for example, 1 strong cherry duplicate, 1 strong watermelon duplicate, 1 chance A duplicate) is set,
The specific gaming state notification means is configured to change the state to the advantageous state by stopping the symbol combination for transition when the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result and a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won. The game to be transferred is set as the starting game, the notification by the specific notification means is not started at a timing before the starting game, and the specific notification is performed at a timing before the operation of the game next to the starting game is allowed. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA10, characterized in that the game machine starts notification by the notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the game moves to a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state notification means starts reporting, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of notification by the specific gaming state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who ends a game immediately and a player who takes a seat at the game machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game based on order notification to the fullest.

Furthermore, if the transition to a specific gaming state is based on winning a duplicate result that includes the transition result, the specific gaming state notification means does not start reporting until the starting game in which the symbol combination for transition stops and the transition to an advantageous state occurs. is limited. In other words, as mentioned above, in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means while eliminating the feeling of inequality among players regarding a specific gaming state, the notification regarding the specific gaming state is also limited, and the special result is It is possible to prevent the joy of the appearance of the first specific symbol combination at the time of winning (the joy of knowing that you have won the lottery for transition to a specific game state) from being reduced. Therefore, while ensuring equality among players by the specific game state notification means, it is possible to suitably improve the gameplay in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means.

Feature BA12. As the specific result, a non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, chance A) that does not include the transition result is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, the specific gaming state notification means sets the game that won the specific result as the starting game, and The gaming machine according to feature BA11, characterized in that the notification by the specific notification means is started at a timing before the operation of the next game is permitted.

According to the above configuration, the case where the start of notification by the specific gaming state notification means is limited to the case where there is a duplicate winning with the transition result, and the game cannot be ended even though the transition has been made to the specific gaming state. This makes it possible to reduce as much as possible the occurrence of such incidents. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the function of ensuring equality among players by providing the specific game state notification means.

Feature BA13. As the duplication result, a first duplication result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a first specific result (for example, strong cherry) of the specific results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a first non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry) that is a non-overlapping result of the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) among the specific results is set;
The benefit granting means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first duplicate result, based on the fact that the symbol combination for the first specific result has stopped at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is granted based on the fact that the symbol combination for the first specific result has stopped at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature BA12.

According to the above configuration, the game in which the first overlapping result is a winning combination of the first specific result and the transition result, and the game in which the first non-overlapping result is a single winning in the first specific result, In both cases, the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped and it becomes possible to establish a first specific result winning, so whether the winning result is the first duplicate result or the first non-duplicate result is stopped. It becomes difficult to judge from the appearance. On the other hand, the notification by the specific game state notification means is such that if the first duplicate result is the first overlap result, the game in which the transition result winning is established is the starting game, and if the first non-overlapping result is the first specific result winning is the game in which the first specific result winning is established. This is the starting game. Therefore, even if a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is won based on any result, an event may occur in which whether or not the notification by the specific gaming state notification means starts (start timing) differs. In other words, even if the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started before the operation of the next game is permitted, the first specific result It is possible to maintain the possibility that the symbol combination for the result is based on the first specific result in the first duplicate result, and even if you have not won the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, the feeling of anticipation is maintained. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the lottery for transitioning to the specific gaming state has been won based on the stop roll at the time of winning the special result, so it is possible to arouse great interest in the subsequent stop roll. .

Feature BA14. As the duplication result, a second duplication result (for example, strong watermelon duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a second specified result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specified results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon) that is a non-overlapping result of the second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second duplicate result, based on the fact that the symbol combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the second specific result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a benefit corresponding to the second specific result is granted based on the fact that the symbol combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position. It is a thing,
The gaming machine according to feature BA13, wherein the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first specific result and the lottery based on the second specific result.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is also taken into consideration in the gameplay of feature BA13. That is, for example, if the configuration is such that the first specific result is easier to win the transfer lottery than the second specific result, the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped, and the specific game state notification means starts reporting. If the symbol combination for the second specific result has stopped and notification by the specific gaming state notification means has not started, there is a higher possibility that the specific gaming state has been won, and the first The sense of expectation for the appearance of a specific pattern combination is further increased. On the other hand, when the symbol combination for the second specific result has stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the effect of surprise when the first specific symbol combination appears thereafter is enhanced. . As described above, by taking into consideration the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means and enjoying the stop rolls, the gameplay of predicting whether or not a specific game state will be won from the stop rolls during reservation is greatly improved. .

Feature BA15. As the duplication result, a third duplication result (for example, chance A duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a third specific result (for example, chance A) of the specific results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (for example, chance A) that is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (for example, chance A) among the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the third duplicate result, based on the fact that the symbol combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the third specific result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a benefit corresponding to the third specific result is granted based on the fact that the symbol combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position. It is a thing,
In the lottery by the lottery means, the ratio of the overlapping result to the non-overlapping result is the ratio of the first overlapping result to the first non-overlapping result, and the third overlapping result to the third non-overlapping result. The gaming machine according to feature BA13 or feature BA14, characterized in that the ratio is different.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is also taken into account in the gameplay of feature BA13 and feature BA14. In other words, for example, a configuration in which the ratio of the first duplicate result to the first non-duplicate result is higher than the ratio of the third duplicate result to the third non-duplicate result is that the result is a duplicate result of the migration result (same stop If the result is a configuration in which there is a high possibility of winning as a result of the transition), the symbol combination for the first specific result has stopped, and if the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the third specific result There is a higher possibility that the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means than when the pattern combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of feature BA14, if there is a non-overlapping result and a specific gaming state, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started for that game, so as described above, the notification for the first specific result is If the symbol combination has stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the possibility of winning the specific game state is higher than in the case of the symbol combination for the third specific result. As described above, by taking into consideration the probability of winning as a result of the transition and entertaining the stopped rolls, the gameplay of predicting whether or not a specific game state will be won from the stopped rolls during reservation is greatly improved.

Feature BA16. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA15, wherein the special result is a result that does not trigger a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state by the transition lottery means.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transfer lottery to a specific gaming state is restricted, the result is different from the result that is subject to the restriction of the transfer lottery to the specific gaming state. , the system is configured to notify whether or not the player has won the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state (whether or not the game is in the pre-transition mode) based on a stopped roll. Therefore, the player can genuinely enjoy the stop result without feeling a sense of loss due to the result being subject to restrictions.

Feature BA17. In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result win is higher than in a situation where the transfer result win is not reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA16.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of a special result is high during reservation, it is easy to play a game where you can enjoy seeing whether the first specific symbol combination or the second specific symbol combination stops. I can do it.

Feature BA18. The bonus granting means is configured to re-play the lottery as a bonus corresponding to the special result based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery unit is the special result and the symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature BA17, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by giving out a number of game media equal to or less than the number of bets for the game in which the special result is won.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which a specific game state is inferred based on the number of stopped results without increasing the advantage too much during reservation. In other words, for example, if the configuration is such that an increase in gaming media can be expected due to benefits when winning a special result, players will be able to enjoy profits from winning a special result, and they will want to win a special result in hopes of an increase in gaming media. This can become a barrier to the pure enjoyment of the game.

Feature BA19. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA18.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above structure, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) (9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game), and each of the stop operation means sets a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to provide the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. In this case, it is possible to more clearly indicate the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

Feature BA20. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA19, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and before the transition is set is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it becomes possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of increasing expectations for the specific gaming state described in feature BA1.

<Feature BB group>
Features BB1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As the lottery result by the said lottery means,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. If the operation is performed in a second stop operation mode different from the first mode, the symbol combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result, and a second mode different from the symbol combination of the first mode. A first operation mode result that allows the pattern combination to be stopped (for example, a push order bell);
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode. When an operation is performed in a fourth stop operation mode different from the above-mentioned mode, a picture combination corresponding to the third result and a fourth mode different from the picture combination of the third mode can be stopped. The second operation mode result (for example, special replay) is set,
A first aspect regarding an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode, or the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means. It is equipped with a first mode notification means (a function of executing a process for press order notification by the display control device 81) that can execute notification (press order notification effect) with the first notification means (auxiliary display unit 65),
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a lottery to transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery device is a predetermined specific result; ,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to an advantageous one for the player. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (main control function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the first mode notification is performed by the first mode notification means based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second operation mode result. possible special notification means (a function for executing special RT notification processing by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, the winning as a result of the transition is reserved. In such a configuration, a specific game state is further provided in which the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the degree of advantage varies depending on whether or not the first mode notification regarding the stop operation mode is provided. There is. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery to shift to a specific gaming state can be performed, so a chain of advantageous states and specific gaming states can occur in each game, and the gameplay is significantly improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is performed in a state where the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for transition may be performed. There is a possibility that an act may be performed in which a transition to an advantageous state is made difficult to occur and a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is generated without limit. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the transfer symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and from the perspective of the fairness of the game. This is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, when the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, the intended payout rate can be achieved, and the fairness of the game can be improved. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve winnings as a result of transition, if the transition to an advantageous state is internally determined and the game is played while hinting at this through production, etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to an advantageous state. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. However, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery to transition to a specific gaming state will not be held, so if the configuration is such that it is obvious that the transition lottery will not be held, it is difficult for the player to do so. is not desirable.

In this regard, in the above configuration, even in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transfer lottery to a specific gaming state is restricted, the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result is executed. . Similar to the first operation mode result, the second operation mode result is set so that, although the stop result differs depending on the stop operation mode, the winning result depending on the stop result is set as the same. In other words, if it is the result of the second operation mode, the player's advantage level will not change even if the first mode is notified. Therefore, in a situation where the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is restricted as described above, if the configuration is such that the first mode notification is performed based on the result of the second operation mode, the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. It becomes possible to execute the first mode of notification to the extent that it does not violate the purpose of restricting the transition lottery to a specific gaming state, and the execution of the first mode notification makes it difficult to understand the situation where the transition lottery is restricted. be able to. Therefore, while ensuring the fairness of the game, it is possible to improve the gameplay during reservation.

Features BB2. The first mode notification means does not perform the first mode notification even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to feature BB1.

According to the above configuration, the case where the first mode notification is executed in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means means that the second operation mode result is the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result. Limited to certain cases. As mentioned above, the results of the first operation mode and the results of the second operation mode are such that the winning result of the first operation mode may differ depending on the stop operation mode, while the result of the second operation mode may differ depending on the stop operation mode. The same result will be awarded regardless. By doing this, in a situation where the transition result winnings are reserved, while ensuring the significance of restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, the first aspect in the situation where the transition result is reserved. Notification becomes executable.

Features BB3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result, the first notification means provides a second mode notification regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. A second mode notification means (a function of executing the push order processing by the main controller 101) that can be executed by a different second notification means (first display segment N1 to seventh display segment N7 on the instruction monitor 68). The gaming machine according to feature BB1 or feature BB2.

According to the above configuration, the first mode notification means executes the first mode notification for both the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, while the second mode notification means executes the first mode notification for both the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result. Execute two-mode notification. As mentioned above, between the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, the winning result of the first operation mode result may differ depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result may differ depending on the stop operation mode. The same result will be awarded regardless. In other words, between the first mode of notification and the second mode of notification, the second mode of notification causes a change in the player's profit, and the first mode of notification includes one that does not cause a change in the same profit. In this case, for example, a game hall manager or the like can monitor the relationship between the stop operation mode and the winning result by monitoring the second mode notification by the second notification means. In this way, by entrusting the notification associated with the player's profit to the second mode notification, it becomes possible to use the first mode notification as a notification for performance, and it is also possible to make the first mode notification a notification related to the profit, or a notification related to the profit. The degree of freedom in notifications is greatly increased, such as by making notifications that do not apply.

Features BB4. a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the second mode notification means;
a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the first mode notification means;
The gaming machine according to feature BB3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above structure, since the lottery means and second mode notification means directly connected to the player's profit and the first mode notification means for performance are installed in separate control devices, the structure related to the profit It becomes possible to centrally take countermeasures against fraud, and by distributing functions, it becomes possible to prevent local increases in processing load.

Note that by limiting the "second control device" to "provided separately from the first control device," the effect of being a separate control device can be more clearly achieved.

Features BB5. The notification is started by turning on a predetermined notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition to the specific gaming state, and the predetermined notification is started based on the end of the specific gaming state. Equipped with a specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification by turning off the means,
The first mode notification means can execute the first mode notification regardless of whether or not notification by the specific game state notification means has started, while the second mode notification means can execute the first mode notification regardless of whether notification by the specific game state notification means has started. The gaming machine according to feature BB3 or feature BB4, characterized in that the second mode of notification can be executed on the condition that notification by the notification means has started.

According to the above configuration, regarding the specific gaming state, when the specific gaming state is entered, notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification is also terminated. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of a notification from the specific gaming state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state. It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between a player who ends a game without realizing it and a player who later takes a seat at the game machine where he has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the special notification.

In addition, regarding the first mode notification and the second mode notification, by configuring the second mode notification to be executable on one condition that the notification by the specific game state notification means has been started, the second mode notification can be executed. The significance of the fact that this is directly connected to profits is further strengthened, and the importance of monitoring the second mode notification as well as the notification by the specific game state notification means is increased. In addition, since the first mode notification can be executed regardless of whether or not the specific game state notification means has started the notification, the degree of freedom when performing the first mode notification is improved, and the function as a production is further enhanced. It is possible to increase it.

Features BB6. The transition lottery means can execute a lottery to transition to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the specific gaming state notifying means starts notification corresponding to the result of the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state executed based on the transition result winning; A feature characterized by comprising a means (for example, a function of executing step S4204, step S4208, and section display fourth processing in the main control device 101) that can restrict at least until the transition result winning is established. A gaming machine described in BB5.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to ensure consistency between the restriction of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the fact that the second mode notification is not performed in the situation. It becomes possible to guarantee this, and in a situation where winning as a result of transition is reserved, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state has been won.

Features BB7. By making the first mode notification by the special notification means, specific content corresponding to the result of the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means executed in response to the transfer result reserved by the reservation means is suggested. The gaming machine according to feature BB6.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the first mode notification based on the second operation mode result is performed, so that the transition result triggered by the reserved transition result can be entered into a specific gaming state. Since the content of the transition lottery is suggested, even if execution of the transition lottery to a specific gaming state is restricted in such a situation, interest in the transition lottery can be maintained.

Features BB8. The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) that have different degrees of advantage for the player,
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, if the result of the transfer lottery means executed based on the transfer result win is a transfer win to the first predetermined state, the special notification means executes the first mode notification regarding the third stopping operation mode in which the third order of symbol combinations in the second operation mode result can be stopped;
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the result by the transfer lottery means executed based on the transfer result win is a transfer win to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state. In this case, the special notification means is characterized in that the special notification means executes the first mode notification regarding the fourth stopping operation mode in which the fourth order of symbol combinations in the second operation mode result can be stopped. The gaming machine described in feature BB7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the winning content of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state by using the result of the second operation mode in which the stop operation mode is different and the stop result changes. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize new gaming features using mode notification in a situation where mode notification that directly leads to profit may be restricted.

Features BB9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a plurality of types of replay results are provided for which replay can be given as a benefit by the benefit granting means,
The plurality of types of replay results include transitional replay results (e.g. promotion replay) in which the replay is granted by the benefit granting means and which triggers a shift in gaming state; A non-transfer replay result (for example, a special replay) that is given and does not trigger a change in gaming state is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BB1 to BB8, wherein the second operation mode result is the non-transition replay result.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved, even if the second operation mode result is a win, the gaming state does not change and a replay is simply awarded. By notifying the mode using such gaming results, the effect of feature BB1 can be improved to the extent that it does not violate the purpose of restricting the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved. It becomes possible to play.

Feature BB10. The first operation mode result is such that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result is When the stop operation becomes possible and each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second stop operation means corresponding to the second result The pattern combination of the modes can be stopped,
The second operation mode result is such that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result is When the stop operation becomes possible and each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth stop operation corresponding to the third result It is possible to stop the pattern combination of modes,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode or the result of the second operation mode, the first mode notification means is configured to notify the user of the first stop order, the second stop order, or the third stop order. Feature BB1 characterized in that a first order notification (push order notification effect) regarding a stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of BB9 to BB9.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above configuration, "the result of the first operation mode is such that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode is When the stop occurs and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 9 medals awarded based on the first minor win in a 3 bet game) is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and each of the stops When the operating means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the second mode is stopped and the second resultant prize is won. is established, and the benefit granting means grants a second benefit different from the first benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on winning the second minor role in a 3-bet game);
The result of the second operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in a third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped and the third result is obtained. A winning is achieved, a third benefit (replay) is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and each of the stop operation means operates in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode. If so, the symbol combination of the fourth aspect is stopped, the third result winning is established, and the third privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode or the result of the second operation mode, the first mode notification means is configured to notify the user of the first stop order, the second stop order, or the third stop order. A first order notification (push order notification effect) regarding a stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the bonus that is awarded.

Features BB11. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BB1 to BB10, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and before the transition is made is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it becomes possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of increasing expectations for the specific gaming state described in feature BB1.

<Characteristic BC group>
Feature BC1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (a function for executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to an advantageous one for the player. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (main control function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
When the execution of the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is restricted by the restriction means, special notification regarding the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means that has already been executed is made based on the specific winning result that is subject to the restriction by the restriction means. An executable special notification means (a function for executing notification cancellation processing and special RT notification processing by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, the winning as a result of the transition is reserved. In such a configuration, there is also a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the manner in which the orbiting body is stopped, and the degree of advantage varies depending on whether or not there is notification of the manner in which the stopping operation is performed. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery to shift to a specific gaming state can be performed, so a chain of advantageous states and specific gaming states can occur in each game, and the gameplay is significantly improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is performed in a state where the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for transition may be performed. There is a possibility that an act may be performed in which a transition to an advantageous state is made difficult to occur and a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is generated without limit. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the transfer symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and from the perspective of the fairness of the game. This is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, when the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, the intended payout rate can be achieved, and the fairness of the game can be improved. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve winnings as a result of transition, if the transition to an advantageous state is internally determined and the game is played while hinting at this through production, etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to an advantageous state. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. However, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state will not be held, so although expectations for an advantageous state may be improved, from the perspective of expectations for a specific gaming state Then, it can be said that the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means is not desirable for the player.

In particular, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits of a transfer lottery that would normally be held, and the player may feel like a loss, and if the transfer result is won. The greater the number of games that are reserved, the greater the likelihood that such an event will occur. Therefore, as in the above configuration, in a case where the lottery to transition to a specific gaming state is restricted when a specific result is won, if the configuration is configured to notify about the transition lottery that was held before then, it will be as if when the specific result is won. It is possible to make it seem as if a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state has been carried out, and it is possible to make it difficult for people to realize that the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the gaming nature based on the advantageous state and the specific gaming state.

Feature BC2. The gaming machine according to feature BC1, wherein the special notification means is related to a transition lottery by the transition lottery means that has already been executed, and is capable of notifying contents that have not yet been announced.

According to the above configuration, the content of notification by the special notification means becomes more limited. In more detail, the content of notifications by special notification means does not include information related to announced transfer drawings, but relates to unannounced drawings, so it may be carried out in games similar to games in which a specific result has been obtained but transfer drawings are restricted. Since the contents are related to a nearby game, the effect of making it seem as if the transition lottery was held based on a specific result can be further enhanced.

Feature BC3. The transition lottery means is capable of executing a transition lottery for the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result,
In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, means capable of restricting execution of notification regarding the lottery by the transition lottery means triggered by the transition result (in the display control device 81, the display control device 81 is set to an attack mode, etc.) The gaming machine according to feature BC1 or feature BC2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of setting an omen mode when winning a prize.

According to the above configuration, when a transfer lottery is held by the transfer lottery means based on the transfer result, the execution of notification regarding the transfer lottery is restricted, so in a situation where the transfer result winning is carried over by the reservation means, When a specific result is won, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a transition lottery not being held before that.

Feature BC4. According to any one of features BC1 to BC3, the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification in a game subsequent to the game in which the specified result is restricted by the restriction means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in a game subsequent to the game in which the transition lottery is restricted and in which the specific result was won, notification regarding the transition lottery that was executed before the game in which the specific result was won is performed. By doing this, the games for which special notifications are given are not limited to games in which the specific result has been won, and the special notifications can be diversified, and even if the result of the transition lottery is unfavorable to the player. Even if there is, the player can enjoy the game after the specific result while looking forward to changes in the content of the special notification.

Feature BC5. The special notification means is configured to notify the above when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result in a game subsequent to the game that has the specific result that is restricted by the restriction means. The gaming machine according to feature BC4, characterized in that special notification can be executed.

According to the above configuration, when a special notification is made, it is taken into account that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, so even if a transfer result winning is achieved without the special result, the notification will be This can create a sense of anticipation for the content of the special announcement that was supposed to be made. In other words, in a configuration in which the result of the transition lottery is favorable to players by the special announcement, even if the special announcement is not made, the reason why the special announcement was not made is the result of the transition lottery. Not only are the results unfavorable to the player, but there are also cases where the special result is not won, and the sense of anticipation can be maintained. In particular, since the execution timing of the special announcement is limited to a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, there are many cases where the special result does not become a prize by the time the transfer result is won, and the above special announcement is not carried out. There is a high possibility that this could be a factor. Therefore, it is possible to suitably achieve the effect of sustaining the feeling of anticipation as described above.

Feature BC6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, a first control means (in the main control device 101, for example, A function that controls so that a replay prize is established when the black BAR double stops.
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, a second controller controls each of the orbiting bodies so that a second special symbol combination different from the first special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position. A control means (a function of controlling the main control device 101 so that, for example, a replay winning is established when the black BAR does not stop),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature BC5, wherein the special notification means executes, as the special notification, a notification that makes it possible to stop the first special symbol combination.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed based on the stopped roll when the special result is won. By doing this, in a configuration that performs special notification based on a special result winning, there is no need for a configuration such as changing the probability of a special result winning before and after a specific result winning, and a simple configuration can achieve the feature BC5. It can be effective.

Feature BC7. The special notification means is configured to control the game in which the specific result winning is such that, in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, execution of the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is restricted by the restriction means. is used as a trigger game, and the notification regarding the transition lottery by the executed transition lottery means is made easier in a game after the trigger game than in a game before the trigger game. The gaming machine according to any one of BC6.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result is won in a situation where a transition result is reserved, the game in which the specific result is won is used as the trigger game, and the game after the trigger game is more likely to be executed than the game before the trigger game. It becomes easier to notify about the transfer lottery. By doing so, even if the transition lottery has already been executed, it is possible to make it seem as if the transition lottery was held based on the specific result of the trigger game.

Feature BC8. Multiple types of specific results are set,
The special notification means determines whether the game after the trigger game is better than the game before the trigger game, depending on the type of the specific result for which the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is restricted by the restriction means. The gaming machine according to feature BC7, characterized in that it is possible to vary the probability that notification regarding the transfer lottery by the executed transfer lottery means is likely to be performed.

According to the above configuration, the probability that notification regarding the transfer lottery will be more likely to be performed in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific result was won varies depending on the type of the specific result that is pending, so that the special notification means is more likely to be notified. It is possible to make the notification according to the actual situation of the transition lottery. Specifically, for example, it is common that there are specific results that make it easier to win the transition lottery and results that make it harder to win, and changes in the notification rate during reservations should also be adjusted according to the probability of winning. In this way, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the transition lottery was held based on the specific result of the trigger game.

Feature BC9. The transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and when the transition result winning is established after that, a means capable of executing notification regarding the lottery by the transition lottery means that has been executed (section display fourth process by the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC8, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions.

According to the above configuration, even if a specific result is not won during reservation, or even if a specific result is won, as in feature BC5, a special notification is made based on the special result winning. Even if a winning result is achieved as a result of the transition without being notified, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a transition to an advantageous state without being notified of the lottery by the executed transition lottery means. By doing so, notification regarding the lottery by the transition lottery means can be suitably executed.

Feature BC10. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC9.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above structure, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) (9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game), and each of the stop operation means sets a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to provide the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. In this case, it is possible to more clearly indicate the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

Features BC11. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC10, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and the transition is yet to occur is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it becomes possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing expectations for the specific gaming state described in feature BC1.

<Characteristic BD group>
Features BD1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (a function for executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to an advantageous one for the player. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (main control function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
Equipped with
As the gaming state, a plurality of replaying states (in particular, the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state) are set, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined regaming result is different from the normal gaming state,
re-gaming state transition means ( In the special RT state processing of the main control device 101, a function of executing processing for transitioning to one of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state);
When the gaming state is transferred to the replaying state by the replaying state transfer means, a selection means (special RT of the main controller 101) capable of selecting the replaying state to be transferred based on a specific event related to the specific gaming state. In state processing, a function of executing a process of setting an RT state depending on the presence or absence of a challenge mode winning flag, an attack mode winning flag, and a specialized zone winning flag);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, the winning as a result of the transition is reserved. In such a configuration, there is also a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the manner in which the orbiting body is stopped, and the degree of advantage varies depending on whether or not there is notification of the manner in which the stopping operation is performed. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery to shift to a specific gaming state can be performed, so a chain of advantageous states and specific gaming states can occur in each game, and the gameplay is significantly improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is performed in a state where the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for transition may be performed. There is a possibility that an act may be performed in which a transition to an advantageous state is made difficult to occur and a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is generated without limit. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the transfer symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and from the perspective of the fairness of the game. This is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, when the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, the intended payout rate can be achieved, and the fairness of the game can be improved. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve winnings as a result of transition, if the transition to an advantageous state is internally determined and the game is played while hinting at this through production, etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to an advantageous state. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the transitional symbol combination itself, there will be many situations where a specific result will result and the execution of a lottery related to a specific state will be restricted, making the player feel like they have lost out. obtain. Therefore, based on a situation where such a situation can occur, that is, a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, a replay state, a so-called RT state, in which the probability of a predetermined replay result changes, is established. In addition to the configuration, the type of re-gaming state is selected based on a specific event related to a specific gaming state. By doing this, a game is added in which a specific event related to a specific gaming state is predicted from the type of replaying state, and the situation is such that the execution of a lottery regarding a specific gaming state is restricted due to a specific result. Also, it becomes possible to enjoy games related to specific game states. As a result of the above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Features BD2. The transition lottery means is capable of executing the transition lottery based on the transition result winning,
The gaming machine according to feature BD1, wherein the specific event is the content of the transfer lottery held based on the transfer result winning.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration where the game shifts to a re-gaming state based on a winning transition result, the re-gaming state to which the game transitions changes depending on the content of the transition lottery held based on the winning transition result. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the content of the transition lottery is predicted from the transition re-gaming state.

Features BD3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), means for controlling each of the orbiting bodies (main controller 101 (function to execute reel control processing),
The gaming machine according to feature BD1 or feature BD2, wherein the frequency at which the specific replay symbol combination stops depends on the type of the replay state selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, the stop frequency of the specific replay symbol combination that may appear when a specific replay result is won differs depending on the type of replay state. By doing this, it is possible to predict the type of replay state based on the stop frequency of symbol combinations for a specific replay, and thereby predict a specific event related to a specific play state. Become.

Features BD4. The gaming machine according to feature BD3, wherein the probability of the specific replay result differs depending on the type of the replay state.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probabilities of specific re-gaming results themselves differ, the appearance rate of the symbol combination for specific re-gaming may also vary depending on the type of re-gaming state. In this way, for example, when a specific re-gaming result is won, there is no need to control whether or not to stop the symbol combination for the specific re-gaming, depending on the stopping order, stopping timing, etc. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which a specific event in a specific game state is predicted from the appearance rate of a symbol combination for a specific replay.

Features BD5. Any one of features BD1 to BD4, characterized in that, regardless of the type of the re-gaming state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be one of the re-gaming results is the same probability or almost the same probability. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in order to realize a game of predicting a specific event for a specific game state in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the advantage of the replay state to which the transition result is reserved is made to differ. No need arises. Therefore, it is possible to realize the gameplay for the specific gaming state without considering the ball payout rate or the like.

Note that "the same probability or almost the same probability" includes not only cases where the probabilities are completely the same, but also cases where the probabilities differ to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to experience the difference in probabilities.

Features BD7. The specific conditions include a non-winning condition that is satisfied without the transfer result winning being reserved by the reservation means (for example, a duplicate role that results in BB non-winning),
The re-gaming state is selected by the selection means based on the fulfillment of the non-winning condition, and the re-gaming state is selected by the selection means based on the fulfillment of the winning condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the means will be one of the re-gaming results is the same probability or almost the same probability.

According to the above configuration, the probability of the re-gaming result is the same or almost the same in the re-gaming state to which the transition result is transferred based on the reservation of winning by the reservation means and the re-gaming state where this is not the case. Become. By doing this, if you play a game where you can predict whether or not the transition result winnings are reserved when you transition to the re-gaming state, it is not possible to predict it from the winning probability of the re-gaming results. In this way, it is possible to enhance the prediction game.

Features BD8. A normal replay result (normal replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the normal game state,
A specific replay result (special replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the replay state,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the normal replay result, means for controlling each of the orbiting bodies (reel control of the main controller 101) so that the symbol combination for normal replay can be stopped at the valid position. A function that executes a process to win a replay prize at the stop result of the normal replay in the process),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), means for controlling each of the orbiting bodies (main controller 101 In the reel control process, for example, a function of executing a process of making a replay win at the stop roll of the black BAR stop),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), means (main controller) for controlling each of the orbiting bodies so that the symbol combination for normal replay can be stopped at the valid position. 101 reel control process, a function of executing a process of making a replay win at the stop roll of the normal replay),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD7, wherein the frequency at which the specific replay symbol combination stops depends on the type of the replay state selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, in the gameplay in which the type of replay state is predicted from the appearance rate of symbol combinations for specific replay, even if the specific replay result is won, the stop result is the same as the normal replay result. There may be cases where this occurs. By doing this, without changing the winning probability of specific replay results, when a specific replay result is won, either the symbol combination for specific replay is stopped, or the symbol combination for normal replay is stopped. It is possible to change the appearance rate of the pattern combination for specific replay by simply changing whether or not the pattern is changed. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize the gameplay of predicting the type of replay state from the appearance rate of a symbol combination for a specific replay, and thereby predicting a specific event related to a specific play state. can.

Features BD9. The transition lottery means is capable of executing the transition lottery based on the transition result winning,
The migration results include a first migration result and a second migration result,
The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) that have different degrees of advantage for the player,
When executing the transition lottery based on the first transition result winning, the transition lottery means performs a transition lottery to a first predetermined state among the specific gaming states, and based on the second transition result winning. When executing the transition lottery, a transition lottery is performed to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state among the specific gaming states,
The re-gaming state transition means causes the re-gaming state to transition to a first re-gaming state of the plurality of re-gaming states on the condition that the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and Characteristics BD1 to BD8 characterized in that the game is caused to shift to a second replay state different from the first replay state among the plurality of replay states on the condition that the winning result of the first transition is reserved. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the type of transition result, the type of re-gaming state, and the content of the specific gaming state in which the transition lottery is held are each linked. In other words, an event may occur in which the player moves to the first replay state even though the second shift result is a win, or the event moves to the second replay state even though the first shift result is a win. do not have. Therefore, the transparency of the game is ensured, and it is possible to suitably realize a game in which a specific game state is predicted from the type of replay state.

Features BD10. Notification is started by lighting a predetermined notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and notification is started based on the transition of the specific gaming state to the specific gaming state. A specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification by turning off the predetermined notification means;
When the gaming state is transferred to the re-gaming state by the re-gaming state transition means, means capable of restricting the start of notification by the specific gaming state notification means (when winning the attack mode etc. in the display control device 81, the precursor mode ), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, regarding the specific gaming state, when the specific gaming state is entered, notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification is also terminated. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of a notification from the specific gaming state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state. It is possible to eliminate the sense of inequality between a player who ends a game without realizing it and a player who later takes a seat at the game machine where he has finished the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the special notification.

Furthermore, when the re-gaming state transition means shifts to the re-gaming state, the start of notification by the specific gaming state notification means may be restricted. By doing so, when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition is made to the re-gaming state, it is possible to preferably predict a specific event related to the specific gaming state from the type of the re-gaming state. can be executed. In other words, in a configuration in which the presence or absence of transition to a specific gaming state is determined as a specific event when notification is started by the specific gaming state notification means, the specific event is predicted by the notification by the specific gaming state notification means. This is because it will soon be understood.

Features BD11. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD10.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above configuration, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) 9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game, and each of the stop operation means is set in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to issue order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order to the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device. In this case, it is possible to more clearly indicate the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

Features BD12. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD11, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and the transition is yet to occur is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it becomes possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of increasing expectations for the specific gaming state described in feature BD1.

Features BD13. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (a function for executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to an advantageous one for the player. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (main control function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
Equipped with
As the gaming state, a plurality of replaying states (in particular, the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state) are set, in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined regaming result is different from the normal gaming state,
The plurality of replay states are set such that the probability of a specific replay result among the replay results is different,
The transition lottery means can execute a lottery to transition to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
re-gaming state transition means ( In the special RT state processing of the main control device 101, a function of executing processing for transitioning to one of the fifth RT state to the eighth RT state);
When the gaming state is transferred to the re-gaming state by the re-gaming state transition means, a selection means (main control In the special RT state processing of the device 101, a function of executing a process of setting the RT state depending on the presence or absence of the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, and the special zone winning flag);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, the winning as a result of the transition is reserved. In such a configuration, there is also a specific game state in which the winning result may differ depending on the manner in which the orbiting body is stopped, and the degree of advantage varies depending on whether or not there is notification of the manner in which the stopping operation is performed. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery to shift to a specific gaming state can be performed, so a chain of advantageous states and specific gaming states can occur in each game, and the gameplay is significantly improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is performed in a state where the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, a stopping operation that does not stop the symbol combination for transition may be performed. There is a possibility that an act may be performed in which a transition to an advantageous state is made difficult to occur and a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is generated without limit. In this case, the difference in advantage between a player who can perform a stopping operation that does not stop the transfer symbol combination and a player who cannot perform such a stopping operation becomes noticeable, and from the perspective of the fairness of the game. This is not preferable, and in the first place, the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate due to the design, so it is also not preferable from that point of view. Therefore, when the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed, by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, the intended payout rate can be achieved, and the fairness of the game can be improved. can be guaranteed.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve winnings as a result of transition, if the transition to an advantageous state is internally determined and the game is played while hinting at this through production, etc., it is possible to prevent the transition to an advantageous state. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the transitional symbol combination itself, there will be many situations where a specific result will result and the execution of a lottery related to a specific state will be restricted, making the player feel like they have lost out. obtain. Therefore, based on the situation where such a situation can occur, that is, the transfer result winning is reserved in the reservation means, which of the multiple replay states each has a different probability of becoming a specific replay result? In addition, the type of re-gaming state is selected depending on the expectation of winning the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state. By doing this, a game is added that predicts and understands the type of replay state based on the winning probability of a specific replay result, and predicts the winning expectation of a lottery that will transition to a specific play state. Therefore, even in a situation where the execution of a lottery regarding a specific gaming state is restricted, it is possible to enjoy the game regarding the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Note that each of the configurations of the features BD1 to BD12 described above may be applied individually to the feature BD13, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

<Characteristic BE group>
Feature BE1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (a function for executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and,
The notification by the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is started based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the notification by the specific notification device is ended based on the end of the specific gaming state. a specific game state notification means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to an advantageous one for the player. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
Equipped with
The specific results include duplicate results that include the transition result (for example, 1 strong cherry duplication, 1 strong watermelon duplication, 1 chance A duplication) and non-duplicate results that do not include the transition result (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, Chance A) is set,
The specific game state notification means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, the game for which the non-overlapping result is won is the starting game, and the operation of the next game after the starting game is performed. Means for starting notification by the specific notification means at a timing earlier than allowing (a function for executing section display first processing in main controller 101);
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result or the transition result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, the game transitions to the advantageous state by stopping the symbol combination for transition. a starting game, the notification by the specific notification means is not started at a timing before the start game, and the notification by the specific notification means is started at a timing before the operation of the next game after the start game is allowed. means for starting (a function for executing the section display fourth process in the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is awarded by a privilege awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the first result may be a winning result or the second result may be won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the orbiting body. Results such as winning a prize are set, and there are cases where notifications are made regarding these stop operation conditions, creating a gameplay that changes the presence or absence of winning depending on the presence or absence of notification of the conditions, thereby creating a gaming experience in which the degree of advantage varies. Ru.

In this case, when the game shifts to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, notification by the specific notification means also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of the notification from the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the mode notification.

Moreover, the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is such that at least a game in which the lottery result that triggered the winning of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state can win is set as the starting game, and the operation of the next game after the starting game is permitted. Also, the start timing of the notification is set to be a time-limited notification. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the occurrence of ending the game even though the player has won the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state.

On the other hand, if the notification of the transition lottery is made time-limited as described above, the result of the transition lottery can be clearly determined depending on whether notification by the specific game status notification means starts or not. Therefore, it could be seen as a source of a lack of interest in the production.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is used as an opportunity to transition to an advantageous state, and the result overlaps with the transition result (so-called jackpot) in which the winning can be withheld until a winning is achieved. and a non-overlapping result that is not an overlap with the transition result, and the notification start by the specific gaming state notification means is made different for the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result.

More specifically, if you win a lottery to transition to a specific gaming state based on a non-overlapping result, the game in which you won the non-overlapping result will be the starting game, and the game will start before the next game is allowed to be operated. When notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, and if a result including a transition result (mainly duplicate results) wins a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, the transition pattern corresponding to the transition result will be displayed. A game in which the combination stops and shifts to an advantageous state is defined as a starting game, and the notification by the specific game state notification means is started before the operation of the next game is permitted.

By doing this, even if a stop result corresponding to a result that triggers a lottery to transition to a specific gaming state appears, even if the specific gaming state notification means does not start reporting in the game, Since the possibility of the above-mentioned duplicate results remains, it is possible to make the notification by the specific game state notification means time-limited, and to make the notification highly effective. Therefore, interest can be suitably improved.

Feature BE2. As the duplication result, a first duplication result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a first specific result (for example, strong cherry) of the specific results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a first non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry) that is a non-overlapping result of the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) among the specific results is set;
The benefit granting means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first duplicate result, based on the fact that the symbol combination for the first specific result has stopped at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a benefit corresponding to the first specific result is granted based on the fact that the symbol combination for the first specific result has stopped at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature BE1.

According to the above configuration, the game in which the first overlapping result is a winning combination of the first specific result and the transition result, and the game in which the first non-overlapping result is a single winning in the first specific result, In both cases, the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped and it becomes possible to establish a first specific result winning, so whether the winning result is the first duplicate result or the first non-duplicate result is stopped. It becomes difficult to judge from the appearance. On the other hand, the notification by the specific game state notification means is such that if the first duplicate result is the first overlap result, the game in which the transition result winning is established is the starting game, and if the first non-overlapping result is the first specific result winning is the game in which the first specific result winning is established. This is the starting game. Therefore, even if a lottery for transition to a specific gaming state is won based on any result, an event may occur in which whether or not the notification by the specific gaming state notification means starts (start timing) differs. In other words, even if the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started before the operation of the next game is permitted, the first specific result It is possible to maintain the possibility that the symbol combination for the result is based on the first specific result in the first duplicate result, and even if you have not won the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state, the feeling of anticipation is maintained. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature BE3. As the duplication result, a second duplication result (for example, strong watermelon duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specified results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon) that is a non-overlapping result of the second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second duplicate result, based on the fact that the symbol combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the second specific result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a benefit corresponding to the second specific result is granted based on the fact that the symbol combination for the second specific result has stopped at the valid position. It is a thing,
The gaming machine according to feature BE2, wherein the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first specific result and the lottery based on the second specific result.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is also taken into account in the gameplay of feature BE2. That is, for example, if the configuration is such that the first specific result is easier to win the transfer lottery than the second specific result, the symbol combination for the first specific result is stopped, and the specific game state notification means starts reporting. If not, there is a higher possibility of a transfer winning than when the symbol combination for the second specific result has stopped and notification by the specific game status notification means has not started, and the first specific symbol combination has stopped. Expectations for the appearance of combinations are further increased. On the other hand, when the symbol combination for the second specific result has stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the effect of surprise when the first specific symbol combination appears thereafter is enhanced. . As described above, by taking into consideration the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means and enjoying the stop rolls, the gameplay of predicting the result of the transition lottery from the stop rolls during reservation is greatly improved.

Feature BE4. As the duplication result, a third duplication result (for example, chance A duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a third specific result (for example, chance A) of the specific results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (for example, chance A) that is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (for example, chance A) among the specific results is set,
The benefit granting means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the third duplicate result, based on the fact that the symbol combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the third specific result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a benefit corresponding to the third specific result is granted based on the fact that the symbol combination for the third specific result has stopped at the valid position. It is a thing,
In the lottery by the lottery means, the ratio of the overlapping result to the non-overlapping result is the ratio of the first overlapping result to the first non-overlapping result, and the third overlapping result to the third non-overlapping result. The gaming machine according to feature BE2 or feature BE3, characterized in that the ratio is different.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is also taken into account in the gameplay of the feature BE2 and the feature BE3. In other words, for example, a configuration in which the ratio of the first duplicate result to the first non-duplicate result is higher than the ratio of the third duplicate result to the third non-duplicate result is that the result is a duplicate result of the migration result (same stop If the result is a configuration in which there is a high possibility of winning as a result of the transition), the symbol combination for the first specific result has stopped, and if the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the third specific result There is a higher possibility that the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means than when the pattern combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of feature BE3, if it is a non-overlapping result and is in a specific gaming state, notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started for that game, so as described above, the notification for the first specific result is If the symbol combination has stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not started, the possibility of winning the specific game state is higher than in the case of the symbol combination for the third specific result. As described above, by taking into account the probability of winning as a result of the transition and entertaining the stopped rolls, the gameplay of predicting the result of the transition lottery based on the stopped rolls during reservation is greatly improved.

Feature BE5. As the duplication result, a fourth duplication result (for example, middle bell duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a fourth specific result (for example, middle bell) of the specific results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a fourth non-overlapping result (for example, middle bell) that is a non-overlapping result of the fourth specific result (for example, middle bell) among the specific results is set;
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth duplicate result, based on the fact that the symbol combination for the fourth specific result has stopped at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the fourth specific result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth non-overlapping result, a benefit corresponding to the fourth specific result is granted based on the fact that the symbol combination for the fourth specific result has stopped at the valid position. It is a thing,
The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) that have different degrees of advantage for the player,
The transition lottery by the transition lottery means includes a first transition lottery, which is a transition lottery to a first predetermined state (challenge mode), and a transition lottery to a second predetermined state (attack mode), which is different from the first predetermined state. A certain second transition lottery has been set,
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery that are executed based on the first specific result, it is possible to win in either transition lottery, while the first transition lottery that is executed based on the fourth specific result The gaming machine according to any one of features BE2 to BE4, characterized in that, in the second transition lottery, the game machine is set so that no one wins in one of the transition lottery.

According to the above configuration, among the specific gaming states, the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state include ones that do not shift depending on the type of the specific result. That is, in the case of the first identification result, it is possible to shift to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state, but in the case of the fourth identification result, it is not possible to shift to either one. By doing this, when the symbol combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first overlapping result or the first non-overlapping result is stopped, and when the symbol combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first overlapping result or the fourth non-overlapping result is stopped, the fourth specific result corresponding to the fourth overlapping result or the fourth non-overlapping result In addition to the viewpoints of whether or not the symbol combination for the result is stopped, whether or not it is reserved, and whether or not notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, it is also important to consider which lottery transition to a predetermined state is performed. It is possible to play a game where you can enjoy the subsequent trends from the viewpoint of whether or not the player was defeated.

Feature BE6. As the duplication result, a fifth duplication result (for example, middle bell duplication 1) that is a duplication result with a fifth specific result (for example, middle bell) of the specific results is set,
As the non-overlapping result, a fifth non-overlapping result (for example, middle bell) that is a non-overlapping result of the fifth specific result (for example, middle bell) among the specific results is set;
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth duplicate result, based on the fact that the symbol combination for the fifth specific result has stopped at the valid position, a benefit corresponding to the fifth specific result is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth non-overlapping result, a benefit corresponding to the fifth specific result is granted based on the fact that the symbol combination for the fifth specific result has stopped at the valid position. It is a thing,
The specific game state includes a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, omen mode, etc.) that have different degrees of advantage for the player,
The transition lottery by the transition lottery means includes a first transition lottery, which is a transition lottery to a first predetermined state (challenge mode), and a transition lottery to a second predetermined state (super attack mode), which is different from the first predetermined state. The second transition lottery is set,
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery that are executed based on the first specific result, there is a possibility that no one wins in either of the transition lottery, while the first transition lottery that is executed based on the fifth specific result The gaming machine according to any one of features BE2 to BE5, wherein the transition lottery and the second transition lottery are set so that at least one of the transition lottery wins.

According to the above configuration, among the specific game states, the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state include a state in which the game always transitions to one of the predetermined states depending on the type of the specific result. That is, in the case of the first identification result, there is a case where the state does not shift to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state, and in the case of the fifth identification result, the state always shifts to either one. By doing this, if the symbol combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first duplicate result or the first non-duplicate result is stopped, and if the symbol combination for the first specific result corresponding to the fifth duplicate result or the fifth non-duplicate result is stopped, In addition to the viewpoints of whether or not the symbol combination for the result is suspended, whether or not it is reserved, and whether or not notification by the specific game state notification means is started, there are also considerations such as which predetermined state it should move to. From this point of view, it is possible to play a game where you can enjoy the subsequent trends.

Feature BE7. The first result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order,
The second result is that a winning is established when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BE1 to BE7.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above configuration, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) 9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game, and each of the stop operation means is set in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to issue order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order to the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device. In this case, it is possible to more clearly indicate the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

Features BE8. The specific gaming state includes a high frequency state in which the mode notification is performed more frequently than the normal gaming state, a high probability state in which it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state, and the high frequency state or the The gaming machine according to any one of features BE1 to BE7, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) in which the lottery for transition to a high probability is won and the transition is yet to occur is set.

According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved. Moreover, the high probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage improves depending on the execution frequency of mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state. . Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when a transition to a specific gaming state is made, it is possible to end the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of In other words, if the player has transitioned to a high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can understand the state transition by being notified of the state, and it is possible to identify the transition to the previous state of such a high-frequency state. By configuring the system to notify the player by starting the notification by the notification means, it becomes possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it becomes possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to improve the effect of increasing expectations for the specific gaming state described in feature BE1.

<Characteristic CA group>
Feature CA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination for the first mode can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. When the operation is performed in a second stop operation mode different from the operation mode, the operation mode result (for example, the push order bell ) is set and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and based on the fact that the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to an advantageous one for the player. a transition means for transitioning to the state (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result, a reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main controller 101 function) and
Equipped with
As the gaming state, a re-gaming state is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a re-gaming result is higher than the normal gaming state,
When specific conditions are met, including a winning condition that is satisfied when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and a non-winning condition that is satisfied without the transition result winning being reserved by the reservation means, Equipped with a re-gaming state transition means (a function for executing special RT state processing by the main controller 101) capable of shifting the gaming state to the re-gaming state,
The aspect notification means is such that when the lottery result by the lottery means in the re-gaming state is the operation manner result, the re-gaming state is shifted based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied as the specific condition. If so, it is easy to execute the mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode, and if the re-gaming state is shifted based on the non-winning condition being satisfied as the specific condition, the second stop operation. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a special mode notification means (a function for executing special RT notification processing by the display control device 81) that facilitates execution of the mode notification regarding the mode.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the game shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped, the winning as a result of the transition is reserved.

Furthermore, a re-gaming state (so-called RT state) is set as a gaming state in which the probability of a re-gaming result is higher than the normal gaming state, and a transition to the re-gaming state is made on the condition that the transition result winning is reserved. There are cases where the game moves to a re-gaming state on the condition that the winning result is not reserved. Therefore, when transitioning to the re-gaming state, the subsequent advantage of the player will vary greatly depending on whether or not the transition result winnings are reserved, and it is thought that the player's interest will be in whether or not the winning is reserved.

Here, the replay result is a result in which no player loses out. Therefore, for example, if the above-mentioned presence or absence of reservation is determined by a performance, etc., the frequency at which eye presses are required during the re-gaming state is relatively low, which means that the performance of the presence or absence of reservation may be overlooked. This is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing. On the other hand, generally speaking, the number of stop results for winning a prize as a result of re-gaming is uniform, and there is a possibility that the number of stop results may become monotonous.

In this regard, in the above configuration, by changing the mode notification when the operation mode results in a win during the re-gaming state, whether the symbol combination for the first mode is stopped or the symbol combination for the second mode is changed. A game has been added in which the presence or absence of the reservation is predicted depending on whether the game stops. In other words, by indicating the presence or absence of reservations that the player is interested in during the replay state by the stop roll, and having the player understand this, it is possible to not only avoid the monotony of the stop roll during the replay state, but also to It is possible to expect a dramatic effect such as dramatically increasing the degree of attention to the stopped roll. As a result of the above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature CA2. The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
A transition lottery means (a function of executing a first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a lottery to transition to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery device is a predetermined specific result; ,
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carryover state), if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a restriction means (main control function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101);
The gaming machine according to feature CA1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved, execution of the lottery for transition to a specific gaming state regarding mode notification is restricted. In other words, in the re-gaming state, if the execution of the lottery to transition to a specific gaming state regarding mode notification is restricted, the reservation of the transition result winning is confirmed, and the execution of the lottery to transition to a specific gaming state regarding mode notification is restricted. If not, it is confirmed that the transfer result election is not reserved. In other words, if the situation is unfavorable for the player, such as the execution of the transfer lottery being restricted, the situation is favorable for the player, where the transfer result winning is withheld, and conversely, the situation is favorable for the player, where the execution of the transfer lottery is not restricted. If the situation is favorable for the player, then it is an unfavorable situation for the player in that the transfer result winning is not reserved, and in either case, it is a favorable situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide well-balanced gameplay.

Feature CA3. The pattern combination for the first aspect is established by stopping a first number of predetermined specific patterns at a specific position (middle line L2) that is visible through the display section on each of the orbiting bodies. ,
Feature CA1, characterized in that the pattern combination for the second mode is established by stopping a second number of specific patterns smaller than the first number at the specific position on each of the orbiting bodies. Or the gaming machine described in feature CA2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the difference in the stop result between the pattern combination for the first mode and the pattern combination for the second mode based on the number of specific patterns to be stopped. By doing this, it becomes possible to make the game easier to understand, for example, by having the game predict the presence or absence of a reservation based on the difference in the number of stop results, and having the game be determined based on the number of stops of a specific symbol.

Feature CA4. The gaming machine according to feature CA3, wherein the second number is 0.

According to the above configuration, the difference in the number of stop results between the case where the pattern combination for the first mode stops and the case where the pattern combination for the second mode stops depends on whether the specific pattern stops at a specific position or not. The difference is more clear. Therefore, it is possible to make the gameplay simpler in terms of predicting the presence or absence of reservations.

Furthermore, for example, in the above prediction game, if you do not want a specific symbol to stop at a specific position any longer, you can use the above configuration to prevent the operation mode results from winning any more. Even without using such a complicated configuration, it is possible to adjust whether or not a specific symbol is stopped based on the difference in the stopping operation mode, and it is possible to realize the above predicted game with a simpler configuration.

Feature CA5. comprising a specifying means (black BAR stop counter) for counting the number of times the specific symbol has stopped at the specific position over a plurality of games in the replay state;
When the number counted by the specifying means reaches a specific number, the special aspect notification means is configured to provide the above-mentioned replay state if the replay state is shifted based on the non-winning condition being satisfied as the specific condition. Means for disabling execution of the mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode (executes a process in the display control device 81 to set a press order notification effect for non-stopping of the black BAR from the notification scenario and the value of the black BAR stop counter) The gaming machine according to feature CA4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to the above configuration, when the number of stops of a specific symbol reaches a specific number in a re-gaming state in which the transfer result winning is not reserved, the mode for the first stop operation mode corresponding to the symbol combination for the first mode is changed. Notification will no longer be executed. As a result, the first number of specific symbols will not stop as the pattern combination for the first mode, and therefore the specific symbols will not stop at the specific position as the pattern combination for the second mode. As a result, it is predicted that the transfer result winning is not reserved because the number of specific symbols stopping at a specific position does not exceed a specific number, and conversely, the number of specific symbols stopping at a specific position exceeds a specific number. Through this, it becomes possible to make it known that the transfer result winning is reserved.

Feature CA6. The special aspect notification means is such that even if the number counted by the specifying means is less than the specific number, the replay state is shifted based on the fulfillment of the non-winning condition as the specific condition. and when the first number is added to the number counted by the specifying means and exceeds the specific number, means for disabling execution of the mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode (display control device The gaming machine according to feature CA5, characterized in that it is equipped with a function of executing a process of setting a press order notification effect for non-stopping of the black BAR based on the type of special replay and the value of the black BAR stop counter in 81) .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the number of specific symbols stopping at a specific position exceeds a specific number even though the transfer result winning is not reserved by the reservation means. Therefore, in a game where the presence or absence of a reservation is predicted from the number of stops, a contradiction between the number of stops and the presence or absence of a reservation is less likely to occur.

Feature CA7. As the operation mode results, a plurality of operation mode results are provided in which the number of the specific symbols stopping at the specific position when the symbol combination for the first mode is stopped;
Features CA3 to CA6 characterized in that for any of the plurality of operation mode results, when the symbol combination for the second mode stops, the number of the specific symbols stopping at the specific position is zero. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, in a game where the presence or absence of a reservation is predicted based on the number of stops of a specific symbol, the increase in the number of stops is varied depending on the type of operation result, and while diversifying the rate of increase, the feature CA5 is If you do not want to increase the number of stops any further due to the relationship between the number of stops and the presence or absence of reservations, it is sufficient to simply notify the mode of the second stop operation mode, thereby suitably realizing a game that allows you to predict the presence or absence of reservations. can do.

Feature CA8. Means capable of changing the content (background color) of the specific effect on the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) according to the number counted by the specific means (processing for setting the effect at the time of addition by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features CA3 to CA7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions:

According to the above configuration, the number of specific symbols stopped at a specific position can be ascertained from the content of the predetermined performance by the specific notification means, and the player does not have to count the number himself. Therefore, it is possible to more easily play a game in which the presence or absence of a reservation is predicted from the number of stops.

Feature CA9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation mode result and each of the orbiting bodies is stopped in the first stop operation mode, the stop timing of a predetermined orbiting body among the orbiting bodies is a first timing. If so, the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped, while if the stop timing of the predetermined orbiting body is a second timing different from the first timing, then the pattern combination for the first mode is different. According to any one of features CA3 to CA8, the pattern combination is a pattern combination for a low number in which the number of the specific patterns stopping at the specific position is smaller than the first number. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop operation mode matches the first stop operation mode (for example, even if the stop operation mode is a stop order and matches the first stop order), the first The number of specific symbols does not necessarily stop at a specific position, but the timing of the stop operation, that is, whether the symbol combination for the first mode in which the first number of specific symbols stops by the eye-pressing operation or from the first number The difference is whether or not a pattern combination for a low number of objects, in which a small number of specific patterns stop, stops. In this way, it becomes possible to stop the specific symbol by the player's own stop operation, making it seem as if the player has won as a result of the transition, and it is possible to improve the gameplay during the replay state.

Feature CA10. A stop roll that stops on each of the orbiting bodies in a game that shifts to the re-gaming state when the winning condition is met, and a shift to the re-gaming state when the non-winning condition is met. The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA9, characterized in that in the game, a stop result that stops on each of the orbiting bodies is common.

According to the above configuration, it is no longer possible to determine whether or not the winning result of the transition is reserved based on the stop result of the game that triggers the transition to the replaying state. Therefore, the gameplay of predicting and understanding the presence or absence of reservations from the stop result during the re-gaming state is not impaired.

Feature CA11. a grasping means (special RT counter) for grasping the number of games in the replay state that is transferred due to the fulfillment of the non-winning condition;
Means (main controller 101 (a function that executes processing to return to the original gaming state based on the special RT counter becoming 0);
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the re-gaming state to which the game is transferred can be limited without reservation of winning as a result of the transfer. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that a re-gaming state in which there is a high probability of winning as a result of re-gaming continues indefinitely even though winning as a result of transfer is not reserved.

In addition, if the "predetermined number" is configured to be "a number larger than the denominator of the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the operation mode result", then at least once on average during the re-gaming state. It is possible to expect a win as a result of the operation mode, and there is an advantage that it is possible to suitably realize a gaming experience that utilizes the stopped numbers. On the other hand, if the "predetermined number" is configured to be "a number smaller than the denominator of the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the operation mode result", it is difficult for the operation mode result to win during the re-gaming state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the rarity of the stop result based on the operation mode result can be increased, and the degree of attention to the stop result can be increased.

Feature CA12. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
The lottery is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the lottery has the same probability of winning regardless of the setting value set by the setting device, and the lottery results in the lottery to the specific gaming state. Equipped with a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery (a function of executing the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101),
According to any one of features CA1 to CA11, the transition result is a first transition result (second BB) in which the probability of winning by the lottery means differs depending on the setting value set by the setting means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player is shifted to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the transition symbol combination must stop. For example, in addition to the game feature in which winning as a result of the transition is reserved, a specific gaming state is provided in which, when winning as a result of the operation mode, the stop result is changed depending on whether or not there is notification of the mode regarding the stop operation mode. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery to shift to a specific gaming state can be performed, so a chain of advantageous states and specific gaming states can occur in each game, and the gameplay is significantly improved. improves. Moreover, the specific gaming state is set so that there is no difference in the winning rate of the transfer lottery depending on the setting value that causes changes in the increase/decrease rate of gaming media, and the luck factor is more important in determining whether or not you win. This will ensure the fairness of the game. On the other hand, if there were no differences due to setting values, it would be difficult to predict which setting value is set, which is the fun of selecting one game machine from among multiple machines installed in a game hall. There is also the possibility that the fun of playing games while doing so may be erased. Therefore, in the above configuration, by providing a first transition result in which the winning probability differs depending on the set value as the transition result, the game of predicting the set value can be suspended or not depending on the number of stop results during the replay state. It is possible to enjoy the gameplay that is linked to a specific game state while predicting the game.

Regarding the "specific gaming state", "the specific gaming state includes a high frequency state where the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than the normal gaming state, and a high frequency state where it is easier to shift to the high frequency state than the normal gaming state". At least one of a probability state and a pre-transition state (pre-transition mode) which is a state in which the user has won the transition lottery to the high-frequency state or the high-probability state and has not yet transitioned to the high-frequency state or the high-probability transition lottery may be set. According to the above configuration, the variations of the specific game state are diversified, and the gameplay is improved.Furthermore, regarding the high probability state and the pre-transition state, both of the high probability state and the pre-transition state are The advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal gaming state.Including such a state, by configuring the system so that notification is started by the specific notification means when the game transitions to a specific gaming state. , it is possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon of ending the game without noticing the transition to a specific gaming state.In other words, if the transition is to a high-frequency state, It is considered that the player is able to grasp the state transition by being notified of the state, and the configuration is such that the transition to the previous state of such a high frequency state is notified by the start of notification by the specific notification means. This makes it possible to better understand the transition to a specific gaming state.As a result of the above, it becomes possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality using the specific notification means. In addition, regarding the variations of "specific gaming state", the same applies to each of the following features.

Feature CA13. As the transition result, a second transition result (first BB) is provided in which the probability of winning by the lottery means is common regardless of the setting value set by the setting means,
The re-gaming state transition means is characterized in that even if either the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means, the re-gaming state is transitioned to the common re-gaming state. The gaming machine described in feature CA12.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to complicate the game in which the set value is predicted while predicting the presence or absence of reservation in the replay state. In other words, even if it is determined whether there is a reservation in the re-gaming state, is the result of the first transition with a difference in winning probability depending on the setting value being reserved, or the second transition with no difference in winning probability depending on the setting value? As a result, the number of branches in predicting set values increases, and the games that predict set values can be made more diverse, improving gameplay.

Feature CA14. The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
The transition lottery means is capable of executing a lottery to transition to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning,
Notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific notification is started based on the end of the specific gaming state. Equipped with a specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification by turning off the notification means,
The specific game state notification means is
If the game result that triggered the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is a result that does not include the transfer result, the game in which the winning result is established is the starting game, and the operation of the game following the starting game is permitted. a first means (a function for executing a section display first process by the main controller 101) for starting notification by the specific notification means at a timing earlier than the above;
If the game result that triggered the transfer lottery by the transfer lottery means is a result that includes the transfer result, the game in which the transfer result winning is established is the starting game, and the operation of the game following the starting game is permitted. a second means (a function for executing a fourth section display process by the main controller 101) for starting notification by the specific notification means at a timing earlier than the above;
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA13, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result stops, the player is shifted to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the transition symbol combination must stop. For example, in addition to the game feature in which winning as a result of the transition is reserved, a specific gaming state is provided in which, when winning as a result of the operation mode, the stop result is changed depending on whether or not there is notification of the mode regarding the stop operation mode. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery to shift to a specific gaming state can be performed, so a chain of advantageous states and specific gaming states can occur in each game, and the gameplay is significantly improved. improves.

In such a configuration, when the game transitions to a specific gaming state, notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification also ends. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a specific gaming state is entered. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the special notification.

Moreover, the notification by the specific notification means is started at least before the lottery result that triggered the start of the specific game state allows the operation of the next game after the winning starting game, and the timing of starting the notification is limited to a time limit. It is considered to be a notification. More specifically, if the lottery result that triggered the start is a result that does not include a transfer result and the transfer result winning is not reserved, the operation of the game following the game in which the lottery result winning was established. If the lottery result that triggered the start is a result that includes a transfer result, and the transfer result winning can be reserved, then the notification will be announced in the next game after the game in which the transfer result winning was established. Notification starts before game operations are allowed. In other words, although the notification will basically start in the game where the lottery result winning is the trigger for starting the specific gaming state, if the transition result winning is reserved, the specific game will not be played until the transition result winning is established. The start of notification by the status notification means is restricted. Then, for example, in a game with a game result that could trigger the start of a specific gaming state, if the specific gaming state notification means does not start the notification, (1) the player has won the lottery to enter the specific gaming state, and (2) A case in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means; (2) a case where the transfer lottery to a specific gaming state has not been won and a transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means; or (3) a case in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means. Either the state transition lottery or the transition result has not been won. In this regard, as in feature CA1 above, it is possible to play a game in which the transition result winning or not is inferred from the stop result of the operation mode result, so it is possible to play a game in which the winning result of the transition result is inferred from the stop result of the operation mode result. If the notification has not been started, it is possible to narrow down the case to either case (1) or (2) or case (3) based on the stop result of the operation mode result. By doing so, it is possible to make the game more sophisticated in estimating whether or not there is a reservation based on the number of stopped results, and to improve the interest.

In particular, in configurations such as feature CA12 and feature CA13, where the transition result has a first transition result with a difference in winning probability depending on the setting value and a second transition result with no difference, the winning of the lottery to transition to a specific gaming state If it is assumed that the probability does not differ depending on the set value, the first transition result cannot be used to draw a lottery to transition to a specific gaming state, and the second transition result cannot be a lottery to transition to a specific gaming state. This is a configuration that allows this to be carried out. Then, in the cases (1) and (2) above, if the first transition result is reserved, case (2) will be the case, and if the second transition result is reserved, the case (1) will be the case. Therefore, it is possible to narrow down which case it is based on the relationship with the type of migration result.

Feature CA15. As a result of the above operation mode,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result becomes stopable as the symbol combination for the first mode, and each of the stop operation means When the operating means is operated in the second stop operation mode, the symbol combination for the second mode is a symbol combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result, and the symbol combination for the second mode is a symbol combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result. a first operation mode result (for example, a push order bell) that makes it possible to stop a second mode of pattern combination different from the pattern combination of;
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result becomes stopable as the symbol combination for the first mode, and each of the stop operation means When the operating means is operated in the second stop operation mode, the symbol combination for the second mode is a symbol combination that corresponds to the third result and is different from the symbol combination of the third mode. A first operation mode result (for example, special replay) that allows the symbol combination of the fourth mode to be stopped is set,
The special mode notification means executes the mode notification if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, but does not execute the mode notification if the operation mode result is the first operation mode result. The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA14.

According to the above configuration, in a game where the presence or absence of a reservation is predicted from the stop roll when the operation mode result is won, if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, the stop score is adjusted by the mode notification, If it is the result of the first operation mode, the mode is not notified and the stop number is not adjusted. The result of the first operation mode and the result of the second operation mode are that the winning result of the first operation mode may differ depending on the stop operation mode, while the result of the second operation mode is the same regardless of the stop operation mode. will win a prize. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted from the stop result when winning as a result of the operation mode, within a range that does not cause a change in the player's profit. Therefore, when setting the game to be predicted, there is no need to consider the ball payout rate, etc., and it is possible to set the game with pure production effects in mind.

Feature CA16. As a result of the operation mode, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode in the first stop order, the symbol combination for the first mode can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means When the second stop operation mode is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, an order correspondence result (for example, a push order bell) that allows the symbol combination for the second mode to be stopped. is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order-corresponding result, the mode notification means provides the mode notification with order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA15, characterized in that the gaming machine can be executed by a predetermined notification means.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above structure, "if each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 3 bets) (9 medals awarded based on winning the first minor prize in the game), and each of the stop operation means sets a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. If the second result winning is achieved through the operation, the second benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on the second small win in a 3-bet game) is awarded;
The mode notification means is configured to provide the predetermined notification as the mode notification, based on the lottery result by the lottery device, order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order. In this case, it is possible to more clearly indicate the relationship between the prize winning result and the privilege awarded.

<Characteristic CB group>
Feature CB1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As the lottery result by the said lottery means,
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. If the operation is performed in a second stop operation mode different from the first mode, the symbol combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result, and a second mode different from the symbol combination of the first mode. A first operation mode result that allows the pattern combination to be stopped (for example, a push order bell);
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode. If the fourth stop operation mode is different from the above, the picture combination corresponding to the third result and the fourth mode different from the third mode can be stopped. The second operation mode result (for example, special replay) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result, the first mode notification (press order notification) regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is a first mode notification means (a function for executing the push order processing by the main controller 101) that can be executed by the notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the instruction monitor 68);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second operation mode result, the second mode notification (push order notification effect) regarding the stop operation mode including the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode is performed. a second mode notification unit (a function for executing a press order notification process by the display control device 81) that can be executed by the second notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65);
Equipped with
a first specific state (advantageous section) in which execution is permitted for both the first mode notification by the first mode notification means and the second mode notification by the second mode notification means;
a second specific state (normal section) in which execution of the first mode notification by the first mode notification means is restricted, while execution of the second mode notification by the second mode notification means is permitted;
is set,
In the second specific state, based on the second mode notification by the second mode notification unit, a suggesting means (execution of special RT notification processing by display control device 81) that suggests an advantage after the second specific state. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means if the rolled number corresponds to a lottery result, a first operation mode result is further set in which the winning result differs depending on the stopping operation mode of the orbiting body. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of the first mode notification when the first operation mode result is won. In addition, a second operation mode result is also set in which the winning result is common depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, so as the first specific state, the second mode notification when the second operation mode result is won is set as the first mode. By generating the information by interweaving it with the notification, it becomes possible to realize a gaming experience that is less gambling-like without excessively changing the advantage.

In such a configuration, between the first mode notification and the second mode notification, execution of the first mode notification is restricted, while a second specific state is set in which execution of the second mode notification is permitted. By setting such a second specific state, it is possible to realize a gameplay that does not cause a change in the advantage level even though the mode notification is performed, and it is possible to realize a gameplay that does not cause a change in the advantage level due to the mode notification. It is possible to contribute to the creation of new gameplay that breaks away from traditional gameplay. However, although players may want to enjoy such new gameplay, it does not mean that they do not want to acquire gaming media, and the reality is that they are still very interested in the advantage. It can be said. Therefore, in the second specific state, if the configuration is such that the mode notification is used to suggest the advantage after the second specific state, a game in which the subsequent development is predicted by the mode notification will be added, and the mode notification It is possible to improve the gameplay in the second specific state in which the advantage level does not change due to the game itself. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature CB2. The first specific state is a state in which at least the frequency of execution of the first mode notification by the first mode notification means can be higher than the normal gaming state,
a first transition lottery means (a function for executing the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition the gaming state to the first specific state;
The notification by the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is started based on winning the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means, and the specific notification is started based on the end of the first specific state. a specific notification execution means (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main controller 101) for terminating the notification by the means;
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is characterized in that even if the player has won the first transfer lottery by the first transfer lottery, the specific notification execution means does not provide notification by the specific notification device in the second specific state. The gaming machine described in feature CB1.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration including the first specific state in which execution of the first aspect notification and the second aspect notification is permitted, and the second specific state in which execution of only the second aspect notification is permitted, the first Since the specific state is set so that the execution frequency of the first mode notification can be higher than in the normal gaming state, the player should play the game while expecting the transition to the first specific state. Conceivable. On that point, if you win the first transition lottery to the first specific state, notification by the specific notification means will start, and when the first specific state ends, notification by the specific notification means will end, so whether or not there is notification by the specific notification means. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the first specific state is reached. By doing this, for example, it is possible to prevent players from ending the game without noticing even though they have won the first transition lottery to the first specific state. It is possible to eliminate the imbalance in profits between the player who finishes the game and the successor player who plays the game after that.

In this way, if a specific notification means is provided that clearly indicates whether or not the first specific state is present, it can be expected to have the effect of ensuring the fairness of the game as described above. Regardless of the occurrence of a performance, the player may end up paying attention only to the specific notification means, and therefore the performance effect may be reduced. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the specific notification means does not notify in the second specific state, the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means, that is, the start of notification of the specific notification means It is possible to prompt the players who have been paying limited attention to the second mode of notification that occurs in the second specific state to shift their attention to the second mode of notification that occurs in the second specific state, and to increase the subsequent advantage based on the second mode of notification. It becomes possible to suitably realize the gameplay of predicting.

Feature CB3. The suggesting means is configured to notify the second mode of the third stop operation mode and the second mode of the fourth stop operation mode after the second specific state. The gaming machine according to feature CB1 or feature CB2, characterized in that the advantages of the two are different.

According to the above configuration, the suggesting means causes a case where a stop operation is performed in the third stop operation mode and the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped, and a case where the stop operation is performed in the fourth stop operation mode and the pattern combination is stopped in the fourth mode. The advantage after the second specific state is different depending on the case where the symbol combination stops. In this way, if the configuration is such that suggestions are made using the stopping result, even if the common third result is winning, interest in the stopping operation will be increased and the subsequent advantage will be predicted. The gameplay can be suitably improved.

Feature CB4. The suggestion means is capable of notifying the second mode of the third stop operation mode and executing a specific effect (background color change) when the picture combination of the third mode is stopped; When the second mode is notified about the stop operation mode and the symbol combination of the fourth mode stops, the specific effect can be executed, and the second mode is notified about the third stop operation mode. and when the symbol combination of the fourth aspect is stopped, the specific effect is not executed, the second aspect of the fourth stopping operation aspect is notified, and the symbol combination of the third aspect is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature CB3, wherein the advantage after the second specific state can be suggested by not executing the specific effect when the second specific state occurs.

According to the above configuration, the suggestion means executes a specific effect as a type of suggestion if a stop operation is performed in accordance with the second mode notification, but does not execute the specific effect if a stop operation is performed without following the second mode notification. . In other words, the configuration is such that the second mode notification and the set of stop rolls match and the suggestion is established. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game that does not follow the second mode notification even if all the winning results are the third results, and it is possible to suitably implement the game using the suggestion means.

Feature CB5. A second transition lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition the gaming state to the second specific state;
As a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, a first result that does not transition to the first specific state after the second specific state (for example, a second BB win, a specific combination that is not won in a bonus or attack mode, etc.); The gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB4, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a second result (for example, winning the first BB) that can transition to the first specific state after the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, there are a pattern in which the second specific state does not transition to the first specific state and a pattern in which the transition to the first specific state occurs after the second specific state. It is also possible to suggest whether or not to move to the first specific state thereafter by using the suggestion by the second mode notification performed in the second specific state. In particular, the first specific state is a state in which both mode notifications are allowed and the degree of advantage changes depending on the mode notification, so it has high affinity with the suggestion made by mode notification (second mode notification). It becomes possible to easily associate the first specific state from the suggestion by the mode notification.

Feature CB6. Feature CB5 is characterized in that the suggesting means is capable of suggesting, as an advantage after the second specific state, whether or not to transition to the first specific state after the second specific state. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature CB5 can be achieved by a specific configuration.

Feature CB7. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which a predetermined number of gaming media are awarded as the benefit by the benefit granting means;
As the gaming state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is higher than in the normal gaming state,
If the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the first result, transition to the third specific state after the second specific state,
Feature CB5 characterized in that when the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the second result, the second specific state is followed by the third specific state, and then the first specific state is entered. Or the gaming machine described in feature CB6.

According to the above configuration, if a winning result is achieved as a result of the payout, a predetermined number of game media will be paid out, so when the third specific state is reached, a large number of game media can be expected to increase. Such a third specific state is caused to occur after the second specific state in both the first result and the second result, and the first specific state is caused to occur after the third specific state depending on the first result and the second result. It is now possible to change whether or not to move to . In this way, no matter which result the transition to the second specific state is based on, at least the third specific state will occur after the second specific state, which will reduce expectations for the second specific state. It becomes possible to increase it further.

Features CB8. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The probability that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means will be the first result may vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means, and the probability that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means will be the second result. The gaming machine according to any one of features CB5 to CB7, characterized in that the probability that the result is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the probability of the first result of not transitioning to the first specific state after the second specific state differs depending on the setting value that causes a change in the increase/decrease rate of game media, etc. The probability of the second result of transitioning to one specific state is the same regardless of the set value. In other words, for the first specific state in which the degree of advantage changes due to the first mode notification (also the second mode notification), the transition probability may be the same regardless of the set value. By doing so, whether or not to shift to the first specific state can be made more dependent on luck, and the fairness of the game based on the first specific state is ensured. On the other hand, if there were no differences due to setting values, it would be difficult to predict which setting value is set, which is the fun of selecting one game machine from among multiple machines installed in a game hall. There is also the possibility that the fun of playing games while doing so may be erased. Therefore, in the above configuration, in the case where the transition to the first specific state does not occur after the second specific state, a difference may occur depending on the set value, so that the fun of playing the game while predicting the set value is not obliterated. Within this range, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game based on the first specific state.

Feature CB9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which a predetermined number of game media are awarded as the benefit by the benefit granting means;
As the gaming state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is higher than in the normal gaming state,
A second transition lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition the gaming state to the second specific state;
As a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, a third result that does not transition to the third specific state after the second specific state (a specific winning combination that does not win a bonus, attack mode, etc.), and the second specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB8, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a fourth result (for example, winning the first BB) that can transition to the third specific state after the state.

According to the above configuration, if a winning result is achieved as a result of the payout, a predetermined number of game media will be paid out, so when the third specific state is reached, a large number of game media can be expected to increase. By setting such a third specific state and having the above configuration, a pattern in which the second specific state does not transition to the third specific state after the second specific state, and a pattern in which the second specific state does not shift to the third specific state after the second specific state Since a pattern of transitioning to the third specific state occurs after , the suggestion by the second mode notification performed in the second specific state can also be used to suggest whether or not to transition to the third specific state afterwards. is also possible.

Feature CB10. Feature CB9 is characterized in that the suggesting means is capable of suggesting, as an advantage after the second specific state, whether or not to transition to the third specific state after the second specific state. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature CB9 can be achieved through a specific configuration.

Features CB11. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result is set in which a replay is awarded as the benefit by the benefit granting means;
The second operation mode result is a specific replay result among the replay results,
As the gaming states, a plurality of re-gaming states are set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined re-gaming result winning is higher than the normal gaming state,
Based on the transition to the second specific state, means (main controller 101).The gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB10.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of replay states are set, a specific replay state among them is set as the second specific state. In the specific re-gaming state, the probability of winning the specific re-gaming result as a result of the second operation mode is high. By using the replay state in this way, it is possible to change the winning probability of the game results without using the so-called jackpot state like the third specific state described above, and when moving to the second specific state, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning as a result of the second operation mode.

Feature CB12. The first operation mode result is such that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result is When the stop operation becomes possible and each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second stop operation means corresponding to the second result The pattern combination of the modes can be stopped,
The second operation mode result is such that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result is When the stop operation becomes possible and each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth stop operation corresponding to the third result The pattern combination of the modes can be stopped,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode or the result of the second operation mode, the first mode notification means is configured to notify the user of the first stop order, the second stop order, or the third stop order. Feature CB1 characterized in that a first order notification (push order notification effect) regarding a stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of CB11 to CB11.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stopping order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be performed as the mode notification. By doing this, for example, even a player who is not good at eye-pressing operations aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In addition, in the above configuration, "the result of the first operation mode is such that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode is When the stop occurs and the first result winning is established, the first benefit (for example, 9 medals awarded based on the first minor win in a 3 bet game) is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and each of the stops When the operating means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the symbol combination of the second mode is stopped and the second resultant prize is won. is established, and the benefit granting means grants a second benefit different from the first benefit (for example, three medals awarded based on winning the second minor role in a 3-bet game);
The result of the second operation mode is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in a third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped and the third result is obtained. A winning is achieved, a third benefit (replay) is awarded by the benefit awarding means, and each of the stop operation means operates in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode. If so, the symbol combination of the fourth aspect is stopped, the third result winning is established, and the third privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode or the result of the second operation mode, the first mode notification means is configured to notify the user of the first stop order, the second stop order, or the third stop order. A first order notification (push order notification effect) regarding a stop order including the stop order and the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the bonus that is awarded.

<Characteristic DA group>
Feature DA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order. and a second result in which a winning is established if the operation is performed in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to seventh display segment N7) is equipped with an order notification means (a function for executing push order processing by the main controller 101),
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 ) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
a first grasping means (number of advantageous section games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state;
a second grasping means (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
A first terminating means for transitioning the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state (normal in the section display second processing by the main controller 101). (a function that executes an end process for an advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end conditions);
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means in the specific gaming state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions ascertained by the second grasping means. , a second ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function for executing processing for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101);
an increasing unit capable of executing an increasing process of increasing the remaining number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times ascertained by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number of times, or When the specific situation is reached by performing the increase processing based on the establishment of the specific condition, it is possible to cause a specific event that is different from the event based on the increase processing and that can be beneficial to the player. Specific event execution means (a function for executing various processes for special notification in a situation where the excess flag is set by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In so-called slot machines in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the orbiting bodies, and whether or not there is an order notification regarding the stopping order. There are specific game states that have different advantages depending on the game. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery to shift to a specific gaming state can be performed, and when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific gaming state, the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state is increased, so-called addition Since this can occur, the gameplay in each game is greatly improved.

However, the original gameplay of a so-called slot machine is to aim at the pattern on the rotating object and stop it in order to obtain a benefit, so if you increase the number of benefits that can be obtained by playing a game using sequential notification, the original The gameplay may become poor, and if a specific game state using order notification can be executed without limit, there is a possibility that the ball payout rate may exceed the ball payout rate intended by the designer. Therefore, in the above configuration, regardless of the remaining number of times in the specific game state, the game ends when the upper limit number of times is reached. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the gaming experience using the sequential notification a gaming experience that is attached to the above-mentioned original gaming experience, and to enjoy both gaming features to the fullest.

However, if the upper limit is specified as described above, in certain situations where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit, no additional charges will occur even if the specific conditions are met. A game in such a situation becomes a so-called digest game, and the fun of the game can be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of executions has already reached the upper limit number of times, or if the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the increase processing (additional processing) is performed. A specific event that is different from the above event and that may be beneficial to the player is caused to occur. By doing this, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that no addition is made or that it is meaningless even if an addition is made, increasing the fun of each game even in the above specific situation. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, interest can be suitably improved.

Regarding the "first result" and "second result", "the first result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the It may be expressed as "a second result in which a winning is established when the stop operation mode is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode". In this case, it is preferable to read and apply "stop order" as "stop operation mode", "order notification" as "mode notification", and "order notification means" as "mode notification means".

Feature DA2. The gaming machine according to feature DA1, wherein the specific event is an event that is not related to the probability of occurrence, frequency of occurrence, or number of occurrences of the order notification.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to further ensure consistency with setting the upper limit number of times and not performing an increase process.

Note that the above configuration can also be expressed as "the probability of occurrence, frequency of occurrence, and number of occurrences of the sequential notification do not change depending on whether the specific event occurs or not."

Feature DA3. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The gaming machine according to feature DA1 or feature DA2, wherein the specific event execution means performs, as the specific event, a suggestion notification that suggests information on a setting value set by the setting device.

According to the above configuration, since the setting value suggestion information is presented as a specific event, the player can use it as a basis for deciding whether to continue playing after the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times and ends. In other words, if it is a suggestion notification indicating a low setting, it can be determined that the game should be ended after the end of the specific gaming state, and if it is a suggestion notification indicating a high setting, it can be determined that the game should be continued even after the specific gaming state ends. This can be said to be beneficial for players who wish to increase the number of game media and also wish to prevent the number of game media from decreasing.

Feature DA4. The gaming machine according to feature DA3, wherein the specific condition has a common probability of being met regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the probability of occurrence of the increase process is the same regardless of the set value. In other words, in a situation where the upper limit number of times has been reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase process occurs with a common probability of occurrence regardless of the setting value, and when it occurs, a notification indicating the setting value is performed. In this way, the element of luck can be strongly involved in the notification of setting value suggestions. As a result, it is possible to avoid problems such as, for example, the higher the setting, the more likely the chance of setting value suggestion notification to occur, and therefore the lower the setting, substantially no suggestion notification occurs.

Furthermore, since the probability of the specific condition being satisfied is the same regardless of the set value as described above, the probability that the specific gaming state will reach the upper limit number of times may be the same regardless of the set value. In other words, the probability of occurrence of a specific situation in which setting value suggestion notification can be made is also the same regardless of the setting value, and the independence of the setting value from being involved in the occurrence rate of setting value suggestion notification can be further enhanced. becomes possible.

Feature DA5. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be established based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined special result,
The probability that the specific condition is satisfied when the increase process is performed differs depending on the type of the special result,
Features DA1 to DA4 characterized in that the type of the specific result that increases the probability that the specific condition is met when the increase process is performed, the higher the probability that the specific condition is met when the specific event occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the probability when a special result is obtained and an increase process is performed is linked to the probability when a special result is obtained and a specific event occurs. By doing so, it is possible to easily make the user understand that a specific event occurs instead of performing an increase process based on a special result. Therefore, for example, in a specific situation, if a special result is won in which an increase process is performed with a high probability, it is possible to increase expectations for the specific event to occur in advance, and the player's mental By making preparations, it is possible to increase the attention to a specific event.

Feature DA6. A plurality of types of predetermined states are set as the specific game state, including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state,
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the probability of establishment is different between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state. can be,
In the specific gaming state, the higher the probability of the specific condition being met when the increasing process is performed, the higher the probability of the specific condition being met when the specific event occurs. A gaming machine described in DA5.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the probability that an increase process will be performed even for the same type of special result changes depending on the type of specific gaming state (predetermined state), the probability when a specific event occurs also changes according to the type of specific gaming state (predetermined state). state) and is linked to the case of increase processing. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it easier for the user to understand that a specific event occurs instead of performing an increase process based on a special result.

Feature DA7. As the specific game state, a special state (VB mode, specialized zone) in which the minimum number of consecutive games is determined is set,
A special transition means (for example, setting a VB notification flag by the main controller 101) for transitioning the specific gaming state to the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special condition during the specific gaming state; processing functions),
The specific event execution means may cause the specific event to occur when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by transitioning to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the features DA1 to DA6.

If a special state is entered during a specific gaming state, the special state will continue for the minimum number of consecutive games. This can be considered to be equivalent to the process of increasing the number of times. In this case, it may be meaningless for the player to shift to a special state in a specific situation or to become a specific situation by shifting to a special state. Therefore, in the above configuration, by treating such a special state as a target of a specific event, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned feeling that it is meaningless.

Feature DA8. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be established based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined special result,
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is such that even if the lottery results by the lottery means are the same type of special results, the special state has a higher probability of being realized than other states in the specific gaming state. This is a configuration in which the
The probability that the specific condition is met when the specific event occurs is also higher in the special state than in other states in the specific gaming state,
The specific event execution means causes the specific event to occur when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by transitioning to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, The gaming machine according to feature DA7, characterized in that transition to the special state is allowed based on the establishment of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which increase processing is more likely to be performed when transitioning to a special state, a specific event is caused when transitioning to a special state in a specific situation, or when transitioning to a special state results in a specific situation. In this case, it is permissible to move to a special state. Therefore, the configuration is such that a specific event occurs during transition to the special state, and further allows the specific event to occur during the special state. In this way, by making the special state a state where it is easy to perform an increase process and a state where a specific event is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent a transition to the special state during a specific gaming state from a specific situation or when the specific situation is approaching. This makes it possible to have something to look forward to even in a difficult situation.

Feature DA9. If the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or if the specific situation is reached by the increase process being performed based on the specific condition being met, or if the increase process is performed based on the specific condition being met. Storage means for storing the number of times information corresponding to the number of times increased to the number of times to be increased in the number of times information storage means (the number of eliminated games EG) (a function that executes the process of adding the number of additional games to the number of eliminated games EG by the main control device 101) Equipped with
According to any one of features DA1 to DA8, the specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the number of times the increase process is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to cause a specific event to occur as compensation for the benefit that should have been obtained through the increase process, such as, for example, the greater the number of times the information is, the more likely the specific event is to occur.

Feature DA10. The number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means is stored at least until the specific gaming state in which the specific event occurs transitions to the normal gaming state, and the number of times information is stored in the number of times information storage means. If the specific condition is newly established in the specific situation in a situation where It is possible to update the stored number information by adding the number information corresponding to the number of times to be increased when the increase processing is performed,
The specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means when transitioning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described in Features DA9.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied multiple times in a specific situation, the information on the number of times when the increase process is performed is accumulated, and based on the total number of times information, a specific event occurs at the end of the specific gaming state. . By doing this, in the configuration of feature DA9, even if the information on the number of times each specific condition is satisfied is small, if the specific condition is satisfied multiple times, it is possible to cause a specific event, and it is possible to cause a specific event to occur. It can maintain a sense of expectation.

In particular, if a specific situation occurs relatively early after entering a specific gaming state, a game in which the number of executions of the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit, that is, a game that can be a so-called exhaustion game, is played over a long period of time. That will happen. In this regard, by creating a configuration in which a specific event can occur through the accumulation of multiple increase processes, as in the above configuration, the more games that can become the digestion game, the more likely the specific event will occur, making it feel like a digestion game. can be suppressed.

Feature DA11. The specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event each time based on the establishment of the specific condition, and is capable of changing the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state by the second ending device. The gaming machine according to feature DA10, characterized in that, based on the transition, it is possible to cause the specific event to occur based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means.

According to the above configuration, a specific event occurs every time the specific condition is satisfied, and at the end of the specific gaming state, the specific event can occur depending on the integrated value when the increasing process is performed. By doing this, you can enjoy both the effect of not getting bored with a specific gaming state by causing a specific event to occur each time, and the effect of making the specific gaming state enjoyable for a long period of time by satisfying a specific condition multiple times. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature DA12. The specific event execution means is capable of causing the specific event based on the fulfillment of the specific condition during the normal gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state in which the specific condition was satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA11.

According to the above configuration, it is also possible to carry over the establishment of a specific condition during a specific gaming state as a specific event to the normal gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. Since the specific event is different from the increase processing, the event in the specific gaming state is carried over to the normal gaming state to the extent that it does not contradict the meaning of forcibly terminating the specific gaming state by the upper limit number of times. It becomes the composition. By doing so, the interlock between the specific game state and the normal game state is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature DA13. If the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or if the specific situation is reached by the increase process being performed based on the specific condition being met, or if the increase process is performed based on the specific condition being met. a means for storing information corresponding to the number of games to be increased in a predetermined information storage means (number of extinguished games EG) (a function for executing a process of adding the number of additional games to the number of extinguished games EG by the main control device 101); ,
At least when the second ending means causes the specific gaming state to transition to the normal gaming state, an initial state in which an initialization process for initializing specific information related to the order notification used during the specific gaming state can be executed. initialization means (a function for executing initialization processing by the main controller 101);
When the initialization process is performed by the initialization means, means for restricting the information stored by the information storage means from being initialized (the number of extinguished games is set in the normal section area in the main control device 101); (a function that executes the process of storing data in the specified area),
The gaming machine according to feature DA12, comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the specific gaming state is terminated when the number of executions in the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit, the specific information related to order notification is initialized, so the specific gaming state is forced to be terminated. The effect of feature DA11 can be maintained while preventing the occurrence of so-called consecutive games in which the player enters the specific gaming state again based on the information in the specific gaming state that was forcibly ended even though the game has ended in the specific gaming state. It is possible to expect.

Feature DA14. The increase process can be performed even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or even if the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the specific condition being satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA13.

In the above configuration, it is made clear that even if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation or a specific situation is reached due to an increase process based on the establishment of a specific condition, the increase process itself is not restricted. Ru. In other words, for example, in a configuration in which execution of processes related to predetermined order notifications, including increase processes, is restricted in a normal game state that is not a specific game state, the increase process related to the above-mentioned specific situation is not subject to that restriction. is clarified. However, as mentioned above, even if the increase processing is performed in the above situation, it may become meaningless due to the upper limit of the number of times, and by causing a specific event in such a situation, the excellent effect of feature DA1 can be achieved. You can expect it.

Feature DA15. Based on the transition of the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8), and the specific gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. A specific game state notification means that terminates the notification by turning off the specific notification means based on the transition to the state (a function of executing the first section display process to the fourth section display process by the main controller 101) Equipped with
The specific gaming state notifying means is characterized in that even if the second ending device causes the specific gaming state to transition to the normal gaming state, the specific gaming state notifying means ends the notification by turning the specific notifying device into the light-off state. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA14.

According to the above configuration, the notification by the specific notification means is started when the normal gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, and the notification ends when the specific gaming state ends and shifts to the normal gaming state. In other words, by checking the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a specific gaming state is entered. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between a player who finishes playing a game and a player who takes a seat at the gaming machine after finishing the game. Therefore, it becomes possible for all players to equally enjoy the game to the fullest based on the special notification.

In particular, even when a specific gaming state reaches the upper limit and transitions to the normal gaming state, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so the player is informed that the specific gaming state has ended, that is, under certain conditions in a specific situation. It is possible to clearly understand that the increase process was not performed even if . In this case, even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, it is difficult to enjoy the afterglow of the end of the specific gaming state, since the notification by the specific notification means is strictly terminated. On that point, if the configuration is such that a specific event can occur as in feature DA1, even if the configuration allows the specific notification means to clearly understand that the specific gaming state has been forcibly terminated, the specific event may , it is also possible to enjoy a lingering sound based on the fulfillment of specific conditions.

Feature DA16. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order. and a second result in which a winning is established if the operation is performed in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to seventh display segment N7) is equipped with an order notification means (a function for executing push order processing by the main controller 101),
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 ) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
a first grasping means (number of advantageous section games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state;
a second grasping means (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
A first terminating means for transitioning the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state (normal in the section display second processing by the main controller 101). (a function that executes an end process for an advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end conditions);
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means in the specific gaming state has reached a predetermined upper limit, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions ascertained by the second grasping means. , a second ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function for executing processing for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101);
an increasing unit capable of executing an increasing process of increasing the remaining number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times ascertained by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number of times, or Specific event execution means (main controller 101), and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the orbiting bodies, and whether or not there is an order notification regarding the stopping order. There are specific game states that have different advantages depending on the game. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery to shift to a specific gaming state may be performed, and if a specific condition is satisfied during a specific gaming state, an increase process for the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state, a so-called addition Since this can occur, the gameplay in each game is greatly improved.

However, the original gameplay of a so-called slot machine is to aim at the pattern on the rotating object and stop it in order to obtain a benefit, so if you increase the number of benefits that can be obtained by playing a game using sequential notification, the original The gameplay may become poor, and if a specific game state using order notification can be executed without limit, there is a possibility that the ball payout rate may exceed the ball payout rate intended by the designer. Therefore, in the above configuration, regardless of the remaining number of times in the specific game state, the game ends when the upper limit number of times is reached. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the gaming experience using the sequential notification a gaming experience that is attached to the above-mentioned original gaming experience, and to enjoy both gaming features to the fullest.

However, if the upper limit is specified as described above, in certain situations where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit, no additional charges will occur even if the specific conditions are met. A game in such a situation becomes a so-called digest game, and the fun of the game can be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of executions has already reached the upper limit number of times, or if the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the increase processing (additional processing) is performed. A specific event that is different from that occurs. By doing this, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that no addition is made or that it is meaningless even if an addition is made, increasing the fun of each game even in the above specific situation. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, interest can be suitably improved.

Regarding the "first result" and "second result", "the first result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the It may be expressed as "a second result in which a winning is established when the stop operation mode is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode". In this case, it is preferable to read and apply "stop order" as "stop operation mode", "order notification" as "mode notification", and "order notification means" as "mode notification means".

<Feature DB group>
Feature DB1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) are set, in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low.
a first grasping means (number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the high advantageous state;
a second grasping means (number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state;
A first terminating means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state (normally in the section display second processing by the main controller 101) (a function that executes an end process for an advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end conditions);
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means in the high advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions ascertained by the second grasping means. , a second ending means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
a specific information grasping means for grasping specific information (total number of games) corresponding to the gaming situation of the day (a function for executing processing for grasping the total number of games in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
Suggestion notification execution means (a function for executing processing for performing a fourth special notification by the display control device 81) for executing a suggestion notification suggesting information on the setting value set by the setting means;
Equipped with
The suggestion notification execution means is capable of executing the suggestion notification based on the specific information grasped by the specific information grasping means when the second termination means causes the state to shift from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state ends based on the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state, and Since there is a case where the process ends based on reaching the upper limit number of times, the degree of advantage of a high advantageous state is suppressed from becoming extremely high. However, it is thought that the player would like the highly advantageous state to continue for a long time, and it is preferable that the highly advantageous state be forcibly terminated even if there is a remaining number of times based on reaching the upper limit number of times. Moreover, if the highly advantageous state is forcibly terminated, it is thought that the player's intention to continue playing the game may be extremely reduced. Therefore, when such a high advantageous state is forcibly terminated, a suggestion of a setting value that causes a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of gaming media is made to be notified, for example, when a high setting value is forcibly terminated. It becomes possible to motivate the player to continue playing by giving a suggestion or the like.

On the other hand, depending on the situation where the high advantageous state has reached the upper limit number of times, the above-mentioned setting value suggestion notification may not only motivate the player to continue playing, but may even motivate him to end the game. That is, for example, if the situation in which the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times is a situation such as a situation where the game hall has just opened, and the above-mentioned high setting suggestion notification is performed, the game that is played on the game machine in question is Although this may motivate the player to continue playing, other gaming machines may be judged to have low settings in relation to the high setting of the other gaming machine, and may be motivated to end the game. There is a possibility that it will be added. For example, in a situation where the high advantageous state has reached the upper limit number of times and the game hall is about to close, it is possible to simply notify the setting value suggestion rather than to motivate people to continue playing or to end the game. There may be cases where it is better to do so. Therefore, in a situation where the high advantageous state has reached the upper limit number of times, the high advantageous state is forcibly terminated by making a configuration in which a setting value suggestion is notified after taking into account specific information corresponding to the gaming situation of the day. In this case, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in the player's intention to continue playing.

Feature DB2. comprising a specific execution means for executing a specific process regarding the continuation rate or number of continuations of the high advantageous state (for example, a function of executing a process for adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
The gaming machine according to feature DB1, wherein the specific execution means executes the specific processing regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, while the specific processing regarding the continuation rate and the number of continuations is executed regardless of the setting value, when the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times and ends as a result of the specific processing, the setting value suggestion may occur. . In this case, the fact that the high advantageous state has reached the upper limit number of times has a strong element of luck and has nothing to do with the level of the set value, but when the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times, a large amount of gaming media has been acquired. Under such circumstances, it is considered that the player tends to predict a set value higher than the actual set value. However, even if the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times, due to the fact that a large amount of gaming media has been required up to that point, even if you have acquired a large amount of gaming media by the time the upper limit is reached, the same day's Depending on the gaming situation, the total ball payout rate may not necessarily be high. Therefore, regarding the above-mentioned high advantageous state, by taking into account the game situation and giving a suggestion of the setting value at the time of forced termination, the suggestion of the setting value can be made to reflect the impression that the player has about the gaming media he has acquired. It can be used to support the continuation of the game at the time of forced termination.

In addition, for more details about the "specific execution means", for example, "a system capable of executing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition from the low advantageous state to the high advantageous state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition" Transition lottery means (a function for executing mode lottery processing by the main control device 101)", for example, "increase means capable of executing an increase process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition. (a function of executing the process of adding up the number of games by the main control device 101)" or, for example, "a means capable of executing the lottery for ending the high advantageous state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition." .

Furthermore, the "specific execution means" may be expressed as "a means for executing the specific processing with a uniform probability regardless of the level of the setting value set by the setting means" or "the It may be expressed as ``the specific process is executed with a common probability regardless of the level of the setting value set by the setting means'', or ``the specific process is executed with a common probability regardless of the level of the setting value set by the setting means''. Regardless, the result of the specific processing is the same.''

Feature DB3. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping, as the specific information, the total number of times the game has been executed among the gaming conditions on the day;
The suggestion notification executing means is configured to determine whether the total number of executions ascertained by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined specific number (2000 If the total number of executions exceeds the specific number of times, the execution probability of the suggestion notification is lower than that of the specific number of executions, or the suggestion notification executed when the total number of executions is less than or equal to the specific number of times is lower than the probability of execution of the suggestion notification. The feature DB1 or the feature DB2 is characterized in that the suggestion notification is executed in a manner that makes it more difficult for a player to predict the setting value than the suggestion notification that is executed when a specific number of times is exceeded. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when comparing the case where the total number of executions is less than a certain number of times and the case where the total number of executions exceeds a certain number of times, in the former case, it is more difficult to execute the setting value suggestion notification, or even if it is executed, the setting value The situation may be difficult to predict. Therefore, even if the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times in a situation where the number of times is less than a specific number, it is difficult to narrow down the set value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the setting value is determined soon after the opening of the gaming hall and the operating rate of the gaming machine or other gaming machines decreases.

Feature DB4. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping time information as the specific information among the gaming conditions of the day,
The suggestion notification executing means is configured to set the time information grasped by the specific information grasping means at a predetermined specific time (13:00 ), if the time information is after the specific time, the execution probability of the suggestion notification is lower than if the time information is after the specific time, or the suggestion notification is executed when the time information is before the specific time. Features DB1 to DB3 are characterized in that the suggestion notification is executed in a manner that makes it more difficult for the player to predict the set value than the suggestion notification executed after the specific time. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, when comparing cases where the forced termination time is before a specific time and cases where the time is after the specific time, in the former case, it is more difficult to execute the setting value suggestion notification, or Even if the setting value is set, it may be difficult to predict. Therefore, even if the highly advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times in a certain situation before a specific time, it is difficult to narrow down the set values. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the setting value is determined soon after the opening of the gaming hall and the operating rate of the gaming machine or other gaming machines decreases.

In particular, by adding the above configuration to the feature DB 3, setting values can be suggested according to the operation start time of the day. Specifically, for example, in the feature DB 3, if the start of operation on the day is late, it may be determined that the specific number of times has been exceeded at a later stage than when the specific number of times has been exceeded after starting from the morning. In this case, the setting value suggestion may not be as intended by the designer. Therefore, by combining the configuration of the feature DB 4 with the configuration of the feature DB 3, it becomes possible to generate suggestion notification of setting values as intended by the designer.

Feature DB5. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping, as the specific information, at least one of the total number of executions from power-on or time information among the gaming conditions of the day;
The suggestion notification executing means is configured to determine whether the total number of executions ascertained by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined specific number of times (2000 times) or below, or if the time information is the first specific situation before a predetermined specific time (13:00), the total number of executions exceeds the specific number of times, or the time information is after the specific time. The execution probability of the suggestion notification suggesting a low setting is higher than in the second specific situation, or the suggestion notification executed in the first specific situation is more likely to be executed in the second specific situation. The feature DB1 is characterized in that the suggestion notification is executed in such a manner that it is easier for the player to predict the low setting value as a prediction of the setting value, rather than the suggestion notification executed in A gaming machine described in any one of DB4.

According to the above configuration, when the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times and is forcibly terminated at a relatively early stage from the opening of the game hall, the suggestion notification that makes it easy to narrow down to a low setting is executed. A situation in which the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times at a relatively early stage is considered to be a situation in which a large amount of gaming media is obtained and the total ball output rate is high. It is thought that there is a tendency for players to easily predict high setting values, and there is a high possibility that they will continue playing even if a setting value suggestion notification that makes it easy to narrow down to a low setting is made as described above. It will be done. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which suggestion notifications of setting values on the low setting side are made in anticipation of such situations, the appearance rate can be balanced with the notification notification of setting values on the high setting side without causing a decrease in the operating rate. can be kept.

Feature DB6. The suggestion notification execution means is
As the suggestion notification of the setting value, a suggestion notification information group in which information corresponding to multiple types of suggestion notifications is stored is used to select information corresponding to one suggestion notification from the suggestion notification information group, and select the information corresponding to one suggestion notification from the suggestion notification information group. The configuration is configured to execute the suggestion notification based on information corresponding to the suggestion notification made,
When the second termination means causes the state to transition from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state, the suggestion notification information group used in the first specific situation and the suggestion notification information group used in the second specific situation. , the suggestion notification is executed in such a manner that the execution probability of the suggestion notification suggesting the low setting is increased or the setting value of the low setting is easily predicted. A gaming machine described in Featured Features DB5.

According to the above configuration, the configuration of the feature DB 5 can be realized with a simple configuration such as switching of a group of suggestion notification information, that is, a table used for suggestion notification.

Feature DB7. A transition means (by the main controller 101) capable of shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a predetermined transition result (second BB). with the ability to perform bonus status processing),
The increase rate of game media in each game is configured to be higher during the special game state than during the high advantage state,
The special gaming state is set to be transferable even during the high advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB6, wherein the first grasping means grasps the number of times the game has been executed, including the number of times the game has been executed during the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, a special gaming state is set as a so-called jackpot state in which the rate of increase in gaming media is high, and the number of games in the special gaming state is also taken into account in the number of executions, so the high rate of increase until the upper limit is reached is set. If a special gaming state intervenes in an advantageous state, the final number of game media acquired may be greater than if a special gaming state does not intervene. That is, in a highly advantageous state where an upper limit number of times is set, the final number of game media acquired when the high advantageous state ends is diversified depending on the upper limit number of times. By doing this, when the high advantageous state ends due to the upper limit number of times, for example, if the number of acquisitions is large, a high setting is predicted, and if the number of acquisitions is small, a low setting is predicted. Adds the fun of predicting the set value at the end.

Feature DB8. The gaming machine according to the feature DB 7, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result winning can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DB 7, the number of acquisitions at the time of forced termination of a high advantageous state can actually vary depending on the set value. This makes it possible to increase the significance of notifying a setting value suggestion at the time of forced termination.

Feature DB9. The specific information grasping means is capable of grasping, as the specific information, the total number of times the game has been executed among the gaming conditions on the day;
The total number of executions is initialized when the setting value set by the setting means is changed, but is not initialized when the gaming machine is powered on or off. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics DB1 to DB8.

According to the above configuration, the total number of executions as the game status reflected in the suggestion notification at the time of forced termination is not initialized by power on or power off, but is initialized by the setting value change process. Therefore, if the power is turned on and off without changing the set value at the time of closing or opening of the game hall, the total number of executions from the previous day will be carried over. As a result, it becomes possible to play a game in which the setting value is predicted not only from the setting value suggestion notification but also from factors such as whether or not the setting value has been changed, and the gameplay is greatly improved.

Feature DB10. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order. and a second result in which a winning is established if the operation is performed in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to seventh display segment N7) is equipped with an order notification means (a function for executing push order processing by the main controller 101),
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 ) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
Equipped with
The low advantageous state is the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB9, wherein the high advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a lottery and the orbiting body starts to circulate, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means if the stopping result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the rotating bodies, and it is difficult to notify the order regarding the stopping order. A specific gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of the game. If the configuration related to setting value suggestion according to the gaming situation in the feature DB 1 is applied to a gaming machine having such a configuration, the subsequent operation rate when the specific gaming status reaches the upper limit number of times can be suitably adjusted. I can do it.

In particular, compared to a special gaming state that involves a transition of gaming states, that is, a jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific gaming state is more difficult for players depending on the presence or absence of notifications when winning sequential results, the frequency of notifications, the manner of notifications, etc. The degree of advantage changes. In such a configuration, there is a high degree of freedom in setting continuation conditions compared to a system that has a one-to-one correspondence with gaming results such as transition of gaming states, and the number of times a specific gaming state can be continued is strictly defined. It is easy to realize a game feature that is not controlled, that is, a game feature that makes it fun to see how long a specific game state will last. On the other hand, in such a game, if the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit and ends, it is thought that the player's intention to continue playing thereafter may decrease, and there is a concern that the operating rate may decrease. In this regard, by applying the configuration of the feature DB 1 to such gaming machines, it is possible to enjoy the continuity of a specific gaming state and to continue playing the game even after the number of continuations reaches the upper limit. It becomes possible to motivate them to continue.

<Characteristic DC group>
Feature DC1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order. and a second result in which a winning is established if the operation is performed in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to seventh display segment N7) is equipped with an order notification means (a function for executing push order processing by the main controller 101),
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 ) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
A specific ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined ending condition (a function of executing an advantageous section ending process in the second section display process by the main controller 101) and,
Specific storage means capable of storing specific information used in the specific gaming state and related to the order notification (processing for storing information corresponding to various areas for advantageous sections in the RAM 106 by the main controller 101) function) and
A normal storage means capable of storing normal information that can be used even in a state other than the specific gaming state and is not involved in the order notification (stores information corresponding to various areas for normal sections in the RAM 106 by the main controller 101) functions) and
When the specific termination means causes the specific gaming state to transition to the normal gaming state, initialization means capable of executing the initialization process of the specific information stored in the specific storage device (section display number by the main controller 101) 2 function to execute initialization processing during processing),
Regarding a specific event that occurs during the specific gaming state (for example, an opportunity to increase the number of games in a situation where the excess flag is not set), the specific storage means uses information corresponding to the specific event (number of additional games) as the specific information. a first means capable of executing a storage process to store the number of games (a function of executing a process of adding the number of additional games to the corresponding number of continuations in the number of games addition process by the main control device 101);
Regarding the specific event that occurs during the specific gaming state (for example, an opportunity to increase the number of games in a situation where an excess flag is set), information corresponding to the specific event (number of eliminated games) is stored as the normal information. a second means (a function for executing a process of adding the number of additional games to the number of extinguished games in the number of games addition process performed by the main control device 101) capable of executing a storage process of storing the second means in the means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the orbiting bodies, and whether or not there is an order notification regarding the stopping order. There are specific game states that have different advantages depending on the game, which improves the gameplay of each game.

However, the original gameplay of a so-called slot machine is to aim at the pattern on the rotating object and stop it in order to obtain a benefit, so if you increase the number of benefits that can be obtained by playing a game using sequential notification, the original The gameplay may be neglected, and if the success rate of a particular game state using order notification is increased, and the particular game state can be executed unlimitedly, the ball payout rate may exceed the designer's intention. There is also a possibility that the ball will be rolled out. Furthermore, if you improve the performance of consecutive games in a specific gaming state, it will become more likely that even if you think that the specific gaming state has ended and you end the game, the specific gaming state actually continues. Fairness between a player who ends the game and a successor player who takes a seat at the game machine where the game ended may not be guaranteed.

Therefore, in the above configuration, at the end of the specific gaming state, the specific event in the specific gaming state is configured to be initialized for the specific storage means that stores it as specific information related to sequence notification. The successive winning performance of the state is not increased too much, and it is possible to eliminate the sense of unfairness between players.

However, if the above configuration is used, the impression that the gameplay of the specific gaming state and the gaming nature of the normal gaming state are separate gaming properties becomes strong, and the interlocking nature of these two gaming states decreases, which makes it difficult to see the total There is also concern that the gameplay may deteriorate. Therefore, in the above configuration, with respect to a specific event during a specific gaming state, the second means is provided for storing the information not as specific information but as normal information not related to sequence notification. It becomes possible to carry over information on a specific event in a specific gaming state to the normal gaming state as information different from sequential notification. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the successive game performance of a specific gaming state from becoming too high, and to enhance the interlocking nature of the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state while ensuring equality among players. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature DC2. a specific storage area (various areas for advantageous sections in the RAM 106) corresponding to the specific storage means;
a normal storage area (various areas for normal sections in the RAM 106) corresponding to the normal storage means;
is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature DC1, wherein the specific storage area and the normal storage area are each set as non-overlapping storage areas.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DC1, the locations where each piece of information is stored are physically different, so that, for example, the normal information in the normal storage means is initialized during initialization processing. Errors such as this become less likely to occur, and events such as specific information remaining without being initialized even after a specific gaming state ends are also less likely to occur.

Feature DC3. Using the normal information corresponding to the specific event stored in the normal storage means by the second means, after the specific gaming state in which the specific event occurred, a special notification is issued by the specific notification unit. The gaming machine according to feature DC1 or feature DC2, characterized in that it is equipped with an executable special notification means (a function of executing special replay notification processing by display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, since the special notification for the specific event that occurred during the specific gaming state is executed after the specific gaming state ends, the interlock between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state is This can be achieved through directing.

Feature DC4. When the specific event occurs, selection means selects which of the first means and the second means is to perform storage processing (a process for determining whether an excess flag is set in the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to any one of features DC1 to DC3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions.

According to the above configuration, information regarding a specific event is stored as either specific information or normal information. By doing this, both pieces of information are not stored redundantly, so it is possible to reduce the storage capacity, and when the normal information based on a specific event is inherited at the end of a specific game state, the specific information is related This can reduce the possibility that the data will be inherited (the possibility that it will not be initialized due to some inconvenience).

Feature DC5. an increase determination means (main player) capable of executing an increase determination as to whether or not to execute an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (specific combination); (a function of executing a game number addition lottery process by the control device 101);
An increase processing means capable of executing the increase processing of the remaining number of games (a function for executing the game number addition processing by the main control device 101) based on the determination result by the increase determination means that the increase processing is to be executed. )and,
Equipped with
The selection means is
As the specific event, if the determination result by the increase determination means is that the increase process is to be executed, selecting to execute the storage process by the first means;
As the specific event, if the determination result by the increase determination means is that the increase processing is not to be executed, the storage processing by the second means is selected to be executed, as described in feature DC4. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, when it is determined as a specific event whether or not to increase the number of consecutive games in a specific gaming state, when it is determined that the number of consecutive games is to be increased, the specific information related to order notification is Storage processing is performed by the first means, and if it is determined that the number of consecutive games is not to be increased, storage processing is performed by the second means as normal information not involved in order notification. Based on the premise that it would be advantageous for the player to increase the number of consecutive games in a specific gaming state, and that the player would like the increase process to be performed, information that the determination had an unfavorable result for the player. is stored as normal information and can be carried over until after the specific gaming state. By doing this, the information corresponding to the profits that could not be fully enjoyed in the specific gaming state can be carried over to the normal gaming state without carrying over the profits in the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and By making it appear as if profits can be enjoyed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to enhance the interlocking nature between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state.

Feature DC6. If a predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination result by the increase determination means is that the increase process is to be executed, or the restriction means is capable of executing a restriction process that restricts the execution of the increase process. (a function of executing processing for setting an excess flag by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to feature DC5, wherein the selection means selects so that the storage processing is performed by the second means based on the restriction processing being performed by the restriction means.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination result by the increase determination means is to execute the increase process, and the execution of the increase process itself is restricted. Even if the lottery result becomes a specific result, there is no benefit for the player during the specific gaming state, and rather, it is a disappointing result that the player should have gotten the specific result in a situation where the predetermined conditions were not met. It can be. In this regard, in the above configuration, the information about the disappointing result is stored so that it is carried over to the normal gaming state, so even if the disappointing result occurs, the specific gaming state ends. It can create a sense of expectation that some kind of benefit may be obtained later.

Feature DC7. a first grasping means (number of advantageous section games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state;
a second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of games (number of games remaining in advantageous section ZG);
Equipped with
The specific termination means is
A first terminating means for transitioning the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state (normal in the section display second processing by the main controller 101). (a function that executes an end process for an advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end conditions);
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means in the specific gaming state has reached a predetermined upper limit, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions ascertained by the second grasping means. , a second ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function for executing processing for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
The predetermined condition is characterized in that the predetermined condition is established when the sum of the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means and the remaining number of times ascertained by the second ascertaining means reaches the upper limit number of times. A gaming machine described in DC6.

In the above configuration, a specific gaming state may end based on the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, or may end based on reaching the upper limit number of times, and the predetermined condition in feature DC5 is based on the number of executions. The configuration is established when the total with the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number of times. That is, when a situation arises in which the number of remaining games cannot be expected to increase any further even if the increase process is performed, the storage process by the second process is performed based on the specific result that becomes the trigger for the increase process. For players who want to play as many games as possible in a specific gaming state, it is thought that they want an increase process to be performed in each game in the specific gaming state, that is, they want the game result to be a specific result. , when the number of remaining games cannot be expected to increase even if the increase processing is performed, interest in the playing results of the game in the situation decreases, interest in the specific gaming state itself decreases, and the degree of attention to the game decreases. may drop significantly. On that point, as in the above configuration, even in such a situation, when a specific result is won, memory processing is performed by the second means, thereby eliminating the possibility of a meaningless specific result winning. It becomes possible to take over the information after a specific gaming state, and it is possible to make a specific result meaningful in that situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameplay during a specific gaming state.

Feature DC8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result in a situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second means determines that the determination result by the increase determination means is that the increase process is to be executed. The gaming machine according to feature DC6 or feature DC7, characterized in that a specific number of times the remaining number of times is increased in the increase processing when the number of times remaining is increased is used as the normal information, and a storage process is executed to store it in the normal storage means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result is won when the predetermined condition is met, the specific number of times that should have been increased in the increase process is stored as normal information as is. By doing so, when the storage processing is performed by the second means instead of the first means, special processing such as information conversion processing is not required, and effects such as feature DC6 can be achieved with a simple configuration. You can expect it.

Feature DC9. In the normal gaming state, a special state (special section) is set in which a predetermined special notification can be executed,
When the specific gaming state is transferred to the normal gaming state by the specific ending device, a device capable of transferring the specific gaming state to the special state (a function for executing a process of setting a special section flag by the main controller 101);
Means for selecting the number of executions of the special state based on information on the specific number of times the storage process has been performed by the second means (corresponding to the number of special section games PG based on the special section table by the main controller 101) function that executes the process of inputting values), and
The gaming machine according to feature DC8.

According to the above configuration, when the specific gaming state is transferred to the normal gaming state, the transition may be made to a special state in which a special notification can be executed, and the number of executions of the special state is stored by the second means. It is determined by the information on the specific number of times that the Therefore, the information that the increase process was not performed during the specific gaming state will be carried over as information about the continuity of the special state in which special notification is performed, and the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state will be changed to the special state. It can be linked via.

Feature DC10. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The gaming machine according to feature DC9, wherein the special notification is a suggestion notification as information on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, instead of the increase processing not being performed during the specific gaming state, the suggestion notification can be executed after the specific gaming state. Assuming that the player desires a high setting, the setting value suggestion notification will be useful information for the player, and by presenting such useful information, the increase processing will be performed. It becomes possible to compensate for something that is not available.

Feature DC11. As a lottery result by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order, a third specific symbol combination is stopped and a third resultant prize can be established, and each of the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stopping order that is different from the third stopping order, a fourth specific symbol combination that is different from the third specific symbol combination stops, and the third result winning can be achieved. The second order corresponding result (for example, special replay) is set,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a second order notification (push order notification effect) regarding the stop order including the third stop order and the fourth stop order is sent to a specific notification means (auxiliary display) as the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature DC9 or feature DC10, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a second order notification means (a function of executing special replay notification processing by display control device 81) that can be executed in section 65).

According to the above configuration, if the result corresponding to the second order is such that the stopping result differs depending on the stopping order but the benefit obtained does not change, the first order causes a change in the advantage even if it is performed during the normal gaming state. A specific gaming state in which notification (order notification of feature DC1, referred to as first order notification in relation to the above configuration, and order corresponding result of feature DC1 is also referred to as first order corresponding result) is specified for a specified upper limit number of times. Special notifications can be realized by notifications using the stop result, within the scope of the intended meaning.

Feature DC12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result, a winning notification means (display control) that can notify the special result winning notification on the special notification means (for example, the auxiliary display section 65). (a function of executing a bonus winning notification effect by the device 81);
A game number setting means for setting the number of winning notification games from the game in which the special result is won to the game for which the winning notification is made by the winning notification means (executing a lottery process for the number of portent games by the display control device 81) function) and
Equipped with
Any of the features DC9 to DC11, characterized in that the winning notification game number set by the game number setting means is more likely to be shorter when the special notification is performed than when the special notification is not performed. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, it is preferable for players who want to know the special result winnings as soon as possible to set a short number of winning notification games by performing special notification, and from that point of view, increasing processing is performed during a specific gaming state. It becomes possible to compensate for not doing so.

<Characteristic DD group>
Feature DD1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) are set, in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low.
a first grasping means (number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the high advantageous state;
a second grasping means (number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state;
A first transition means for transitioning the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state (normally in the section display second process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes an advantageous section termination process based on the fulfillment of the termination condition);
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means in the high advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions ascertained by the second grasping means. , a second transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
an increasing unit capable of executing an increasing process of increasing the remaining number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that can perform an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65); (a function of executing an additional notification effect by the display control device 81);
When the increase processing is performed in a situation where the sum of the number of executions ascertained by the first ascertaining means and the remaining number as ascertained as the second ascertaining means has reached the upper limit number of times; Specific notification execution means (display of the number of special games in the third special notification setting process by the display control device 81 (a function that executes update processing of the section), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state ends based on the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state, and Since there is a case where the process ends based on reaching the upper limit number of times, the degree of advantage of a high advantageous state is suppressed from becoming extremely high. In such a configuration, there is a so-called additional function in which the remaining number of highly advantageous states is increased when a specific condition is met, and expectations for the specific condition to be met are heightened.

On the other hand, if a game in which the specific conditions are met is played before the total number of executions and the remaining number of runs reaches the upper limit, it may be preferable for the player as described above, but the total number of runs may not reach the upper limit. After that, no matter how many times a specific condition is met, the high advantage will end when the upper limit is reached, so interest in the success or failure of the specific condition will decrease, and the number of times until the upper limit is reached There is a possibility that the game will become a so-called digest game, and the level of attention to the game will be extremely reduced.

In this regard, in the above configuration, even after the total has reached the upper limit number of times, a specific notification is made regarding the excess amount when the increase processing is performed. The system is purposely designed to inform the player of the number of times he or she has not been able to fully receive the benefit. In other words, even if an increase process is performed, the upper limit will mean that there was no increase process, so normally it would be better not to notify about the increase process, but this is intentionally done. By making this notification, the benefits that would have been obtained if the increase processing had exceeded the upper limit will be calculated, or some kind of compensation will be provided for not being able to receive the benefits. It is possible to create a sense of expectation that the event will take place. In other words, the reverse idea of not hiding the fact that one cannot enjoy the benefits of increased processing, but daring to make it clear, evokes feelings different from the feeling of loss caused by not being able to enjoy the benefits. It is possible to improve the gameplay in a situation where the upper limit number of times has been reached.

Feature DD2. The specific notification execution means is capable of notifying the number of times corresponding to the excess amount as the specific notification, and reports the number of times in a manner that can be understood as a number different from the remaining number of times. The gaming machine described in DD1.

It is also possible to add the excess amount to the remaining number of times and display it on the same number display, but in the above configuration, by displaying these separately, it is easier to understand the excess amount. However, since the excess amount is displayed separately, it is possible to create a strong impression that some kind of compensation will be provided for the excess amount.

Feature DD3. When performing the increasing process, the increasing means selects one number of times using a number information group in which plural types of number of times information are stored, and increases the remaining number of times by the selected number of times. ,
The specific notification executing means selects one number of times as the number of times of excess by using the number of times information group or an information group in which the same type of number of times information as the said number of times information group is stored, and The gaming machine according to feature DD1 or feature DD2, wherein the increase notification corresponding to the number of times can be executed as the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification is used to determine the number of notifications in the specific notification, so the excess amount if the increase processing is performed is clearly explained. You can make them understand. Furthermore, if the same information group is used to determine the number of times, there is no need to store a dedicated information group, which can contribute to reducing storage capacity.

Feature DD4. The specific notification execution means is
Information on a predetermined number of times can be reported as the number of times corresponding to the excess amount,
By performing the increase notification corresponding to the selected number of times, the selected number of times can be added to the predetermined number of times information, and then the predetermined number of times information can be updated and notified. The gaming machine described in feature DD3.

According to the above configuration, when an increase process exceeding the upper limit number of times is performed multiple times, the number of times corresponding to each increase process is accumulated and notified. By doing this, even after the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of executions reaches the upper limit, it is possible to add the reported excess amount and increase it. By gradually increasing the number of times, it can create a sense of expectation that the compensation that will be provided will become more generous.

Feature DD5. special notification execution means capable of executing a predetermined special notification based on the number of times of excess in the specific notification by the specific notification execution unit (function of executing a third special notification setting process by the display control device 81); The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD4.

According to the above configuration, special notification is executed as compensation for the excess amount. For example, if the configuration is such that useful information is presented to the player by the special notification, the player will be satisfied with the special notification, and even if the information is not useful, the player will be satisfied. Even if the notification is, for example, a flashy performance, seeing the flashy performance can compensate in no small part for the player's sense of loss due to the fact that the increase processing was not performed.

Feature DD6. The special notification execution means is characterized in that it is capable of executing the special notification as a transition notification (attack mode end performance) when the second transition unit causes the high advantageous state to transition to the low advantageous state. The gaming machine described in feature DD5.

According to the above configuration, the transition notification when the high advantageous state ends becomes a special notification, and the excess amount is reflected. In the transition notification when a high advantageous state ends, the number of game media acquired during the high advantageous state, the number of continued games, etc. are generally notified, and the excess amount is By reflecting this, it becomes easier to associate how many more games would have been continued if there was no upper limit, or the number of game media acquired if there was no upper limit. In addition, when taking a photo of such a transition notification, the excess information will be reflected, and it will be more fun to report to a friend based on the photo taken, for example. Even when reviewing it later, it is possible to immerse yourself in the memories.

Feature DD7. Feature DD5 or The gaming machine described in feature DD6.

According to the above configuration, the excess amount of the high advantageous state can be reflected in the low advantageous state instead of the high advantageous state. Therefore, by using the excess amount, it is possible to enhance the interlocking effect between the highly advantageous state and the low advantageous state.

Feature DD8. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
According to any one of features DD5 to DD7, the special notification execution means is capable of executing, as the special notification, a suggestion notification that suggests information on the setting value set by the setting means. Game machine.

Based on the premise that the player desires a high setting, notification of a setting value suggestion can be useful information for the player. Therefore, as described above, if the setting value suggestion notification is made based on the excess amount, it is possible to predict that the setting value suggestion will be made based on the excess amount notified by specific notification, and When a set value is suggested, it is possible to realize a game in which the set value is predicted, and it is possible to increase interest in the specific notification that is the starting point of the game.

Feature DD9. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order. and a second result in which a winning is established if the operation is performed in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to seventh display segment N7) is equipped with an order notification means (a function for executing push order processing by the main controller 101),
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 ) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
Equipped with
The low advantageous state is the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD8, wherein the high advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a lottery and the orbiting body starts to circulate, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means if the stopping result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the rotating bodies, and it is difficult to notify the order regarding the stopping order. A specific gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of the game. If the configuration regarding the specific notification of feature DD1 is applied to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the gameplay after the sum of the number of executions and the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times can be suitably improved. I can do it.

In particular, compared to a special gaming state that involves a transition of gaming states, that is, a jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific gaming state is more difficult for players depending on the presence or absence of notifications when winning sequential results, the frequency of notifications, the manner of notifications, etc. The degree of advantage changes. In such a configuration, there is a high degree of freedom in setting continuation conditions compared to a system that has a one-to-one correspondence with gaming results such as transition of gaming states, and the number of times a specific gaming state can be continued is strictly defined. It is easy to realize a game feature that is not controlled, that is, a game feature that makes it fun to see how long a specific game state will last. On the other hand, it can be said that the problem described in feature DD1 is likely to occur when an upper limit is set for such gameplay. In this regard, by applying the configuration of feature DD1 above to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy the continuity of a specific gaming state while improving the gameplay when it is determined that the number of continuations reaches the upper limit. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

<Characteristic DE group>
Feature DE1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) are set, in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low.
a first grasping means (number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the high advantageous state;
a second grasping means (number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state;
A first transition means for transitioning the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state (normally in the section display second process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes an end process for an advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end conditions);
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means in the high advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions ascertained by the second grasping means. , a second transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
an increasing unit capable of executing an increasing process of increasing the remaining number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that can perform an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65); (a function of executing an additional notification effect by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means is capable of executing the increase notification for an increase in the special number of times, which is part or all of the number of times increased by the increase process, in a game subsequent to the game in which the increase process was performed. It has a post-notification execution means (a function to execute post-add effect setting processing by the display control device 81),
The sum of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of runs grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit number of times, and the post-notification execution means relates to the increase processing. In a specific situation where there is an unreported portion as the special number of times (a situation where the excess flag is set and the post-addition flag is set), if the specific condition is met, within the range of the unreported portion, the A first special notification execution means (a function for executing a first special notification setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a first special notification (pseudo additional notification) as an increase notification by the predetermined notification means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state ends based on the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state, and Since there is a case where the process ends based on reaching the upper limit number of times, the degree of advantage of a high advantageous state is suppressed from becoming extremely high. In such a configuration, there is a so-called additional function in which the remaining number of highly advantageous states is increased when a specific condition is met, and expectations for the specific condition to be met are heightened. Furthermore, even if the remaining number of times is increased, some or all of the remaining times may not be reported immediately, so it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation for a long time when certain conditions are met. .

On the other hand, if a game in which the specific conditions are met is played before the total number of executions and the remaining number of runs reaches the upper limit, it may be preferable for the player as described above, but the total number of runs may not reach the upper limit. After that, no matter how many times a specific condition is met, the high advantage will end when the upper limit is reached, so interest in the success or failure of the specific condition will decrease, and the number of times until the upper limit is reached There is a possibility that the game will become a so-called digest game, and the level of attention to the game will be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, even after the above-mentioned total reaches the upper limit number of times, if there is an unreported portion of increase processing, that unreported portion is used and the number of times of the unreported portion is within the range of Since the configuration is such that the increase notification can be executed within the game, it is possible to give the impression that the remaining number of games has increased without causing a discrepancy between the increase notification and the number of consecutive games in a highly advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably play the game after the total number of times reaches the upper limit.

Feature DE2. When performing the increasing process, the increasing means selects one number of times using a number information group in which plural types of number of times information are stored, and increases the remaining number of times by the selected number of times. ,
The first special notification execution means selects one number of times as the number of times of the unreported portion using the number information group or an information group in which the same type of number information as the number information group is stored, and The gaming machine according to feature DE1, characterized in that it is possible to execute the first special notification as the increase notification corresponding to the number of times the increase notification has been made.

According to the above configuration, the number of times to be notified in the first special notification is determined using the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification, so even if the upper limit has been reached, the actual This can strengthen the impression that increased processing is being carried out. Furthermore, if the same information group is used to determine the number of times, there is no need to store a dedicated information group, which can contribute to reducing storage capacity.

Feature DE3. Feature DE2 is characterized in that the first special notification execution means is capable of notifying the unreported number of times as the first special notification if the selected number of times exceeds the unreported number of times. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, while enjoying the advantage of the first special notification that the increase notification is performed within the range of the unreported amount, it is expected that the configuration related to the number of times selection will be simplified and the effect will be similar to the actual increase processing. be able to.

Feature DE4. In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second special notification (pseudo additional notification) as the increased notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means, exceeding the range of the unreported portion. special notification execution means (a function for executing the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81);
By performing the second special notification by the second special notification execution unit, a granting unit capable of granting a special benefit different from the benefit based on the increase processing being performed (by pseudo additional notification by the display control device 81) function to suggest setting values),
The gaming machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE3.

According to the above configuration, the second special notification as an increase notification that exceeds the range of the number of times of the unreported portion is performed while assuming the first special notification as the increased notification that is within the range of the number of times of the unreported portion. Since a special benefit is granted that is different from the increase processing, even if there is a discrepancy between the increase notification and the number of consecutive games with a high advantage, it will lead to a happy event for the player, and the number of executions and remaining games will be different. It becomes possible to enhance the gameplay after the total with the number of times reaches the upper limit.

In particular, the second special notification is executed on the condition that there is an unreported portion of the increase process, so if there is no unreported portion, that is, the sum of the execution number and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number. The second special notification is given not after the player realizes that the player has reached the goal, but before the player realizes that the player has reached the goal. By doing this, the second special notification will exceed the expectations of the players who wish to increase the number of times until the above-mentioned total reaches the upper limit, and if the second special notification is performed, It can increase your happiness. In other words, in a situation where the player knows that the above-mentioned total has already reached the upper limit number of times, it is considered that the player's interest shifts from the increase processing to the provision of special benefits. In this case, even if a special benefit is given in such a situation, it would be difficult to provide more pleasure than the special benefit. Therefore, in a situation where the user desires something different from the special benefit (increase processing), by providing the special benefit along with the increase processing, it becomes possible to provide more pleasure than the special benefit.

Feature DE5. The second special notification execution means is capable of executing, as the second special notification, the increased notification by adding a predetermined specific number of times (10 times, 56 times, 77 times) to the number of unreported portions. The gaming machine according to feature DE4.

The unreported number of times is the number of executions subtracted from the upper limit number of times in a high advantageous state by the number of executions and the number of times reported out of the remaining number of times. Each time the number of times increases, the number of unreported times decreases, and the special number of times also changes depending on the ratio of unreported times by the post-notifying means. Then, in a configuration where a special benefit is granted by notifying an increase in the number of times that has been increased by adding a specific number of times to the number of unreported times, as in the above configuration, the special benefit will be granted. The number of notifications will change depending on the progress of the game. By doing this, it is possible to make the increase notification that triggers the granting of special benefits difficult to understand at first glance, and it is possible to make it difficult for players who are playing the game machine in question and are aware of the gaming situation, It is possible to make the ease of noticing that a special benefit is given different depending on the other person who is viewing the special benefit. In other words, by making it easy for the player playing the game machine to notice that a special benefit is given, and making it difficult for others to notice, the advantage of the player playing the game machine is increased. can be guaranteed.

Feature DE6. The second special notification execution means is capable of executing the increased notification by adding a first specified number of times (10 times) as the specified number of times to the number of times of the unreported portion, and On the other hand, the increase notification can be performed by adding a second specific number of times (56 times, 77 times) different from the first specific number of times as the specific number of times,
The content of the special benefit granted by the granting means is different depending on whether the increase notification is performed by adding the first specific number of times and the case where the increase notification is performed by adding the second specific number of times. The gaming machine according to feature DE5.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature DE5, the number of increase notifications for which special benefits will be granted is more diversified, and furthermore, which special benefits will be granted is also complicated. The advantage of the players playing on the gaming machine can be further secured.

Feature DE7. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101);
In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second special notification (pseudo additional notification) as the increased notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means, exceeding the range of the unreported portion. special notification execution means (a function for executing the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81);
By performing the second special notification by the second special notification execution unit, a granting unit capable of granting a special benefit different from the benefit based on the increase processing being performed (by pseudo additional notification by the display control device 81) function to suggest setting values),
Equipped with
According to any one of features DE1 to DE6, the granting means is capable of granting the special benefit by executing a suggestion notification indicating information on the setting value set by the setting means. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the second special notification as an increase notification that exceeds the range of the number of times of the unreported portion is performed while assuming the first special notification as the increased notification that is within the range of the number of times of the unreported portion. Since a special benefit is granted that is different from the increase processing, even if there is a discrepancy between the increase notification and the number of consecutive games with a high advantage, it will lead to a happy event for the player, and the number of executions and remaining games will be different. It becomes possible to enhance the gameplay after the total with the number of times reaches the upper limit.

In particular, the second special notification is executed on the condition that there is an unreported portion of the increase process, so if there is no unreported portion, that is, the sum of the execution number and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit number. The second special notification is given not after the player realizes that the player has reached the goal, but before the player realizes that the player has reached the goal. By doing this, the second special notification will exceed the expectations of the players who wish to increase the number of times until the above-mentioned total reaches the upper limit, and if the second special notification is performed, It can increase your happiness. In other words, in a situation where the player knows that the above-mentioned total has already reached the upper limit number of times, it is considered that the player's interest shifts from the increase processing to the provision of special benefits. In this case, even if a special benefit is given in such a situation, it would be difficult to provide more pleasure than the special benefit. Therefore, in a situation where the user desires something different from the special benefit (increase processing), by providing the special benefit along with the increase processing, it becomes possible to provide more pleasure than the special benefit.

In the above configuration, in particular, setting value suggestion information is presented as a special benefit. In other words, by making the second special notification that exceeds the range of the unreported amount, information on the set value is presented, so the player has a strong influence on whether or not to continue playing after the high advantage state ends. It can be used as material for making decisions.

Moreover, if the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit and ends, it is considered to be a situation in which a large amount of gaming media has been acquired, and even if information indicating a low setting is presented, a large amount of gaming media will be acquired. Therefore, there is a high possibility that it will be determined that the setting is high, and it is thought that if the game is continued, it will be more likely to be determined that the setting is high. Therefore, compared to, for example, a configuration in which a setting value is suggested when the upper limit number of times is not reached, an effect can be expected in which the setting value is suggested and the criteria for determining whether to continue the game are relaxed for the continuation side.

Feature DE8. The gaming machine according to feature DE7, wherein the probability of the specific condition being satisfied is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition that is satisfied with the same probability of being satisfied regardless of the setting value is established, and the second special notification is made to notify the user more than the upper limit number of times, the setting value is suggested. By doing so, it is possible to make the players aware of the importance of the setting value, even if the setting value has little to do with the high advantage situation, and it is possible to make the player aware of the importance of the setting value, and to make it possible to play games from multiple gaming machines installed in the gaming hall. It is possible to provide the fun of selecting a game machine to play.

Feature DE9. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a winning is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first stop order. and a second result in which a winning is established if the operation is performed in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, order notification (press order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment on the instruction monitor 68). N1 to seventh display segment N7) is equipped with an order notification means (a function for executing push order processing by the main controller 101),
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 ) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
Equipped with
The low advantageous state is the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE8, wherein the high advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a lottery and the orbiting body starts to circulate, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means if the stopping result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stopping order of the rotating bodies, and it is difficult to notify the order regarding the stopping order. A specific gaming state is provided as a highly advantageous state in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of the game. If the configuration related to the first special notification of feature DE1 is applied to a gaming machine having such a configuration, the gameplay after the total number of execution times and remaining times of the specific advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times can be suitably improved. can be done.

In particular, compared to a special gaming state that involves a transition of gaming states, that is, a jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific gaming state is more difficult for players depending on the presence or absence of notifications when winning sequential results, the frequency of notifications, the manner of notifications, etc. The degree of advantage changes. In such a configuration, there is a high degree of freedom in setting continuation conditions compared to a system that has a one-to-one correspondence with gaming results such as transition of gaming states, and the number of times a specific gaming state can be continued is strictly defined. It is easy to realize a game feature that is not controlled, that is, a game feature that makes it fun to see how long a specific game state will last. On the other hand, it can be said that the problem described in feature DE1 is likely to occur by setting an upper limit on the number of times the game can be played. In this regard, by applying the configuration of feature DE1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy the continuity of a specific gaming state while also improving the gameplay when it is determined that the number of continuations reaches the upper limit. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

<Characteristic EA group>
Feature EA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
A lottery is held based on a lottery result by the lottery means during the specific gaming state, and the specific notification means (auxiliary display section 65) can notify a specific notification corresponding to a predetermined specific lottery result. Equipped with a specific notification execution means (for example, a function to execute setting processing of additional effects by the display control device 81),
The specific notification execution means is
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the first notification means (which can execute the specific notification in the first mode (in the case of an additional performance, the execution timing of the immediate performance); (a function of executing processing for causing the display control device 81 to generate an additional notification effect in an additional winning game);
When the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, the specific notification is set in a second mode (in the case of an additional effect) that is different from the first mode. , a second notification means (a function for executing processing for causing the main control device 101 to generate an additional notification effect in a game subsequent to the additional winning game), which is executable at the execution timing of the additional effect.
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is awarded by a privilege awarding means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, the first result may be a winning result or the second result may be won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means that stops the orbiting body. Results such as winning a prize are set, and there are cases where notifications are made regarding these stop operation conditions, creating a gameplay that changes the presence or absence of winning depending on the presence or absence of notification of the conditions, thereby creating a gaming experience in which the degree of advantage varies. Ru.

Here, in a configuration in which the increase/decrease rate and manner of increase/decrease in game media are managed by set values set by a setting means, it is common to vary the probability of a lottery by the lottery means depending on each set value. On the other hand, when creating the above-mentioned gameplay, if differences are set based on setting values such as the presence or absence of mode notification, probability of transition to a specific gaming state, continuity, etc., there will be too many parameters with different settings. As a result, there is a possibility that the increase/decrease rate of game media and the range of upward/downward fluctuations in the increase/decrease manner may increase due to overlapping of the upward and downward deviations of each parameter. On the other hand, if a configuration is adopted in which no difference is provided based on the set value in the game during the specific gaming state, the enjoyment during the specific gaming state may be reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the mode of notification of the results of a specific lottery executed during a specific gaming state (specific notification) is configured to vary depending on the setting value, so that the ball payout rate is less likely to be affected by the setting value. It is possible to create differences in gameplay depending on the set value within the range. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing." In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Feature EA2. The specific notification execution means is configured to send, as the specific notification, a first specific notification that the specific lottery has been won (additional notification performance in the immediate play performance in the zone, and first post-ride character BUP1 or the like in the late play performance in the zone). (display of the second pick-up character BUP2) and a second specific notification regarding the content in the case of winning the specific lottery (notification of the number of games in the additional play in the zone immediate play performance, special notification in the zone late play performance) notification of the number of additional games at the end of the zone), and
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific manner, and executes the second specific notification in the first manner,
The gaming machine according to feature EA1, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific mode and executes the second specific notification in the second mode. .

According to the above configuration, the specific notification includes the first specific notification that a specific lottery related to a specific gaming state has been won, and the second specific notification related to the winning content of the specific lottery, and the first specific notification The notification is executed in a common manner (specific manner) regardless of the setting value, and the second specific notification is executed in a different manner depending on the setting value. Therefore, while ensuring that the likelihood of an event such as ending a game without realizing that one has won a specific lottery does not vary depending on the setting value, the setting value differs depending on the execution mode of the second specific notification. It is possible to realize a gameplay that reflects this in the performance (a gameplay that allows you to predict and understand the set value).

Feature EA3. When the first set value is set by the setting means, the increase rate of game media is higher than when the second set value is set,
The gaming machine according to feature EA2, wherein the first mode is set at a timing earlier than the second mode.

According to the above configuration, the higher the set value increases the rate of increase in game media, the earlier the execution timing of the second specific notification becomes. Assuming that players desire a setting value that increases the increase rate and preferentially selects a gaming machine with such a setting value, the specific lottery It is preferable that the second specific notification as the winning content is executed as soon as possible. In this way, the setting value can be predicted and understood using the execution timing of the second specific notification.

Here, in a game where such setting values are predicted and grasped, if the predicted and grasped setting values are unfavorable for the player (in the above example, it is the second setting value), the player's There is a possibility that the desire to play games will decrease rapidly. In this respect, in the above configuration, even if it is predicted and understood by the second specific notification that the second setting value is unfavorable for the player, it is possible that the player won the specific lottery by the first specific notification before that. Since the first specific notification makes the player even slightly happy, the second specific notification is given, and it is possible to alleviate the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Feature EA4. The specific lottery is executed based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a specific result (specific combination),
The specific results include at least a first specific result (watermelon) and a second specific result (cherry),
The ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed by the first notification means and the case where the specific notification is performed by the second notification means is defined as a notification ratio (immediate boarding/later boarding ratio), and the notification when the specific notification is the first setting value. The notification ratio difference, which is the difference between the ratio and the notification ratio when the second set value is the second setting value, is different between the specific notification based on the first specific result and the specific notification based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features EA1 to EA3.

According to the above configuration, regarding the notification ratio when specific notification is performed in the first mode and in the second mode, the notification ratio when the specific notification is the first setting value and the notification ratio when the second setting value is used. The notification ratio difference with the ratio is different between the case of the first identification result and the case of the second identification result. For example, if the notification ratio difference between specific notifications based on the first specific result is larger than the notification ratio difference based on the second specific result, in a game where the setting value is predicted and grasped, the specific notification based on the first specific result is better. This can be a more powerful basis for prediction and understanding than the specific notification based on the second specific result. In this way, by making the ease of prediction and understanding different depending on the type of specific result, we can increase interest in the specific result that triggers specific notification, and increase the attention to the lottery results of each game. It becomes possible to suitably increase the amount.

Feature EA5. The lottery result by the lottery means is set so that the probability that the lottery result is the second specific result is higher than the probability that the lottery result is the first specific result,
Feature EA4 is characterized in that the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first identification result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second identification result. The game machine described.

Based on the premise that the larger the difference in notification ratio is, the more powerful the basis for predicting and understanding the setting value, the first specified result with a low probability of winning can have a larger difference in notification ratio than the second specified result. Therefore, the specific notification based on the first specific result can be a more effective basis for predicting and understanding the set value. Therefore, it is possible to create the benefit of winning the first specific result with a low probability of winning in addition to the benefit of the specific lottery based on the first specific result or the benefit of winning the specific lottery. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the first specific result of winning.

In addition, if the benefit from a specific lottery is a benefit related to the ball payout rate, such as a benefit related to continuity during a specific gaming state, by providing the benefits through notification as described above, the ball payout rate will be increased. It becomes possible to provide an advantage from a different perspective than the rate, and it is possible to increase the advantage of obtaining the first specified result while avoiding a rise in the ball payout rate.

Feature EA6. A first specific gaming state (specialized zone triggered by a cherry) and a second specific gaming state (specialized zone triggered by a specific role other than cherry) are set as gaming states in the specific gaming state,
In the first specific gaming state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result. Ori,
In the second specific gaming state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be smaller than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to feature EA4 or feature EA5.

According to the above configuration, the notification ratio difference based on the first specific result and the second specific result is reversed between the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. That is, in the first specific gaming state, the effect of feature EA5 is achieved, and in the second specific gaming state, when the second specific result with a high winning probability is a win, it becomes easier to predict and understand the set value. Therefore, the second specific gaming state is a state where it is easier to predict and understand the set value than the first specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy a game in which the set value is predicted and grasped from the viewpoint of which specific game state will be entered, and through the diversification of the game, the interest is increased.

Feature EA7. The lottery result by the lottery means is set so that the probability that the lottery result is the second specific result is higher than the probability that the lottery result is the first specific result,
The gaming machine according to feature EA6, further comprising means for shifting to the second specific gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result.

According to the above configuration, when the first specified result has a low probability of winning, the game may shift to the second specified gaming state in which it is easy to predict and understand the set value. By doing this, it becomes possible to provide benefits based on the first specific result winning not only from the perspective of specific notification based on the winning, but also from the perspective of transitioning to a specific gaming state, and It becomes possible to further improve the superiority of the results.

Feature EA8. In any one of features EA4 to EA7, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific result and the probability that the second specific result is the same regardless of the gaming state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize gameplay using the first specific result and the second specific result without changing the lottery probability by the lottery means. Therefore, for example, there is no need to change the lottery table, and compared to a configuration that can be applied only in limited situations such as a jackpot situation where the probability of winning a small winning combination is different from the normal gaming situation, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned gameplay. The degree of freedom is greatly improved.

Feature EA9. As the first aspect, the first notification means executes the specific notification in a game in which the specific lottery is held;
The game according to any one of features EA1 to EA8, wherein the second notification means executes the specific notification in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific lottery was held, as the second aspect. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the difference in the aspect between the specific notification by the first notification means and the specific notification by the second notification means is the difference in the aspect in different games. By doing this, there will be a difference in whether the results of a specific lottery will be announced in that game or in a later game, and the difference in notification format will improve the gameplay. It is possible to enjoy it for a long period of time.

Feature EA10. means for grasping the number of remaining games in the specific gaming state (number of games remaining in advantageous section ZG);
Means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state (an advantageous section based on the normal end condition being satisfied in the section display second process by the main controller 101) function to execute termination processing),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features EA1 to EA9, wherein the specific lottery is a lottery related to an increase process that increases the remaining number of times.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery is a lottery related to an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times of a specific gaming state, that is, an additional lottery. In terms of gameplay, which is advantageous for the player due to the notification of the mode in the specific gaming state, it is more advantageous to continue the specific gaming state for a long time, and such an increase in the remaining number of times can be said to be a favorable phenomenon for the player. In particular, after transitioning to a specific gaming state, players will likely play the game with the hope that the specific gaming state will continue for a long time, so it can be said that the specific lottery regarding the increase processing is a lottery that attracts a lot of interest from players. In addition, by configuring the execution mode of the specific notification regarding the process of increasing the remaining number of times to be different depending on the setting value, it is possible to make the players pay great attention to the difference in the execution mode, and the winning probability of the increase process. etc., it is possible to have fun while associating setting values and increase processing without actually setting differences.

Feature EA11. The specific notification execution means is configured to send, as the specific notification, a first specific notification that the increase process is to be performed (additional notification performance in the zone immediate ride performance, first post-ride character BUP1, etc. in the zone later pick-up performance, (display of the second post-ride character BUP2), and a second specific notification regarding the number of increases in the remaining number of times when the increase process is performed (indication of the number of games in the additional performance in the immediate play performance in the zone, notification of the number of games in the additional performance when the increase process is performed, In terms of production, it is possible to notify the number of additional games at the end of the specialized zone),
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific manner and executes the second specific notification in the first manner,
The gaming machine according to feature EA10, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific mode and executes the second specific notification in the second mode. .

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the configuration is provided with a first specific notification indicating that the number of additional games has been won (increase processing) in a specific gaming state, and a second specific notification regarding the number of additional games. The specific notification is executed in a common manner (specific manner) regardless of the setting value, and the second specific notification is executed in a different manner depending on the setting value. Therefore, after making the player happy through the first specific notification that adds up, the second specific notification regarding the number of additional games is made in a different manner, and the second specific notification is This will be done in a situation where interest in the announcement has been heightened in advance. In other words, it is thought that the difference in the notification mode will give a big impression to the players who are waiting for the moment, and the merits of setting different settings for the notification mode of the second specific notification can be more effectively utilized. becomes possible.

Feature EA12. The first notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in a game in which the specific lottery was held, and executes the second specific notification as the first mode in the game in which the specific lottery was held. and run
The second notification means executes the first specific notification in a game in which the specific lottery was held as the specific mode, and executes the first specific notification in a game after the game in which the specific lottery was held as the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature EA10 or feature EA11.

According to the above configuration, when an additional notification (specific notification) is performed by the first notification means, notification of an additional winning in a game in which a specific lottery was held (first specific notification) and notification of the number of additional games are provided. (Second specific notification) is performed, resulting in a so-called immediate notification. On the other hand, when an additional notification (specific notification) is made by the second notification means, notification of an additional winning in the game in which the specific lottery was held (first specific notification) is performed, and in the subsequent game, an additional notification is made. A number of notifications (second specific notifications) are performed, resulting in so-called post-address notifications. In this way, by configuring the immediate payout notification and the postpaid payout notification in the add-on notification to be different depending on the set value, the game It becomes possible to involve the set value in addition of the number.

Feature EA13. means for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific gaming state (number of advantageous section games AG);
Means (main controller 101 function to forcibly terminate the advantageous section in the section display second process);
Equipped with
The ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed by the first notification means and the case where the specific notification is performed by the second notification means is defined as a notification ratio, and the notification ratio when the specific notification is the first setting value and the second setting value. The gaming machine according to any one of features EA10 to EA12, wherein the notification ratio difference, which is the difference from the notification ratio in the case of , differs depending on the number of executions.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that an upper limit number of times is set for the specific gaming state, the first setting value is set regarding the notification ratio between when the specific notification is performed in the first mode and when the specific notification is performed in the second mode. The difference in the notification ratio between the notification ratio when this is the second setting value and the notification ratio when the second set value is the second setting value varies depending on the number of executions of the specific gaming state, and the difficulty level of predicting and grasping the setting value changes. For example, if there is still room for the number of games up to the maximum number of games, the player may wish to add more games; Even if a number of players are added to the game, they do not feel very happy, and in fact, they think that they have lost money when the number of players exceeds the upper limit. In this regard, by using the above configuration, by varying the difficulty level of predicting and understanding the set value in relation to the number of games remaining until the upper limit, the joy when the additional value occurs can be increased by such prediction and understanding. This makes it possible to compensate from the viewpoint of ease of use.

Feature EA14. A number display means capable of displaying a number display corresponding to the remaining number of times on a predetermined display means (a function for executing processing for displaying a display corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81),
Any one of features EA10 to EA13, characterized in that whether the specific notification is performed by the first notification means or the second notification means differs depending on the number of times displayed by the number of times display. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, whether the specific notification as the additional notification is performed in the first mode or the second mode differs in relation to the display of the number of times corresponding to the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state. In the case of an additional win as a special lottery, for example, in a situation where the number of times displayed is small, the player will feel relieved as the number of times displayed is increased due to the number of times displayed, and conversely, in a situation where the number of times displayed is large, the player will feel relieved. Depending on the situation, you may feel that it is better to have a sense of superiority that the potential remaining number of times is greater than the number of times displayed, rather than having the number of times displayed increase immediately. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the manner of the additional notification is made to differ depending on the number of times displayed, thereby creating a performance that takes advantage of the difference in emotions caused by the above-mentioned addition. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effective performance that attracts players.

Feature EA15. an award determination means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes an award determination as to whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the occurrence of a determination opportunity;
A benefit that allows a player to be granted a benefit corresponding to the granting response result based on the fact that the granting determination result by the granting determination means is a granting response result that corresponds to granting the benefit to the player. A granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media based on the judgment result by the provision judgment means, and one of the setting values of the plurality of levels is set. A setting means to be set (a function for executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
A specific determination means (a determination made by the main controller 101) that executes a determination that is executed based on the determination result by the provision determination means and has a common winning probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. 1 specific winning combination processing to 2nd specific winning processing);
A specific notification execution unit (executing an additional effect setting process by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination unit on a predetermined specific notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65) function) and
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the first notification means (which can execute the specific notification in the first mode (in the case of an additional performance, the execution timing of the immediate performance); (a function of executing processing for causing the display control device 81 to generate an additional notification effect in an additional winning game);
When the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, the specific notification is set in a second mode (in the case of an additional effect) that is different from the first mode. , a second notification means (a function for executing processing for causing the main control device 101 to generate an additional notification effect in a game subsequent to the additional winning game), which can be executed at the execution timing of the additional effect.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a setting value is set that causes a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of game media based on the determination result by the provision determination means, such a setting value does not affect the winning probability determined by the specific determination means. Although not included, it does affect the manner of execution of specific notification as result notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination means, and the manner of execution differs depending on whether it is the first setting value or the second setting value. By doing this, regarding the specific judgment executed based on the judgment result by the grant judgment means, it is possible to associate the set value and the specific judgment without making a difference based on the setting value regarding the winning probability. Become.

Here, players who wish to increase the number of game media are considered to search for a game machine with better setting values and play the game, and therefore, the player who wants to increase the number of game media is likely to search for a game machine with better setting values and play the game. It can be said that by providing this, it is possible to make the game more interesting. On the other hand, if we create a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of suggestion effects differs depending on the set value, the suggestion effect itself will not occur or will be difficult to occur depending on the set value, and the suggestion effect that has been prepared will not be effective. A situation may arise where the setting value is not used, and for example, in order to provide a suggestion effect such as confirming that a predetermined setting value is present when it appears, it is necessary to separately prepare a suggestion effect for the predetermined setting value. On that point, in the above configuration, regarding the specific notification that functions as a suggestive performance, the winning probability of the specific judgment that is the trigger does not vary depending on the setting value, so the occurrence rate of the specific notification is also the same. Since the setting values can be the same and only the execution mode of the specific notification is different, there is no need to prepare separate specific notifications for each setting value. Therefore, it is possible to carry out the suggestion effect more simply and effectively, and it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Note that the "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing." In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Note that each of the configurations of the features DA1 to DA14 described above may be applied individually to the feature DA15, or each configuration may be applied in combination. In this case, it is preferable to apply the terminology between the structures as appropriate, such as by replacing the "granting determination means" in the feature DA15 with "lottery means".

<Feature EB group>
Feature EB1. Specific determination means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 to third specific combination processing by the main control device 101 function to execute specific role processing),
Event execution means for executing the specific event based on the judgment result by the specific judgment means being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific event (a function for executing processing for adding the number of games by the main control device 101, etc.) and,
A specific notification execution means (an additional effect by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification that the specific event has been executed or a specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event using the specific notification device (auxiliary display section 65). function to perform configuration processing), and
A frequency grasping means for grasping the number of times of the specific event (a function for executing processing for managing the watermelon later loading counter and the watermelon immediate loading counter by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The specific notification execution means is
a first notification execution means capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing (a function of executing processing for performing an immediate ride effect in the zone in the display control device 81);
a second notification execution means capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing that is later than the first timing (a function that executes processing for performing a mid-zone later pick-up effect in the display control device 81);
A selection means (display) for selecting a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means. (a function of executing a process of selecting an additional notification timing table according to the table counter ATK in the control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs due to winning in the specific determination, the player can understand the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if the specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is a jackpot notification, and the player can fully enjoy the jackpot and feel a sense of superiority through the jackpot notification.

Here, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs, even if the degree of advantage of that specific event does not change each time it occurs, the player's emotions when the specific event occurs may vary each time it occurs. It is thought that significant changes will occur. Specifically, it is thought that people will be very happy about the occurrence of the specific event the first time it occurs, but after that, they will get used to it and will not feel as much joy as they did the first time it occurred. It is thought that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the above configuration, by making the execution timing of the specific notification for the occurrence of the specific event different each time the occurrence occurs, it is possible to realize the specific notification in accordance with the subtle changes in the player's performance each time the event occurs. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature EB2. The gaming machine according to feature EB2, wherein the selection means is more likely to select such that the first notification execution means performs the specific notification as the number of times ascertained by the number of times recognition means is smaller.

According to the above configuration, the smaller the number of occurrences of a specific event that is advantageous to the player, the earlier the notification is performed. As a player who is looking forward to whether or not an advantageous specific event will occur, it would be preferable for the notification to be made early. It is thought that when a specific event is reported at an unexpected timing, people feel more joy because they are not expecting it. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it becomes possible to suitably realize specific notification according to the player's emotions, which can change each time the game occurs.

Feature EB3. The number of times grasping means is configured to calculate a first specific event number, which is the number of times of the specific event for which the specific notification was executed by the first notification execution means, out of the number of times of the specific event, or the second notification. A specific number grasping means for grasping either one of the second specific event frequency, which is the number of times the specific event has occurred for which the specific notification has been executed by the execution means (for example, when the display control device 81 displays a watermelon immediately (a function that executes processing to manage counters),
The selection means executes a plurality of notifications, including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means, according to the first specific event count or the second specific event count grasped by the specific frequency grasping unit. The gaming machine according to feature EB1 or feature EB2, characterized in that the notification execution means for executing the specific notification is selected from among the means.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the next specific notification is selected based on the number of times the specific notification is executed at the first timing (or the second timing), rather than simply the number of times the specific event is executed. In this case, for example, if a number of executions have been executed at the first timing, the second timing is more likely to be selected next time, or the first timing is more likely to be selected next time. It becomes possible to determine the execution timing of a new specific notification by taking into consideration the timing of the specific notification, and it is possible to skillfully adjust subtle differences in the impression given to the player by the execution timing of the specific notification.

Feature EB4. The first identification is grasped by the specific number of times grasping means based on the fact that the specific notification has been executed by a different notice execution means than the specific announcement by the notification execution means of the side that is grasped by the specific number of times grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature EB3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means (a function for executing the process of step S10806 by the display control device 81) capable of initializing the number of events or the second specific number of events.

According to the above configuration, for example, when the specific number grasping means grasps the first specific event number, when the first notification execution means executes the specific notification, the first specific event number is incremented by 1; When the second notification execution means executes the specific notification, the first specific event count is initialized (reset). In other words, the number of times grasped by the specific number of times grasping means is the consecutive number of times the specific notification has been executed by the first notification execution means, or the consecutive number of times the specific notification has been executed by the second notification execution means. As a result, the execution timing of the specific notification is determined according to the number of times it is grasped, for example, if the specific notification at the first timing is consecutive, the specific notification at the first timing is more likely to be performed. Then, you can make a decision based on the number of consecutive runs up to that point.

Feature EB5. A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101),
The selection means is capable of selecting the notification execution means for executing the specific notification based on the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means and the set value set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features EB1 to EB4.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification changes depending on the setting value that causes a change in the increase/decrease rate and the increase/decrease manner of the game media. For example, there is a situation in which a large amount of game media is acquired due to a good setting value, and a situation in which no game media is acquired due to a bad setting value. Comparing the cases where an advantageous specific event occurs, it is thought that the player will be more pleased with the latter than the former. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it becomes possible to realize specific notification in response to subtle changes in the player's emotions based on advantageous specific events and the quality of the set values.

Feature EB6. The selection means is
When the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is a first number, and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, selecting a predetermined notification execution means with a first probability; When the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the first number of times, and the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, the first probability and selects the predetermined notification execution means with a different second probability;
If the number of times ascertained by the number of times grasping means is a second number that is greater than the first number of times, and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, When a predetermined notification executing means is selected and the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is the second number of times, and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the third set value The predetermined notification execution means is selected based on a fourth probability different from the probability,
The gaming machine according to feature EB5, wherein the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

According to the above configuration, when selecting the notification execution means based on the number of times a specific event occurs and the set value, the influence of the set value becomes larger as the number of times increases, and conversely, the influence of the set value becomes smaller as the number of times decreases. By doing so, for example, in the case of a configuration in which setting values are suggested based on the execution timing of specific notification, the more the number of times a specific event is executed, the easier it is to narrow down the setting values. In other words, it is possible to prevent the set values from being narrowed down in a situation where the number of executions of a specific event is small, and to prevent the fun of the game in which the set values are gradually narrowed down from being lost.

In addition, the "predetermined notification execution means" is more specifically referred to as the "first notification execution means" or the "second notification execution means."

Feature EB7. The gaming machine according to feature EB6, wherein when the first number of times is one, the first probability and the second probability are the same probability.

According to the above configuration, when the specific event is executed for the first time, there is no difference in execution timing of the specific notification depending on the set value. By doing this, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the set value is determined from the first time, and it is possible to suitably realize the gameplay of predicting the set value.

Features EB8. A notification in which information of a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means is stored. Each execution means information group (additional notification timing table) is set,
Features EB1 to EB7, characterized in that the selection means selects the notification execution means for executing the specific notification by switching the notification execution means information group to be used according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the notification execution means selected by the selection means can be changed simply by switching the notification execution means information group (table) according to the number of times a specific event is executed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature EB1 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature EB9. As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state (normal section) and a specific gaming state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features EB1 to EB8, wherein the specific event is an event that can increase the remaining number of times the specific gaming state remains.

According to the above configuration, the specific event is originally executed during a specific gaming state where the gaming state is advantageous, and when the specific event occurs, the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state increases. In other words, the specific event is an addition to the specific game state. By configuring the execution timing of the specific notification (additional notification) when such an addition occurs to be different depending on the number of times the addition occurs, for example, when the number of additions has occurred is small and the remaining number of times is small, It becomes possible to provide an add-on notification that utilizes the subtle difference in the emotions of the player when an add-on occurs and when there is a large number of times the add-on occurs and there are many remaining times.

<Characteristic EC group>
Feature EC1. A specific determination means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 to the third specific combination processing by the main control device 101 3. Function to execute specific hand processing),
Event execution means for executing the specific event based on the judgment result by the specific judgment means being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific event (a function for executing processing for adding the number of games by the main control device 101, etc.) and,
A specific notification execution means (additional effect by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification that the specific event has been executed or a specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event using the specific notification device (auxiliary display section 65). function to perform configuration processing), and
a specific storage unit capable of storing information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution unit (a function for executing processing for managing a watermelon later pick-up counter and a watermelon quick pick-up counter by the display control device 81); ,
At a timing later than the timing at which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution unit, specific output means (for watermelon by the display control device 81) capable of outputting specific information corresponding to the information stored in the specific storage unit A function that executes processing to display the immediate loading/later loading ratio and the immediate loading/later loading ratio for cherry),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs due to winning in the specific determination, the player can understand the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if the specific event is a jackpot, the specific notification is a jackpot notification, and the player can fully enjoy the jackpot and feel a sense of superiority through the jackpot notification. Although the specific notification can be performed at various timings, in the above configuration, the timing at which the specific notification is executed is stored, and specific information regarding the timing is subsequently output. For example, when compiling gaming data after the fact, specific events such as jackpots may be displayed on the data display in the gaming hall, and such events that are advantageous to the player may be stored in memory. It is thought that it is easy to remember and can be easily recalled later. On the other hand, regarding the execution timing of specific notification that a specific event that is advantageous to the player will occur, the player's desire will be satisfied at the time such specific notification is made, and the occurrence of the specific event will cause the player to stop playing. Since the person's sense of elation will further increase, it is thought that specific notifications executed before that will likely fade from memory as the sense of elation increases. In other words, regarding the specific notification, especially the execution timing, it is considered that it is difficult for the player to remember it. Therefore, as in the above configuration, it is possible to store such hard-to-memorize information on the gaming machine side and make it readable (output) after the fact to help players collect data. It becomes possible.

Feature EC2. As the specific event, a plurality of specific events (different additions to the number of games) that have different degrees of advantage for the player are set,
The game according to feature EC1, wherein the specific storage means is capable of storing each specific event as separate information even if the specific event has the same advantage but the specific notification is performed at different timings. Machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific events have the same advantage, if the specific notification execution timings are different, the events can be counted separately. In other words, even if there are similar jackpots, if the notification timing of the jackpots is different, each piece of information can be aggregated as separate pieces of information. For example, in conventional aggregation methods, big wins and small wins are counted separately, but if the same jackpot is announced, it is generally counted as the same information even if the notification timing is different. According to the above configuration, the difference from the conventional technology can be made clearer, and it is possible to more preferably realize the aggregation of notification timings shown in feature EC1.

Feature EC3. The specific notification execution means is
a first specific notification execution means capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing (a function of executing processing for performing an immediate ride effect by the display control device 81);
a second specific notification execution means capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing (a function of executing processing for performing a post-addition effect by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The specific output means is capable of outputting ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification execution unit and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification execution unit as the specific information. The gaming machine according to feature EC1 or feature EC2.

According to the above configuration, as information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification, ratio information between the ratio of execution at the first timing and the ratio of execution at the second timing is output. By doing this, not only is it easier to tally, but also, for example, if the number of executions of a specific event is small, only the ratio is output without outputting the number of times, which is not desirable for the player. It is also possible to avoid information being expressed vividly.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
“The specific notification execution means is
a first specific notification execution means capable of executing the specific notification at a first timing (a function of executing processing for performing an immediate ride effect by the display control device 81);
a second specific notification execution means that can execute the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing (a function for executing processing for performing a post-addition effect by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The specific output means is capable of outputting ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification execution unit and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification execution unit as the specific information. , information on the number of times the specific notification was executed by the first specific notification execution means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification execution unit is not outputted.''

Feature EC4. A restriction capable of restricting output of the specific information by the output means in a specific situation (advantageous section) where the specific event is being executed or a game based on the specific event is being played. The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means (a function for executing the process of step S11206 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the output of specific information is restricted during a specific event or in a specific situation where a game based on a specific event is being played. For example, during a jackpot, information regarding the execution timing of the jackpot notification is not output. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a phenomenon in which the user is unable to fully enjoy a specific event due to trying to collect data during a specific situation. Moreover, by assuming such a configuration, the specific information can be output at a later timing, so the significance of storing such specific information is increased.

Feature EC5. The specific notification execution means executes the specific notification after determining the execution timing of the specific notification using a predetermined information group (additional notification timing table including information on setting values),
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC4, wherein the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for the player.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification is determined using the information set in the predetermined information group, and the execution timing is set in the predetermined information group by aggregating the execution timing. It becomes possible to predict and understand information. Since the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for the player, the aggregation of execution timing can also be said to be an act for collecting information that can be useful for the player. Therefore, the significance of outputting specific information is further enhanced, and it becomes possible to bring about benefits for the player by outputting such specific information.

Feature EC6. In the specific storage means, the specific area that stores information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is executed is configured to be able to store information regarding the timing at which a plurality of the specific notifications are executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC5, wherein the specific output means is capable of outputting cumulative information of the plurality of pieces of stored information as the specific information.

According to the above configuration, when there is a plurality of pieces of information regarding the execution timing of specific notification, such as when specific notification is executed multiple times, the cumulative information is output as the specific information. Therefore, the player can more easily perform data analysis based on the specific information.

Feature EC7. A first judgment condition (cherry) and a second judgment condition (watermelon) are set as the judgment conditions,
The specific information storage means separately stores information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition and information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC6, wherein the gaming machine is capable of storing data.

According to the above configuration, information corresponding to the execution timing of specific notification is stored for each type of judgment condition, so it is possible to perform more useful data analysis, such as when the information obtained for each type is different. Become.

Feature EC8. It has an operation section (production switch 66) that can be operated by the player,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a means (a function for executing the processing of step S11203 and step S11204 by the display control device 81) capable of erasing the information stored in the specific storage means based on the operation of the operation unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC7.

According to the above configuration, the player can freely select whether or not to erase the information stored in the specific storage means. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game data of the player from passing on to his/her successor, and it is possible to ensure the superiority of collecting specific information.

Feature EC9. The specific information is output by the specific output means based on the operation of the operating unit,
The gaming machine according to feature EC8, wherein the specific storage means is capable of storing information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is executed, regardless of whether or not the operating section is operated.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the information regarding the execution timing of specific notification is erased or outputted by operating the operation unit, and the information regarding the execution timing of specific notification is stored regardless of whether or not the operation unit is operated. With this configuration, the collection of specific information is entrusted to the player's operation, ensuring its superiority, while avoiding the inconvenience of not being able to output the specific information due to forgetting an operation or the like.

Feature EC10. As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state are set,
a first ending means (a function for executing a process of normally ending an advantageous section in the main control device 101) for ending the specific gaming state according to the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
a second ending means for ending the specific gaming state regardless of the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state (a function of executing a process of forcibly ending the advantageous section in the main control device 101);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC9, wherein the specific output means is capable of outputting the specific information based on the specific gaming state being ended by the second ending means. .

A specific game state advantageous to the player may end depending on the remaining number of times the game can be played, or may end regardless of the remaining number of times the game can be played. The former is a normal termination mode, and the latter corresponds to forced termination when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, for example. In such a configuration, if the game is forcibly terminated by the second termination means, the player who still wants to enjoy the specific game state may feel as if the profits that could be obtained have been exploited. Therefore, by configuring the configuration to output specific information as a substitute, as in the above configuration, it is possible to follow up on the forced termination of the specific gaming state.

<Characteristic ED group>
Features ED1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) are set, in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low.
a first grasping means (number of advantageous zone games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the high advantageous state;
a second grasping means (number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state;
A first terminating means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state (normally in the section display second processing by the main controller 101) (a function that executes an end process for an advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end conditions);
Based on the fact that the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means in the high advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of executions ascertained by the second grasping means. , a second ending means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (a function for executing a process for forcibly ending the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
A plurality of setting values are provided that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the manner of increase/decrease of the game media, and a setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of setting values. 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
an increasing unit capable of executing an increasing process of increasing the remaining number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that can perform an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65); (a function for executing setting processing for additional effects by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
When performing the increase notification, the increase notification execution means includes a specific notification execution unit (a display control device 81).This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a function of executing a late-playing effect during a zone and an immediate-playing effect during a zone according to 81.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantageous state ends based on the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state, and Since there is a case where the process ends based on reaching the upper limit number of times, the degree of advantage of a high advantageous state is suppressed from becoming extremely high. In such a configuration, there is a so-called additional function in which the remaining number of highly advantageous states is increased when a specific condition is met, and expectations for the specific condition to be met are heightened.

On the other hand, even if a specific condition is met and the remaining number of executions is increased, there may be cases where increasing the remaining number of executions will reach the upper limit, such as in a situation where the number of executions is close to the upper limit. There are situations in which it is not expected that the remaining number of times will increase, and in a highly advantageous state where an upper limit number of times is set, expectations for an increase in the number of remaining times vary greatly depending on the situation.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when performing an increase notification corresponding to the increase processing being performed, by making it possible to suggest a setting value according to the number of executions, if an increase in the remaining number of times is not expected, Even in a situation where the benefits of the condition being satisfied cannot be fully enjoyed, it is possible to follow up on the benefits by suggesting the set values. Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the highly advantageous state, and it is possible to suitably improve interest.

Feature ED2. The specific notification execution means is configured such that the closer the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means is to the upper limit number, the easier it is to grasp information on the setting value set by the setting means in the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature ED1, which is capable of being suggested.

According to the above configuration, the more the number of executions increases and approaches the upper limit number of times, and even if the increase processing is performed, the benefits thereof cannot be fully enjoyed, the easier it becomes to grasp the set value by the specific notification. This makes it possible to compensate for the benefits that cannot be enjoyed through the increase process by suggesting the set value.

Feature ED3. The specific notification execution means is
When the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the first number, and the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the execution mode of the specific notification is determined with a first probability. The setting value information is suggested in a specific manner, and the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means is the first number of times, and the setting value set by the setting means is the first number of executions. If it is a second set value different from the first set value, suggest the information of the set value so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with a second probability different from the first probability,
When the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is a second number greater than the first number, and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, a third probability is set. the setting value information is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode, and the number of executions ascertained by the first grasping means is the second number of times, and the setting means When the setting value to be set is the second setting value, the information on the setting value is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with a fourth probability different from the third probability. It is a thing,
The gaming machine according to feature ED2, wherein the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

According to the above configuration, as the number of executions increases and approaches the upper limit number of executions, and even if the increase processing is performed, the merits cannot be fully enjoyed, the execution mode of the specific notification becomes a specific mode and the setting value is suggested. The difference in the setting values in the probability that Thereby, the effect of feature ED2 can be achieved with a specific configuration.

Feature ED4. The game according to any one of features ED1 to ED3, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of suggesting information on the set value as the specific notification based on the execution timing of the increase notification. Machine.

According to the above configuration, if the setting value is suggested using the difference in the execution timing of the increase notification, there is no need to prepare different effects for the setting values set in multiple stages. Thereby, specific notification can be realized with a simple configuration without complicating the production configuration.

Feature ED5. The specific notification execution means executes the increase notification at a first timing when the setting value set by the setting unit is the first setting value, and the specific notification execution unit executes the increase notification at a first timing when the setting value set by the setting unit is the first setting value. If the second setting value is different from the first setting value, the specific notification can be executed by executing the increase notification at a second timing different from the first timing. The gaming machine described in feature ED4.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature ED4 can be achieved with a more specific configuration.

Feature ED6. The gaming machine according to feature ED5, wherein the second timing is a game after the first timing.

According to the above configuration, the first timing and the second timing are different from each other in the game. In this case, the remaining number of times when the specific notification is executed at the first timing is different from the remaining number of times when the specific notification is executed at the second timing. For example, if a specific notification is given when the remaining number of times is small and when it is given when there are many remaining times, it is thought that the former will be more happy about the remaining number of times being increased. In other words, when the process of increasing the remaining number of times is performed by the increase notification, the impression given to the player will be greatly different. By making use of these differences in impressions received by players to suggest a setting value, for example, by suggesting a low setting at a time when the player feels happy about an increase notification. , it is possible to alleviate the sadness of having a low setting, and conversely, by suggesting a high setting at a time when the increase notification does not feel very happy, it can compensate for the happiness of the increase notification. can.

Feature ED7. The specific notification execution means is
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the increase notification is executed in the first game, and the setting value set by the setting means is higher than the first setting value. If the second set value is advantageous for the second set value, the increase notification is executed in a second game that is a later game than the first game,
When the setting values set by the setting means are the same,
When the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is a first number of executions, a specific selection rate at which the second game is selected over the first game is a first selection rate,
When the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is a second number of executions that is greater than the first number of executions, the specific selection rate is set to a second selection rate higher than the first selection rate, The gaming machine according to any one of features ED4 to ED6, which is capable of executing specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that the increase notification will be executed in later games, and when compared with the same setting value, the number of executions of the specific game state will be higher than that in the beginning where the number of executions of the specific game state is small. By configuring the configuration so that the increase notification is more likely to be executed in later games as the number increases, in the early stages when the number of executions of a specific game state is small, the increase notification is executed in the first game and the setting is low. Although it becomes easier for people to suggest this, the sadness of having a low setting can be alleviated by the joy of being notified of an increase. On the other hand, it is more likely to be suggested that the setting is high at the end of a specific gaming state, so even if you are not very happy about the increase notification, you can follow up by suggesting that the setting is high. becomes possible.

Feature ED8. The increase notification is
a first means for executing the increase notification in a game in which the specific condition is satisfied (a function for executing processing for performing an immediate ride effect in the display control device 81);
a second means for executing the increase notification in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific condition is satisfied (a function for executing processing for performing a post-addition effect in the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features ED4 to ED7, wherein the increasing means executes the increasing process in a game in which the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, since the increase processing itself is executed in a game where a specific condition is satisfied, even if the increase notification is performed in a subsequent game as in the second method, there is a difference in performance. This simplifies the configuration for performing specific notification by differentiating the execution timing of increase notification while managing the number of times of execution, upper limit number of times, etc.

Feature ED9. It is equipped with a number of times notification means (a function for executing processing for managing the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) that allows the number of times notification corresponding to the remaining number of times to be executed by a predetermined notification means,
When the increase notification is executed in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific condition is met by the second device, the frequency notification means is configured to notify the result of the increase process executed in the game in which the specific condition is met. A feature characterized in that the number of times notification is performed without reflecting the number of times, and the result of the increase processing for the increase notification is reflected in the number of times notification based on the fact that the increase notification has been performed by the second means. The gaming machine described in ED8.

According to the above configuration, when an increase notification is performed after the fact while the remaining number of times is grasped to some extent by the number of times notification means, the result of the increase processing is not reflected in the number of times notification until the increase notification occurs. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of notifying the increase in a subsequent game while also achieving the effect of simplifying the processing configuration as in feature ED8.

Feature ED10. The gaming machine according to feature ED9, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of performing the specific notification in accordance with information about the number of times notification notified by the number of times notification means.

According to the above configuration, the setting value is suggested (specific notification) by performing an increase notification, taking into account information about the number of times notification on the display. In this way, even if, for example, there is actually a large number of remaining counts remaining, but the displayed count notification shows a small number, this will be handled as a case in which the increased notification will make people feel happy. becomes possible. Therefore, in particular, there are many situations in which a configuration such as feature ED6 is applied, and it becomes possible to more suitably exhibit the presentation effect of feature ED1.

<Characteristic FA group>
Feature FA1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 ) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
a grasping means (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
Normal transition means for transitioning the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state (normal ending condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing to end an advantageous section based on the establishment of the
an increasing unit capable of executing an increasing process of increasing the remaining number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that can perform an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65); (a function for executing setting processing for additional effects by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means includes:
A first notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification in a first manner (a function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on the immediate ride selection flag in the display control device 81);
a second notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode (a function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on a post-addition selection flag in the display control device 81); ,
Equipped with
The first notification execution means is based on the fact that, in a specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed, the stop operation means is operated in a first specific stop operation mode and the corresponding orbiting body is stopped. and executing the increase notification in the first aspect when the increase processing is performed,
The second notification execution means is configured such that in the specific game, the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode, and the corresponding orbiting body is stopped. The gaming machine is characterized in that the increase notification when the increase processing is performed is performed in the second mode based on the increase processing.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to a lottery result, the winning result may vary depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and aspects related to such stop operation mode. A specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, if a specific condition is met in a specific gaming state, the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state may be increased, and by continuing the specific gaming state for a long time, it may be possible to acquire a large amount of gaming media. , the gameplay of each game has been significantly improved.

On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the game tends to be one-sided from the gaming machine, such as when the player performs a stop operation based on the status notification from the gaming machine and wins the corresponding result. In view of the original gameplay of a slot machine, in which players aim at the symbols on a rotating object and stop the player to obtain a bonus, the above-mentioned gaming machine-driven game is not desirable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the execution mode of the increase notification is notified to the player by the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in a specific game where the mode notification is not performed. It was configured to allow selection. By doing so, it is possible to have the player intervene in the game in a specific gaming state, and it is possible to encourage the player's participation in the gaming experience that may be dominated by the gaming machine.

In addition, regarding the "specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not performed," the configuration is such that "a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means" and "the When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be achieved by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode. The game may be configured such that the special result winning can be achieved by operating the stopping operation mode, and a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result may be a "specific game".

Note that the "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing." In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA2. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result is provided that allows the player to replay the next game without requiring new game media;
The gaming machine according to feature FA1, wherein when the specific gaming state is entered, the gaming machine can shift to a re-gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined re-gaming result is higher than the normal gaming state. .

According to the above configuration, when the game mode is shifted to a specific gaming state in which mode notification is performed, it is possible to shift to a so-called RT state where the probability of a predetermined replay result is increased. Generally, the re-gaming result is a winning result regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, but in the above RT state, the mode is notified and the reward is obtained by the stop operation mode according to the notification. In addition to games in which the player wins as a result of the first or second result, it is conceivable that games in which the player wins as a result of a predetermined replay with a higher probability of winning frequently occur. As mentioned above, the replay results generally result in winnings regardless of the stop operation mode, so in these games, the stop operation is performed according to instructions from the gaming machine side. The game becomes a game in which the stop operation mode has no influence on whether or not a prize is won, and there may be less room for the player to intervene in the game. In this regard, as described in feature FA1, since the execution mode of the increase notification is determined based on the stop operation mode of a specific game in which the mode notification is not performed, for example, the above-mentioned replay result winning game It is also possible to make it a specific game. As a result of the above, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the above configuration is limited to ``if the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific re-gaming result winning, the specific re-gaming result winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode by each of the stop operating means''. By doing so, it becomes possible to achieve the above effects more clearly.

Feature FA3. The specific condition is satisfied based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation manner, and each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature FA1 or feature FA2, characterized in that the specific result winning can be achieved by operating in the stop operation mode of item 2.

According to the above configuration, in the specific result winning game that triggers the execution of the increase process, the specific result winning game is achieved regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. In other words, a game that is not the target of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means becomes a trigger for the increase process, and the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed is determined by the stop operation mode of such a game. Assuming that the player is playing the game while hoping for the increase processing to take place in a specific gaming state, interest in a game in which such modal notifications are not performed may be due to other games (in which modal notifications are not performed). It is considered to be expensive compared to other games. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the execution mode of the increase notification is determined in a game in which the player is originally interested, as in the above configuration, it becomes possible to fully enjoy the gameplay of selecting the increase notification by oneself.

Feature FA4. The gaming machine according to feature FA3, wherein a game whose lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result is the specific game.

According to the above configuration, the specific result winning game becomes the specific game. In other words, the game in which the increase process is performed and the game in which the execution mode of increase notification when the increase process is performed are the same game. It is thought that the player's pleasure when the increase notification is performed differs not only depending on the execution mode but also the progress of the game (the situation of the specific game state). It becomes possible to select the execution mode in a situation that is closer to the ever-changing progress situation. In other words, for example, a configuration may be considered in which the execution mode of the special notification is selected at the start of a game or at the start of a specific game state, but in such a configuration, the execution mode may differ from the originally desired execution mode as the game progresses. There is also a possibility that an increase will be notified depending on the execution mode. In this regard, according to the above configuration, it is possible to realize an increase notification that is more in accordance with the player's preference.

Feature FA5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped at the valid position, so that the specific result winning is established,
In a particular orbiting body among the orbiting bodies, a particular symbol constituting the particular symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position when the corresponding stop operation means is stopped in the first stop mode. On the other hand, a feature is attached to the specific orbiting body so that it cannot be stopped at the effective position when the stop operation is performed in a second stopping mode different from the first stopping mode. A gaming machine described in FA4.

According to the above configuration, since the specific result is a so-called missed result, in the gameplay in which the execution mode of the increase notification is selected in the stop operation mode in the specific result winning game, the stop operation for making such a selection is , the configuration is such that the specific results are performed while not being missed, and the difficulty level of the operation is increased, thereby improving the gameplay.

Feature FA6. The second aspect is at a later timing than the first aspect,
The first specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which the first stop operation means of each of the stop operation means is stopped at a specific time,
The second specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which a second stop operation means different from the first stop operation means of each of the stop operation means is stopped at the specific number,
The gaming machine according to feature FA5, wherein the stop operation means corresponding to the specific orbiting body is the first stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification is selected depending on which stop operation means is used for the specific stop operation, and in the specific result winning game, the stop operation for the orbiting object that has been missed is performed. When the means is stopped at a specific time, the first mode is selected. By doing this, even if there is a missed winner, the increase will be announced at a relatively early timing, and multiple questions such as whether it was a missed winner or whether the specific result was not won in the first place will be announced. It is possible to create a structure in which doubts and anxieties caused by possibilities can be resolved more quickly.

Feature FA7. The gaming machine according to feature FA3, wherein the specific game is a game that precedes the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed is selected depending on the stop operation mode of the game before the specific result winning game that is the trigger for the increase process. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the selection operation and the operation to achieve a specific result winning in separate games, allowing the player to concentrate on each operation.

Features FA8. Based on the transition to the specific gaming state, means that can execute a transition notification (attack mode start effect) of the transition to the specific gaming state using a predetermined notification means (attack mode start effect by the display control device 81) ),
The gaming machine according to any one of features FA1 to FA7, wherein the specific game is a game after the game in which the transition notification is performed.

According to the above configuration, it is made clear that one of the games in the specific gaming state is the specific game, and the difference from the gameplay that is selected before or at the start of the specific gaming state becomes clearer. In other words, in the game after the specific gaming state has started, it is possible to more clearly produce the effect of enhancing the enjoyment of the game in which the mode notification is not performed.

Features FA9. The gaming machine according to any one of features FA1 to FA8, wherein the second aspect is included in a game different from the game in which the first aspect is included.

According to the above configuration, the game for which the increase notification is performed can be a different game depending on the stop operation mode in the specific game. With such a configuration, the selection result by the player can influence the performance across multiple games, making it possible to increase the importance and significance of the selection.

Feature FA10. If the stop operation means is operated in the second specific stop operation mode in the specific game, and if a game previous to the target game that includes the second mode is further designated as the specific game, the increase The gaming machine according to feature FA9, wherein the notification execution means executes the increase notification in a manner according to a stop operation mode of the stop operation means in the specific game on the rear side.

In a configuration where an increase notification is performed in a later game across games as in feature FA9, there may be a situation in which a later game is selected and a specific game is selected. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the configuration gives priority to the selection on the rear side, it becomes possible to execute the increase notification in a manner that takes into consideration the situation at the time of selection.

Feature FA11. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 ) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
a grasping means (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
Normal transition means for transitioning the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state (normal ending condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing to end an advantageous section based on the establishment of the
an increasing unit capable of executing an increasing process of increasing the remaining number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that can perform an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65); (a function for executing setting processing for additional effects by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means includes:
A first notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification in a first manner (a function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on the immediate ride selection flag in the display control device 81);
a second notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode (a function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on a post-addition selection flag in the display control device 81); ,
Equipped with
The first notification execution means performs the increase process based on the stop operation means being operated in a first specific stop operation mode in a specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed. Executing the increase notification in the first aspect when the increase occurs;
The second notification execution means executes the increase processing based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode in the specific game. A gaming machine characterized in that when the increase notification is performed, the increase notification is performed in the second mode.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to a lottery result, the winning result may vary depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and aspects related to such stop operation mode. A specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, if a specific condition is met in a specific gaming state, the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state may be increased, and by continuing the specific gaming state for a long time, it may be possible to acquire a large amount of gaming media. , the gameplay of each game has been significantly improved.

On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the game tends to be one-sided from the gaming machine, such as when the player performs a stop operation based on the status notification from the gaming machine and wins the corresponding result. In view of the original gameplay of a slot machine, in which players aim at the symbols on a rotating object and stop the player to obtain a bonus, the above-mentioned gaming machine-driven game is not desirable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the execution mode of the increase notification is notified to the player by the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in a specific game where the mode notification is not performed. It was configured to allow selection. By doing so, it is possible to have the player intervene in the game in a specific gaming state, and it is possible to encourage the player's participation in the gaming experience that may be dominated by the gaming machine.

In addition, regarding the "specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not performed," the configuration is such that "a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means" and "the When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be achieved by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode. The game may be configured such that the special result winning can be achieved by operating the stopping operation mode, and a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result may be a "specific game".

Furthermore, the "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing." In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

Feature FA12. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal gaming state,
Transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101 ) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the main controller 101 executes winning result corresponding processing) to transition to the specific gaming state; function) and
a grasping means (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state;
Normal transition means for transitioning the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state (normal ending condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing to end an advantageous section based on the establishment of the
an increasing unit capable of executing an increasing process of increasing the remaining number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that can perform an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65); (a function for executing setting processing for additional effects by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means includes:
A first notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification in a first manner (a function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on the immediate ride selection flag in the display control device 81);
a second notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification in a second mode different from the first mode (a function of executing processing for performing an additional effect based on a post-addition selection flag in the display control device 81); ,
Equipped with
The first notification execution means is configured to operate the stop operation means in a first specific stop operation mode in a specific situation where each of the orbiting objects is orbiting in a game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed. Based on this, executing the increase notification in the first aspect when the increase processing is performed,
The second notification execution means executes the increase processing based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode in the specific situation. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the increase notification is performed, the increase notification is performed in the second mode.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to a lottery result, the winning result may vary depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and aspects related to such stop operation mode. A specific game state is provided in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, if a specific condition is met in a specific gaming state, the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state may be increased, and by continuing the specific gaming state for a long time, it may be possible to acquire a large amount of gaming media. , the gameplay of each game has been significantly improved.

On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, the game tends to be one-sided from the gaming machine, such as when the player performs a stop operation based on the status notification from the gaming machine and wins the corresponding result. In view of the original gameplay of a slot machine, in which players aim at the symbols on a rotating object and stop the player to obtain a bonus, the above-mentioned gaming machine-driven game is not desirable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of a specific condition, the execution mode of the increase notification is notified to the player by the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in a specific game where the mode notification is not performed. It was configured to allow selection. By doing so, it is possible to have the player intervene in the game in a specific gaming state, and it is possible to encourage the player's participation in the gaming experience that may be dominated by the gaming machine.

In addition, regarding the "game in which the mode notification is not performed by the mode notification means", it is configured that "a special result (specific combination, normal replay) is provided as the lottery result by the lottery means", and "the game in which the said lottery result is provided as a lottery result" When the lottery result by the means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is operated in the second stop operation mode. By operating the stop operation mode, the special result winning can be established.'', and the game where ``the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result'' is changed to ``the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed. It may also be called a game.

Furthermore, the "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing." In this way, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, it becomes possible to exhibit the above excellent effects with a simpler configuration.

<Characteristic FB group>
Features FB1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) are set, in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low.
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times of the high advantageous state (number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG);
Transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the high advantageous state (normal end conditions are set in the section display second process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing to end an advantageous section based on the establishment of the advantageous section);
an increasing unit capable of executing an increasing process of increasing the remaining number of games based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, an increase notification execution means (additional notification) that can perform an increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65); (a function for executing setting processing for additional effects by the display control device 81);
Equipped with
The increase notification execution means includes:
Based on the first selection operation performed by the player, a first notification execution means (immediately executed by the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification at a first timing triggered by a predetermined specific condition. (a function that executes processing for performing additional effects based on selection flags);
a second notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification triggered by the predetermined specific condition at a second timing subsequent to the first timing based on the second selection operation performed by the player; (Function to execute processing for performing additional effects based on the post-addition selection flag in the display control device 81);
The predetermined specific condition is set based on the third selection operation performed by the player in a specific situation after the second selection operation is performed and before the second timing. a third notification execution unit (a function of executing correction processing in the display control device 81) for causing the increase notification to be executed at a third timing different from the second timing;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where there is a high advantageous state and a low advantageous state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low, when a specific condition is satisfied, the remaining number of high advantageous states is increased. If the remaining number of times is increased, an additional notification will be given as an additional notification, so there is a high expectation that the specific condition will be met.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the player can select whether to execute the increase notification at the first timing or at a later second timing. It has a function that players can customize, making it possible to create gaming machines that meet the needs of players. Furthermore, in a situation where an increase notification at the second timing is selected, an increase notification is generated at a third timing different from the second timing according to the player's selection in a specific situation before the second timing. It also has a function that can be changed to suit your needs. By doing this, if you initially select the second timing, but change your mind due to subsequent gaming conditions, etc., it is possible to change the execution timing of the increase notification after the fact, and it is possible to change the execution timing of the increase notification after the fact. A gaming machine is realized.

Features FB2. A storage means (by the display control device 81) capable of storing the result of the increase processing triggered by the predetermined specific condition, which is to be executed by the second notification execution means at the second timing, in a predetermined storage area. Separate areas)
The third notification execution means is
means for acquiring the result of the increase process triggered by the predetermined specific condition stored in the storage means (a function for executing the process of step S12806 by the display control device 81);
means for executing the increase notification corresponding to the acquired result of the increase process at the third timing (a function for executing the process of step S12807 by the display control device 81);
means for erasing the acquired result of the increase process from the storage means (a function for executing the process of step S12809 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature FB1, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the content of the increase notification that was supposed to be executed at the second timing can be changed to be executed at the third timing while preventing duplication or omission. By doing so, it is possible to realize the gameplay of feature FB1 while avoiding inconveniences such as putting the player at a disadvantage or causing inconsistency in performance.

Features FB3. The storage means is capable of individually storing the results of the plurality of increase processes,
The third notification execution means is capable of separately executing the increase notification for the individually stored results of the increase processing at the third timing, based on the third selection operation by the player. A gaming machine described in feature FB1 or feature FB2.

According to the above configuration, when there is a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to the increase notification that was supposed to be executed at the second timing, it is possible to change each piece of information to be executed individually at the third timing. By doing so, it is possible to realize performances that are more responsive to the needs of the players.

Features FB4. The storage means stores information corresponding to the result of the increase process that was performed based on the first specific opportunity and that was selected to be executed at the second timing, and the first specific event. and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing that is performed based on a second specific trigger different from the trigger and that is selected to be executed at the second timing. It is possible and
The increase process is performed based on the first specific opportunity based on the third selection operation by the player, and corresponds to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing. information that can be executed at the third timing, and the increase process is performed based on the second specific opportunity, and the increase process is selected to be executed at the second timing. The gaming machine according to feature FB3, characterized in that information corresponding to the result can be executed at the second timing.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature FB3.

Regarding the "second specific opportunity," "different from the first specific opportunity" does not mean that the type of opportunity is different when the "specific condition" is met, but also that the type of opportunity is the same even if the type of opportunity is the same. This also includes the fact that the timing (game) at which the "specific condition" is satisfied is different.

Feature FB5. The storage means stores information corresponding to the result of the increase process that was performed based on the first specific opportunity and that was selected to be executed at the second timing, and the first specific event. and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing that was performed based on a second specific trigger that occurred before the trigger, and that was selected to be executed at the second timing. can be stored separately,
The increase process is performed based on the first specific opportunity based on the third selection operation by the player, and corresponds to the result of the increase process selected to be executed at the second timing. information that can be executed at the third timing, and the increase process is performed based on the second specific opportunity, and the increase process is selected to be executed at the second timing. The gaming machine according to feature FB3 or feature FB4, characterized in that information corresponding to the result can be executed at the second timing.

According to the above configuration, while the increase notification for the second specific trigger that occurred earlier remains at the second timing, the increase notification for the first specific trigger that occurred later is set to the third timing that is earlier than the second timing. It becomes possible to execute the In other words, by using a configuration in which the results of the increase processing can be stored individually, it is possible to perform the increase notification in a different order from the order in which the increase processing was performed.

Features FB6. Display control means (display control device 81) having a predetermined display screen (auxiliary display section 65);
In the specific situation, means (step S12804 by the display control device 81) capable of displaying correspondence information corresponding to information on the results of the increase processing individually stored in the storage means on the predetermined display screen; function) and
means (a function for executing the processing of step S12805 and step S12806 by the display control device 81) for making it possible to select one piece of the displayed correspondence information based on a third selection operation by the player;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features FB2 to FB5, wherein the third notification execution means executes the increase notification regarding the selected correspondence information at the third timing.

According to the above configuration, the player can execute the increase notification at the third timing by selecting one of the correspondence information displayed on the predetermined display screen. In this way, by making selections while displaying them on the display screen, it is intuitively easy to understand, and even players who are not accustomed to playing games can easily perform selection operations. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly user-friendly.

Features FB7. The gaming machine according to any one of features FB1 to FB6, wherein the game in which the first timing exists and the game in which the second timing exists are different games.

If the configuration of the feature FB1 is applied to a gaming machine that assumes that the increase notification is performed in different games depending on the first selection operation and the second selection operation, the first timing and the second selection operation can be applied. The second timing becomes a timing that is further apart in time, and not only does a specific situation in which the second timing is selected and is earlier occur more easily, but also allows the third selection operation to be performed in such a specific situation. It becomes possible to secure a grace period.

Features FB8. The first timing exists in a first game in which the specific condition is satisfied,
The second timing exists in a second game after the first game,
The third timing exists in a third game before the second game,
The gaming machine according to feature FB7, wherein the third notification execution means executes the increase notification in the third game when the third selection operation is performed.

According to the above configuration, when the first selection operation is performed, an increase notification occurs in a game in which the specific condition is satisfied, and when the second selection operation is performed, in a game after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, Increase notification occurs. Assuming such a configuration, when the third selection operation is performed, an increase notification is generated in the game in which the selection operation is performed. By doing this, the increase notification is immediately executed when the third selection operation is performed, which not only makes it easier for the player to understand, but also makes it easier for the player to understand when the third selection operation is performed. Since there is no need to re-memorize information when the data is lost, the configuration can also be simplified.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature AA groups to feature FB groups to each structure of the feature AA group to feature FB group detailed above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

10... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... Reel as a rotating body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker forming an auxiliary performance section, 65 ... Auxiliary display part constituting an auxiliary production part, 68... Instruction monitor, N8... Eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... Display control device as a sub control board, 101... Main control device as a main control board , 102... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (1)

a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
comprising mode notification means capable of executing mode notification regarding operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode using a predetermined notification means, based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
providing at least a normal state and a specific state in which the frequency of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than the normal state;
Transition lottery means for executing a lottery for transition to the specific state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result;
Specification that starts specific notification by turning on the specific notification means when transitioning to the specific state, and ends the specific notification by turning off the specific notification means when the specific state ends. Notification means;
Equipped with
The specific notification means is configured to display a display corresponding to the specific result in a predetermined position that is visible through the display unit in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery device is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific state is won. The starting game is a game in which, when a specific symbol combination stops, a privilege corresponding to the specific result can be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and at least the operation of the next game after the starting game is allowed. The specific notification by the specific notification means is started at the previous timing,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a restriction means capable of restricting permissibility of operations in a game following the starting game .

Images